Project Manual Farmington Family Outdoor Aquatics Facility

Project Manual Farmington Family Outdoor Aquatics Facility

1901 N. Dustin Ave, Farmington, NM 87401

March 14, 2018

Construction Documents

Project Manual - Volume 1

Prepared by: FBT Architects, Ltd.

One Park Square 6501 Americas Pkwy NE Suite 300 Albuquerque, NM 87110

505.883.5200

Farmington Outdoor Family Aquatics Facility

Project Manual March 14, 2018

Construction Documents

PROJECT MANUAL/OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS

FARMINGTON OUTDOOR FAMILY AQUATICS FACILITY, FARMINGTON, NM

OWNER CITY OF FARMINGTON 800 MUNICIPAL DRIVE FARMINGTON, NM 87401 T: (505) 599-1373 CORY STYRON E: [email protected] ARCHITECT OF RECORD FBT ARCHITECTS AIA, LTD. ONE PARK SQUARE 6501 AMERICAS PKWY RD. NE, SUITE 300 ALBUQUERQUE, NM 87110 T: (505) 883-5200, X114 F: (505) 884-5390 TED GRUMBLATT, PRINCIPAL E: [email protected] ELECTRICAL CONSULTANT BRIDGERS AND PAXTON 4600 C Montgomery Blvd. NE ALBUQUERQUE, NM 87109 T: (505) 883-4111

BENJAMIN BOSSE, PE E: [email protected]

STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT WALLA ENGINEERING 6100 INDIAN SCHOOL RD NE ALBUQUERQUE, NM 87110 T: (505) 881-3008 F: (505) 884-5390

MIKE WALLA, PRESIDENTE: [email protected] MECHANICAL/PLUMBING CONSULTANT BRIDGERS AND PAXTON 4600 C Montgomery Blvd. NE ALBUQUERQUE, NM 87109 T: (505) 883-4111

RICH REIF, PE E: [email protected] LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT GROUNDWORK STUDIO ONE PARK SQUARE 6501 AMERICAS PKWY NE SUITE 300 ALBUQUERQUE, NM 87110 T: (505) 212-9126 AMY BELL, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT E: [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]






POOL CONSULTANT COUNSILMAN HUNSAKER T: (303) 384--9500

DOUG COOK E: [email protected]


INDEX VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 - INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION (BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS TO BE FOUND IN PREVIOUS SECTION PROVIDED BY CITY OF FARMINGTON) 00 0000 DESIGN TEAM LIST 00 0001 INDEX 00 9000 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 2300 ALTERNATES 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT COORDINATION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3301 SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 6300 PRIOR APPROVAL SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES 01 6301 PRIOR APPROVAL SUBSTITUTIONS REQUEST FORM 01 6302 CONTRACTOR SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 01 7000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7500 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7823 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7900 DEMONSTRATIONS AND TRAINING DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4116 BUILDING & SITE DEMOLITION 02 5639 TEMPORARY TREE PROTECTION DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 0500 POOL DECK CONCRETE MATERIALS 03 1100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 2000 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 04 –MASONRY 04 2300 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05 – STEEL FABRICATION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 2100 STEEL JOISTS 05 3000 METAL DECKING 05 4000 LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1600 SHEATHING 06 4116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1000 UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER/RETARDER 07 1113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 1900 WATER REPELLENT 07 2111 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2119 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 2726 FLUID APPLIED WATER & AIR BARRIER 07 4170 INDUCTION WELDED MEMBRANE ROOF SYSTEM 07 4265 THERMAL WALL SYSTEM (CI) 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM/GUTTERS 07 7100 MANUFACTURED ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 7200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 8413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1743 AF COMPOOSITE DOORS 08 3113 ACCESS DOORS & FRAMES 08 3313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 08 3613 OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOOR 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4523 FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL ASSEMBLIES-LIGHT TOWER 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 08 8000 GLAZING

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2240 THREE COAT STUCCO SYSTEM 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 09 3013 PORCELAIN FLOOR/WALL TILE 09 6513 RESILIENT BASE & ACCESSORIES 09 6519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 6723 RESINUOUS FLOORING (CERAMIC CARPET) 09 7200 VINYL WALL COVERING 09 8116 ACOUSTIC BLANKET INSULATION 09 9100 PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 1400 BUILDING SIGNAGE 10 2113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2600 WALL PROTECTION 10 2816 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 4416 FIRE EXTINGUISHER 10 5126 SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS 10 9999 TOWER CLOCK DIVISION 11 –EQUIPMENT 11 NOT USED

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 NOT USED DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 1100 SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT 13 1103 SWIMMING POOL TILE 13 1104 SWIMMING POOL CEMENTITIOUS FINISH 13 1413 WATERSLIDES VOLUME 2 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 0500 COMMON WORK REQUIREMENTS 22 0503 TRENCHING & BACKFILLING 22 0504 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 22 0505 PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 0523 VALVES 22 0549 PLUMBING & ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION COORDINATION 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 1100 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 22 1316 SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING 22 1400 FACILITY ROOF DRAINAGE 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES & TRIM 22 6801 OUTSIDE UTILITIES DIVISION 23 –HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 0500 COMMON WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC 23 0504 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 23 0505 PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 0523 VALVES 23 0549 HVAC & ELEC INSTALLATION COORDINATION 23 0593 TEST ADJUSTMENT BALANCE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 23 0700 MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 23 0900 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 23 2123 PUMPS 23 2313 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS & EQUIPMENT 23 3000 AIR TEMPERING SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 0500 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0519 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0550 INSTALLATION COORDINATION 26 0553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0573 COORDINATION STUDY 26 0574 ARC-FLASH STUDY

26 0800 ELECTRICAL FACILITY STARTUP & COMMISSIONING 26 0880 ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING 26 0913 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26 2213 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2813 FUSES 26 2816 DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2820 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION 26 2913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 4313 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES SES-M SPECIFICATION 26 5113 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 5612 EXTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 0526 GROUNDING & BONDING 27 0528 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 27 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0543 UNDERGROUND PATHWAYS AND STRUCTURES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 0544 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING 27 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 1100 COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0528 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PATHWAYS 28 0550 INSTALLATION COORDINATION 28 3111 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 0516 GRANULAR MATERIALS 31 0519.13 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 31 1000 SITE CLEARING 31 2000 EARTHWORK 31 2317 TRENCHING 31 2318 ROCK REMOVAL 31 2323 BACKFILL 31 2324 FLOWABLE FILL DIVISION 32 - LANDSCAPE 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1217 ASPHALT SEALCOATING 32 3114 PVC COATED CHAINLINK FENCE AND GATE 32 8400 IRRIGATION 32 9223 SOD 32 9300 PLANTS 32 0523 CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 600 DECORATIVE STAMPED CONCRETE DIVISION 33 – UTILIITES 33 0132 SEWER AND MANHOLE TESTING

33 0510 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITIES 33 1213 WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS 33 1300 DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION 33 3100 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS 33 4214 HDPE CORRUGATED DRAIN PIPE

END OF SPECIFICATIONS

GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION REPORT PROPOSED OUTDOOR AQUATIC CENTER Brookside Park Farmington, New Mexico WT Reference No. 3127JS095 PREPARED FOR: City of Farmington Park, Recreation, and Cultural Affairs 901 Fairgrounds Road Farmington, New Mexico 87401 November 21, 2017

Roger K. Southworth, P.E. Reviewed By: Jeff M. Boyd, P.E. Managing Director Senior Geotechnical Engineer

11/21/17

November 21, 2017 City of Farmington Park, Recreation, and Cultural Affairs 901 Fairgrounds Road Farmington, New Mexico 87401 Re: Geotechnical Evaluation Job No. 3127JS095 Proposed Outdoor Aquatic Center Brookside Park Farmington, New Mexico

Western Technologies Inc. (WT) has completed the geotechnical evaluation for the above-

referenced project. This study was performed in general accordance with our proposal number

3127PS089 dated September 19, 2017. The results of our study, including the boring location

diagram, boring logs, laboratory test results, and the geotechnical recommendations are attached.

We have appreciated being of service to you in the geotechnical engineering phase of this project

and are prepared to assist you during the construction phases as well. Please do not hesitate to

contact us if the design conditions change or if you have any questions concerning this report. We

look forward to working with you on future projects.

Sincerely,

WESTERN TECHNOLOGIES INC.

Roger K. Southworth, P.E.

Managing Director

City of Farmington Park, Recreation and Cultural Affairs

Job No. 3127JS095

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................. 1

2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 1

3.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES ............................................................................................................. 1 3.1 Field Exploration ................................................................................................................... 1 3.2 Laboratory Testing ................................................................................................................ 2 3.3 Analyses and Report ............................................................................................................. 2

4.0 SITE CONDITIONS ................................................................................................................. 3 4.1 Subsurface ............................................................................................................................ 3 4.2 Groundwater ........................................................................................................................ 3

5.0 GEOTECHNICAL PROPERTIES & ANALYSIS ............................................................................. 3

6.0 RECOMMENDATIONS........................................................................................................... 4 6.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 4 6.2 Foundations .......................................................................................................................... 4 6.3 Floor Support ........................................................................................................................ 5 6.4 Seismic Considerations ......................................................................................................... 6 6.5 Drainage ............................................................................................................................... 6 6.6 Drainage ............................................................................................................................... 7 6.7 Pavement .............................................................................................................................. 8

7.0 EARTHWORK ....................................................................................................................... 9 7.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 9 7.2 Site Clearing .......................................................................................................................... 9 7.3 Building Pad Preparation ...................................................................................................... 9 7.4 Pavement Subgrade Preparation ....................................................................................... 10 7.5 Materials ............................................................................................................................. 10 7.6 Placement and Compaction ............................................................................................... 11 7.7 Compliance ......................................................................................................................... 11

8.0 PLAN REVIEW .................................................................................................................... 11

9.0 ADDITIONAL SERVICES ....................................................................................................... 12

10.0 LIMITATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 12

11.0 CLOSURE ............................................................................................................................ 13 BORING LOCATION DIAGRAM .............................................................................................. Plate 1

ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

APPENDIX A

Definition of Terminology ....................................................................................................... A-1

Method of Soil Classification ................................................................................................... A-2

Boring Log Notes ..................................................................................................................... A-3

Boring Logs ....................................................................................................... A-4 through A-11

APPENDIX B

Laboratory Test Results ........................................................................................................... B-1

1

GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION PROPOSED OUTDOOR AQUATIC CENTER

BROOKSIDE PARK FARMINGTON, NEW MEXICO

JOB NO. 3127JS095

1.0 PURPOSE

This report contains the results of our geotechnical evaluation for the outdoor aquatic center that

will be constructed in Farmington, New Mexico. The purpose of these services is to provide

information and recommendations regarding:

Foundation Design Drainage

Floor Slab Support Earthwork

The results of the field exploration and laboratory tests are presented in the Appendix.

2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

The project will consist of constructing an outdoor aquatic center. The facility will include a lazy

river, a shallow pool with a children’s play area, tower slides with a drop pool, a three-lane lap pool,

and a 4,000 square foot bath house. It was assumed that the structures would have maximum wall

loads of less than 2 kips per linear foot and maximum column loads of less than 40 kips. It was also

assumed that grade changes of less than about 2 feet would be required to develop the proposed

finish grades. We should be notified immediately if any of our assumptions are incorrect since a

revision of the recommendations presented herein could then be necessary.

3.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES

3.1 Field Exploration

Eight borings were drilled for this project to depths of 7 to 21½ feet. Nine borings were

originally proposed. However, one boring was not drilled at the request of the City of

Farmington because they did not want the drill rig to drive on the grass. Four of the borings

were terminated due to auger refusal in cobbles.

City of Farmington Park, Recreation, and Cultural Affairs

Job No. 3127JS095

2

The number of the borings and the proposed boring locations were specified by others.

Three of the borings were offset because their proposed locations they were not accessible

to the drill rig. The borings were drilled at the approximate locations indicated on the

attached Boring Location Diagram (Plate 1).

WT engineers monitored the drilling operations and prepared field logs for each boring.

These logs contain visual classifications of the materials encountered during drilling as well

as interpolation of the subsurface conditions between samples.

The final boring logs, included in Appendix A, represent our interpretation of the field logs

and may include modifications based on laboratory observations of the recovered samples.

The final logs describe the materials encountered, their thicknesses, and the depths at

which samples were obtained.

The Unified Soil Classification System was used to classify the soil. The soil classification

symbols appear on the boring logs and are briefly described in Appendix A.

3.2 Laboratory Testing

Laboratory tests were performed on representative samples to aid in material classification

and to estimate the pertinent engineering properties of the soil. Testing was performed in

general accordance with applicable ASTM methodologies. The following tests were performed

and the results are presented in Appendix B.

Water Content

Swell Potential

Dry Unit Weight

Percent Passing No. 200 Sieve

Liquid and Plastic Limits

The laboratory test results were used in the development of the recommendations contained

in this report.

3.3 Analyses and Report

Analyses were performed and this report was prepared for the exclusive purpose of

providing geotechnical engineering information and recommendations. The scope of

services for this project does not include, either specifically or by implication, any


Job No. 3127JS095

3

environmental assessment of the site or identification of contaminated or hazardous

materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such

contamination, other studies should be undertaken. We are available to discuss the scope of

such studies with you.

This geotechnical engineering report includes a description of the project, a discussion of

the field exploration and laboratory testing programs, a discussion of the subsurface

conditions, and design recommendations as required to satisfy the purpose previously

described.

4.0 SITE CONDITIONS

4.1 Subsurface

The soil conditions encountered in the borings were variable, typically consisting of

interbedded layers of very loose to loose clayey sand, firm to stiff fat clay, and very dense

cobbles. Borings B-1, B-2, and B-5 were terminated at depths of 7 to 8 feet due to auger

refusal in cobbles and Boring B-7 was terminated at a depth of 19 feet due to auger refusal

in cobbles.

4.2 Groundwater

Groundwater was encountered in Borings B-3, B-6, and B-8 at a depth of approximately 18

feet during drilling. Groundwater was not encountered in the other borings. The level of

the groundwater table will fluctuate seasonally with variations in the amount of

precipitation, evaporation, and surface water runoff. The observations made during this

investigation must be interpreted carefully because they are short-term and do not

constitute a groundwater study.

5.0 GEOTECHNICAL PROPERTIES & ANALYSIS

Swell tests were performed to evaluate the swell potential of the clay. The test results indicated swell

values of 0.8 and 1.7 percent when the samples were placed under a load of approximately 100

pounds per square foot and inundated with water. Based upon past experience and the plasticity

index of the soil, the clays are expected to be subject to a significant amount of shrink/swell with

variations in the soil water content.


Job No. 3127JS095

4

6.0 RECOMMENDATIONS

6.1 General

The recommendations contained in this report are based on our understanding of the project

criteria described in Section 2.0, Project Description, and the assumption that the subsurface

conditions are those disclosed by the test borings. Others may change the plans, final

elevations, number and type of structures, foundation loads, and floor levels during design or

construction. Substantially different subsurface conditions from those described herein may

be encountered or become known. Any changes in the project criteria or subsurface

conditions shall be brought to our attention in writing.

6.2 Foundations

The proposed structures can be supported by spread footings. However, the clays are

expansive and the sands exhibit low strength characteristics. The foundations should

therefore should underlain by non-expansive engineered fill in order to reduce movements

associated with shrink/swell of the clay and to reduce the amount of load induced by the

footings on the low-strength sands. The engineered fill should be a minimum of 24 inches or

one footing width thick, whichever is greater. Foundation subgrade preparation is discussed

in greater detail in the Earthwork section of this report.

Foundations bearing on the engineered fill can be designed for a maximum net allowable

bearing capacity of up to 2,000 pounds per square foot (psf). The allowable bearing capacity

applies to dead load plus design live load conditions.

Resistance to lateral loads will be provided by the passive earth pressure acting against the

footings and the frictional resistance acting along the base of the footings. An ultimate

passive earth pressure resistance of 330 pounds per square foot per foot (psf/ft) is

recommended for design. A coefficient of sliding resistance of 0.35 is recommended for

design. The lateral load resistance should incorporate a factor of safety of at least 1.5.

The foundations should bear a minimum of 24 inches below the final adjacent site grade for

frost considerations. Strip footings should have a minimum width of 16 inches and isolated

column pad foundations should have a minimum dimension of 24 inches.

We estimate that the total post-construction movement of foundations supported as

recommended herein will be on the order of 1 inch or less. We estimate that the

differential movement between comparably sized and loaded foundations could be on the


Job No. 3127JS095

5

order of one-half the total foundation movement. Additional foundation movement can

occur if water from any source infiltrates the foundation subgrade. Therefore, proper

drainage should be provided in the final design and during construction.

All footings, stem walls, and masonry walls should be reinforced to reduce the potential for

distress caused by differential foundation movement. The use of joints at openings and

other discontinuities in masonry walls is recommended. Joints should also be closely spaced

along the length of masonry site retaining walls and screen walls to accommodate minor

differential foundation movement.

We recommend that the geotechnical engineer or a representative of the engineer observe

the base of the footing overexcavations prior to backfilling operations. This observation is to

assess whether the exposed bearing stratum is similar to that anticipated for structural fill

subgrade and indirect foundation support. Any loose, soft, or disturbed material should be

undercut to a suitable bearing subgrade.

6.3 Floor Support

The floor can be designed as a slab-on-grade. The floor slab can be supported directly on the

clayey sand and cobbles. However, in any areas where clay is present the floor slab should

be underlain by a minimum of 24 inches of non-expansive fill in order to reduce the

potential for excessive movement due to shrink/swell of the clay. The floor slab subgrade

should be prepared as recommended in the Earthwork section of this report.

A minimum four-inch-thick layer of drainage aggregate should be provided beneath at-

grade floor slabs to prevent the capillary rise of water beneath the slab and a damp slab.

The drainage aggregate should consist of sand, sand-gravel, crushed stone, or a combination

of these materials. The granular fill should have a maximum particle diameter of no more

than one-half the granular fill thickness and should contain no more than 5 percent passing

the No. 200 sieve. In addition, the granular fill should have a maximum plasticity index of 6.

The use of vapor retarders is desirable for any slab-on-grade where the floor will be covered

by products using water-based adhesives, wood, vinyl-backed carpet, impermeable floor

coatings (urethane, epoxy, acrylic terrazzo, etc.). When used, the design and installation

should be in accordance with the recommendations presented in ACI 302.1R and 302.2R.

Final determination on the use of a vapor retarder should be left to the slab designer.

All concrete placement and curing operations should follow the American Concrete Institute

manual recommendations. Improper curing techniques and/or high slump (high water-

cement ratio) could cause excessive shrinkage, cracking, or curling of the floor slab.


Job No. 3127JS095

6

Concrete slabs should be allowed to cure adequately before placing vinyl or other moisture-

sensitive floor covering.

6.4 Seismic Considerations

Structural design criteria based upon the 2012/2015 International Building Code is provided

below.

Site Soil Classification: Site Class D

Ss = 0.135 g SMS = 0.215 g SDS = 0.144 g

S1 = 0.051 g SM1 = 0.123 g SD1 = 0.082 g

6.5 Drainage

For cantilevered walls backfilled with granular soil (sand or sand and gravel) containing less

than 20 percent passing the No. 200 sieve the recommended equivalent fluid pressures are:

Active

Level backslope .................................................................................................. 35 psf/ft

4H:1V backslope ................................................................................................ 45 psf/ft


For walls that will be restrained from movement backfilled with granular soil (sand or sand

and gravel) containing less than 20 percent passing the No. 200 sieve the recommended

equivalent fluid pressures are:

At-Rest

Level backslope .................................................................................................. 50 psf/ft



Passive:

Shallow wall footings .................................................................................. 225 psf/ft

Shallow column footings ............................................................................. 375 psf/ft

Coefficient of base friction ................................................................................. 0.35*

* The coefficient of base friction should be reduced to 0.25 when used in conjunction with

passive pressure


Job No. 3127JS095

7

The equivalent fluid pressures presented above are for well-drained backfill and do not

include lateral loads due to surcharge loading. The wall backfill should extend a horizontal

distance of at least one-half the wall height from the face of the wall in order to develop the

recommended active equivalent fluid pressures.

We recommend a free-draining soil layer or manufactured geocomposite material be

constructed adjacent to the back of retaining walls. A filter may be required between the

soil backfill and drainage layer. This drainage zone is recommended to prevent the buildup

of hydrostatic pressure against the walls. The vertical drain should be tied into a drainage

system at the base of the retaining wall. Water from the drainage system should be

discharged by gravity flow into a suitable drainage outlet. The ground surface should slope

down away from the walls to promote drainage away from the structure.

It is important that all backfill be properly placed and compacted. Compaction of each lift

adjacent to walls should be accomplished with hand-operated tampers or other lightweight

compactors. Flooding or jetting should not be permitted. Care should be taken not to

damage the walls during compaction operations. Overcompaction may cause excessive

lateral earth pressures that could result in wall movements. Backfill should be inspected and

tested during placement.

6.6 Drainage

Properly functioning foundations and floor slabs require appropriately constructed and

maintained site drainage conditions. Therefore, it is extremely important that positive

drainage be provided during construction and maintained throughout the life of the

structure. It is also important that proper planning and control of landscape and irrigation

be performed.

Infiltration of water into utility or foundation excavations must be prevented during

construction. Backfill against footings, exterior walls, and in utility and sprinkler line

trenches should be well compacted and free of all construction debris to reduce the

possibility of moisture infiltration. If utility line trenches are backfilled with the clayey soil,

care should be taken not to overcompact the backfill. However, if the trenches are backfilled

with a granular soil then a clayey sand plug should be placed in the trench adjacent to the

building to reduce the potential for water following the trench back under the structure.

The building should be provided with downspout extensions to direct water away from the

structure. The downspouts should discharge into drainage swales or into the storm sewer

system.


Job No. 3127JS095

8

In areas where sidewalks, patios, or driveways do not immediately adjoin the structure, the

ground surface adjacent to the building should slope down at a grade of about five percent

for a distance of at least 10 feet from the perimeter walls.

It should be understood that these recommendations will help reduce the potential for soil

movement and resulting distress, but will not eliminate this potential.

6.7 Pavement

The project will include the construction of new parking lots and drives. Details regarding

the amount and type of traffic that the pavements will experience were not available. It was

assumed that the parking lots would be subject to passenger vehicles and occasional small-

to medium-size delivery trucks. It was assumed that this traffic volume is an average for the

life of the pavement and that it includes any anticipated traffic growth. The design period

for the pavement was 20 years.

A revision of the recommended pavement sections may be necessary if the expected traffic

loading conditions are different than assumed. An evaluation of the type and volume of

traffic that each portion of the parking lot will experience should be conducted to

determine if the pavement sections presented herein are appropriate.

The pavement subgrade is expected to consist of clayey sand and/or fat clay. These deposits

are considered a fair to poor quality material for pavement support. A resilient modulus (Mr)

of 5,000 pounds per square inch was used for pavement design.

A reliability value of 70 percent was assumed for pavement design. This parameter assumes

that the pavement will be subject to occasional interruption of traffic for pavement repairs.

Based upon these parameters, the resulting pavement sections according to the AASHTO

procedure are:

Traffic Area Asphalt Concrete Pavement

(inches) Base Course (inches)

Light Duty 2.5 6.0

Access Drives 3.0 7.0

The "design life" of a pavement is defined as the expected life at the end of which

reconstruction of the pavement will need to occur. Normal maintenance, including crack


Job No. 3127JS095

9

sealing, slurry sealing, and/or chip sealing, should be performed during the life of the

pavement.

Due to the high static loads imposed by parking trucks in loading and unloading areas and at

dumpster locations, we recommend a rigid pavement section for these areas. A minimum

six-inch thick Portland cement concrete pavement is recommended.

Bituminous pavement should be constructed of dense-graded, central plant-mix, asphalt

concrete. Base course, Portland cement, and asphalt concrete should conform to the City of

Farmington or the New Mexico Department of Transportation standard specifications.

Material and compaction requirements should conform to recommendations presented in

the Earthwork section of this report. The pavement should be sloped to ensure positive

drainage. Water should not pond in areas directly adjoining paved sections.

7.0 EARTHWORK

7.1 General

The conclusions contained in this report are contingent upon compliance with

recommendations presented in this section. Any excavating, trenching, or disturbance that

occurs after completion of the earthwork must be backfilled, compacted, and tested in

accordance with the recommendations contained herein. It is not reasonable to rely upon

our conclusions and recommendations if any future unobserved and untested trenching,

earthwork activities, or backfilling occurs.

7.2 Site Clearing

Remove any remnants of previous construction such as pavements, slabs, foundations,

existing fill, and any other deleterious materials from the building and pavement areas. The

building area is defined as the area within the building footprint plus five feet beyond the

perimeter of the footprint. All exposed surfaces should be free of mounds and depressions

that could prevent uniform compaction.

7.3 Building Pad Preparation

The floor slab can be supported directly on the existing clayey sand and cobbles.

However, in any areas where clay is present within 24 inches from the bottom of the floor


Job No. 3127JS095

10

slab, the building pad should be overexcavated as required to allow the placement of a

minimum of 24 inches of non-expansive fill beneath the floor slab.

The footing areas should be overexcavated to a minimum depth of 24 inches or one footing

width below the proposed foundation bearing elevation, whichever is deeper. The

overexcavations should extend a lateral distance of at least one foot for every two feet of fill

that will be placed beneath the footings.

The footing/floor slab overexcavations should be backfilled to the design finish grade with

non-expansive fill placed and compacted in accordance with the recommendations presented

in Section 7.6. The engineered fill should consist of low expansive potential material meeting

the requirements presented in Section 7.5.

7.4 Pavement Subgrade Preparation

Following site clearing operations, the pavement areas should be cut as required to the design

finish grade. The subgrade should then be scarified to a minimum depth of 8 inches and

recompacted in accordance with the recommendations presented in Section 7.6. The site can

then be raised to the design finish grade with engineered.

7.5 Materials

The clayey sand can be used as fill and backfill in the proposed building and pavement areas.

However, the clay is expansive and is not recommended for use as fill in the proposed

building and pavement areas. Imported fill soil should conform to the following:

Gradation (ASTM C136):

percent finer by weight

6" ................................................................................................................... 100

4" ............................................................................................................. 85-100

¾” ............................................................................................................ 70-100

No. 4 Sieve ............................................................................................... 50-100

No. 200 Sieve ......................................................................................... 30 (max)

Maximum expansive potential (%)* .............................................................. 1.5

Maximum soluble sulfates (%) ..................................................................... 0.10


Job No. 3127JS095

11

* Measured on a sample compacted to approximately 95 percent of the ASTM

D698 maximum dry density at about three percent below the optimum water

content. The sample is confined under a 100 psf surcharge and submerged.

Imported fill should be approved by WT prior to placement.

7.6 Placement and Compaction

a. Place and compact fill in horizontal lifts, using equipment and procedures that will

produce recommended water contents and densities throughout the lift.

b. Uncompacted fill lifts should not exceed 10 inches.

c. No fill should be placed over frozen ground nor should frozen fill or backfill be used.

d. Materials should be compacted to the following:

Minimum Percent

Material Compaction (ASTM D698)

Fill in the building and pavement areas ............................................................. 95

Nonstructural backfill.......................................................................................... 90

Fill should be compacted within a water content range of –3 to +3 percent of the optimum

water content.

7.7 Compliance

Recommendations for foundations, slabs-on-grade, and pavements supported on compacted

fills or prepared subgrade depend upon compliance with the EARTHWORK recommendations.

To assess compliance, observation and testing should be performed under the direction of a

WT geotechnical engineer. Please contact us to provide these observation and testing services

8.0 PLAN REVIEW

Foundation and grading plans were not available at the time of this report. WT should be retained

to review the final plans to determine if they are consistent with the recommendations presented

in this report. If the Client does not retain WT to review the plans and specifications, WT shall have

no responsibility for the suitability of the plans for project application.


Job No. 3127JS095

12

9.0 ADDITIONAL SERVICES

The recommendations provided in this report are based on the assumption that a sufficient

schedule of tests and observations will be performed during construction to verify compliance. At a

minimum, these tests and observations should be comprised of the following:

Observations and testing during site preparation and earthwork;

Observation of foundation excavations; and

Consultation as may be required during construction.

Retaining the geotechnical engineer who developed your report to provide construction

observation is the best way to verify compliance, and to help you manage the risks associated with

unanticipated conditions.

10.0 LIMITATIONS

This report has been prepared assuming the project criteria described in Section 2.0. If changes in

the project criteria occur, or if different subsurface conditions are encountered or become known,

the conclusions and recommendations presented herein shall become invalid. In any such event,

contact WT to assess the effect that such variations may have on our conclusions and

recommendations. If WT is not retained for the construction observation and testing services to

determine compliance with this report, our professional responsibility is accordingly limited.

The recommendations presented are based entirely upon data derived from a limited number of

samples obtained from widely spaced borings. The attached logs are indicators of subsurface

conditions only at the specific locations and times noted. This report assumes the uniformity of the

geology and soil structure between borings, however variations can and often do exist. Whenever

any deviation, difference or change is encountered or becomes known, WT should be contacted.

This report is for the exclusive benefit of our client alone. There are no intended third-party

beneficiaries of our contract with the client or this report, and nothing contained in the contract or

this report shall create any express or implied contractual or any other relationship with, or claim or

cause of action for, any third party against WT.

This report is valid until the earlier of one year from the date of issuance, a change in

circumstances, or discovered variations. After expiration, no person or entity shall have any right to

rely on this report without the express written authorization of WT.


Job No. 3127JS095

13

11.0 CLOSURE

We prepared this report as an aid to the designers of the proposed project. The comments,

statements, recommendations and conclusions set forth in this report reflect the opinions of the

authors. These opinions are based upon data obtained at the location of the borings, and from

laboratory tests. Work on your project was performed in accordance with generally accepted

standards and practices utilized by professionals providing similar services in this locality. No

warranty, express or implied, is made.

WT v1.0L, 111714

BORING LOCATION DIAGRAM

PROJECT: PROPOSED OUTDOOR AQUATIC CENTER

JOB NO.: 3127JS095

PLATE: 1

N

Approximate Boring Location

Allowable Soil Bearing Capacity The recommended maximum contact stress developed at the interface of the foundation element and the supporting material.

Backfill A specified material placed and compacted in a confined area.

Base Course A layer of specified aggregate material placed on a subgrade or subbase.

Base Course Grade Top of base course.

Bench A horizontal surface in a sloped deposit.

Caisson/Drilled Shaft A concrete foundation element cast in a circular excavation which may have an enlarged base (or belled caisson).

Concrete Slabs‐On‐Grade A concrete surface layer cast directly upon base course, subbase or subgrade.

Crushed Rock Base Course A base course composed of crushed rock of a specified gradation.

Differential Settlement Unequal settlement between or within foundation elements of a structure.

Engineered Fill Specified soil or aggregate material placed and compacted to specified density and/or moisture conditions under observations of a representative of a soil engineer.

Existing Fill Materials deposited through the action of man prior to exploration of the site.

Existing Grade The ground surface at the time of field exploration.

Expansive Potential The potential of a soil to expand (increase in volume) due to absorption of moisture.

Fill Materials deposited by the actions of man.

Finished Grade The final grade created as a part of the project.

Gravel Base Course A base course composed of naturally occurring gravel with a specified gradation.

Heave Upward movement.

Native Grade The naturally occurring ground surface.

Native Soil Naturally occurring on‐site soil.

Rock A natural aggregate of mineral grains connected by strong and permanent cohesive forces. Usually requires drilling, wedging, blasting or other methods of extraordinary force for excavation.

Sand and Gravel Base Course A base course of sand and gravel of a specified gradation.

Sand Base Course A base course composed primarily of sand of a specified gradation.

Scarify To mechanically loosen soil or break down existing soil structure.

Settlement Downward movement.

Soil Any unconsolidated material composed of discrete solid particles, derived from the physical and/or chemical disintegration of vegetable or mineral matter, which can be separated by gentle mechanical means such as agitation in water.

Strip To remove from present location.

Subbase A layer of specified material placed to form a layer between the subgrade and base course.

Subbase Grade Top of subbase.

Subgrade Prepared native soil surface.

DEFINITION OF TERMINOLOGY

PLATE

A‐1

81WTI 091614

COARSE‐GRAINED SOILS LESS THAN 50% FINES

FINE‐GRAINED SOILS MORE THAN 50% FINES

GROUP SYMBOLS

DESCRIPTION MAJOR DIVISIONS

GROUP SYMBOLS

DESCRIPTION MAJOR DIVISIONS

GW WELL‐GRADED GRAVEL OR WELL‐GRADED GRAVEL WITH SAND, LESS THAN 5% FINES

GRAVELS MORE THAN

HALF OF COARSE FRACTION

IS LARGER THANNO. 4

SIEVE SIZE

ML SILT, SILT WITH SAND OR GRAVEL, SANDY SILT, OR GRAVELLY SILT SILTS

AND CLAYS

LIQUID LIMIT LESS

THAN 50

GP POORLY‐GRADED GRAVEL OR POORLY‐GRADED GRAVEL WITH SAND, LESS THAN 5% FINES CL

LEAN CLAY OF LOW TO MEDIUM PLASTICITY, SANDY CLAY, OR GRAVELLY CLAY

GM SILTY GRAVEL OR SILTY GRAVEL WITH SAND, MORE THAN 12% FINES OL

ORGANIC SILT OR ORGANIC CLAY OF LOW TO MEDIUM PLASTICITY

GC CLAYEY GRAVEL OR CLAYEY GRAVEL WITH SAND, MORE THAN 12% FINES MH

ELASTIC SILT, SANDY ELASTIC SILT, OR GRAVELLY ELASTIC SILT SILTS

AND CLAYS

LIQUID LIMIT MORE

THAN 50

SW WELL‐GRADED SAND OR WELL‐GRADED SAND WITH GRAVEL, LESS THAN 5% FINES SANDS

MORE THAN HALF

OF COARSE FRACTION IS SMALLER

THAN NO. 4

SIEVE SIZE

CH FAT CLAY OF HIGH PLASTICITY, SANDY FAT CLAY, OR GRAVELLY FAT CLAY

SP POORLY‐GRADED SAND OR POORLY‐GRADED SAND WITH GRAVEL, LESS THAN 5% FINES OH

ORGANIC SILT OR ORGANIC CLAY OF HIGH PLASTICITY

SM SILTY SAND OR SILTY SAND WITH GRAVEL, MORE THAN 12% FINES

PT PEAT AND OTHER HIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS HIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS SC

CLAYEY SAND OR CLAYEY SAND WITH GRAVEL, MORE THAN 12% FINES

NOTE: Coarse‐grained soils receive dual symbols if they NOTE: Fine‐grained soils may receive dual classification contain 5% to 12% fines (e.g., SW‐SM, GP‐GC). based upon plasticity characteristics (e.g. CL‐ML).

SOIL SIZES CONSISTENCY

COMPONENT SIZE RANGE CLAYS & SILTS BLOWS PER FOOT

BOULDERS Above 12 in. VERY SOFT SOFT FIRM STIFF

VERY STIFF HARD

0 – 2 3 – 4 5 – 8 9 – 15 16 – 30 OVER 30

COBBLES 3 in. – 12 in.

GRAVEL

Coarse Fine

No. 4 – 3 in.

¾ in. – 3 in. No. 4 – ¾ in.

SAND

Coarse

Medium Fine

No. 200 – No. 4

No. 10 – No. 4

No. 40 – No. 10 No. 200 – No. 40

RELATIVE DENSITY

SANDS & GRAVELS BLOWS PER FOOT

VERY LOOSE LOOSE

MEDIUM DENSE DENSE

VERY DENSE

0 – 4 5 – 10 11 – 30 31 – 50 OVER 50 Fines (Silt or Clay) Below No. 200

NOTE: Only sizes smaller than three inches are used to classify soils

NOTE: Number of blows using 140‐pound hammer falling 30 inches to drive a 2‐inch‐OD

(1⅜‐inch ID) split‐barrel sampler (ASTM D1586).

PLASTICITY OF FINE GRAINED SOILS DEFINITION OF WATER CONTENT

PLASTICITY INDEX TERM DRY

SLIGHTLY DAMP

DAMP MOIST

WET

SATURATED

0

1 – 7

8 – 20

Over 20

NON‐PLASTIC

LOW

MEDIUM

HIGH

METHOD OF CLASSIFICATION

PLATE

A‐2

81 WTI 090414

The number shown in "BORING NO." refers to the approximate location of the same number indicated on the "Boring Location Diagram" as positioned in the field by pacing or measurement from property lines and/or existing features, or through the use of Global Positioning System (GPS) devices. The accuracy of GPS devices is somewhat variable. "DRILLING TYPE" refers to the exploratory equipment used in the boring wherein HSA = hollow stem auger, and the dimension presented is the outside diameter of the HSA used. "N” in “BLOW COUNTS" refers to a 2‐inch outside diameter split‐barrel sampler driven into the ground with a 140 pound drop‐hammer dropped 30 inches repeatedly until a penetration of 18 inches is achieved or until refusal. The number of blows, or “blow count”, of the hammer is recorded for each of three 6‐inch increments totaling 18 inches. The number of blows required for advancing the sampler for the last 12 inches (2nd and 3rd increments) is defined as the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) “N”‐Value. Refusal to penetration is considered more than 50 blows per 6 inches. (Ref. ASTM D1586). "R" in “BLOW COUNTS" refers to a 3‐inch outside diameter ring‐lined split barrel sampler driven into the ground with a 140 pound drop‐hammer dropped 30 inches repeatedly until a penetration of 12 inch is achieved or until refusal. The number of blows required to advance the sampler 12 inches is defined as the “R” blow count. The “R” blow count requires an engineered conversion to an equivalent SPT N‐Value. Refusal to penetration is considered more than 50 blows per foot. (Ref. ASTM D3550). “CS” in “BLOWS/FT.” refers to a 2½‐in. outside diameter California style split‐barrel sampler, lined with brass sleeves, driven into the ground with a 140‐pound hammer dropped 30 inches repeatedly until a penetration of 18 inches is achieved or until refusal. The number of blows of the hammer is recorded for each of the three 6‐inch increments totaling 18 inches. The number of blows required for advancing the sampler for the last 12 inches (2nd and 3rd increments) is defined as the “CS” blow count. The “CS” blow count requires an engineered conversion to an equivalent SPT N‐Value. Refusal to penetration is considered more than 50 blows for a 6‐inch increment. (Ref. ASTM D 3550) "SAMPLE TYPE" refers to the form of sample recovery, in which N = Split‐barrel sample, R = Ring‐lined sample, “CS” = California style split‐barrel sample, G = Grab sample, B = Bucket sample, C = Core sample (ex. diamond bit rock coring). "DRY DENSITY (LBS/CU FT)" refers to the laboratory‐determined dry density in pounds per cubic foot. The symbol "NR" indicates that no sample was recovered. "WATER (MOISTURE) CONTENT” (% of Dry Wt.) refers to the laboratory‐determined water content in percent using the standard test method ASTM D2216. "USCS" refers to the “Unified Soil Classification System” Group Symbol for the soil type as defined by ASTM D2487 and D2488. The soils were classified visually in the field, and where appropriate, classifications were modified by visual examination of samples in the laboratory and/or by appropriate tests. These notes and boring logs are intended for use in conjunction with the purposes of our services defined in the text. Boring log data should not be construed as part of the construction plans nor as defining construction conditions. Boring logs depict our interpretations of subsurface conditions at the locations and on the date(s) noted. Variations in subsurface conditions and characteristics may occur between borings. Groundwater levels may fluctuate due to seasonal variations and other factors. The stratification lines shown on the boring logs represent our interpretation of the approximate boundary between soil or rock types based upon visual field classification at the boring location. The transition between materials is approximate and may be more or less gradual than indicated.

BORING LOG NOTES

PLATE

A‐3

©81WTI 091614

BN-

PLATE

FIELD ENGINEER: R. Southworth

NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drillingSTANDARD PENETRATION TEST

RING SAMPLE

7.8

DE

PT

H (

FE

ET

)

DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y (

psf)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

A-4

G

R

R

ASPHALT PAVEMENT UNDERLAIN BY SAND AND GRAVELAGGREGATE BASE COURSE

CLAYEY SAND; brown, very loose, moist

COBBLES; with clayey sand and gravel matrix, brown, very dense,moist

Boring Terminated At 8 Feet Due To Auger Refusal In Cobbles

7

SC

GP



4

DRILLING TYPE: 7" HSA

NO SAMPLE RECOVERY

.

G- GRAB SAMPLE

BUCKET SAMPLEB-

Not determined

BLUNT NOSE PENETROMETER

NR-

DATE DRILLED:

ELEVATION:W

AT

ER

CO

NT

EN

T (

%)

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

BLO

WS

/FT

.

LOCATION:

SA

MP

LE

BORING LOG

TH

IS S

UM

MA

RY

AP

PLIE

S O

NLY

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

AN

D A

T T

HE

TIM

E O

F L

OG

GIN

G.

CO

ND

ITIO

NS

MA

Y D

IFF

ER

AT

OT

HE

R

US

CS

LO

CA

TIO

NS

AN

D M

AY

CH

AN

GE

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

WIT

H

TIM

E.

DA

TA

PR

ES

EN

TE

D I

S A

SIM

PLIF

ICA

TIO

N.

N-

R-

GR

AP

HIC

REF. NO.: 3127JS095

EQUIPMENT TYPE: CME-55BORING NO. B-111-13-17

See Boring Location Diagram

5

10

15

20

PLATE

BN-

FIELD ENGINEER: C. Dumitru

NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drillingSTANDARD PENETRATION TEST

9.5

.

DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y (

psf)

SOIL DESCRIPTION

A-5

10.4

G

R

R

R

CLAYEY SAND; brown, very loose to loose, moist



9

25/3"

DE

PT

H (

FE

ET

)

SC

GP



7


ELEVATION:

N-

RING SAMPLE

G- GRAB SAMPLE

BUCKET SAMPLEB-

Not determined


NO SAMPLE RECOVERY

DATE DRILLED:

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

BLO

WS

/FT

.

SA

MP

LE

BORING LOG

TH

IS S

UM

MA

RY

AP

PLIE

S O

NLY

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

AN

D A

T T

HE

TIM

E O

F L

OG

GIN

G.

CO

ND

ITIO

NS

MA

Y D

IFF

ER

AT

OT

HE

R

GR

AP

HIC

US

CS

LO

CA

TIO

NS

AN

D M

AY

CH

AN

GE

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

WIT

H

TIM

E.

DA

TA

PR

ES

EN

TE

D I

S A

SIM

PLIF

ICA

TIO

N.

NR-

REF. NO.: 3127JS095

LOCATION:



5

10

15

20

R-

CH

CH

SC



NOTES: Groundwater encountered at 18 feet during drilling


A-6

DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y (

psf)

28.5

BN-

30.9

35.7

G

R

R

R

N

N

N

FAT CLAY; brown, stiff, moist

FAT CLAY; gray, stiff, moist

CLAYEY SAND; gray, medium dense, moist

13

18

wet

12

Boring Terminated At 21.5 Feet

13

10

11

DATE DRILLED:

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

BORING NO. B-3See Boring Location Diagram

B-

NO SAMPLE RECOVERY

BUCKET SAMPLE

GRAB SAMPLEG-

N-


5

10

15

20

NR-

Not determined


R-

BLO

WS

/FT

.

EQUIPMENT TYPE: CME-55

ELEVATION:

SOIL DESCRIPTION

PLATE

LO

CA

TIO

NS

AN

D M

AY

CH

AN

GE

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

WIT

H

TIM

E.

DA

TA

PR

ES

EN

TE

D I

S A

SIM

PLIF

ICA

TIO

N.

DE

PT

H (

FE

ET

)

.

RING SAMPLE

STANDARD PENETRATION TEST

11-13-17

LOCATION:

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

REF. NO.: 3127JS095

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

TH

IS S

UM

MA

RY

AP

PLIE

S O

NLY

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

AN

D A

T T

HE

TIM

E O

F L

OG

GIN

G.

CO

ND

ITIO

NS

MA

Y D

IFF

ER

AT

OT

HE

R

BORING LOG

SA

MP

LE

GR

AP

HIC

US

CS


SC

CH

CH

SC

CL

DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y (

psf)


A-7


15.1

BN-

N

CLAYEY SAND; gray, medium dense, damp

FAT CLAY; gray, stiff, moist

FAT CLAY; brown, firm, moist

CLAYEY SAND; brown, loose, moist

SANDY LEAN CLAY; brown, stiff, moist

N

R

R

R

G

22.3

12.1

N

6

11


10

9

10

14

GRAB SAMPLE

DRILLING TYPE: 7" HSABORING NO. B-4DATE DRILLED:

NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling

BLO

WS

/FT

.


R-

G-

N-

ELEVATION:

11-13-17

NR-

BUCKET SAMPLEB-

5

10

15

20

Not determined



NO SAMPLE RECOVERY

PLATE

LOCATION:

DE

PT

H (

FE

ET

)

.

RING SAMPLE


SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

TH

IS S

UM

MA

RY

AP

PLIE

S O

NLY

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

AN

D A

T T

HE

TIM

E O

F L

OG

GIN

G.

CO

ND

ITIO

NS

MA

Y D

IFF

ER

AT

OT

HE

R

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

BORING LOG

SA

MP

LE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

GR

AP

HIC

US

CS

LO

CA

TIO

NS

AN

D M

AY

CH

AN

GE

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

WIT

H

TIM

E.

DA

TA

PR

ES

EN

TE

D I

S A

SIM

PLIF

ICA

TIO

N.

REF. NO.: 3127JS095

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

BN-

A-8



4.1


DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y (

psf)

.

DE

PT

H (

FE

ET

)

9

8.6

G

R

R

CONCRETE SLAB

POORLY GRADED SAND; with clay, brown, loose, moist

CLAYEY SAND; brown, medium dense, moist




RING SAMPLE

25

SC-SP

SC

GP


WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

NO SAMPLE RECOVERY

SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

ELEVATION:

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

N-

G-

R-

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

5

10

15

20

BUCKET SAMPLEB-

Not determined


BLO

WS

/FT

.

DATE DRILLED:


GRAB SAMPLE

BORING LOG

PLATE

LO

CA

TIO

NS

AN

D M

AY

CH

AN

GE

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

WIT

H

TIM

E.

DA

TA

PR

ES

EN

TE

D I

S A

SIM

PLIF

ICA

TIO

N.

US

CS

GR

AP

HIC

NR-

SA

MP

LE

TH

IS S

UM

MA

RY

AP

PLIE

S O

NLY

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

AN

D A

T T

HE

TIM

E O

F L

OG

GIN

G.

CO

ND

ITIO

NS

MA

Y D

IFF

ER

AT

OT

HE

R

REF. NO.: 3127JS095

LOCATION:




SP

SC

CH

SC

DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y (

psf)


A-9


8.6

BN-

N


FAT CLAY; gray, stiff to very stiff, moist

loose

CLAYEY SAND; brown, very loose, moist

CONCRETE SLAB

N

N

R

R

R

G

11.9

7

50

13

POORLY GRADED SAND; with gravel, dark red-brown, dense to vreydense, wet

11


6

16

GRAB SAMPLE

BORING NO. B-6DRILLING TYPE: 7" HSA

BLO

WS

/FT

.


11-13-17 EQUIPMENT TYPE: CME-55

R-

G-

N-

ELEVATION:

DATE DRILLED:

NR-

5

10

15

20

BUCKET SAMPLEB-


Not determined


NO SAMPLE RECOVERY

PLATE

LOCATION:

DE

PT

H (

FE

ET

)

.

RING SAMPLE


SOIL DESCRIPTION

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

TH

IS S

UM

MA

RY

AP

PLIE

S O

NLY

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

AN

D A

T T

HE

TIM

E O

F L

OG

GIN

G.

CO

ND

ITIO

NS

MA

Y D

IFF

ER

AT

OT

HE

R

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

BORING LOG

SA

MP

LE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

GR

AP

HIC

US

CS

LO

CA

TIO

NS

AN

D M

AY

CH

AN

GE

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

WIT

H

TIM

E.

DA

TA

PR

ES

EN

TE

D I

S A

SIM

PLIF

ICA

TIO

N.

REF. NO.: 3127JS095

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE



SC

30.0



A-10

BN-

CH

DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y (

psf)

G

R

R

N

N

CONCRETE SLAB


FAT CLAY; brown, firm to stiff, moist

FAT CALY; gray, stiff, moist




GP

13

CH

GP

15

10

8

NR-

GRAB SAMPLEG-

N-

ELEVATION:

B-

NO SAMPLE RECOVERY

Not determined

R-

See Boring Location DiagramBORING NO. B-7

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

BUCKET SAMPLE

11-13-17


DATE DRILLED:

BLO

WS

/FT

.


SA

MP

LE

GR

AP

HIC

US

CS

LO

CA

TIO

NS

AN

D M

AY

CH

AN

GE

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

WIT

H

TIM

E.

DA

TA

PR

ES

EN

TE

D I

S A

SIM

PLIF

ICA

TIO

N.

5

10

15

20

PLATE

SOIL DESCRIPTION

DE

PT

H (

FE

ET

)

.

RING SAMPLE



LOCATION:

TH

IS S

UM

MA

RY

AP

PLIE

S O

NLY

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

AN

D A

T T

HE

TIM

E O

F L

OG

GIN

G.

CO

ND

ITIO

NS

MA

Y D

IFF

ER

AT

OT

HE

R

REF. NO.: 3127JS095

BORING LOG

SC

CH

SC





A-11

DR

YD

EN

SIT

Y (

psf)

13.8

BN-

N


FAT CLAY; gray, soft, moist

with gravel

CLAYEY SAND; brown, very loose to loose, moist


N

N

R

R

R

GCONCRETE SLAB

6

16

wet

3

9

7

16

EQUIPMENT TYPE: CME-5511-13-17DATE DRILLED:


WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

BUCKET SAMPLE

NR-

GRAB SAMPLEG-

N-

ELEVATION:


NO SAMPLE RECOVERY

LOCATION:

R-

B-

Not determined

5

10

15

20


BLO

WS

/FT

.

SOIL DESCRIPTION

DE

PT

H (

FE

ET

)

.

RING SAMPLE


PLATE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

REF. NO.: 3127JS095

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

TH

IS S

UM

MA

RY

AP

PLIE

S O

NLY

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

AN

D A

T T

HE

TIM

E O

F L

OG

GIN

G.

CO

ND

ITIO

NS

MA

Y D

IFF

ER

AT

OT

HE

RBORING NO. B-8

BORING LOG

SA

MP

LE

GR

AP

HIC

US

CS

LO

CA

TIO

NS

AN

D M

AY

CH

AN

GE

AT

TH

IS L

OC

AT

ION

WIT

H

TIM

E.

DA

TA

PR

ES

EN

TE

D I

S A

SIM

PLIF

ICA

TIO

N.

SA

MP

LE

TY

PE

FC-Soil Properties v2.0

Boring No. Depth (ft.) USCS Classification

Dry Density (pcf)

Water Content (%)

Expansion Properties Plasticity

Percent Passing #200 Remarks

Surcharge (ksf)

Expansion (%)

Liquid Limit (%)

Plasticity Index

B-1 2 - 3 SC 7.8 23.3

B-2 2 - 3 SC 9.5 30.5

B-2 5 - 6 SC 10.4 37.3

B-3 2 - 3 CH 96 28.5 0.1 0.8 54 31 96.8 1, 2

B-3 5 - 6 CH 30.9 97.9

B-3 7 - 8 CH 35.7 98.5

B-4 2 - 3 CL 15.1 57.7

B-4 5 - 6 SC 12.1 41.1

B-4 7 - 8 CH 22.3 79.6

B-5 2 - 3 SC-SP 4.1 8.7

B-5 5 - 6 SC 8.6 20.3

B-5 5 - 6 SC 8.6 30.3

B-6 7 - 8 SC 11.9 33.0

B-7 5 - 6 CH 93 30.0 0.1 1.7 61 32 97.9 1, 2

B-8 2 - 3 SC 13.8 25.1

Note: Initial Dry Density and Initial Water Content are in-situ values unless otherwise noted.

Remarks 1. Test performed on undisturbed sample. 2. Submerged to approximate saturation.


PLATE

B-1 JOB NO.: 3127JS095

LABORATORY TEST RESULTS

01 1000 - 1 SUMMARY

SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Work sequence. 2. Contractor use of site. 3. Definitions. 4. Abbreviations. B. Related documents and sections: 1. General Conditions of the Contract 1.2 WORK SEQUENCE A. The existing Brookside Outdoor swimming facility has exceeded it useful service

life and is needing replacement. The new facility will serve as an outdoor aquatic facility with amenities of a waterpark. The new facility includes construction of:

1. 4,900 S.F. Bath House 2. 2- tower water slides 3. Lazy River 4. Kid’s playpool with beach entry and play water-features 5. Pavilions for private parties 6. 3-lane lap pool (see Section 01 2300 for Alternates) 7. All associated site work as indicated in the plans and specifications.

B. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner representative(s) &

Design Professional. 1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. Existing buildings and existing Brookside Park site will be partially occupied during

construction. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations during regular and after-hours use.

B. Contractor will have restricted use of site to allow Owner to conduct normal

operations. 1. Access to site by trucks, equipment, and automobiles: Limited to route and

01 1000 - 2 SUMMARY

entrances designated in Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. Schedule construction traffic and material deliveries to site during time periods coordinated in advance with Owner.

2. On-site construction vehicle and equipment traffic shall be limited to pathways,

areas and time periods approved in advance by Owner to ensure safe site conditions. The Contractor shall strictly maintain close communication with the owner’s representative(s) on matters of on-site construction traffic scheduling and promptly inform them in advance of any significant changes to related pre-authorized arrangements. Do not proceed with altered arrangements prior to representative(s) approval.

3. Parking: Contractor and work force may use Owner-designated portions of

existing parking lots. Do not interfere with Owner's parking requirements.

4. Construction activities shall be limited to areas of actual construction. Unless otherwise agreed to in advance by Owner, restrict workmen from entering adjacent occupied facilities.

C. Contractor shall make arrangements with Owner to secure any keys necessary for

access to existing building and site areas so that the work can be performed. The Contractor assumes sole responsibility for the security and use of keys obtained from the Owner and shall not reproduce them nor lend them out during the progress of the work.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S PERSONNEL JOBSITE RESTRICTIONS A. Contractor shall enforce the following requirements on his entire workforce

throughout the progress of the Work:

1. All personnel on site, directly or indirectly in the employ of Contractor, are restricted from any interaction with any Owner, Owner’s staff, or other members of the public while on, or adjacent to Owner’s property except through jobsite meetings conducted by the Design Professional and the Owner or as otherwise determined by the Owner.

2. Contractor’s personnel shall remain in their designated work areas. Communications

with any non-project related persons on or near the site shall be through Project Superintendent.

3. No firearms or other types of weapons, of any sort are allowed on site. If member of

the Contractor’s workforce is found to be in possession of a firearm, of any kind, they will be directed to leave immediately and will not be allowed to return. This includes firearms found in company or private vehicles, tool boxes, or brought on site in any other manner;

4. Smoking shall be limited to designated areas if allowed in advance by Owner.

01 1000 - 3 SUMMARY

5. There shall be no use, possession, sale, and distribution of alcohol, drugs, or other controlled substances on its premises. The Contractor shall also prohibit the presence of an individual with such substances in their body from the workplace.

6. Any employee who is found in violation of requirements of these restrictions, or of any

others within the Contract Documents, or who refuses to permit inspection shall be barred from the Project site at the discretion of the Owner.

7. The General Contractor shall provide a procedure for individual visual

identification of Contractor’s workforce on site and in occupied areas. If identification badges are required make sure that they are worn at all times on site during the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 01 2300-Alternates.doc

012300 - 1 ALTERNATES

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

FBT Architects - 01 2300-Alternates.doc

012300 - 2 ALTERNATES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate #1: Alternate requires provisions for all cost associated with the construction of the lap pool in lieu of a catch pool (Base Bid) at the water slide as indicated on the drawings.

END OF SECTION 01 2300

FBT Architects – 01 3100 - PM & Coord.docx

01 3100 - 1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

SECTION 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. General requirements for coordination of Work. 2. Field engineering. 3. Requirements for participation in and administration of: a. Pre-construction conference. b. Progress meetings. c. Pre-installation conferences. 4. Progress schedule. B. Related documents and sections: 1. General Conditions of the Contract a. Contractor’s Schedules, Logs, Meetings, and Reports 2. Instructions to Bidders 3. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Work by others. 4. Section 01 4000 – Quality Requirements

5. Section 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide in accordance with Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures:

1. Site mobilization plan in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

a. Submit for Owner’s approval prior to start of Work.

b. Update as necessary during progress of Work to adjust for changed



conditions and as approved by Owner.

2. Coordination drawings:

a. Provide where coordination is critical for installation of components fabricated off site and where space is limited and maximum utilization of space is required.

b. Show relationship and integration of components and construction entities, required installation sequence, dimensions, and tolerances.

c. As required by individual sections of the project manual. B. Staff assignment list and emergency contact information: 1. Prior to Pre-Construction Conference, provide to Design Professional a list of

Contractor's principal staff assignments for Project. Indicate names, duties and responsibilities, addresses, emergency contact information and telephone numbers. Include Project Superintendent. Naming more than one Project Superintendent to be in charge depending which is present at the site will not be acceptable. Design Professional shall be informed in writing prior to any proposed change in Project Superintendent during the progress of the Work.

2. Distribute contact information and post in field office coordination. 1.3 GENERAL COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS (See General Conditions). A. Scheduling: Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of various specification

sections to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. Ensure that work of one specification section is not installed in such a manner as to limit, preclude, or restrict work of another section.

B. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate specification sections in

preparation for final inspection specified in Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. C. After acceptance of Work, coordinate access to facility for required maintenance,

monitoring, adjusting, and correcting deficiencies to manner to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

D. Coordinate with Owner regarding work of Owner’s forces and separate contractors.

Ensure coordination of such work with Project Schedule. 1.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Existing control datum for field engineering is indicated on Drawings. B. Locate or establish survey control and reference points prior to starting site

construction. Protect points during construction and record locations with horizontal and vertical data on Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01 7800



- Closeout Submittals. C. Prior to start of construction, verify location of control points and layout information

on Drawings relative to property, setback, and easement lines. D. Provide competent field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels

utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. Periodically verify layouts. E. Promptly replace dislocated control and reference points based on original survey

control. 1.5 PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM (CIMS)

A. Contractor shall utilize their in house Project Management System. The Owner,

Construction Manager & Architect shall be provided access for necessary communication.

B. At project closeout all documents shall be provided to the Owner in electronic format.

1.6 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Conference will be held after execution of the GMP Agreement. Time and location

will be coordinated with Owner and Design Professional. Meet at the site or other location convenient to all parties.

B. Attendance: Owner, Construction Manager or other designated representative,

Design Professional, consultants, Contractor, and major subcontractors and suppliers.

C. Agenda:

1. To be developed by the Contractor and approved by the Owner/Construction Manager & Architect.

1.7 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract. .

B. Progress Meetings shall include review of Owner’s separate contractor issues. 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required by an individual specification section, convene a pre-installation

conference at site. B. Require attendance of entities directly concerned with item of work. C. Notify Design Professional 4 days in advance of meeting.



D. Prepare agenda and preside at conference. Record minutes, and distribute copies within 3 days to participants and Design Professional.

E. At meeting, review conditions of installation, preparation and installation

procedures, and coordination with related work. 1.9 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. See Paragraph General Conditions of the Contract for requirements.

1. Indicate complete sequence of roofing activity.

2. Indicate complete sequence of HVAC and controls installation activity as separate line items.

3. Itemize each category of subcontracted work

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of equipment are compatible with

facility utilities. Coordinate work of various specification sections having interdependent requirements for installing, connecting to, and placing in service such equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION WITH INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Cutting and patching of installed construction shall be accomplished in accordance

with Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements.

END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures.docx

01 3300 - 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes submittal procedures for: 1. Shop drawings. 2. Product data. 3. Samples. 4. Manufacturer's instructions. 5. Design data and calculations. 6. Manufacturer's certificates. 7. Reports for testing, inspecting, and demonstrating. B. Related documents and sections: 1. General Conditions of the Contract: Contractor's responsibilities regarding

submittals. 2. Section 01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination: Submittal of Progress

Schedule and coordination drawings. 3. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers' field services and

reports. 2. Section 01 6300 - Product Substitution Procedures: Submittal of substitution

requests. 3. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Submittal of project record drawings,

operation and maintenance manuals, warranties, certifications of inspection, extra materials, and other closeout submittals.

7. Refer to individual specification sections for unique submittal requirements

related to a specific product, system, or procedure.

FBT Architects - 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures.docx

01 3300 - 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION

01 3301 - 1 SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM

SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM The undersigned, as Contractor for the above project, submits the following and certifies that submittal has been reviewed and it conforms with requirements of Contract Documents except as noted. SUBMITTAL NUMBER:__________________________ ______RESUBMITTAL: YES NO DATE:______________________________NUMBER OF COPIES SUBMITTED: ________ DESCRIPTION:________________________________________________________________ ASSOCIATED SPECIFICATION SECTION NO:____________________________________ REFERENCED DRAWING SHEET NO:___________________________________________ NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER:_______________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ SUBMITTED BY:_______________________________________________DATE:_____________________ SIGNATURE: _________________________________________________________________

• * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * DATE RECEIVED BY DESIGN PROFESSIONAL:___________________________________ DISTRIBUTED TO: OWNER CIVIL LANDSCAPE STRUCTURAL MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL OTHER: ___________________________________________________________________ * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ACTION: No exceptions taken [ ] Make corrections noted [ ] Revise and resubmit [ ] Rejected [ ] COMMENTS: _____________________________________________________________________________ Submittal review corrections and comments by Design Professional do not relieve Contractor from compliance with Contract Documents. Review is only for general conformance with design concept and general compliance with information given in Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for verifying dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination with other trades, and performing work in safe and satisfactory manner. REVIEWED BY:______________________________________DATE:____________________ SIGNATURE: _________________________________________________________________

FBT Architects - 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.docx

01 4000 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Installation quality control. 2. Reference standards. 3. Inspection and testing laboratory services. 4. Manufacturer's field services and reports. B. Related requirements: 1. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: a. Contractor's supervision and construction procedures. b. Owner’s responsibilities for testing and inspections. c. Contractor's responsibility for uncovering and correction of work. d. Requirements for tests and inspections. 2. Section 01 3100 – Project Management and Coordination: Requirements for

coordination with Owner’s separate contractors. 3. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and

product quality. 1.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Unless required otherwise in the Contract, Owner shall appoint, employ, and pay for

services of an independent firm to perform routine inspections and compliance for materials, components, and systems where routine testing to determine compliance with Contract Documents is required. See General Conditions of the Contract.

B. Testing firm shall perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in

individual specification sections and as required.

FBT Architects - 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.docx

01 4000 - 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 01 5000 - Temp Facilities & Controls.doc

01 5000 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Site mobilization plan. 2. Temporary services: Electrical, lighting, heating, ventilating, water, telephone,

and facsimile. 3. Fencing, barriers, and other temporary controls. 4. Temporary erosion and sediment controls including NPDES-SWPPP

requirements. 5. Construction facilities: Temporary buildings, sanitary facilities, access, and

parking. 6. Protection of Work and existing facilities. 7. Bulletin board. B. Related documents and sections: 1. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: a. Contractor's use of site. b. Contractor's responsibility for cleaning. c. Safety precautions and programs. 2. Section 01 3100: Project Management and Coordination 2. Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements: Progress cleaning. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. B. NFPA 241 - Safeguarding Building Construction, Alterations, and Demolition

Operations.



1.3 SITE MOBILIZATION PLAN A. Coordinate locations for temporary facilities with Design Professional and Owner. B. Based upon information indicated on Drawings, prepare site mobilization plan in

accordance with requirements for site logistics plan in General Conditions. C. Present 3 copies of plan at Pre-Construction Conference in accordance with Section

01 3100 - Project Management and Coordination. D. Prior to mobilization, revise and resubmit to Design Professional site mobilization

plan incorporating final revisions made at Pre-Construction Conference and approved by Design Professional and Owner.

1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for temporary electricity used during construction. Provide service

disconnect and overcurrent protection. Provide temporary feeder as required. B. Provide power outlets for construction operations with branch wiring, distribution

boxes, and flexible power cords as required. C. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide lighting for construction operations in accordance with the General

Conditions. Lighting levels shall be appropriate for type and difficulty of work. Use these minimums as guidelines:

B. After dark, provide security lighting for interior and exterior work and storage areas. C. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting

conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. D. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. E. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. Document existing

lighting system conditions at start of Work and submit report to Design Professional for approval before Work begins. Re-lamp, replace, or repair existing fixtures at end of job to return lighting to conditions documented prior to commencement of Work.

1.6 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATING A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to

prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, and gases.



B. Provide temporary fan units to maintain clean air for construction operations. C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in interior areas where

construction is in progress. D. If HVAC system is temporarily used to maintain specified conditions, the contractor

shall pay for the service. If systems is not sufficient to maintain required conditions provide and pay for supplemental heating devices needed to maintain specified conditions and in such a manner as to prevent damage to existing building and systems.

E. Change all HVAC filters in existing system serving area of Work at end of Project. 1.7 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide, maintain, and pay for suitable quality water service required for

construction operations. B. Assume responsibility for temporary connections and water lines. Upon completion,

remove temporary facilities. 1.8 COMMUNICATIONS A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone and wireless internet service to field office.

Owners telephones and internet services will not be available to Contractor’s workforce unless for an emergency.

1.9 FENCING A. Provide temporary fencing around new building and materials storage site.

Completely separate construction from existing facilities. B. Type: Panelized 6 foot high commercial grade chain link fence. Equip with

vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.10 BARRIERS AND PROTECTION A. Security: Provide to protect Work from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft.

Coordinate with Owner's security program and personnel. B. Barriers: Provide to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect

existing facilities and adjacent properties from construction operations. C. Barricades and covered walkways: As required by Design Professional, Owner and

governing authorities for safe public access to existing buildings.



D. Enclosures: Provide temporary, insulated, weather tight closures of exterior openings to provide acceptable working conditions, protect Work, and prevent unauthorized entry. Fit with lockable doors.

E. Temporary partitions: Provide to separate work areas from completed Work.

Prevent penetration of dust and moisture into completed portions of building. F. Emergency exits shall be maintained during construction. Provide separate barriers

as appropriate. G. Protect detection devices such as smoke detectors and sensors from construction

dust. H. Protect existing trees and plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plant

material. I. Hand-water existing trees, plants as necessary to maintain them viable in the event

that existing irrigation system is made temporarily inoperable due to the Work. Replace dead plant material as required in the event of failure to comply with this provision.

1.11 PROTECTION OF EXISTING AND INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work. Control activity in immediate work area. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. C. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, and

movement of heavy objects with durable sheet materials. D. Prohibit traffic and storage on roof surfaces and landscaped areas. 1.12 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Install and maintain temporary fire protection components. Establish and follow

procedures to protect against fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. B. Fire extinguishers: Provide hand carried, portable, UL rated fire extinguishers of

type and size recommended by NFPA 10 for building exposure conditions. Place in accessible, convenient locations in clear view with a minimum of one extinguisher per floor.

C. Access: Maintain unobstructed access to fire hydrants, water supply, fire

extinguishers, stairways, and access routes for fighting fires. D. Heating devices: Exercise care and monitor use of temporary heaters to minimize



fire risk. E. Store combustible materials in fire-safe containers. F. Volatile products: Do not store paints, varnishes, paint removers, solvents,

adhesives, cleaning rags, and other volatile products in building. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.

G. Cutting and welding: Approve in advance use of open flame cutting, welding, and

soldering equipment. Ensure that safe conditions exist before granting approval. 1.13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS

A. Prevent temporary collection of sediment on sidewalks, parking lots, streets and driveways. Clean such surfaces promptly if such conditions exist due to the Work.

B. National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit and procedures

for preparing a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). 1. Contractor shall determine whether Project requires an EPA NPDES storm

water discharge permit in conformance with all regulations governing the disturbance of construction site areas.

2. If storm water discharge permit is required, then both Contractor and Owner

shall be designated as separate permittees and the Contractor shall do the following:

a. Prepare a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) document as

necessary to ensure compliance with any and all NPDES construction storm water permitting plan requirements.

b. Prepare and submit all EPA documentation and forms required of

Contractor for permit. c. Assist Owner with preparation and submittal of all EPA documentation and

forms specifically required of Owner for permit. Provide all required project-related information to Owner as necessary.

d. At Final Completion of Project, Contractor shall complete and submit

documentation to EPA as required and to Design Professional as part of Project Closeout documentation package. See Section 01 78 00 of Specifications.

3. If a storm water discharge permit is not required, then the Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional and Owner prior to mobilization a signed statement containing specific written justification why such permit is not required on the Project.



4. The Contractor shall manage the discharge of storm water from the site in accordance with NPDES permit and the provisions of the SWPPP. The Contractor shall be responsible for installing and maintaining any necessary storm water control measures in accordance with control device manufacturer’s recommendations and the provisions of the SWPPP. The Contractor shall monitor the suitability of the designated control measures and management practices to achieve the storm water quality provisions of the NPDES permit, and shall make any necessary changes to the controls and practices in order to meet the permit requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for updating the SWPPP and maintaining all records related to the SWPPP. A copy of the approved SWPPP shall be kept on the jobsite at all times. Contractor shall be liable for all fines and construction delays resulting from any governmental agency enforcement action due to failure by the Contractor to satisfy the above requirements.

5. Contractor is responsible for payment of all applicable fees and permits related to SWPPP approval process and for full cost of control measures for the Project.

1.14 ACCESS A. Refer to Drawings for location of acceptable access routes and site entrances.

Protect existing curbs and walks traversed by construction vehicles from damage. B. Identify access to Contractor's work and office area with appropriate signs so that

delivery personnel and others may contact Contractor. Existing facilities offices shall not be used as destination for Contractor’s deliveries.

C. Prevent unauthorized personnel from accessing existing building or site through

Contractor's work area. 1.15 FIELD FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain a weathertight, fully equipped field office. B. Provide space for project meetings with table and chairs to accommodate 8 persons. C. Provide and maintain storage sheds and other facilities as required. D. Arrange for parking for work force in manner approved by Owner. Do not limit

Owner's requirements for parking. 1.16 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required sanitary facilities for work force. B. New and existing toilet facilities shall not be used by work force.



1.17 DRINKING WATER A. Provide independent source of drinking water for workforce. Facilities drinking

fountains shall not be available for Contractor’s use. 1.18 BULLETIN BOARD A. Furnish and maintain bulletin board adjacent to field office. Display the following

throughout construction period: 1. Safety requirements. 2. Official notices and announcements. 1.19 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade and buried utilities, equipment, facilities, and excess

materials prior to final inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation of temporary facilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION

FBT Architects – 01 6300 - Product Substitution Procedures.doc

01 6300 - 1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 6300 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for product options and substitution procedures.

B. Related documents and sections:

1. General Conditions of the Contract

1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. During bidding, Design Professional will consider written requests from qualified

bidders, subcontractors, and manufacturers for substitutions. 1. Submit separate request for each substitution with Form 01 6301 - Prior

Approval Substitution Request Form. Copy of form follows this Section. 2. Submit substitution request in accordance with procedures and time limitations

stated in Document - Instructions to Bidders. 3. Substitutions approved during bidding will be listed in Addenda. B. After Contract award: 1. After signing of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Design

Professional will consider written requests for substitutions in accordance with the General Conditions.

2. Submit separate request for each substitution with Form 01 6302 - Contractor

Substitution Request Form. Copy of form follows this Section. Provide data documenting need for substitution and substantiating compliance of proposed product with Contract Documents. Include proposed changes to contract amount and time if substitution is accepted.

FBT Architects – 01 6300 - Product Substitution Procedures.doc

01 6300 - 2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION - FORMS FOLLOW

01 6301 - 1 PRIOR APPROVAL SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

PRIOR APPROVAL SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM The undersigned, qualified bidder, subcontractor, manufacturer, or supplier requests that the following product be accepted for use in the Project PRODUCT: ________________________________________________________________ MODEL NO.: ______________________________________________________________ MANUFACTURER: _________________________________________________________ ADDRESS: _________________________________________________________________ The above product would be used in lieu of PRODUCT: ________________________________________________________________ specified in SECTION: _________________________________________________________________ PARAGRAPH: _____________________________________________________________ Attached are the following circled items: 1. Product description including specifications, performance and test data, and

applicable reference standards. 2. Drawings. 3. Photographs. 4. Samples. 5. Tabulated comparison with specified product. 6. For items requiring color selections, full range of manufacturer's color samples. 7. Other: ______________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ The undersigned certifies that the following statements are correct. Explanations for all items which are not true are attached.

01 6301 - 2 PRIOR APPROVAL SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

1. Proposed substitution has been thoroughly investigated and function, appearance, and quality meet or exceed that of specified product. TRUE FALSE 2. Same warranty will be provided for substitution as for specified product. TRUE FALSE 3. No aspect of Project will require re-design. TRUE FALSE 4. Use of substitution will not adversely affect: a. Dimensions shown on Drawings. TRUE FALSE b. Construction schedule and date of completion. TRUE FALSE c. Work of other trades. TRUE FALSE 5. Maintenance service and replacement parts for proposed substitution will be readily available in [Las Cruces] [El Paso] [Roswell] [Albuquerque] [Southern New Mexico] [Northern New Mexico] [_____] area. TRUE FALSE 6. Proposed substitution does not contain asbestos in any form. TRUE FALSE Submitted By: COMPANY:_____________________________________________________________ ADDRESS: _____________________________________________________________ TELEPHONE NUMBER: _________________________________________________ NAME OF PERSON SUBMITTING REQUEST: ______________________________ TITLE: ________________________________________________________________ DATE: _________________________________________________________________

01 6302 - 1 CONTRACTOR SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

CONTRACTOR SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM The undersigned, as Contractor for the above Project, requests that the following product be accepted for use in the Project PRODUCT: ________________________________________________________________ MODEL NO.: ______________________________________________________________ MANUFACTURER: _________________________________________________________ ADDRESS: _________________________________________________________________ The above product would be used in lieu of PRODUCT: ________________________________________________________________ specified in SECTION: _________________________________________________________________ PARAGRAPH: _____________________________________________________________ Reason for substitution request: __________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ Attached are the following circled items: 1. Product description including specifications, performance and test data, and

applicable reference standards. 2. Drawings. 3. Photographs. 4. Samples. 5. Tabulated comparison with specified product. 6. For items requiring color selections, full range of manufacturer's color samples. 7. Documentation of reason for request. 8. Cost data for comparing proposed substitution with specified product.


9. Other: ______________________________________________________________ The undersigned certifies that the following statements are correct. Explanations for all items which are not true are attached. 1. Proposed substitution has been thoroughly investigated and function, appearance, and quality meet or exceed that of specified product. TRUE FALSE 2. Same warranty will be provided for substitution as for specified product. TRUE FALSE 3. No aspect of Project will require re-design. TRUE FALSE 4. Use of substitution will not adversely affect: a. Dimensions shown on Drawings. TRUE FALSE b. Construction schedule and date of completion. TRUE FALSE c. Work of other trades. TRUE FALSE 5. Maintenance service and replacement parts for proposed substitution will be readily available in [Las Cruces] [El Paso] [Roswell] [Albuquerque] [Southern New Mexico] [Northern New Mexico] [_____] area. TRUE FALSE 6. Proposed substitution does not contain asbestos in any form. TRUE FALSE 7. All changes to Contract Sum related to use of proposed substitution are included in price listed below. Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to acceptance of substitution which may subsequently become apparent. TRUE FALSE 8. Costs of modifying project design caused by use of proposed substitution which subsequently become apparent will be paid for by Contractor. TRUE FALSE If substitution request is accepted: Contract Sum will be [decreased] [increased] by $ _____________________________ Contract Time will be [decreased] [increased] by ______________________________ calendar days.


Submitted By: CONTRACTOR: ________________________________________________________ ADDRESS: _____________________________________________________________ TELEPHONE NUMBER: _________________________________________________ NAME OF PERSON SUBMITTING REQUEST: ______________________________ TITLE: ________________________________________________________________ DATE: _________________________________________________________________

FBT Architects – 01 7000 - Execution Requirements.doc

01 7000 - 1 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 7000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Basic requirements for examination, preparation and installation. 2. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching incidental to work,

including excavation and backfilling, and as required making several parts fit together.

3. Progress cleaning. B. Related documents and sections: 1. General Conditions of the Contract: a. Contractor's responsibilities regarding use of the site. b. Contractor's responsibilities regarding cutting and patching operations. c. Uncovering and correction of work. 2. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary barriers and

enclosures. 3. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Final cleaning. 1.2 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall arrange for all spotting of lines by utility companies in advance of any excavation work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

FBT Architects – 01 7000 - Execution Requirements.doc

01 7000 - 2 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Patching and replacement materials: Those used for original installation. B. Product substitutions: For any proposed change in patching materials, submit

request for substitution in accordance with Section 01 6300 - Product Substitution Procedures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. New roofing: 1. Coordinate, locate and schedule roof penetrations prior to installation of new

roof system. 2. Coordinate roof penetrations such that installation does not void roof warranty. END OF SECTION

FBT Architects – 01 7329-CUTTING AND PATCHING.doc

01 7329 - 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING

CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01 7329

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building.

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

3. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Fire Stop Systems" for patching fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be



relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect’s Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE



A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections

where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.



4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-tight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

END OF SECTION 01731

FBT Architects - 01 7500 - Starting & Adjusting.docx

01 7500 - 1 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

SECTION 01 7500 STARTING AND ADJUSTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: General procedures for starting, monitoring, and adjusting items of

equipment and complete systems. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals 2. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Balancing of HVAC

system. PART 2- PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A. Submit written Construction Checklists in accordance with Section 01 3300 -

Submittal Procedures that equipment and systems have been properly installed and are functioning correctly.

END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.doc

01 7700 - 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Closeout procedures. 2. Final cleaning. 3. Final inspection. 4. Inspection held immediately prior to end of one year correction period. B. Related documents and sections: 1. Conditions of the Contract, a. Substantial Completion. b. Partial occupancy. c. Closeout Requirements d. Final completion and final payment. e. One year correction period for Contractor to correct defective work. f. Use of site. 2. Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements: Progress cleaning. 3. Section 01 7500 – Starting and Adjusting: Starting and adjusting items of

equipment and complete systems. 4. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Submittal of project record documents,

operation and maintenance manuals, warranties, certificates of inspection, extra materials, and keys.

5. Section 01 7900 – Demonstration and Training: Demonstrations and training

for Owner's personnel.

FBT Architects - 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.doc

01 7700 - 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Prior to or in conjunction with submission of Contractor’s request for Substantial

Completion, submit the items specified in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Procedures: B. Comply with General Conditions of the Contract for issuance of Certificate of

Substantial Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Follow procedures as outlined in the General Conditions. 1.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection by methods and with materials and

equipment suitable for commercial/institutional building maintenance. See General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.doc

01 7800 - 1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes procedures for preparing and submitting closeout submittals: 1. Project Record Documents. 2. Operation and maintenance manuals and data. 3. Warranties. 4. Insurance information. 5. Certificates of inspection and compliance. 6. Maintenance tools. 7. Extra materials. 8. Keys. B. Related documents and sections: 1. General Conditions of the Contract: a. Contractor's warranty that Work is of good quality and free from defects

and conforms to Contract Documents. b. Commencement of warranties and correction period.

c. Closeout requirements

d. Affidavits and Certificates required before Final Payment

d. One year correction period for Contractor to correct defective work. 2. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal of shop drawings, product

data, samples, installation instruction, reports and other submittals during construction prior to closeout.



3 Section 01 7500 – Starting and Adjusting: Starting and adjusting items of equipment and complete systems.

4 Section 01 7500 – Starting and Adjusting: Starting and adjusting items of equipment and complete systems.

5 Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures: Requirements for achieving Substantial Completion and Final Completion.

1.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Provide operation and maintenance data for: a. Landscaping & Irrigation Systems b. Planting. c. Automatic gate operators d. Chain Link Fences and Gates e. Motorized Doors f. Coiling Doors and Grilles g. Coiling Counter Doors h. Overhead Sectional Doors i. Automatic door Operator j. Operable partitions k. Food service equipment l. Folding basketball backstops and gymnasium dividers m. Motorized bleachers n. Elevator o. Mechanical equipment, systems, and controls p. Integrated automatic controls q. Electrical equipment, systems, and controls. r. Other equipment and systems for which operation and maintenance data is

requested in individual specification sections.

B. Provide written sequence of operations for each automated building system, including those related to the following:

a. Life safety system(s). b. Electrical system(s). c. Mechanical system(s). d. Other automated building systems and components.



C. Submission: 1. Submit data to Design Professional in Digital PDF format.

a. Document shall be a single PDF file b. Document shall be contain a linked index to each section

2. Submit for review one draft copy 30 days prior to need date or as otherwise

specified. This copy will be returned after review with Design Professional's comments. Revise content as required.

3. Once approved, submit copies of final operation and maintenance manuals as

follows:

a. 1 hard copy and one 2 electronic disk(s) of entire manual to the owner. b. 1 electronic copy to the construction manager

4. All manuals shall be submitted prior to or in conjunction with Contractor’s

request for Substantial Completion and prior to demonstration and training session.

D. Contents: 1. Appropriate design criteria. 2. Equipment parts list. 3. Equipment inventory data (on Owner-provided electronic forms) and parts lists.

4. Roofing data. 5. Operating instructions. 6. Maintenance instruction for equipment and finishes. 7. Shop drawings and product data.

8. Written sequence of operations for each automated building system including those related to the following:

a. Life safety system(s).

b. Electrical system(s).

c. Mechanical system(s). 9. Testing, balancing, and other field quality reports.



10. Copies of warranties. 11. Directory listings 12. Training Videos 13. Other material and information as indicated in individual specification sections

and as necessary for operation and maintenance by Owner's personnel. E. Form: 1. Hard copies of manuals shall be 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages bound in three ring

expansion binders with a hard durable plastic cover. All documents to be originals unless otherwise noted.

2. Prepare binder covers with printed subject title of manual, title of project, date,

and volume number when multiple binders are required. Printing shall be on face and spine.

3. Internally subdivide the binder contents with divider sheets with typed tab titles

under reinforced plastic tabs. Place dividers at beginning of each chapter, part, section, and appendix.

4. Provide a table of contents for each volume. 5. Provide directory listing as appropriate with names addresses, and telephone

numbers of Design Professional, Contractor, subcontractors, equipment suppliers, and nearest service representatives. Provide emergency 24-hour service contact information for all subcontractors, service contractors and principal vendors.

6. Provide electronic data disk(s) with each manual including all data required to

be submitted electronically. Include hard copy with each manual. 1.3 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies of special and extended warranties as required by

individual specifications sections. B. Submit warranties to Design Professional prior to or in conjunction with submission

of Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Execute and assemble warranties from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. D. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three ring binder with a hard durable



plastic cover. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, with tab titling clearly typed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

E. For items of work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated

warranty submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

1.4 CERTIFICATES OF INSPECTION AND COMPLIANCE A. For inspections throughout the construction period required by regulatory agencies,

obtain and maintain certificates issued to show compliance. B. Assemble certificates and any formal written evidence of regulatory compliance in

three ring binder with table of contents and submit to Design Professional prior to or in conjunction with submission of Notice of Substantial Completion.

C. Certificate of Occupancy: Prior to Substantial Completion, obtain from authorities

having jurisdiction Certificate of Occupancy. Submit with Notice for Substantial Completion.

1.5 INSURANCE INFORMATION A. Submit prior to or in conjunction with submission of Contractor’s request for

Substantial Completion information regarding insurance including change over requirements and insurance extensions.

1.6 MAINTENANCE TOOLS A. Provide any hardware and software tools (including software keys) that are

proprietary to the mechanical systems and that may be necessary for service during their lifecycle.

B. Tools shall be as provided or recommended by manufacturers of installed equipment

and systems. Types and sizes shall be as specifically required for installed products. C. Tools shall be available and their use demonstrated during training sessions specified

in Section 01 75 00 - Starting, Adjusting, and Demonstrating. D. Prior to, or concurrent with Contractor’s request for Substantial Completion, deliver

maintenance tools to Owner's representative. Prepare inventory of tools provided and obtain receipt from Owner's representative.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide spare parts and maintenance materials in quantities specified in individual

sections.



B. Extra materials shall be produced by the same manufacturer of and compatible with

the installed products. C. Prior to or concurrent with submission of Notice of Substantial Completion deliver

extra materials in unopened containers to Owner's representative at designated storage area at project site and place in location as directed. Obtain receipt from Owner's representative.

D. During one year correction period: 1. Extra materials may be used by Contractor to replace expendable and normally

worn parts. 2. Extra materials used by Contractor for replacement of defective products shall

be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. 1.8 KEYS A. Prior to or in conjunction with submission of Contractor’s request for Substantial

Completion, provide Owner with all keys for: 1. Door hardware locks after re-keying in accordance with Section 08 71 00 - Door

Hardware. 2. Access doors and panels. 3. Electrical panel boards and other equipment. B. Provide a minimum of two keys for each lock. C. Clearly label each key as to function and location of lock. D. Obtain receipt from Owner's representative.

E. Prior to, or in conjunction with Final Completion, return all keys lent out by Owner to Contractor for access to existing spaces, gates, etc. for the Work. Obtain receipt from Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used.



PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 01 7823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.doc

01 7823 - 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of [products, materials, and finishes]

[systems and equipment].


1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts.

2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Tenant. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.



b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.



2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.



2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Tenant's operating personnel.

C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

E. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


FBT Architects - 01 7839-PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.doc

01 7839 - 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications.


1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents

of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit 2 set(s) of marked-up Record Prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit 2 copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.



a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. d. Revisions to electrical circuitry. e. Actual equipment locations. f. Duct size and routing. g. Locations of concealed internal utilities. h. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. i. Changes made following Architect's written orders.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Transparencies: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected transparencies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

2. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 3. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Transparencies.

Architect will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.



1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place transparencies in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings included.

3. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and



in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.


FBT Architects – 01 7900 - Demonstration & Training.doc

01 7900 - 1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

SECTION 01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Training of Owner's designated personnel in operation and maintenance of

equipment and systems. B. Related sections: 1. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide in accordance with Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: 1. List of names, resumes, and qualifications of personnel conducting training sessions. 2. Preliminary schedule listing times, dates, and outline showing organization and proposed

contents of training sessions for approval by Design Professional and Owner. 3. Copies of training manuals and other materials to be used in training sessions for approval by

Design Professional and Owner. 4. Provide Owner additional copy of audio visual material on the same media used in training

sessions. 5. 2 copies of training manuals for future use in training by Owner. 6. Submit report within 1 week after completion of training that sessions have been satisfactorily

completed. Give times, dates, list of persons trained, and summary of instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Personnel conducting demonstration and training sessions shall be knowledgeable of installation,

operation, sequence of operations, and maintenance of specific project equipment and systems. Where appropriate manufacturer's representatives shall conduct training.

PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TRAINING MATERIALS A. Training manuals: Loose leaf notebook format with agenda and objectives of each lesson.



1. Manuals shall describe function, operation, sequence of operations, and maintenance of various items of equipment and be suitable for personnel with high school education.

2. Manuals shall be suitable for future training of Owner personnel by Owner staff. 3. Manuals shall useful reference for staff maintaining facility. B. Visual aids: Provide charts, handouts, overhead projector slides, electronic presentations, and

other visual aids required to make effective presentation and facilitate training. 1. Equipment needed for showing visual training aids shall be provided by Contractor. 2. Visual aids shall be suitable for use by Owner's staff to train additional personnel in the future. PART 3 - EXECUTION 2.1 SCHEDULING A. Schedule demonstration and training sessions after equipment and systems have been completely

installed, startup completed, and adjustments made. Single demonstration and training session shall be conducted of all items prior to substantial completion. Schedule with Owner's representatives.

2.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Provide demonstration and training session to emphasize operation, sequence of operations, use,

and maintenance of installed items and systems:

a. Landscaping & Irrigation Systems c. Automatic gate operators e. Motorized Doors f. Coiling Doors and Grilles g. Coiling Counter Doors h. Overhead Sectional Doors i. Automatic door Operator j. Operable partitions k. Food service equipment l. Folding basketball backstops and gymnasium dividers m. Motorized bleachers n. Elevator o. Mechanical equipment, systems, and controls p. Integrated automatic controls q. Electrical equipment, systems, and controls. r. Other equipment and systems for which operation and maintenance data is requested in

individual specification sections.

B. Conduct at project site using actual installed equipment and systems.



C. Owner shall be responsible for designating and notifying personnel to attend and ensuring

attendance at scheduled sessions. D. Have copies of operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 01 7800 - Closeout

Submittals available. Use as training aids. Include training on each of written sequence of operations contained in the Operations & Maintenance Manual.

E. Contractor shall record or video tape demonstration and training sessions. Videos should be

included in Operations & Maintenance Manual (Digital version). END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 02 4116 - Building & Site Demolition [v4.0].docx

02 4116 - 1 BUILDING & SITE DEMOLITION

SECTION 02 4116 – BUILDING & SITE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of buildings or structures in their entirety.

2. Demolition and removal of concrete flatwork and swimming pool in its entirety.

3. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.

4. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

5. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition waste.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 1000 – Summary

2. Section 01 7000 – Execution Requirements

3. Section 02 5639 – Temporary Tree Protection

4. Section 31 0000 – Earthwork

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated

to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage,

and deliver to Owner or store ready for reuse as noted on drawings.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage,

prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise

indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle

methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless

indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

F. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or

selective demolition operations.



G. Disposal: removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling

reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and

their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner

that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREDEMOLITION MEETINGS

A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.

3. Review and finalize demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by

demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures

proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and noise control. Indicate

proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each

activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Use of elevator and stairs and other egress components (if applicable).

5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction,

including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations.

Submit before Work begins.

D. Warranties: Coordinate with Owner for documentation indicating that existing warranties are still

in effect after completion of selective demolition.



1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification

program.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. If Owner occupies portions of building immediately adjacent to demolition area. Conduct

demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far

as practical.

1. Before demolition, Owner will remove the items noted on the drawings.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding

with demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate

contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against

damage during demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during demolition operations.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to

void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding.

B. Notify warrantor on completion of demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing

system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project

closeout.



1.11 COORDINATION

A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning

demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and

hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing

conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition

operations.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings,

preconstruction photographs or video.

1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide

photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

salvage operations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect

them against damage.



B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to

be selectively demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary

services/systems that bypass area of demolition and that maintain continuity of

services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC

systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or

compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and

make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible

ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around demolition area and to and from

occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition of existing

construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and

damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are

exposed during demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as

required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and

finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of

construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.



3.5 DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of

governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete

selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting

members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting

methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand

tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping.

Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed

spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before

starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-

cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during and after flame-cutting operations as required.

6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.

8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free

fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose

excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

10. Legally dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials

necessary to make item functional for use indicated.



E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by Owner, items may be removed to a suitable,

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original

locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

F. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.

G. Drawings indicate extent of demolition but do not show every element that will need to be

removed. The contractor is responsible for demolition of all elements required to accomplish

new work.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved

construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition

operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before demolition operations began.


TEMPORARY 025639 - 1 TREE PROTECTION

SECTION 025639 - TEMPORARY TREE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.

1. Protect existing trees indicated to remain.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius equal to the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees indicated to remain, which

establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other non-soil materials.

B. Organic Mulch: Shredded bark and bark chips free from deleterious materials. C. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting one of the

following requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Owner’s Representative.

1. Temporary chain link construction fence, 4’ ht. to 8’ ht. 2. Wood fencing, 4’ ht. to 8’ ht.


D. Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes pre-punched and reinforced; “Keep Out. Tree Protection Zone.” legibly printed with non-fading lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. General: Contractor shall be responsible for care and preservation of existing trees indicated to remain.

B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary

erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious

materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.

D. Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside protection zones with 8 to 12-inch average

thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks. E. Trees to Remain: As indicated in the Contract Documents.

3.2 PROTECTION ZONES

A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates. Provide temporary barriers around each tree, or around each group of trees at drip line. 1. Access Gates: Install where needed for access.

B. Protection-Zone Signage: Install protection-zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a manner approved by Owner’s Representative.

C. Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to

Owner’s Representative and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site.

D. Carefully supervise excavating, grading, filling, and subsequent construction

operations to ensure that tree protection zone is not impacted and to ensure there is no damage to plan roots, bark, or other features.

F. The following actions are prohibited within protection zone:

1. Vehicular traffic or parking. 2. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 3. Dumping of refuse or chemicals, or liquids.


4. Puddling or continuous running water. 5. Diesel or gasoline equipment running adjacent to protection zone. 6. Foot traffic. 7. Erection of sheds or structures.

3.3 TRENCHING

A. Trenching near Trees: Trenching or excavation should occur outside the Tree

Protection Zone. Where trenches are required within protection zones, hand excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut tree roots over 1” diameter.

3.4 PRUNING A. No pruning shall be performed except by an approved certified arborist. 3.5 REGRADING

A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.

B. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around

trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.

C. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches (50 mm) or

less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations.

3.6 WATERING

A. Trees: Water at least every fourteen (14) days during construction period by forming suitable dikes and soaking devices at drip line and applying approximately six (6) inches of water each time. Water frequency during winter rain season may be reduced upon approval by Owner’s Representative, which approval may be granted or withheld in Owner’s Representative’s sole discretion.

3.7 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. General: Repair or replace trees indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Owner’s Representative.

1. Owner’s Representative will determine repair and replacement

requirements.

2. Have approved certified arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and all other repairs required due to damage of trees.


3. Treatment of damaged trunks, limbs, and roots shall be in accordance with certified arborist's written instructions.

4. Perform repairs within 24 hours of damage.

5. Any tree damaged by construction operations shall be replaced with a tree of the same species and size. If size of existing tree is not available Contractor shall replace with a 2” cal. tree (deciduous) or 6’ ht. (evergreen) and shall provide a credit to the Owner for the monetary difference in value.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off property.


FBT Architects 03 05 00 Pool Deck Concrete Materials and Methods.docx

03 05 00-1 Basic Concrete Materials and Methods

SECTION 03 05 00 - POOL DECK CONCRETE MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes formwork, reinforcement, accessories, cast-in-place concrete, transporting, placing, finishing, curing, and other pertinent items of construction for the Pool Deck Slab.

B. Concrete and Standards - Except as noted or modified in this section, all concrete materials, transporting, placing, finishing, curing, and sealing shall conform to requirements as follows: 1. American Institute of Concrete (ACI)

a. 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. b. 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. c. 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. d. 305.1 - Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. e. 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. f. 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. g. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. h. 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. i. SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual.

2. ASTM International (ASTM) a. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-

Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. b. ASTM A1064 - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded

Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. c. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Field. d. ASTM C33 - Specifications for Concrete Aggregates. e. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. f. ASTM C40 - Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine

Aggregates for Concrete. g. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled

Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. h. ASTM C94 - Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. i. ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield,

and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. j. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement

Concrete. k. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. l. ASTM C156 - Standard Test Method for Water Loss [from a Mortar

Specimen] Through Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete.

m. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.



n. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.

o. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.

p. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

q. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

r. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.

s. ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars.

t. ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.

u. ASTM C1116 - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete. v. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in

Cementitious Mixtures. w. ASTM C1260 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of

Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method). x. ASTM C1550 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Toughness of Fiber

Reinforced Concrete (Using Centrally Loaded Round Panel). y. ASTM C1567 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential

Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method).

z. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

aa. ASTM C1609 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Performance of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete (Using Beam with Third-Point Loading).

bb. ASTM C1778 - Standard Guide for Reducing the Risk of Deleterious Alkali-Aggregate Reaction in Concrete.

3. American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. PP 65 - Standard Practice for Determining the Reactivity of Concrete

Aggregates and Selecting Appropriate Measures for Preventing Deleterious Expansion in New Concrete Construction.


A. Inform Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of time at which Contractor intends to place concrete.

B. When required by any applicable permits, such as CID permits, Contractor shall have reinforcement inspected by the agency with jurisdiction prior to placement of concrete.

C. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347R.

D. Concrete tests shall be in accordance with requirements of ACI 301, except as noted or modified in this Section. 1. Strength test:

a. Mold and cure 5 cylinders (6”x12”) from each sample.



b. Test one at 7 days and one at 14 days for information and two at 28 days for acceptance.

E. Samples: 1. Collect the following minimum samples for each 28-day strength concrete used in

the work for each days placing:

Quantity Number of Samples 50 cubic yards or less 2 50 to 100 cubic yards 4 100 cubic yards or more 4 plus 1 sample for each additional 30 cubic yards

2. Sampling should be in accordance with ASTM C172. 3. Forming cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31. 4. Hold fifth cylinder for future considerations. Deliver to Owner upon determination

of substantial completion and prior to final payment. 5. Sample marking.

a. Mark or tag each sample of compression test cylinders with date and time of day cylinders were made.

b. Identify location in work where concrete represented by cylinders was placed.

c. Identify delivery truck or batch number, air content and slump. 6. Slump test:

a. Conduct test for each strength test sample and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, in accordance with ASTM C143.

7. Air content: a. Conduct test from 1 of first 3 batches mixed each day and for each strength

test sample, in accordance with ASTM C231, 138 or 173. 8. Temperature:

a. Conduct test in accordance with ASTM C1064.

F. SUBMIT A PLACEMENT SCHEDULE, SEQUENCE, AND PLAN TO THE ENGINEER WITH THE PROPOSED MIX DESIGN. Coordinate concrete placement with the Engineer to ensure proper testing in compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. The cost of all tests shall be covered by the Testing Allowance provided for in the bid schedule, except for failed tests, or new analyses required due to failed tests.

G. The Contractor is free to take additional specimens for his own information, at his own expense, not reimbursable from the Testing Allowance.

H. Acceptance of Concrete: Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory so long as average of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results equal or exceeds specified 28-day strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified strength (fc′) by more than 500 psi when specified compressive strength is 5000 psi or less; or by more than 0.10fc′ when specified compressive strength is more than 5000 psi.

I. Failure of Test Cylinder Results: Upon failure of test cylinder results, Engineer may require Contractor, at his expense, to test remaining cylinder after curing for a period of time specified by Engineer. If strength level of this cylinder is not greater than specified



28-day strength, Engineer may require Contractor to obtain and test at least three 2-inch diameter cored samples from an area in question. 1. Conform to ASTM C42. 2. Concrete will be considered adequate if average of 3 cores is at least 85 percent of,

and if no single core is less than 75 percent of, specified 28-day strength. 3. Upon failure of core test results, Engineer may require Contractor, at his expense,

to perform load tests as specified in ACI 318. 4. Fill all core holes as specified for repairing defective concrete.

J. Completed Work 1. Completed concrete work which fails to meet 1 or more requirements, but which

has been repaired to bring it into compliance, will be accepted without qualification.

2. Completed concrete work which fails to meet 1 or more requirements and which cannot be brought into compliance shall be rejected as provided in these Contract Documents. In this event, modifications shall be required to assure that concrete work complies with requirements. Modifications, as directed by Engineer, to be made at no additional cost to Owner.

K. Perform concrete reinforcing and cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with ACI 301.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Steel Forms: Symons “Steel-Ply”, Simplex “Industrial Steel Frame Forms”, Universal “Uniform”. Forms shall be clean, straight and true, without surface defects.

B. Plywood Forms: Product standard PS-1, waterproof, resin-bonded exterior type Douglas Fir or Larch. Forms shall be clean, straight and true, without surface defects.

C. Lumber: Douglas Fir or Larch, straight, uniform width and thickness, clean and free from offsets, holes, dents and other surface defects.

D. Chamfer Strips: Clean white pine, surface against concrete planed.

E. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil not capable of staining concrete or impairing natural bonding characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Microsynthetic Fibers: 100 percent virgin homopolymer polypropylene multifilament (monofiliament) fibers. Installation per manufacturer’s specifications as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, deformed. Reinforcement bar, size and spacing as indicated on the Drawings.



C. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for support of reinforcing; plastic tipped or non-corroding for supports in slabs where supports are exposed to weather.

D. Concrete blocks used to support and position reinforcement steel, shall have the same or higher compressive strength as specified for the concrete in which it is located. Wire ties shall be embedded in concrete block bar supports.

E. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI SP-66.

2.3 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Site Curb and Gutter: Per City of Farmington Technical Specifications and Construction Standards.

B. Site Sidewalks: Per City of Farmington Technical Specifications and Construction Standards.

C. Structural Concrete: Per Structural Concrete Specification not contained herein this specification.

D. Pool Deck Slab: 1. Contractor shall submit a mix design from a local supplier for the Engineer’s

review prior to pouring, 2. Portland Concrete Cement shall be “TYPE II” and have 20% substitution (by

weight) of “TYPE F” fly ash, 3. Water/Cement Ration shall not exceed 0.40, 4. Nominal maximum aggregate size is ¾”, 5. No chloride or latex admixtures are allowed, 6. Maximum chloride ion content (by weight) in the cement shall not exceed 0.15%, 7. Compressive strength (f’c) shall be 5,000 PSI at 28 days, 8. Air entrainment shall be 6% +/- 1.5% by volume, 9. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. 10. Polypropylene reinforcing fibers per manufacturer’s specifications.

E. Re-tempering of prepared concrete will not be permitted.

F. Proportioning: 1. Proportion ingredients to produce a well-graded mix of high-density maximum

workability consistent with approved mix design.

G. Batching and Mixing Equipment: Conform to ACI 304R.

H. Slump: 1. Keep as low as possible consistent with proper handling and thorough compaction. 2. Shall not exceed 4 inches unless otherwise authorized by Engineer.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK ERECTION

A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements.

B. Erect forms substantially and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and braced or tied to maintain desired position, shape and alignment before, during, and after concrete placement.

C. Carefully remove forms only after concrete is able to support all dead and live loads and curing requirements are met. Apply curing compound to all formed surfaces immediately after form removal.

D. Camber slabs and framing to achieve ACI 301 tolerances.

E. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork.

F. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter.

3.2 INSERTS, EMBEDDED COMPONENTS, AND OPENINGS

A. Provide formed openings where required for work to be embedded in and passing through concrete members.

B. Coordinate work of other sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.

C. Install concrete accessories straight, level, and plumb.

D. Install water stops continuous without displacing reinforcement.

3.3 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT

A. Place reinforcement, supported and secured against displacement in accordance with Drawings.

B. Ensure reinforcing is clean, free of loose scale, dirt, or other foreign coatings.

3.4 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow unless adequate protection is provided and Construction Observer approval is obtained. Do not allow rainwater to increase mixing water or damage surface finish.

B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent.



C. Convey concrete from mixer to final position as rapidly as practicable without segregation or loss of material. Limit chute length to less than 20 feet with maximum slope of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal.

D. Maximum height of concrete free fall is 4 feet.

E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control and construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours creating cold joints.

F. On large volume pours, concrete shall be placed with the aid of approved mechanical vibrators. Vibration shall be supplemented by manual forking or spading adjacent to the forms on exposed faced in order to secure smooth dense surfaces. The concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated around reinforcement, pipes or other shapes built into the work.

G. Where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack with non-shrink grout.

H. Screed slabs-on-grade and concrete base for toppings level.

3.5 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads.

B. Remove formwork progressively and in accordance with code requirements.

3.6 FLOOR FINISHING

A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R.

B. Uniformly spread, screed, and float concrete.

C. Just prior to finishing, concrete shall be dosed with: 1. A superplasticizer to improve workability of low slump concrete. 2. An evaporation retarder to reduce the potential for plastic shrinkage cracking.

D. Commence concrete finishing immediately upon disappearance of bleed water.

E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor level at walls and slope surfaces uniformly to drains in accordance with the drainage plan.

F. Provide surface conforming to proper elevation and contour with all aggregates completely embedded in mortar by screening.

G. Control joints shall be 12’ o.c. each way, 1. Control joints shall be tooled into plastic concrete and not sawcut. 2. The control joint shall receive a backer rod and sealer at the joints

H. Provide an initial float as soon as concrete has stiffened sufficiently for proper working.



I. Provide a second floating at time of initial set.

J. Finish shall be as noted on the Drawings.

3.7 CURING

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying with an evaporation retarder to reduce the potential for plastic shrinkage cracking.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete, for not less than ten (10) days in warm to hot weather (per ACI 305.1), and fourteen (14) days in cold weather (per ACI 306.1) after placing, unless otherwise indicated by the Engineer, in accordance with the methods specified herein for the different parts of the Work.

1. Cold weather is defined as when the temperature reaches or goes below 35 degrees

F for one (1) hour during any 24-hour period during the curing period.

C. Use a pre-approved concrete curing method. Acceptable curing methods, as detailed in ACI 308.1, are as follows: 1. Water Curing Methods:

a. Ponding/Immersion. b. Fogging/Sprinkler. c. Burlap/Cotton Mats/Absorbent Material. d. Wet Sand Curing. e. Straw/Hay. f. Plastic Film. g. Reinforced Paper.

2. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds.

D. The covering used, if applicable, must be overlapped adequately to ensure 100% coverage, and must not be allowed to become dry at any point during the curing period. Place and anchor covers, mats, and/or sheeting to ensure continuous contact with the concrete surfaces.

E. When using one of the water curing methods, keep the concrete structures thoroughly and continuously moist and covered during the entire curing period.

3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details and elevations, as directed by Engineer.

END OF SECTION

031100 - 1 CONCRETE FORMWORK

SECTION 031100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section includes formwork for cast-in-place concrete, including waterstops, and

installation of embedded items.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Concrete Reinforcement - Section 03 20 00

B. Cast-In-Place Concrete - Section 03 30 00


A. Comply with the American Concrete Institute Standard, ACI 347R-94, Recommended

Practice for Concrete Formwork.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM D 226-97a Standard Specification for Asphalt - Saturated Organic

Felt used in Roofing and Waterproofing".

2. ASTM D 1751-83 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint

Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

(Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard

PS-1-83 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood", Class I, Exterior Grade or better or metal,

metal-framed plywood or other acceptable panel-type materials. Plywood shall be

mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark.

Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. Provide form material

with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete without bow or

deflection.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Use plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable

material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Round Piers or Columns: One-piece, disposable fiber forms or approved

equal.


D. Void Forms: Wax treated fiber board, 4" height, designed to resist 1000 psf pressure.

E. Form Coatings: Commercial formulation that will not bond with, stain, or adversely

affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

F. Chamfer Strips: 3/4" by 3/4" wood, PVC, or rubber.

G. Preformed Construction Joint: 24 gage steel, galvanized, shaped to form a continuous

tongue and groove key.

H. Preformed Control Joint: Rigid plastic or metal strip with removable top section.

I. Expansion Joint Material: Asphalt saturated fiberboard, 1/2" thick, meeting the

requirements of ASTM D 1751.

J. Felt: Asphalt-saturated organic felt, weighing 30 pounds per 100 square feet, meeting

the requirements of ASTM D 226.

K. Waterstops: PVC, meeting the requirements of CRD-C572. Provide 6" wide dumbbell

shape waterstop with 3/16 inch minimum web thickness and 3/8 inch minimum end bulb

diameter.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of

forms and reinforcing steel. Set screeds accurately. Embedded items shall be accurately

aligned and adequately supported. Verify installation of mechanical, plumbing, and

electrical items to be embedded in concrete. Correct any unsatisfactory condition before

proceeding further.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Form Coating: Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before

reinforcement is placed. Thin form-coating compounds with thinning agent and apply as

specified in manufacturer's instructions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to

accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh

concrete will be placed.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Formwork: Formwork shall support vertical and lateral loads that are applied until such

loads can be supported by concrete structure. Formwork shall be readily removable

without impact, shock or damage to cast-in- place concrete surfaces and adjacent

materials. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown. Perform

surveys to obtain accurate alignment. Provide for recesses, chamfers, blocking,

anchorages, inserts, and other features required in work. Select materials to obtain


required finishes. Butt joints solidly and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of

cement paste.

B. Chamfer Strips: Provide at exposed corners and edges.

C. Form Ties: Use factory fabricated, adjustable- length, removable or snap-off metal form

ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon

removal.

D. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive

concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris before concrete is placed.

Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar

leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set anchorage devices and other embedded items accurately. Use setting

drawings, diagrams, templates and printed instructions provided by supplier. Secure

embedded items such that they are not displaced during placement of concrete.

B. Waterstops: Install according to manufacturers printed instructions. Splice waterstop

sections using square cut butt joints and fuse sections together with indirect heat from

preheated splicing iron. Use of direct flame is prohibited.

3.05 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on

drawings, so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure. Place

construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement

across construction joints unless noted otherwise.

B. Keyways: Provide keyways at least 1-1/2" deep in construction joints in walls and slabs.

C. Preformed Construction Joint For Slabs on Grade: Secure with galvanized steel stakes,

1/8" thick by 1-1/8 inches wide with 1/2" deep rib and tapered point. Splice adjoining

joints with 24 gage steel, galvanized splice plates.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs on Grade: Construct isolation joints in interior slabs using 30 lb.

felt. Provide isolation joints at points of contact between slabs on grade and vertical

surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as

indicated. Construct isolation joints on exterior slabs abutting vertical surfaces with 1/2"

thick expansion joint material.

E. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Grade:

1. Preformed Strip: Insert premolded rigid plastic, or metal strip into fresh

concrete. Cut groove for strip using 10 foot long straight edge cutting tool.

Depths of strip shall be one fourth of slab thickness. Press strip into groove such

that top of strip is level with the concrete surface. Pull off removable top

section, if any, prior to troweling.


2. Saw Cut: Contractor may saw cut control joints instead of using preformed

strips. Saw cut joints shall be 1/8 inch wide. Saw cut depth should equal 1/3 of

slab depth. Cut joints after concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent

raveling; usually 4 to 12 hours after slab has been cast and finished. Use

diamond or silicone-carbide blades.

F. Control Joints in Walls: Create weakened planes in cantilevered retaining walls at 25

feet on center. Use preformed strips, placed vertically, full height in each face of wall.

Depth of strips shall be one inch.

3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK

A. General: Prevent excessive deflection, distortion, and damage to concrete when forms

are stripped. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast

concrete surfaces.

B. Formwork and supports at sides of concrete shall remain in place for 24 hours after

concrete placement. This period represents cumulative number of hours, not necessarily

consecutive, during which the temperature of the air surrounding the concrete is above

50 degrees F. Formwork and shoring which support the weight of concrete shall not be

removed until concrete has attained its specified compressive strength.

C. Ensure safety of the structure. Do not superimpose any load on concrete until forms are

removed and concrete is cured.

3.07 RE-USE OF FORMS

A. General: Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in work. Split, frayed,

delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for

exposed surfaces. Apply new form coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces

and remove fins and laitance. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use

"patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces.


032000 - 1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

SECTION 032100 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section includes fabrication and installation of deformed bar and welded wire fabric

reinforcing steel.


A. Concrete Formwork - Section 03 11 00.

B. Cast In Place Concrete - Section 03 30 00.


A. Reference Standards:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

a. ACI 301-96 Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings.

b. ACI 315-92 Details and Detailing of Concrete

Reinforcement.

c. ACI 318-85 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced

Concrete.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

a. ASTM A 82-95 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, For

Concrete Reinforcement

b. ASTM A 185-94 Standard Specification for Steel Welded

Steel Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement

c. ASTM A 615/ Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain

A 615M-95b Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI).

a. Manual of Standard Practice - 1992 Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for reinforcing steel. Comply with ACI 315

requirements showing layout, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and

arrangement of reinforcing steel. Shop Drawings shall not be made by reproduction of

the Contract Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Stirrups and ties may be Grade 40.

B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, flat sheets.

C. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, 16 gage.

D. Supports for Reinforcing Steel: Wire bar type and precast concrete block type meeting

the requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

E. Fibrous Reinforcing: 100 percent virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers containing no

reprocessed olefin materials and specifically manufactured for use as concrete

reinforcement at a minimum of 0.1% by volume for the control of cracking due to drying

shrinkage and thermal expansion/contraction.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with fabricating tolerances in ACI 315.

B. Do not fabricate reinforcing steel until shop drawings are approved.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PLACING BAR SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide bar supports meeting the requirements of CRSI Specification for

Placing Bar Supports.

B. Slabs-on-grade: Use supports with sand plates or precast concrete blocks or horizontal

runners where base material will not support chair legs.

3.02 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL

A. General: Comply with CRSI Code of Standard Practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars".

B. Clean reinforcing steel of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which

reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcing steel against displacement by

formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Place reinforcing steel to

obtain minimum coverages. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold


reinforcing steel in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends

are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

D. Concrete Cover:

1. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth .........3"

2. Concrete exposed to earth or weather:

Bars larger than No. 5 .................................................... .........2"

Bars No. 5 or smaller ............................................................1 1/2"

3. Columns or piers ................................................................. ...1 1/2"

E. Rebar Splices: Locate at points of minimum stress or as shown on contract drawings.

Unless noted otherwise, provide lap splices 30 bar diameters or 18" minimum length.

F. Welded Wire Fabric Splices: Lap one complete wire spacing.

G. Corner Reinforcing: Provide corner bars of same size and spacing as horizontal

reinforcing steel. Lap with horizontal reinforcing 30 bar diameters or 18" minimum

length.

H. Reinforcing at Construction/Control Joints: Continue reinforcing steel through

construction joints unless noted otherwise. Discontinue reinforcing steel 2 inches from

preformed construction joints in slabs-on-grade. Cut alternate longitudinal bars at

weakened plane control joints in walls.

I. Fibrous Reinforcing:

1. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is

batched in amounts in accord with approved submittals for each type of concrete

required.

2. Mix concrete in strict accord with fiber reinforcement manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations for uniform and complete distribution.


033000 - 1 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 033000 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section covers cast-in-place concrete including finishing, surface repair and curing.


A. Concrete Formwork - Section 03 11 00

B. Concrete Reinforcement - Section 03 21 00


A. Reference Standards: Meet the requirements of the following codes, specifications and

standards.

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publications;

a. ACI 301-96 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.

b. ACI 306.1-90 Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting

c. ACI 318-95 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM);

a. ASTM C 31-91 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

C 31M-96 Specimens in the Field.

b. ASTM C 33-97 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

c. ASTM C 39-96 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

d. ASTM C 94-97 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

e. ASTM C 131-96 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of

Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact

in

the Los Angeles Machine.

f. ASTM C 136-96a Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and

Coarse Aggregates.

g. ASTM C 143-90a Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic

Cement


Concrete.

h. ASTM C 150-97 Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

i. ASTM C 171-97 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing

Concrete.

j. ASTM C 172-97 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed

Concrete.

k. ASTM C 173-94a Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly

Mixed

Concrete by the Volumetric Method.

l. ASTM C 231-97 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly

Mixed

Concrete by the Pressure Method

m. ASTM C 260-95 Standard Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures

for

Concrete

n. ASTM C 309-97 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming

Compounds for Curing Concrete

o. ASTM C 330-92 Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for

Structural Concrete

p. ASTM C 494-92 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for

Concrete

q. ASTM C 618-97 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or

Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral

Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete

r. ASTM D 2103-92 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and

Sheeting

s. ASTM D 4318-95a Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic

Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation

instructions for proprietary materials and admixtures.

B. Concrete Mix Design:

1. Submit mix design in accordance with ACI-301, Section 4.


2. Submit with mix design results of laboratory tests performed within previous 6

months indicating aggregates from the proposed source comply with the

requirements of ASTM C 33 or C 330 as applicable.

C. Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports for concrete compressive strength,

air content, temperature and slump.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, low alkali. Use one brand of cement

throughout project.

B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33. Provide aggregates from a single source for

exposed concrete.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494.

F. Fly-Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

G. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Provide waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or

polyethylene-coated burlap meeting the requirements of ASTM C 171.

H. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane-forming curing

compound meeting the requirements of ASTM C 309; Type 1-D with fugitive dye for

interior concrete and foundations; Type 2, white pigmented, for exposed exterior

concrete except exposed exterior Architectural concrete, use Type 1-D.

I. Granular base shall meet the following grading requirements when tested in accordance

with ASTM C 136.

Sieve Size Percent Passing

(Square Openings) by Weight

1 inch 100

3/4 inch 70-100

No. 4 35-85

No. 200 0-10

The plasticity Index shall be no greater than 3 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.

The coarse aggregate shall have a percent wear of 50 or less when tested in accordance with

ASTM C.

2.02 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES


A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial

mixture or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301, Section 4. If trial mixture

method is used, employ an independent testing facility, acceptable to Architect, for

preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

B. Submit written reports to Architect, or Engineer, of each proposed mix for each class of

concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until

mixes have been approved.

C. Refer to the General Structural Notes for concrete strengths.

D. Admixtures

1. Use air-entraining admixture in all concrete, except air entrainment may, be

omitted from concrete to receive a steel trowel finish. The entrained air content

for exterior concrete shall be 4 - 7 percent and for interior concrete the air

content shall be 3 - 6 percent.

2. Use water reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C 494, Type A, in all

concrete unless approved otherwise by the Structural Engineer.

3. Use high range water reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C 494, Type F,

in all concrete slabs unless approved otherwise by the Structural Engineer.

4. All other admixtures shall have the written approval of the Architect or

Structural Engineer.

5. Calcium chloride is not permitted.

6. All admixtures, except high range water reducers, shall be added to the concrete

at the batch plant.

7. Concrete for slabs to receive a steel trowel or float finish shall not contain both

fly ash and high range water reducer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of

forms and reinforcing steel. Set screeds accurately. Embedded items shall be accurately

aligned and adequately supported. Verify installation of mechanical, plumbing, and

electrical items to be embedded in concrete. Correct any unsatisfactory condition before

proceeding further.

3.02 PREPARATION


A. Before placing concrete, clean and roughen surface of previously placed concrete. Clean

reinforcing steel. Remove debris, providing clean-outs at bottom of forms when

necessary. Moisten surfaces to receive concrete unless otherwise prepared. Remove

excess water before placing concrete.

3.03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. General: Comply with ACI 301.

B. Place concrete continuously in layers not deeper than 24 inches. Concrete shall not be

placed against concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams

or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction

joints. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation.

Do not use vibrators to transport concrete.

C. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations.

D. Consolidate concrete, immediately after placing, by mechanical vibrating equipment

supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for

consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI recommended practices.

E. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or

darbies to smooth surface. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing

operations.

F. Cold Weather Concreting: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced

strength caused by frost, freezing or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1.

G. Hot Weather Concreting: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality

and strength of concrete, reduce delivery time of ready mix concrete, lower the

temperature of materials, or add retarder to ensure that the concrete is plastic.

Retempering with water is not allowed.

3.04 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough Form Finish: Provide where formed concrete surfaces are not exposed to view.

Tie holes and surface imperfections shall be repaired and patched and fins and other

projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off.

3.05 FINISH OF HORIZONTAL SURFACES

A. At tops of foundation walls and grade beams finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.06 SLAB FINISHES

A. Float Finish: Begin floating when surface water has disappeared and when concrete has

stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven or hand floats. Consolidate

surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to


power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10' when

tested with a 10' straightedge.

B. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to slab surfaces that are to receive floor topping.

Roughen surface before final set, using stiff brushes, or brooms.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to all slab surfaces unless noted otherwise. After

floating, begin first trowel finish using a power-driven or hand trowel. Finish concrete

surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and

appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested

with a 10' straightedge.

D. Broom Finish: Apply on exterior slabs, ramps, steps, and sidewalks. Immediately after

concrete has received a float finish, draw a broom or burlap belt across the surface to

give a coarse transverse scored texture.

3.07 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or

hot temperatures. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete

surface after placing and finishing. Continue curing for at least 7 days using one of the

following methods.

B. Moisture-retaining Cover curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at

least 3" and sealed. Repair any holes or tears in cover during curing period. All concrete

slabs are to be cured with moisture retaining cover for the first 24 hours. After that time

the Contractor has the option to continue the moisture retaining cover, or remove the

cover and apply liquid membrane-forming curing compound.

C. Curing compound: Apply curing compound uniformly in accordance with

manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.08 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Surface Imperfections: Remove loose material and patch surface imperfections

and holes left by tierods with cement mortar. Surface imperfections include honeycomb,

excessive air voids, sand streaking and cracks.

3.09 FOR EXPOSED-TO-VIEW SURFACES

A. Blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching

mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to

verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in

place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A. The Contractor shall coordinate the services of a qualified testing laboratory to perform

tests and submit test reports.

B. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172.

C. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens.

D. Air Content: ASTM C 173 or C 231 for each set of compressive strength test specimens.

E. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below,

when 80 degrees F and above; and when compression test specimens are made.

F. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31, one set of 4 standard cylinders for each

compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for

laboratory cured test specimens except when field cure test specimens are required.

Mold one set of standard cylinders for volume of concrete specified below or fraction

thereof.

1. Slabs on Grade or Metal Deck 30 cubic yards

2. Footings and stem walls 50 cubic yards

3. All other locations (unless noted otherwise) 30 cubic yards

G. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test 1 specimen at 7 days, 2 specimens at 28

days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing. Additional Tests: The testing

laboratory will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate

specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the

structure as directed by the Architect. The testing laboratory may conduct tests to

determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by

other methods as directed by the Architect or Engineer. The Contractor shall pay for

such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when

unacceptable concrete is verified.


042300 - 1 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

SECTION 042300 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section includes the construction of reinforced hollow core unit masonry, masonry

veneer and special shapes. It includes all honed face units and smooth face units, as well

as masonry mortar and grout.


A. Concrete Reinforcement - Section 03 20 00


A. Reference Standards

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard Specification,

latest edition

a. A 615/ "Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete

A 615 M-96a Reinforcement”

b. C 90-94b "Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete

Masonry Units”

c. C 109/ "Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars"

C 109 M-95 (Using 2-in. Or [50mm] Cube Specimens)

d. C 140-97 "Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units"

e. C 270-97a "Mortar for Unit Masonry"

f. C 476-95 "Grout for Reinforced and Non-Reinforced Masonry"

g. C 1019-93 “Sampling and Testing Grout

2. International Congress of Building Officials, Uniform Building Code Standards

a. No.24-22 "Field Test Specimens for Mortar and Grout"

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit sample of exposed masonry unit of each color and texture to be

used to complete the work. Submit copies of test reports performed within last 12

months for representative specimens to be used in accordance with ASTM C 140 for

strength, absorption and moisture content, and ASTM C 426 for drying shrinkage.


B. Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports for masonry units, mortar and grout.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms which allow air circulation under

stacked units.

B. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use.

C. Handle units on pallets or flat bed barrows.

D. Store cementitious ingredients in weather-tight enclosures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Hollow Core Units: ASTM C90, Type I, at concealed block.

B. Aggregate: Scoria, natural color at exposed block. Color 1: “Holloman Buff” and Color

2: “Crego Tan” as manufactured by Crego Block and Supply as the basis of design. See

architectural building elevations.

C. Aggregate: Natural color at concealed block.

D. Mortar: ASTM C 270-94 “Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry,” Type

S.

E. Dry-block: Integral Water Repellent, Liquid polymer, Dry-block by W.R. Grace or

equivalent, add to all mortar utilized on exterior masonry.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476-90 “Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of

Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.”

G. Cell Reinforcing: ASTM A 615-95b “Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain

Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement,” Grade 40. Comply with Section 032000.

H. Bond Beam and Lintel Reinforcing: ASTM A 615, Grade 40. Comply with Section

032000.

I. Joint Reinforcing: Standard Dur-O-Wal or approved equal.

J. Control Joint Material: Rubber, neoprene or PVC joint material for use with standard

sash block by Dur-O-Wal or approved equal.

K. Vertical Bar Positioner: Steel or plastic by Dur-O-Wal or approved equal.


L. Mortar Plasticizer: Easy Spread by American Colloid Company or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Provide jamb, header, lintel, bond beam, etc. units as required to complete the work. Lay

only dry and unfrozen masonry units.

B. All exposed masonry shall be scoria aggregate, smooth finish unless noted otherwise on

the drawings. Masonry not exposed to view may be smooth finished.

C. Discard any broken, chipped, or discolored masonry units.

D. Use masonry saws to cut and fit masonry units.

E. Lay units in running bond pattern with vertical joints located at center of masonry units

in

alternate course below.

F. Set units plumb, true to line and with level courses accurately spaced.

G. Adjust masonry unit to final position while mortar is soft and plastic.

H. Anchors, flashing accessories and similar devices shall be built in as masonry progresses.

3.02 JOINTS

A. Provide joints 3/8" nominal thickness and tooled unless shown otherwise on drawings.

B. Construct uniform joints.

C. Units shall be placed with sufficient pressure to extrude mortar and provide a tight joint.

3.03 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement prior to grouting at a spacing not

greater than 4 feet.

B. Provide 48 diameter lap for all rebar, except footing dowels, 24" minimum. Provide 6"

minimum lap for all truss type joint reinforcing. Footing shall be 30 bar diameter lap

with 24" minimum.

3.04 GROUTING

A. Grout all cells which are below grade.

B. Grout lintel blocks over masonry openings and each jamb of masonry openings.


C. Grout pours shall not exceed 4 feet in height.

D. Grout all cells solid which contain reinforcing.

3.05 POINTING AND CLEANING

A. At completion of unit masonry work, fill holes in joints and tool.

B. Cut out and repoint defective joints.

C. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set, at end of each day's work and after final

pointing.

D. Leave work and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots and droppings.

3.06 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Protect sills, ledges and off-sets from mortar drippings or other damage during

construction.

B. Remove misplaced mortar or grout immediately.

C. Cover top of walls with non-staining waterproof coverings when work is not in progress.

D. Provide adequate bracing during construction to prevent damage from wind loads.

3.07 WEATHER CONDITIONS

A. Do not place concrete masonry units when air temperature is below 20 degrees F.

B. For temperatures between 20 degrees F and 40 degrees F, sand and mixing water shall be

heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F. Mortar

shall be maintained above 32 degrees F during placement.

C. Masonry shall be protected from freezing for 24 hours after placement.


A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Test in accordance with ASTM C 140-94a “Standard

Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.” Six units shall be

sampled and tested for each lot of 10,000 units or less delivered to the job site. Twelve

units shall be sampled from each lot of more than 10,000 units and less than 100,000

units.

B. Mortar: One sample, of six 2"x2"x2" cube specimens, shall be molded from each day’s

production. Test 2 specimens at 7 days age and 4 specimens at 28 days in accordance

with ASTM C 109-95 “Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. Or [50-mm] Cube Specimens).”


C. Grout: Mold and test 4 test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 1019-89a “Standard

Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout” from each day’s grout placement. See

General Structural Notes for required strength.


051200 - 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section includes the fabrication and erection of structural steel.


A. Steel Joists - Section 05 21 00

B. Metal Decking - Section 05 30 00

C. Metal Fabrication - Section 05 50 00


A. Qualifications of Fabricator: Fabricator shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in

the fabrication of structural steel and have a current AISC Certification for the

fabrication facility.

B. Qualifications of Erector: Erector shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the

erection of structural steel.

C. Qualifications of Field Welders: Welders shall be certified in accordance with AWS

D1.1 within the last 12 months.

D. Reference Standards:


a. ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

A 992

b. ASTM A 53-95 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and

Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless.

c. ASTM A 307-94 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,

60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

d. ASTM A 325-94 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat

Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

e. ASTM A 500-93, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and

Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and

Shapes.


2. American Welding Society (AWS), latest edition.

a. AWS D1.1-92 Structural Welding Code-Steel.

3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Steel Construction Manual, latest

edition.

a. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

b. AISC Code of Standard Practice

c. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 , Classes

10.9 and 10.9.3.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including complete details and schedules for

fabrication and assembly of structural steel members. Include details of cuts, connections,

camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and

show size, length, and type of each weld. Shop drawings shall not be made by

reproduction of the Contract Drawings.

B. Provide setting drawings and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other

anchorages to be installed by others.

C. Welder Certification: Submit affidavit stating that all welders are certified in accordance

with AWS.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Support structural steel above ground on skids, pallets, platforms, or other supports.

B. Protect steel from damage.

C. Store packaged materials in original unbroken package or container.

D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to

members or supporting structures.

E. Replace damaged shapes or members.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36 and A 992.

B. Structural Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.


C. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi.

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 36

E. High Strength Tension Control Threaded Fasteners: Meet requirements of ASTM A 325.

F. Headed Anchor Shear Studs: By the Nelson Division of TRW.

G. Welding Electrodes: E 70 Series.

H. Shop Primer Paint: Fabricators standard rust inhibitive primer.

I. Non-Metallic, Non-Shrink Grout: Meets the requirements of Corp of Engineers

specifications CRD-C621.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication shall be in accordance with the AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Buildings

and Bridges".

B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections as indicated on the approved shop drawings.

Design connections to support reactions and forces where indicated on the drawings.

C. Shop Welds: Shall be visually inspected by the Fabricator’s quality control department.

2.03 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be

embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on

exposed portions and initial 2" of embedded areas only.

B. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type

connections.

C. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted.

Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in

accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:

1. SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning"

2. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning"

D. Painting: After surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. Provide one coat.

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.01 COORDINATION

A. Field Measurements: Verify all elevations, locations, and dimensions of surfaces to

receive structural steel.

B. Anchor Bolts and Other Embedded Items: Verify locations and positions of anchor bolts

and other embedded items used to support structural steel.

C. Correct any unsatisfactory conditions prior to erection of structural steel.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive structural steel prior to erection.

3.03 ERECTION

A. General: Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for

Steel Buildings and Bridges".

B. Field Assembly: Assemble structural steel accurately to the lines and elevations shown on

the drawings. Align and adjust components accurately before fastening.

C. Temporary Bracing: Provide temporary bracing or guys to secure structural steel against

wind, seismic, or construction loads. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain

stability of the structure during erection.

D. Field Bolted Connections: Install high strength tension control bolts in accordance with

AISC Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts and the

manufacturer's instructions. Where clearance within a connection does not permit the use

of tension control bolts, standard A325 bolts shall be used and inspected in accordance

with the AISC Specification for Structural Joints.

E. Field Welding: Perform all welds in accordance with AWS.

F. Inspection of Field Welds: Perform visual inspection of all field welds. If any welds

appear to be unsatisfactory, they shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E160 and/or

replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

G. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field to cut structural framing.

H. Do not enlarge unfair holes by burning. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

I. Field Touch-up Painting (Primer): Paint all bolts, washers, and nuts after connections

have been tightened and checked. Paint field welds. Paint all abrasions in shop coat. Use

same paint as for shop painting.

J. Grout Placement: Comply with the manufacturer's instructions.

K. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

052100 - 1 STEEL JOISTS

SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section includes the fabrication and erection of open web steel joists.


A. Structural Steel - Section 05 12 00


A. Qualification of Fabricator: Fabricator shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute.

B. Qualification of Field Welders: Welders shall be certified in accordance with AWS

D1.1 within the last 12 months.

C. Reference Standards:


a. ASTM A 307-94 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel

Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile

Strength

2. Steel Joist Institute (SJI) Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight

Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders, 2005

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SJI

Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special

connections, jointing and accessories. Include mark, number, type, location and spacing

of joists and bridging. Shop Drawings shall not be made by reproduction of the

Contract Drawings.


A. Support structural steel above ground on skids, pallets, platforms, or other supports.

B. Protect steel from damage.



D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to

members or supporting structures.

E. Replace damaged shapes or members.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Comply with SJI Specifications.

B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low

carbon steel.

C. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI Specifications.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI Specification.

B. Extended Ends: Provide extended ends on joists as required complying with applicable

SJI Specifications and load tables.

C. Ceiling Extensions: Provide ceiling extensions in areas having ceilings attached directly

to joist bottom chord. Provide an extended bottom chord element of sufficient strength

to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2" of finished wall surface

unless otherwise indicated.

D. Bridging: Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for "open web" joists, as required

by SJI Specifications.

E. Shop Painting: Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from

fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint.

F. Apply one shop coat of primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or

other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. Verify all elevation locations and dimensions of surfaces to receive steel joists. Furnish

plates, angles, etc. as required to secure steel joists.

3.02 ERECTION


A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI Specifications, approved shop

drawings, and as herein specified.

B. Placing Joists: Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place

and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and

spacing before permanently fastening.

C. Bridging: Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads

are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating

at walls or beams.

D. Fastening Joists: Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI

Specifications for type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with

placing of joists unless noted on contract drawings. Bolt joists to supporting steel

framework where required by SJI Specifications.

E. Touch-Up Painting: After joist installation, paint field bolt heads and nuts, and welded

areas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush

surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use same type of paint as used for shop

painting.


053000 - 1 METAL DECKING

SECTION 053000 - METAL DECKING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all metal decking complete in place as shown on the drawings, specified herein,

and needed for a complete and proper installation.



B. Steel Joists - Section 05 21 00

C. Lightgage Metal Framing - Section 05 40 00



1. Qualification of Field Welders: Welders shall be certified in accordance with

AWS D1.3 within the last 12 months.

2. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard Specification,

latest edition.

a. ASTM A 570/Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot

Rolled,

A 570 M-97 Structural Quality.

b. A 611-97 Steel, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Carbon, Structural Quality.

c. ASTM A 653/ Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

A 653M-97 (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the

Hot-Dip Process

3. American Welding Society (AWS), latest edition.

a. D1.3-92, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel

4. Steel Deck Institute.

a. SDI Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof Decks

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each

type of decking and accessories.


B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout and types of deck panels,

anchorage details, and conditions requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, sump

pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing or other accessories. Shop Drawings shall

not be made by reproduction of the Contract Drawings.


A. Support metal deck above ground on skids, pallets, platforms or other supports.

B. Protect metal deck from damage.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Metal Roof Deck: ASTM A 611, Grade C. See plans for type, size and finish.

B. Metal Floor Deck: ASTM A 570 with galvanized finish. See plans for type and size.

C. Finishes:

1. Painted: Manufacturer's baked-on, rust-inhibitive paint.

2. Galvanized: Conform to ASTM A 653, G60.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. All edge angle shall be in place with proper attachment prior to installation of metal deck.

All roof and floor opening frames shall be installed prior to deck installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and final shop drawings, and as specified herein. Locate deck bundles

to prevent overloading of structural members.

B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends

accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened.

Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.

C. Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run.


D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive

deflection.

E. Lap ends of deck units a minimum of 2" over supports.

F. Place deck units to permit proper attachment to the perimeter deck angle.

G. Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured.

H. Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or

adjacent to the decking, as shown.

I. Fasten deck units to steel supporting members as shown on the structural drawings.

J. Fasten side laps of units as called for on the structural drawings.

K. Care shall be exercised in the selection of electrodes and amperage to provide positive

welds and to prevent high amperage blowholes.

L. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures.

M. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength,

continuity of decking and support of other work shown.

N. Install closure strips at all locations as recommended by the manufacturer to provide a

complete installation.

O. Provide cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, abraded areas and rust spots, as

required for all exposed areas after erection and before proceeding with field painting.


054000 - 1 LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING

SECTION 054000 – LIGHTGAGE METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section includes all lightgage studs, joists and track, 20 gauge or heavier, including

bridging, and related accessories as indicated on the Contract Drawings and specified

herein.



B. Steel Joists - Section 05 21 00

C. Drywall Studs - Section 09 26 0 0



1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural

Members, 1980.

2. American Welding Society of (AWS) D1.3, 1992 Structural Welding Code.

3. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).

a. ASTM A 570/ Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and

Strip,

A 570M-95 Carbon, Hot Rolled, Structural Quality.

b. ASTM A 611-94 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet,

Carbon, Cold Rolled, Structural Quality.

c. ASTM A 653/ Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-

Coated

A 653M-95 (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated

(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product information and installation instructions for each item of

lightgage framing. Submit shop drawings for all prefabricated lightgage systems.



A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in

manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type,

and grade. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof

coverings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Metal Framing:

1. All 12, 14, and 16 gage steel studs and joists shall be formed from steel that

meets the requirements of one of the following standards with a minimum yield

strength of 50,000 psi:

a. Painted Material - ASTM A 570, Grade 50.

b. Galvanized Material - ASTM A 653 Grade 50.

2. All 18 and 20 gage steel studs and joists; all track, bridging and accessories shall

be formed from steel that meets the requirements of one of the following with a

minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi:

a. Painted Material - ASTM A 611, Grade C.

b. Galvanized Material - ASTM A 653.

B. Material Finishes: All stud and joist components shall be primed with paint meeting the

performance requirements of TT-P-1636C, or shall be formed from steel having a G-60

galvanized coating or better.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Prefabricated

panels shall be square, with components attached to prevent racking. Handling and

lifting of panels shall be done in a manner as to not cause distortion in any member.

B. All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members,

or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Members shall be held

positively in place until properly fastened.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and

recommendations, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings.


B. Install and align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as

indicated on Contract Drawings. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.

C. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system to support

fixtures, equipment, etc. Comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and

industry standards, considering weight and loading of each item.

D. Secure studs to top and bottom tracks by welding at both inside and outside flanges

unless noted otherwise.

E. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0" square with double studs at each jamb of frame

except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions.

Install tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb

studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs of

wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated.

F. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at no more than 4'-0"

o.c. Weld at each intersection.

G. Touch-up shop-applied protective coatings damaged during handling and installation.

Use compatible primer for prime coated surfaces; use galvanizing repair paint for

galvanized surfaces.


055000 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Furnish and install all metal fabrications as shown on Drawings and as specified under this Section.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. Cast In Place Concrete - Section 03 30 00

B. Structural Steel - Section 05 12 00

C. Finishes - Division 9

1.03 REFERENCES:

A. The references listed below are declared to be a part of these specifications, the same as if fully set forth, except as modified herein. Unless specifically stated otherwise, the edition or revision of each document in effect at the beginning of work on this project shall be used.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):1. ASTM A6 - General Requirements of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling,

and Bars for Structural Use2. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel3. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc, Coated, Welded and

Seamless4. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality5. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength6. ASTM A386 - Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products7. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled, Sheet and

Strip, Commercial Quality8. ASTM A668 - Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use

C. American Welding Society (AWS)1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel2. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel

D. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)1. Manual of Steel Construction (1989)

E. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)1. SSPC-SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning2. SSPC-SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning

1.04 DEFINITIONS:

A. Definitions in ASTM E985 for railing-related terms apply to this section.


1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the latest edition or revision of the following codes, standards and specifications, except as otherwise shown and specified.1. AISC "Manual of Steel Construction – Allowable Stress Design"2. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".3. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and D1.3 "Structural Welding Code -

Sheet Steel".4. ASTM A6, "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Sheet Piling

and Bars for Structural Use".

B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedures".

C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay the work.

D. Inserts and Anchorages:1. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete for the installation

of miscellaneous metal work. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.2. See concrete section of these specifications for installation of inserts and anchorage

devices.

E. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the project site. Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

1.06 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install the following metal fabrications to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each respective component of each metal fabrication.

1.07 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Comply with requirements of Section 01340.

B. Manufacturer's Data: Manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details and installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work, including paint products. Indicate by transmittal that copy of instructions has been distributed to the installer.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of all assemblies of miscellaneous metal work which are not completely shown by the manufacturer's data sheets. Include profile, elevations, sizes, connections, reinforcing and accessories at


required for complete installation. Show welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

1.09 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver to site as required to avoid interruption of work.

B. Store on blocking under shelters with supports as necessary to avoid damage due to self-weight or superimposed loads.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Steel1. Plates and Shapes: ASTM A36 unless otherwise shown. ASTM A572, grade 50 where

shown.2. Pipe: ASTM A53, type E or S, grade B, black or galvanized as shown.3. Steel Bars and Bar-Size Shapes: ASTM A283, Grade D or ASTM A36.4. Bolts, nuts, washers:

a. Standard bolts: ASTM A307, grade A for general use, grade B for use at flanged joints of piping systems, plain or zinc coated as shown.

b. Anchor bolts: Except as otherwise shown, L-shaped with minimum 3" hook, 8" embedment in concrete, 4" threaded projection, double nutted, ASTM A307 or A36, plain or zinc coated as shown.

B. Primer Paint:1. For general use in shop and field: FS TT-P-31, brown2. For touch-up of galvanized surfaces: FS TT-P-6413. For aluminum to be in contact with steel: FS TT-P-6454. For aluminum to be in contact with concrete: BuRec CTP-1

C. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A47, or cast steel, ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153.

E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded.

2.02 FABRICATION - GENERAL:


A. Use materials of size and thickness shown, or, if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in the finished product for the intended use. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for the various components of work.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners without otherwise impairing the work.

C. Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with the recommendations of AWS. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if not shown, use Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts.

E. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use of the work.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as may be required to receive finish hardware and similar items of work.

2.03 STEEL FABRICATION:

A. General: 1. Conform to following standards of the American Institute of Steel Construction

(AISC):a. "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for

Buildings."b. "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," with following

exceptions: 1) Connections shall be as shown on the Drawings except as specifically and

individually approved otherwise by the Architect.2. Welding shall conform to the AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code Steel" and AWS

D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel" and shall be performed by welders currently certified in accordance with AWS certification procedures to perform the type of welding required.

3. Mill bearing surfaces to true plane.4. Shop connections: Welded, unless otherwise shown.5. Field connections: Provide bolts for all field connections except where shown

otherwise on Drawings.

B. Shop Painting:1. Paint all steel items which are not specified or shown to be galvanized except as

specified below. Paint after fabrication is complete. Exception: If portions of assemblages will not be accessible to painting after fabrication, paint those portions before fabrication.


2. Remove oil and grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign elements by "Commercial Blast Cleaning" in accordance with SSPC-SP6 or by "Hand Tool Cleaning" in accordance with SSPC-SP2 as required.

3. Apply one or more coats of primer paint of specified type in accordance with paint manufacturer's directions as required to achieve recommended coverage and coating thickness for items to be used in a corrosive environment. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces.

4. Omit shop prime coat from contact surfaces of connections, from surfaces to be field welded, from parts to be embedded in concrete, and other parts which will not be exposed to view or weather after construction is complete.

C. Galvanizing: 1. Galvanize after fabrication all steel members and assemblages which are shown or

specified to be galvanized.2. Galvanize each item as specified. If coating type and thickness is not specified,

provide hot-dipped galvanized coating equivalent to a G90 coating as specified in ASTM A525.

3. Protection of dissimilar materials:a. Aluminum surfaces in contact with steel shall be given one coat of zinc chromate

primer in accordance with FS TT-P-645.b. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete shall be given coat of alkali-resistant

bituminous paint meeting requirements of BuRec Specification CTP-1 (coal tar paint).

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS:

A. General: Provide and install items listed below and shown on drawings together with anchorage, attachment and accessories necessary for a complete installation. Items listed are principal items only. See drawing details for items not specifically listed.

B. Nosings: Furnish and install as detailed on Architectural Drawings.

C. Steel Pipe Railings and Handrails:1. General: Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to comply with requirements indicated

for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

2. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated.a. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting members to fit contour of

pipe to which end is joined and weld all around.3. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:

a. By insertion of prefabricated elbow fittings.b. By radius bends of radius indicated.c. By mitering at elbow bends.d. By bending.e. By any method indicated above, applicable to change of direction involved.

4. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe.


5. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.6. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16 inch thick steel plate in place or by use of

prefabricated fittings, except where clearance of end of pipe and adjoining wall surface is 1/4 inch or less.

7. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at the edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated, or if not indicated, use 4 inches high x 1/8 inch steel plate welded to, and centered between, each railing post.

8. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work.a. For railing posts set in concrete fabricate sleeves from steel pipe not less than 6

inches long and with an inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of post, with steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve.

b. Provide friction fit, removable covers designed to keep sleeves clean and hold top edge of sleeve 1/2 inch below finished surface of concrete.

2.05 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS:

A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division 3 section "Concrete Work" for normal weight, ready-mix concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless higher strengths indicated.

B. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged material containing fused aluminum oxide grits or crushed emery as abrasive aggregate; rust- proof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials.

C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION:

A. Prior to beginning installation of metal fabrications, inspect field conditions under which work is to be done. If conditions are not satisfactory, do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Contractor and the Architect. Beginning of installation represents Contractor's acknowledgement and certification that all conditions are satisfactory.

B. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for the installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the project site.

C. Thoroughly clean all parts which will be in contact.

D. Paint with specified paint all surfaces of dissimilar metals and any surfaces of aluminum fabrications which will be embedded in concrete.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL:


A. Install metal fabrication plumb and level or on slope as shown in their correct positions within specified tolerances.

B. Design, provide, install and maintain all temporary handrails, kickplates and other items as required by OSHA and as necessary to provide a safe workplace.

C. Use light drifting as necessary to draw holes together. Drifting to enlarge unfair holes is not permitted. If necessary to enlarge holes to make connections, use twist drills.

D. Weld steel members in accordance with AWS D1.1. Provide certification that all welders are currently qualified in accordance with AWS procedures.

E. Anchor handrails, ladders and miscellaneous items securely to supporting work as shown on the Drawings. Where attachments are not shown, anchor items using appropriate anchors subject to approval by the Architect.

F. Grout under baseplates to provide full bearing area after framing or equipment has been plumbed, leveled and aligned. Place grout in accordance with the manufacturer's directions using the damp-pack method. Do not apply loads to structural framing until grout under baseplates has been placed and properly cured.

G. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal items to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required.

H. Cutting, Fitting and Placement:1. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for the installation of miscellaneous metal

items. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

2. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

I. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made and methods used in correcting welding work.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS:

A. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows:1. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete.

After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.


2. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement.3. Cover anchorage joint with a round steel flange attached to post as follows:

A. Welded to post after placement of anchoring material.1. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 1/8 inch

build-up, sloped away from post. For installations exposed on exterior, or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.

B. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts.1. Install removable railing sections where indicated in slip-fit metal sockets cast into

concrete. Accurately locate sockets to match post spacing.

C. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows:1. Use type of bracket with pre-drilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.2. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and either

concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable.3. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or

concealed anchors using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF WALL HANDRAILS:

A. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements.

B. Mount handrails only on gypsum board assemblies reinforced to receive anchors, and where the location of concealed anchor plates has been clearly marked for benefit of Installer.

3.05 FIELD PAINTING:

A. Apply one or more coats of the primer paint specified to cleaned surfaces of bolts, to new welds and to abrasions to shop coat after erection. Apply as many coats as necessary to achieve protection of the metal surfaces at least equal to that provided by the shop paint.

B. Apply finish paints and coatings as specified in Division 9 Sections of these specifications.

3.06 PROTECTION AND REPAIR OF WORK:

A. Take all measures necessary to protect the work during the life of the contract.

B. If any portion of the work is found to be defective or is damaged by the Contractor's operations after it has been installed, it shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Architect. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the work has been damaged to the extent that satisfactory repairs are not possible or if repairs have been made which are not acceptable, the Contractor shall remove the damaged items and replace with new undamaged items.


FBT Architects - 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry [v4.0].docx

06 1000 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Provide and install rough carpentry as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as

needed for a complete and proper installation. This project shall be constructed in accordance

with the most resent adopted version of the IBC, which permits fire retardant treated wood in

permanent partitions only.

1.2 REFERENCES:

A. Standards of the following as referenced:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

3. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.).

4. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

5. Uniform Building Code (latest edition)

B. Grading rules and standards of the following apply to materials furnished under this section:

1. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC).

2. American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC).

3. American Plywood Association (APA).

4. National Forest Products Association (NFPA).

5. National Bureau of Standards (NBS).

6. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).

7. Southern Forest Products Association (SFPA).

8. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).

9. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).

C. Plywood grading rules:

1. APA: APA Design/Construction Guide, current edition.

2. NBS product standard PS-1-83, Construction (AITC).

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. As specified in the General Conditions and pertinent provisions of Section 01 3300.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit printed data for installation of sheathing materials.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:



A. Storage and protection:

1. Place materials in areas protected from weather immediately upon delivery to Project

site.

2. Store materials minimum 6" above ground on blocking: Provide for adequate air

circulation and ventilation.

3. Storing seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of building is prohibited.

4. Protect sheet materials from broken corners and damaged surfaces.

5. Stack framing lumber to ensure proper ventilation and drainage. Store against cover

in well ventilated building where not exposed to extreme changes of temperature or

humidity.


A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers

which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced

installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

B. Lumber Standards and Grade Stamps: U.S. Product Standard PS 20, American Softwood

Lumber Standard and inspection agency grade stamps.

C. Construction Panel Standards: PS 1, U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial

Plywood; APA PRP-108.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. General:

1. Dimensions: Indicated lumber dimensions are nominal. Actual dimensions conform

to industry standards established by ALSC and the Rules Writing Agencies.

2. Provide materials required for Work under this section suitable for intent and purpose

specified. Any species meeting code requirements acceptable unless otherwise

specified. Sizes indicated are nominal. Conform to NBS product standard PS-20-70

(Reaffirmed 1981), "American Softwood Lumber Standard" for actual sizes.

Provide S4S lumber, surfaced four sides, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Moisture content: 19% maximum at time of permanent closing in of building or

structure, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Hardware

1. General:



a. Provide nails, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, expansion bolts, clips, power

actuated fasteners, and similar hardware necessary for complete

installation of indicated materials.

b. Provide hardware to adequately resist design loads and meet codes.

c. Provide hardware of proper type to secure materials to substrates

encountered.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with

requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with

fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test

method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame

spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of

significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and

with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at

any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for

fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected

to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and

where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where

exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according

ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to

ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high

temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment

factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in

bending for Project's climatological zone.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry

plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified

testing agency.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back

of piece.

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations

that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.



F. Application: Treat all rough carpentry and blocking unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Inspection:

1. Grade marks:

a. General: Identify all lumber and plywood by official grade mark of

agency approved by ALSC Board of Review.

b. Lumber grading:

1) Grade stamp to contain symbol of grading agency, mill

number or name, grade of lumber, species or species

grouping, or combination designation, rules under

which graded, where applicable, and condition of

seasoning at time of manufacture.

2) Conform to PS 20-70 (Reaffirmed 1981) with

amendments for grading of species used. Current

edition of applicable association grading rules govern.

All lumber 2" or less in thickness shall bear grade mark

of an ALSC Board of Review approved agency.

c. Softwood Plywood: appropriate grade trademark of APA, indicate:

1) Type, grade, class and identification index.

2) Inspection and testing agency mark.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

A. Accurately lay out Work to provide correct openings to receive other trades.

1. Lay out Work in accord with allowable tolerances indicated in Article 3.03 below.

2. Cut wood framing and carpentry Work square or bearings, closely fitted, accurately

set to required lines and levels, and rigidly secured in place.

3. Install all wood framing, necessary blocking, rough bucks, and furring, required by

drawings and necessary for proper installation of millwork and other finish carpentry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Blocking:

1. Provide nailers, blocking and grounds where required and to support all wall

mounted fixtures (Owner and Contractor installed), modular casework (Owner and

Contractor installed), and equipment (Owner and Contractor installed). Set work



plumb, level and accurately cut. Wedge, align, and anchor blocking with nails or

drywall screws through metal studs.

2. Coordinate blocking with locations of finishing materials, fixtures, specialty items,

and trim (Owner and Contractor installed), and as required for other divisions of the

specifications.

B. Wood framing: Comply with recommendations of NFPA Manual for House Framing, NFPA

Recommended Nailing Schedule, and NFPA National Design Specifications for Wood

Construction.

C. Plywood: Comply with recommendations of APA Design and Construction Guide -

Residential and Commercial.

D. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved

submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction.

Coordinate with other work.

E. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for cutting, handling, fastening and working

treated materials.

F. Restore damaged components. Protect work from damage.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Tolerances, unless indicated otherwise:

1. Location of dimensioned openings: +/-3/8".

2. Variation in rough opening size; +1/4" - -1/8".

3.4 SCHEDULE

A. Wood Treatment:

1. Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2 for lumber and AWPA C27 for plywood;

waterborne pressure treatment. Provide for wood in contact with soil, attached to

exterior face of concrete, attached to exterior face of masonry, dampproofing and

waterproofing.

2. Fire-Retardant Treatment: AWPA C20 for lumber and AWPA C27 for plywood;

non-corrosive type. Provide at all building locations and blocking for roof flashings.

If wood treatment is not recommended by a manufacturer for specific materials the

architect shall be notified immediately in writing.

a. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

b. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.

c. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof

framing, framing in attic spaces, and where indicated.

d. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.



e. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification

marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.

f. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise

indicated.


FBT Architects - 06 1600 - Sheathing [v4.0].docx

06 1600 - 1 SHEATHING

SECTION 06 1600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Wall sheathing.

2. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment.

3. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing.


1. Division 01 Section 3100 – Project Management & Coordination

2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for plywood

backing panels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer

and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.

Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include

physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated

temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to

ASTM D 5516.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture

content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to

Project site.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of

treatment.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide

materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per

ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance

Directory."

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air

circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness

indicated.

C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing and where indicated.

4. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S.

Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Application: Treat all plywood, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 EXTERIOR WALL SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements

a. Dens-Glass Gold by G-P Gypsum Corporation.

b. Securock Glass-Matt Sheathing by USG.

2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.



3. Size: 48 by 120 inches (1219 by 3048 mm) for vertical installation.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified

in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. For wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with

ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954,

except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer

for material being fastened.

1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other

corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours

according to ASTM B 117.

E. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws,

in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be

attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray

resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

1. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, attach sheathing

to comply with ASTM C 954.

2.5 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral-

curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and

other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated, and

complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Division 07 "Joint

Sealants."

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01

ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by

manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.



B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,

rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to

produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.

b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor

Plus Self-Adhered Flashing.

c. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap.

d. Polygaurd Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300.

e. Protecto Wrap Company; PS-45.

C. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for

substrate.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small

to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting

construction, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully

penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish

materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these

materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing

through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of

structural support elements.



G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so

sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is

forecast.

3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.

2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction

abuts structural elements.

3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar

materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into

facing.

C. Horizontal Installation: Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of

adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of

board to each steel stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8

inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of boards.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with

screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to

studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

3.3 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions.

1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm), except that

at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.

3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings.

4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing heads of openings.

5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to

ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.


FBT Architects - 06 4116 - Custom Plastic Laminate Casework [v4.1].docx

06 4116 - 1 CUSTOM PLASTIC

LAMINATE CASEWORK

SECTION 06 4116 – CUSTOM PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF THE WORK: Furnish delivered to jobsite, unloaded, set in place, leveled and

scribed, the work of this Section as indicated on the drawings and as specified and required for a

complete installation.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Custom casework: high pressure decorative laminate finish

B. Countertops: high pressure decorative laminate finish

C. Countertops: Composite, Stainless Steel, Solid Surface or Quartz

D. Hardware customarily furnished by the casework manufacturer

E. Installation

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Rough Carpentry, Section 06 1000, wood blocking, and grounds within finished walls and

above finished ceiling

B. Division 5, Metal Fabrications

C. Division 7, Joint Sealants

D. Division 10, Specialties

E. Division 11, Equipment

F. Division 21-23, Mechanical Sections

G. Division 26-28, Electrical Sections

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Woodwork Institute, Architectural Woodwork Standards, edition 1

B. ANSI/BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet hardware

C. NEMA LD3 - High pressure decorative laminate

D. Particleboard – ANSI 208.1 (American National Standards Institute)



LAMINATE CASEWORK

E. Softwood plywood – US Products Standards PS1

F. Hardboard – ANSI AHA 135.484 (American Hardboard Association)

G. PVA adhesive (polyvinyl acetate) white glue, Type II ASTM-D3110

H. Aliphatic adhesive (carpenter’s glue) Type II

I. Solvent-based contact cement MMM-A-J1308

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as required in Section 01 3300.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS:

1. Prior to commencement of work under this section, submit copies as required in Section

01 3300.

2. Submit plans and elevations indicating materials, profiles, assembly methods, joint details,

fastening methods, and schedule of finishes. Include hardware cut sheets and lock

schedules.

3. Plans and elevations shall show all adjacent wall mounted equipment including

mechanical, electrical and special systems items. Coordination of these items is the

responsibility of the casework manufacturer. Any field modifications due to conflict with

other trades shall be completed at no additional cost to the owner.

4. Submit drawings with dimensions in units of feet and inches.

5. For countertops, show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining

and cutouts for plumbing fixtures, grommet locations and other items.

C. SAMPLES:

1. 1 each of plastic laminate color sample as indicated on drawings

2. 1 each of countertop (solid surface, quartz or stainless steel) as indicated on drawings

3. Submit one sample of each type of required hardware in specified finish.


A. Perform work in accordance with AWI, Architectural Woodwork Standards, Current Edition.

B. Work in this Section shall comply with the specified Grade(s) or Work and

Section(s) of the current edition of the Architectural Woodwork Standards.

C. Woodwork manufacturers shall be certified by the AWI Quality Certification

Program as competent to perform the work specified.

D. Certification shall be evidenced through the application of AWI Quality

Certification labels and/or the issuance of an AWI letter of certification for the

project.



LAMINATE CASEWORK

E. Contractors and their personnel engaged in the work of this section shall be able to

demonstrate successful experience with work of comparable extent, complexity and

quality to that shown and specified.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to job site in a timely manner to ensure uninterrupted progress. Deliver all

products with protective covering to prevent damage. Promptly remove damaged materials

from job site and make timely replacements.

B. Protect units from moisture damage according to AWI Quality Standards.

C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood work until building is enclosed, wet

work is complete, and HVAC is operating and maintaining designed temperature and relative

humidity levels for the remainder of the construction period.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work of this Section with other applicable trades.

B. Pre-cut rough-ins for plumbing, electrical and data wherever possible.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Where casework is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other

construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded

measurements on final shop drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY.

A. Provide a written warranty that all casework materials and workmanship will be free from

defects for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion of the project. Any

defective work is to be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS:

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS:

A. The following manufacturers are approved for use based upon their being current

participants in the Quality Certification Program (QCP) of the Architectural Woodwork

Institute (AWI). If other manufacturers are current participants in the QCP, they may

submit for Prior Approval as approved manufacturers:

1. Albuquerque Cabinets, Inc.: 4800 Hawkins NE, Albuquerque, NM 87109.



LAMINATE CASEWORK

2. Calmar Manufacturing Co. Inc (Tru-Bilt brand): Calmar, Iowa - Represented by

Institutional Products, LLC 230 Cynthia Loop NW, Suite C, Albuquerque, NM

87114.

3. Casework Technologies, Ltd. Co.: 709 Haines Ave. NW, Albuquerque, NM

87102.

4. O.G.B. Architectural Millwork: 3711 Paseo Del Norte, Suite B, Albuquerque, NM

87113.

5. TMI Systems Design Corporation: Dickinson, North Dakota. Represented by

Construction Specialties Suppliers, 801 Ranchitos NW, Albuquerque, NM 87114.

6. Westmark Casework: Tacoma, Washington - Represented by A.C.I.E., 4800

Hawkins NE, Albuquerque, NM 87109.

7. P&M Caseworks LLC PO Box Albuquerque, NM

8. Jaynes Structures Millwork: 2906 Broadway NE, Albuquerque NM

2.2 SHEET MATERIALS

A. SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD: Graded in accordance with AWI Grade Custom.

B. WOOD PARTICLEBOARD AND/OR FIBERBOARD: Shall be Industrial Grade Medium

Density, complying with current ANSI A208.1 9 (particle board) or ANSI A208.2 (fiberboard),

and shall be a “45 lb” board.

C. WOOD FIBERBOARD FOR MOISTURE APPLICATIONS: Substrate for all countertops

with sinks shall be 3/4” MEDEX NC as manufactured by SierraPine complying with ANSI

A208.2-1994, “45 lb” board.

D. THERMOSET DECORATIVE OVERLAY: Particleboard or medium density fiberboard with

surface of thermally fused, melamine–impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA

SAT-1. Color: White.

E. COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS: As scheduled on Drawings, subject to compliance with

manufacturers requirements.

2.3 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE

A. AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering high pressure decorative laminate that may be incorporated into the work include:

1. As noted on drawings.

2.4 LAMINATE COLORS AND PATTERNS

A. As indicated on drawings.



LAMINATE CASEWORK

2.5 HARDWARE

Substitutions for the following products shall be submitted for approval prior to bidding in

accordance with the requirements of Section 01 6300 Product Substitution Procedures.

Substitutions after the bid will not be allowed.

A. HINGES

a. Multi-purpose Room & other public use spaces, provide one of the following

(quantity of hinges per door as required by the manufacturer):

1. RPC – 5-knuckle overlay hinges 2-3/4” height, Nickle-plated hinge

2. Or approved manufacturer

b. Offices and other private use spaces provide one of the following (quantity of

hinges per door as required by the manufacturer):

1. GRASS - Tiomos 120, Soft-closing, Nickle-plated hinge & mounting plate

2. Or approved manufacturer

B. PULLS

a. Door and drawer pulls shall be back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch

in diameter wire pulls with round safety corners and surfaces eliminating the

possibility of garments and equipment from getting caught. Satin nickel finish.

C. LOCKS

a. Provide on all doors and drawers unless noted otherwise on drawings. Brand:

TIMBERLINE Cam Lock, Model CB-080 through 199 series. Locks to have a

Bezel. Strike plates used where appropriate.

b. Keying Requirements: All locks in a single room shall be keyed alike. Locks shall

be keyed different from room to room. Provide 2 master keys.

D. LATCHES: EPCO Model number 1018-N. Use on inactive door opposite locks.

E. DRAWER SLIDES: Drawer slides for all standard drawers:

a. ACCURIDE - #3832E Box Drawer Slide (Basis of design)

b. BLUM

c. GRASS

d. MEPLA

e. Or approved manufacturer



LAMINATE CASEWORK

F. OVERSIZED DRAWER SLIDES: Drawer slides for all large format style cabinets, 24

inches or greater wide, shall be regular extension epoxy coated by one of the following.

a. BLUM 230E; 100 lb. Bottom Mount drawer slide with stay-close detents.

b. GRASS 6610; 100 lb. Bottom Mount drawer slide with stay-close detents.

c. MEPLA-AFIT AL 1700; Bottom Mount drawer slide.

G. CASEWORK SHELF SUPPORTS: Bainbridge Mfg, 5mm dual pin part #3220WH

H. HORIZONTAL DIVIDER SUPPORTS: Hafele 5mm steel wire (“magic wire”). Furnish

in size appropriate to shelf size.

I. WARDROBE CABINET HARDWARE:

a. CLOSET ROD: Knape & Vogt #750 I Regular. Chrome-look finish.

b. ROD FLANGES: Knape & Vogt #734 & #735 per rod. Chrome-look finish.

c. ROD CENTER SUPPORTS: Knape & Vogt #1195. White.

d. HOOKS: IVES #582 dual hook. Chrome-look finish.

e. MIRROR: 12” x 12” x 1/4” All edges covered with chrome or molded PVC trim.

Fasten to back side of cabinet door with mirror clips.

J. COUNTERTOP WIRING GROMMETS: 2 1/2”diameter with covers. Color black unless

otherwise noted.

K. CABINET DOOR RESTRAINT: 8” long, braded wire with PVC coating. Furnish and

install on cabinet doors adjacent walls and other areas where opening is required to be

restricted to 90 degrees. Install at top of door.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION - CABINET COMPONENTS

A. GENERAL:

1. Comply with the AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards (latest edition) Custom

Grade.

2. Reference Section 400-G-3, Identification of Parts, for the criteria of exposed and

semi-exposed surfaces.

3. Cabinet width dimensions are not to exceed 32” for both wall cabinets and base

cabinets. Cabinets that exceed 32” shall have a center support. Sink base cabinets and

Oversized drawer cabinets will be the only exceptions.

4. Private use spaces cabinetry style shall be constructed per Section 400-G-7, A; Flush

Overlay.

5. Public use spaces cabinetry style shall be constructed per Section 400-G-7, B; Reveal

Overlay.

6. Furnish and install filler panel scribed to wall as required for a continuous built-in

appearance. Filler panel shall match the adjacent cabinet surface.

7. Seal all fixed cabinet components to adjacent wall surfaces.



LAMINATE CASEWORK

8. Cover all exposed fasteners inside cabinet with matching color cover caps. FastCap

(888) 443-3748 or equivalent.

B. DRAWERS:

1. Drawer fronts shall be 3/4” thick particleboard overlaid with high-pressure plastic

laminate on both faces. Edges are banded with 3mm PVC with outer edges 1/8” radius.

PVC edge shall match the face.

2. Steel Drawer Systems: Drawer bottoms and backs shall be 3/4” thick thermo fused

melamine. Color to match cabinet interior. Edges are banded with .5mm PVC color to

match cabinet interior.

3. Built Drawer Boxes:

a. Drawer sides, sub front and backs shall be 1/2” thick minimum thermofused

melamine. Color to match cabinet interior. Edges are banded with .5mm PVC

color to match cabinet interior.

b. Drawer bottoms shall be 1/2” thick minimum thermofused melamine. Color to

match cabinet interior. Sides are rabbeted to accept bottom and bottom is to be

glued and screwed as well as supported by screws from the bottom mount

slides.

C. DOORS: Doors shall be 3/4” thick particleboard overlaid with a high-pressure plastic laminate

on both faces. Edges are banded with 3mm PVC with outer edges 1/8” radius. PVC edge shall

match the face.

D. CABINET ENDS, TOPS & BOTTOMS:

1. All panels shall be constructed with 3/4” particleboard as the core material.

2. At Semi-exposed (see AWI standards for definition and locations) ends, tops or

bottoms the particleboard shall be overlaid with thermofused melamine on the exterior

face.

3. At Exposed (see AWI standards for definition and locations) ends, tops or bottoms, the

particleboard shall be overlaid with a high pressure decorative laminate on exposed

faces. The inside color shall match the cabinet interior with the face color to match

exterior color. The front edges shall be banded with .5mm PVC edge shall match the

face.

4. In cabinets with doors, the interior surfaces of the particleboard shall be overlaid with

either high pressure laminate cabinet liner or thermofused melamine. The color shall

match the melamine surfaced back color. The front edges shall be banded with .5mm

PVC to match exposed face color or as selected by the Architect from the colors

submitted.

5. In open cabinets (without doors), the interior surfaces of the particleboard shall be

overlaid with high pressure decorative to match exposed exterior color. The front edges

shall be banded with .5mm PVC to match exposed face color or as selected by the

Architect from the colors submitted.



LAMINATE CASEWORK

6. All end panels shall be drilled for adjustable shelf supports with .5mm diameter holes

on 32mm (1 1/4”) centers. For shelves up to and including 30” depth, two vertical sets

of holes shall be provided at each end panel. For shelves over 30” deep, three vertical

sets of holes shall be provided at each end panel.

E. FIXED AND ADJUSTABLE SHELVES:

1. Semi-exposed Shelves: Regardless of cabinet width, all shelves shall be 1” thick

particleboard overlaid with thermofused melamine on top and bottom faces. Color to

match cabinet interior.

2. Exposed Shelves: Regardless of cabinet width, all shelves shall be 1” particleboard

overlaid with high pressure decorative laminate. Color to match exterior unless

otherwise noted on the drawings.

3. All four edges of shelves and front edge of fixed shelves shall be banded with .5mm

edge banding in color to match shelf color.

F. CABINET BACKS:

1. All semi-exposed cabinet backs shall be 3/4” thick minimum thermofused melamine.

Color to match cabinet interior.

2. All exposed backs shall be 3/4” thick minimum particleboard overlaid with a high-

pressure plastic laminate. Color to match exterior for exposed backs.

3. Provide removable backs for service access where shown on the project drawings.

4. All backs shall be full bound by all sides, tops and bottoms of the cabinet.

G. DIVIDERS AND PARTITIONS:

1. Vertical dividers and partitions shall be 3/4” particleboard overlaid with thermofused

melamine on both faces when semi-exposed and high pressure decorative laminate for

exposed surfaces. The exposed edges shall be banded with .5mm PVC to match the

other case edges.

2. Fixed Horizontal Dividers: Where indicated on the drawings, dividers less than 6”

apart and less than 12” wide shall be 1/4” tempered hardboard grooved into adjacent

cabinet members. The edges shall be sanded and entire shelf clear sealed.

3. Adjustable Horizontal Dividers: Where indicated on the drawings, dividers shall be

3/4” particleboard overlaid with thermofused melamine on both faces when semi-

exposed and high pressure decorative laminate for exposed surfaces. Dividers shall be

grooved to accept steel “magic wire” supports. The exposed edges shall be banded

with .5mm PVC to match the other case edges

H. CABINET TOE BASES:

1. Cabinet bases shall be 4” standard height made in continuous lengths to ensure straight,

level and true line of casework. The standard core materials shall be 3/4” particleboard.

In rooms with floor drains, the core material shall be “Medex” MDF board or equal.

2. Bases shall be unfinished and ready for scheduled base finish to be applied.



LAMINATE CASEWORK

I. FIXED CLOSET /STORAGE SHELVING:

1. Exposed Shelves: Regardless of shelf width, all shelves shall be 1” thick particleboard

overlaid with thermofused melamine on top and bottom faces. Color to be white.

Provide 1X wood nailer as ledger board. Shelf shall have 2x continuous wood support

at leading edge. Vertical supports to be 1x hardwood supports at no more than 36” on

center, mortised into shelf. All exposed surfaces to be overlaid with edge banded

thermofused melamine to match shelf. Seal all shelving units to adjacent surfaces.

3.2 FABRICATION - COUNTER TOPS

A. GENERAL:

1. Comply with the AWI Quality Standards (latest edition) Custom Grade.

2. Decorative laminate counter tops shall be PF42 NEMA grade laminate with .020”

backing sheet bonded to 3/4” particleboard substrate. Adhesives shall be either Type

II PVA or contact cement depending on the size of the materials and job conditions.

3. Decorative laminate color selections shall be as noted on drawings

4. Counter top thickness shall be as noted in Section B. below.

5. Where tops and back splashes in which sinks occur, utilize an industrial grade particle

board or fiberboard with a 24 hour thickness swell factor of 5% or less and a 24 hour

water absorption factor of 10% or less.

6. Counter tops shall be furnished in the longest lengths possible. When joints are

required, they shall be factory prepared with a minimum of three 1/4” joint bolts each.

Joints shall be field assembled with waterproof sealant to ensure stable and rigid

construction. Avoid joints within 24” of sinks or knee spaces.

7. Seal all countertop units to adjacent surfaces.

8. Countertop types are in locations shown on drawings, all types may not be used.

B. COUNTERTOPS:

1. 180 Degree Wrap Post Forming Decorative Laminate Counter Tops with Integral

Backsplash:

a. Overall counter top thickness shall be 1 1/4” with buildup added to the

substrate. A 1/4” wide x 1/4” deep drip groove shall be cut in the underside of

the top in from the leading edge of the counter top. Standard overhang from

cabinet body along front shall be 1 1/2”. Exposed end overhang shall be 1/2”.

b. Post-formed counter tops shall be PF42 NEMA grade laminate with .020”

backing sheet bonded to 3/4” particleboard substrate. This laminate shall be

heated and then wrapped around the substrate as designed.

c. Back splashes shall be 3/4” thick and 4” high self-edged, unless specified

otherwise.

3.3 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of in wall backing and support framing.

B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are



LAMINATE CASEWORK

placed and ready to receive this work

C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion and

complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.

D. Condition building and woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation

areas before installing.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with AWI Quality Standards (latest edition).

B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. Shim as required with

concealed shims.

C. Scribe work abutting other components or work. Refinish cut surfaces or repair

damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates per AWI

Standards. Secure to grounds, strapping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners

with blind nailing where possible for a complete installation.

E. CABINETS: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide

unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as

indicated.

F. TOPS: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Caulk space

between top/backsplash and wall or between top and adjacent cabinet with specified sealant.

1. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8” in 8’-0”

2. Fasten solid surface & quartz countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base

units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by

manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match

countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual

defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform

appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.

3.6 PROTECTION



LAMINATE CASEWORK

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and

installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of

Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION – 06 4116

FBT Architects - 07 1000 - Under-Slab Vapor Barrier_Retarder [v4.0].docx

07 1000 - 1 UNDER-SLAB VAPOR

BARRIER / RETARDER

SECTION 07 1000 - UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER/RETARDER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Products Supplied Under This Section

1. Vapor Barrier, seam tape, mastic, pipe boots, detail strip for installation under

concrete slabs on grade.

B. RELATED SECTIONS

1. Section 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination

2. Section 03 3000 Cast-in-place Structural Concrete

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM E 1745-11, (2011) Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders

Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

2. ASTM E 154-99 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in

Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs

3. ASTM E 96-95 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

4. ASTM 1643-11, (2011) Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders

Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1. ACI302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring

Materials

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control/ Assurance

1. Manufacturer's samples, literature

2. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of the products certifying that their

products comply with specified requirements.

3. Manufacturer's installation instructions for placement, seaming the pipe boot

installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Review



BARRIER / RETARDER

1. Independent laboratory test results showing compliance with the specified

requirements (woven plastics are not permitted).

2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6300 – Product Substitutions Procedures

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Vapor Barrier (performance based specification). When the specifications of different

sections conflict, the contractor shall perform to the most restrictive provision.

1. Vapor Barrier membrane must have the following properties.

a. Permeance Ratings as per ASTM E-96 or ASTM F-1249

i. New material: Lass than 0.01 perms [grains/(ft²*hr*in-Hg)]

ii. After mandatory conditioning as per ASTM E-154 Sections 8, 11,

12, & 13: Less than 0.01 perms [grains/(ft²*hr*in-Hg)]

b. Strength: ASTM E-1745 Class A

c. Minimum thickness: 15 mils

d. Basis of Design: Stego Wrap 15-mil Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries LLC

e. Acceptable Vapor Barrier Products (must comply with minimum

performance requirements listed):

i. Stego Wrap 15-mil Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries LLC (Basis of

Design).

ii. VaporGaurd by Reef Industries

iii. Vaporflex by Layfield

iv. Prior approved equal complying with all specified requirements

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Seam Tape

1. Tape must have the following qualities:

2. Water Vapor Transmission Rate ASTM E 96 0.3 perms or lower Seam Tape

a. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC

B. Vapor Proofing Mastic

1. Mastic must have the following qualities:

a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate ASTM E 96 0.3 perms or lower Mastic

b. Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC



BARRIER / RETARDER

C. Pipe Boots

1. Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material, pressure sensitive tape and/or

mastic per manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Perimeter/edge seal:

1. Stego Crete Claw by Stego Industries LLC, (887) 464-7834

www.stegoindustries.com

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ensure that subsoil is approved by architect or geotechnical firm

1. Level and tamp or roll aggregate, sand or tamped earth base.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install Vapor Barrier/Retarder:

1. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E

1643-98 (2005).

a. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of

the concrete placement and face laps away from the expected direction of the

placement whenever possible.

b. Extend vapor barrier over footings and grade beams to a distance acceptable

to the structural engineer or stop at impediments such as dowels and

waterstops.

c. Extend vapor barriers in crawl spaces 6” minimum from top of exterior grad

beams.

d. Seal vapor barrier to slab perimeter/edge using Stego Crete Claw and remove

dirt, debris, and mud from Crete Claw prior to concrete placement.

e. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape.

f. Apply tape/Crete Claw to a clean and dry vapor barrier.

g. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer's instructions.

h. No penetration of the Vapor Barrier/Retarder is allowed except for

reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.

i. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of Vapor Barrier/Retarder,

overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape.


FBT Architects - 07 1113 - Bituminous Dampproofing [v4.0].docx

07 1113 - 1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

SECTION 07 1113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of

application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.

B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source

from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of

primary materials.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written

instructions.

B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed

spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. Available Manufactuerers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. ChemMasters Corp.

2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.

3. Henry Company.

4. Karnak Corporation.

5. Meadows, W.R., Inc.



6. Tamms Industries, Inc.

C. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

D. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

2.2 PROTECTION COURSE

A. Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type: ASTM D 6506, premolded, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-)

thick, multi-ply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched

between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film.


A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.

C. Patching Compound: Manufacturer's fibered mastic of type recommended by dampproofing

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface

smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and

penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

2. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being

stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from

entering and clogging weep holes and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and

apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.

C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other

imperfections cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL



A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are

indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of

dampproofing.

1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve

coverages indicated.

2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats.

3. Allow 48 hours drying time prior to backfilling.

B. Apply dampproofing to at the following loctaions:

a. Building wall footing/foundations where exterior finish grade is higher than interior

finish floor

b. Inside of planters

c. Inside of exposed retaining wall faces

d. Elevator pit

1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and

down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing.

2. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto

surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.

3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners,

changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by

embedding an 8-inch-wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of

dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats

required.

4. Apply Protection Course at all locations where landscape material, gravel, crusher

fines or re-vegetative seeding abut dampproofed surface.

C. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner

wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls.

1. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer

ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe.

2. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that

interrupt inner wythe, and lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles

supporting veneer.

D. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on interior face of above-

grade, exterior concrete and masonry walls unless walls are indicated to receive direct

application of paint or vapor barrier.

3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply 1 fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3 gal./100 sq.

ft. (1.2 L/sq. m), or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 L/sq. m).



B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and 1 trowel coat at not less than 5

gal./100 sq. ft. (2 L/sq. m).

C. On Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less

than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m).

D. On Unexposed Face of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at

not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m).

3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE

A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply

with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection

course.

1. Install protection course within 24 hour of installation of dampproofing (while

coating is tacky) to ensure adhesion.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.


FBT Architects – 07 1900 - Water Repellent.doc Farmington Outdoor Aquatics Center

07 1900 - 1 WATER REPELLENT

SECTION 07 1900 - WATER REPELLENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Exterior water and stain repellent coatings for:

a. Cement stucco

d. CMU block

2. Extended written warranty.

B. Related Items:

1. Admixture for concrete block units: Refer to Section 04200

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01300, unless otherwise indicated. Substitution requests must be submitted 14 days

prior to bid date.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and technical data including the following:

1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.

2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3. Certified test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements specified herein.

C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Statement of qualifications.

2. Statement of compliance with Regulatory Requirements.

3. Field Quality Control Submittals as specified in Part 3.

4. Manufacturer’s field reports.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualification: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of

specified products.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm experienced in installation or application of systems similar in

complexity to those required for this Project, plus the following:

1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer.

2. Not less than 3 years experience with systems.

3. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this system.

C. Product Qualifications: The water and stain repellent shall conform to the following

characteristics:

1. Color: clear and beading effect

2. Density: 8.3 lbs/gallon

3. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content: less than 25 grams per liter

4. Toxic Fume Emission During Fire – ISO 5659-2

- None



5. Fire Propagation – UK BS 479 Part 6

- Fire Propagation Index less than 4.0

D. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall comply with State and local regulations concerning AIM

(Architectural, Industrial and Maintenance) coatings regarding Volatile Organic Content (VOC).

1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer’s

identification.

B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations.


A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Maintain ambient temperature above 40 degrees F during and 24 hours after installation.

2. Do not proceed with application on materials if ice or frost is covering the substrate.

3. Do not proceed with application if ambient temperature of surface exceeds 100 degree F.

4. Do not proceed with the application of materials in rainy conditions or if heavy rain is anticipated

with 4 hours after application.

B. Sealer Coordination:

1. Verify compatibility with curing compounds, patching materials, repair mortar, paints, sealants, etc.

to be used on masonry surfaces to ensure compatibility with the water and stain repellent.

1.06 SPECIAL WARRANTIES

A When applied by a pre-approved “Certified Contractor” with an “Certified” Engineer/Consultant, making

all inspections, approving required surface preparation, moisture testing, issuing written reports, and

completing the required tests, Degussa Inc., shall furnish the Owner a written single source

performance warranty that the Water and Stain Repellent will be free of defects related to

workmanship or material deficiency for a five (5) year period from the date of completion

of the work provided under this section of the specification.

B. All defective areas shall be retreated by the system manufacture as determined by the

Engineer/Consultant. The required written warranty shall be provided by the system manufacturer.

C. The Manufacturer shall be responsible for providing material to treat areas of the substrate where sealer

effectiveness does not meet the specified limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Water and stain repellent shall be shall be a ready-to-use, single component, non-solvent-

borne, surface applied product meeting or exceeding the physical and performance

characteristics of the following approved product:



1. Protectosil® AQUA-TRETE® SG, Evonik Degussa A&S Division (1-303-779-0321)

fugitive dye or an anti-microbial may be added if required

2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6300-Product Substitution Procedures

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and

identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Install coverings to protect adjacent surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation:

1. All caulking, joint sealants, repairing, and patching of concrete surfaces shall be installed and cured

before application of repellent.

2. Prior to application of stain repellent, surfaces shall be cleaned by high pressure water and mild

chemical cleaners (as needed) of all dust, dirt, debris, grease, oil, grout, mortar and other foreign

matter.

3 Contaminated areas and new surfaces shall be prepared as recommended by the repellent

manufacturer and acceptable to the Engineer/Consultant.


A. Spray Test: After water and stain repellent has dried, spray coated surfaces with water.

1. After surfaces have adequately dried, recoat surfaces that show water absorption.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Services:

1. Furnish written certification that surface preparation method and final condition has

manufacturer’s approval and comply with the warranty.

2. Test area: Furnish results of test area absorption on each type of substrate. Test results shall

determine application rate.

C. Test Area: Before application of water and stain repellent will be accepted, a test panel will be

applied to the building to verify that no discoloration, darkening or sheen is imparted to the concrete.

Core tests required as appropriate for quality assurance according to Engineer/Consultant.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. Product shall be applied as supplied by the manufacturer without dilution or alteration.

B. Apply with in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations using either spray, brush, or roller.

C. Treat surfaces in a flooding application until the material runs 6 inches and requisite to substrate specifc

requirements, approved by local representative.



D. Apply at temperature and weather conditions recommended by the manufacturer or written in this

specification. Aqua-Trete SG should follow the 100% SIlane sealer by one day and be applied to 10 feet

above grade on walls with stucco finish and full height of exposed masonry walls.

E. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations concerning protection of glass, metal and other non-porous

substrates. Contractor will be responsible to clean all surfaces that are contaminated by the water and

stain repellent.

F. Follow manufacturer’s recommendation concerning protection of plants, grass and other vegetation.

Contractor will be responsible for replacing all plants, grass or vegetation damaged by the water and

Stain repellent.

3.05 CLEANING

A. As Work Progresses: Clean spillage and overspray from adjacent surfaces using materials and methods

as recommended by water and stain repellent manufacturer.

B. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces when no longer needed.

3.06 COMPLETION

A. Work that does not conform to specified requirements shall be corrected and/or replaced as directed

by the Owners Representative at contractor’s expense without extension of time.

END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation [v4.0].docx

07 2100 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed building insulation.

2. Exposed building insulation.

3. Vapor retarders.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Division 4 Section "Reinforced Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls

and masonry cells.

3. Division 7 Section “Masonry Wall Insulation”

4. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Damproofing" for insulation installed with

waterproofing.

5. Division 7 Section “Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.

6. Division 9 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed

assemblies of insulation specified by reference to this Section.

7. Division 21- 23 Sections "Duct Work Insulation” and "Piping Insulation."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for insulation products.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method

indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and

inspecting agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.




A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect Plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and

concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to

Project site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in

each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering


following:

1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:

a. DiversiFoam Products.

b. Dow Chemical Company.

c. Owens Corning.

d. Tenneco Building Products.

e. InsulFoam.

2. Glass-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Johns Manville Corporation.

c. Knauf Fiber Glass.

d. Owens Corning.

3. Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems:

a. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced

standards.



1. Performed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's

standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.

B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below,

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively:

1. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m), unless otherwise indicated.

C. Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Batt Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553,

Types I, II, and III; or ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-

developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; and of the following properties:

1. Nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nor more than 1.7 lb/cu.

ft. (26 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7

K x m/W at 24 deg C).

2. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.

D. Foil-Faced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Batt Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or ASTM C 553,

Types I, II, and III; faced on one side with foil-scrim-kraft vapor retarder; with maximum

flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; and of the following

properties:

1. Nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nor more than 1.7 lb/cu.

ft. (26 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7

K x m/W at 24 deg C).

2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum

permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

2.4 AUXILARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation

securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

1. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.

b. Eckel Industries of Canada Limited; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners.

c. Gemco; Spindle Type.



2. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchor:

a. Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers.

3. Insulation-Retaining Washers:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150.

b. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150.

c. Gemco; Dome-Cap.

d. Gemco; R-150.

e. Gemco; S-150.

4. Anchor Adhesives:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.

b. Eckel Industries of Canada Limited; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive.

c. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.

B. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of

holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking

washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2

inches (50 mm) square.

2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in

diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

C. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting

spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated

with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- (0.762-mm-) thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-

steel sheet with each leg 2 inches (50 mm) square.

2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in

diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

D. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-)

thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to

hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in

diameter.

E. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely

to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.




3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting

performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing

projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer’s written instructions applicable to products and

application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at

any time to ice and snow.

C. Extend insulation or thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit

tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove deleterious projections that

interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls,

coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and

insulation encapsulates piping.

E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are

otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

F. Install foam sill seal gasket between concrete foundation and exterior sill plate.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer’s

written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive

or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic,

or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in



completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation

manufacturer.

C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless

otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.

1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation

to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

D. Install foil-faced, flexible glass-fiber batt insulation exposed to plenum areas

E. Install unfaced flexible glass-fiber insulation in building cavities which are not exposed to

plenum areas

F. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the

following requirements:

1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If

more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a

snug fit between ends.

2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit

between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),

support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling

flanges to flanges of metal studs.

G. Install board insulation on concrete or CMU substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type

insulation anchors as follows:

1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete or CMU substrates with insulation anchor

adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors

according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type,

thickness, and application indicated.

2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between

substrate and insulation.

3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position

over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking

care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.

4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped

washers to tips of spindles.



H. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces. Compact to

approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately

2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). Inject foam insulation into inaccessible cavities.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor

transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend

vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with

loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs.

Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall

openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as

recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor

retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and

vapor retarder.

E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other

work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather

exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures

where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent

construction immediately after installation.


FBT Architects - 07 2119 - Foamed-In-Place Insulation.docxFoamed-in-place Insulation

FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 072119 - 1

SECTION 072119 - FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Closed-cell spray polyurethane foam.

2. Open-cell spray polyurethane foam.


1. Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation" for foam-plastic board insulation.

2. Section 07 5700 "Coated Foamed Roofing" for spray polyurethane foam insulation used

for roofing applications.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Evaluation Reports: For spray-applied polyurethane foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLOSED-CELL SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM

A. Closed-Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam: ASTM C 1029, Type II, minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu.

ft. and minimum aged R-value at 1-inch thickness of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.

1. CertainTeed

2. Dow

3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

4. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.

2.2 OPEN-CELL SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM

A. Open-Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam: Spray-applied polyurethane foam using water as a blowing

agent. Minimum density of 0.4 lb/cu. ft. and minimum aged R-value at 1-inch thickness of 3.4

deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.

1. CertainTeed

2. Dow




b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450or less.

4. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.


A. Primer: Material recommended by insulation manufacturer where required for adhesion of

insulation to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that substrates are clean, dry, and free of substances that are harmful to insulation.



B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer to

comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be

insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.

B. Spray insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated and fill voids.

C. Apply in multiple passes to not exceed maximum thicknesses recommended by manufacturer. Do

not spray into rising foam.

D. Framed Construction: Install into cavities formed by framing members to achieve thickness

indicated on Drawings.

E. Cavity Walls: Install into cavities to fully fill void.

F. Miscellaneous Voids: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and

other causes.


FBT Architects - 07 2726 - Fluid Applied Water & Air Barrier [v4.0].docx

07 2726-1 FLUID APPLIED WATER &

AIR BARRIER

SECTION 07 2726 – FLUID APPLIED WATER & AIR BARRIER

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Manufacturer’s requirements for the proper design, use, and installation of the Installation of

liquid applied water restive barriers.


A. Section 01 3100 – Project Management & Coordination

B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

C. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry

D. Section 06 1600 – Sheathing

E. Section 07 4265 – Thermal Wall system (CI)

F. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

G. Section 07 9000 - Joint Protection

H. Section 08 4113 – Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts

I. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies

J. Section 09 2240 – Three Coat Stucco System

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B117 - Test Method for Salt Spray (Fog) Testing

B. ASTM C1135 - Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of Structural

Sealants

C. ASTM D522 - Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings

D. ASTM D2247 - Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100 Percent Relative

Humidity

E. ASTM D4541 - Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion

Testers

F. ASTM E72 - Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction



AIR BARRIER

G. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

H. ASTM E96 - Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

I. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the

Specimen

J. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

K. ASTM E695 - Method for Measuring Relative Resistance to Impact Loading

L. ASTM E2134 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile-Adhesion Performance of

an Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)

M. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials

N. ASTM E2485 - Standard Test Method for Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and

Finish Systems (EIFS) and Water Resistive Barrier Coatings

O. ASTM G155 and G153 - Accelerated Weathering for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

1.4 DESCRIPTION SPRAY & ROLLER APPLIED BARRIERS

A. 100% acrylic based water-proof membrane and air barrier. Designed for use as water resistive

barrier and air barrier behind EIFS, Stucco and other claddings. This product is installed over

glass mat gypsum sheathing, cement board sheathing, CDX plywood, OSB*, concrete or

CMU.

B. Functional Criteria:

1. General:

a. Flashing: Flashing shall be continuous and watertight. Flashing shall be

designed and installed to prevent water infiltration behind the cladding

material. Refer to Division 07 Flashing Section for specified flashing

materials.

b. The configuration of the water resistive barrier, drainage plane and flashing,

must allow for the egress of incidental moisture.

2. Performance Requirements:

a. System to meet the performance and testing requirements of the International

Council Acceptance Criteria AC 212 and ASTM E2570.



AIR BARRIER

Parex USA

Weatherseal Method

ICC and ASTM E2570

Criteria Results

Accelerated

Weathering AC 212

25 Cycles followed by

Hydrostatic Pressure Test:

No water penetration on the

plane of the exterior facing

side of the substrate.

Pass: no water penetration

Air Infiltration ASTM E2178

Calculated flow Rate at 75

Pa (1.57 lb/ft2, 0.3 in H2O)

=

< 0.02 L/m2*s (< 0.004

cfm/ft2)

< .00001 L/m2*s (0.00001

cfm/ft2) at 75 Pa (1.57 lb/ft2,

0.3 in H2O)

Air Leakage ASTM E283 No Criteria < 0.004 cfm/ft2

Freeze-Thaw

Resistance ASTM E 2485 10 Cycles Pass – No Deleterious Effects

Hydrostatic

Pressure Test

AATCC 127

(Water

Column)

Resist 21.6 in (55 cm)

water for 5 hours before

and after aging

Pass: no water penetration

Elongation ASTM D412 No Criteria 360%

Flexibility ASTM D522 No Criteria No Cracking at 1/8” (3 mm)

Nail Seal

ability, Head of

Water

ASTM D1970 No Criteria Pass 5 inches of water

Racking ASTM E72 Deflection at 1/8 in (3.2

mm)

Pass -No cracking at field,

joints or flashing connection

Restrained

Environmental

ICC ES AC

212 / ASTM

E2570

5 Cycles of wetting and

drying



Structural

Loading

ASTM E1233

Procedure A

10 Cycles @ 80% design

load



Surface

Burning

Characteristics

ASTM E84

ICC and ASTM E2568

Flame Spread <25

Smoke Developed <450

Flame Spread =0

Smoke Developed =0



AIR BARRIER

Tensile Bond

Strength

ASTM E

2134/ ASTM

C 297

Minimum 15 psi (104 kPa) Pass all listed substrates and

flashing materials

Water

Resistance

ASTM D

2247 14 Days Pass – No Deleterious Effects.

Water

Penetration ASTM E331

2.86 psf (137 Pa) for 15

minutes

Pass 25.4 psf (1216 Pa) for

165 minutes

Water

Penetration ASTM E331

Tested after Structural

Loading, Racking and

Restrained Environmental

Cycling at 2.86 psf (137 Pa)

for 15 minutes

No Water Penetration

Water vapor

transmission

ASTM E96

Procedure B Vapor Permeable 7 perms

Weathering

ICC ES AC

212 / ASTM

E2570

210 hours of UV Exposure,

25 cycles of accelerated

weatherin, 21.6 in (549

mm) water column for 5

hours

Pass

Wind Driven

Rain

F.S. TT-C-

555B No Criteria Pass

VOC

EPA

Reference

Test Method

24

US EPA, South Coast

AQMD and Greenseal

Standard

10 g/L

Regional

Harvest LEED MRc 5.1 100% at all facilities

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit Samples, Evaluation Reports and Certificates in accordance with Division

01 General Requirements Submittal Section.


A. Mock-Up: See section 03-3100 Project Management and Coordination for Building

Assemblies Mock-up requirements.

B. Qualifications:



AIR BARRIER

1. All materials shall be manufactured or sold by Water Resistive Barrier manufacturer

or purchased from manufacturer or its authorized distributor.

2. Applicator:

a. Shall have attended an Educational Seminar.

b. Shall possess a current certificate of education.

c. Shall be experienced and competent in installation of plaster-like materials.


A. Deliver in original packaging with manufacturer’s identification.

B. Storage: Store materials in a cool, dry location, out of sunlight, protected from weather and

other harmful environment, and at a temperature above 40°F (4°C) and below 110°F (43°C)

in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.8 PROJECT/ SITE CONDITIONS

A. Installation Ambient Air Temperature: Minimum of 40 °F (4 °C) and rising, and remain so

for 24 hours thereafter.

B. Substrate Temperature: Do not materials to substrates whose temperature are below 40 °F (4

°C) or contain frost or ice.

C. Inclement Weather: Do not apply materials during inclement weather, unless appropriate

protection is employed.

D. Materials shall not be applied if ambient temperature exceeds 120ºF (49ºC) or falls below 40

°F (4 °C) within 24 hours of application. Protect base coat from uneven and excessive

evaporation during hot, dry weather.

E. Prior to installation, the wall shall be inspected for surface contamination, or other defects

that may adversely affect the performance of the materials and shall be free of residual

moisture.

1.9 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING:

A. Coordination installation with other construction operations.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: At completion of installation, provide Standard Limited Warranty.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



AIR BARRIER

A. Basis of Design: Parex USA, Inc., 4125 E. La Palma Ave., Suite 250, Anaheim, CA 92807

Contact Andy Townes at 505-338-443 or [email protected]

B. BASF Enershield HP

C. Components: Obtain components from authorized distributors. No substitutions or additions

of other materials are permitted without prior written permission from specified material

manufacturer for this project.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6300 Product Substitution Procedures

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Water-Resistive Barrier Coating:

1. Parex USA Weatherseal Spray & Roll-On: A non-cementitious, 100% acrylic

trowelable air/weather barrier.

2. Parex 396 Sheathing Tape: Non-woven synthetic fiber tape to reinforce Weatherseal

Spray & Roll-On at sheathing board joints, into rough openings and other

terminations into dissimilar materials available in 4 in, 6 in and 9 in.

3. Flashing Membrane: Self-sealing, Polyester faced, rubberized asphalt membrane, 30

mils (0.76 mm) thick.

2.3 RELATED MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Substrate Materials:

1. Glass mat gypsum sheathing conforming to ASTM C1 177.

2. Cement Fiber Sheathing conforming to ASTM C1186

3. Gypsum Sheathing: Minimum 1/2" (13 mm) thick, core-treated, weather-resistant,

exterior gypsum sheathing complying with ASTM C79.

4. Plywood: Minimum 7/16" (8 mm) thick exterior grade or PS 1, Exposure 1,

minimum 7/16" thick, C veneer facing out, panels gapped 1/8 " at all edges.

5. Oriented Strand Board (OSB): 7/16" - 1/2" Wall-16 or Wall-24, approved by the

APA, TECO, or PSI/PTL. Stamped as Exposure 1 or Exterior Sheathing with a PS2

or PRP-108 rating.

6. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Non-painted (uncoated).

7. Concrete (poured or pre-cast).

8. Other Approved by Parex USA in writing prior to the project.

B. Flashing as required.


3.1 EXAMINATION



AIR BARRIER

A. Verify project site conditions under provisions of Section 01 0000.

B. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation.

C. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to liquid applied installation as follows:

1. Substrate shall be of a type approved by manufacturer. Plywood and OSB substrates

shall be gapped 1/8 in (3.2 mm) at all edges. Plywood and OSB substrates cut edges

(non-factory edges) must be sealed with liquid water-resistive coating and sheathing

tape.

2. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and other harmful conditions.

3. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence, and other harmful

contaminants.

4. Substrate construction in accordance with substrate material manufacturer's

specifications and applicable building codes.

5. Maximum deflection of the substrate shall be determine by the requirements of the

exterior cladding.

D. Flashing: Flashing should be installed prior to the barrier application and incorporated with

the flashing to create positive drainage.

E. Advise Contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the barrier. Do not proceed

with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect surrounding material surfaces and areas during installation of system.

B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 MIXING

A. Mix products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. General: Installation shall conform to this specification written instructions.

1. Flash all rough openings with liquid membrane and embed with sheathing tape or

polyester backed peel and stick flashing membrane.

2. Treat all sheathing joints with liquid water-resistive barrier sheathing tape.

3. Apply liquid water-resistive barrier to the surface of the substrate (Minimum 2 coats

on plywood, OSB, concrete and masonry).



AIR BARRIER

4. Ensure that the liquid barrier laps onto all tracks and flashing to allow for any water

to be drained into the tracks/flashing.

3.5 CLEAN-UP

A. Removal: Remove and legally dispose of component debris material from job site.

B. Clean surfaces and work area of foreign materials resulting from installations.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them.

B. Provide protection of installed stucco from dust, dirt, precipitation, and freezing during

installation.

C. Provide protection of installed finish from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous

high humidity until finally cured and dry.

D. Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of

the material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace work that cannot be cleaned to the

satisfaction of the Project Designer/Owner.


FBT Architects - 07 4170 - Induction Welded Membrane Roofing [v4.0].docx

07 4190 - 1 INDUCTION WELDED MEMBRANE ROOFING

SECTION 07 4190 - INDUCTION WELDED MEMBRANE SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, general project requirements, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install an 80 mil thickness, white, polyester scrim reinforced, PVC or TPO elastomeric sheet roofing membrane system. Membrane shall be a high molecular weight PVC or TPO polymer membrane. Installed system shall include; inducted welded plates & fasteners, insulation, flashing, sealants and all accessories and labor necessary for a complete insulated sheet roofing assembly.

B. For bidding purposes both PVC and TPO Membrane systems are approved products. Contractor has the option of installing either material. Once a membrane system selection has been made, all products and components of the system installed for the project shall be compatible. The contractor is responsible for providing compatible products and any replacement or reinstallation will be completed with no additional cost to the owner.

C. Furnish and install this membrane roofing system in strict accordance with Drawings and

Specifications approved by Roof Systems Manufacturer. If conflicts in application arise, material will be installed in accordance with the most strict requirements between the contract

documents, NRCA standards and manufacturer’s requirements most strict recommendations. D. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 1000- Rough Carpentry 2. Section 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim 3. Section 07 7100 – Manufactured Roof Specialties 4. Section 07 9000 – Joint Sealant

1.3 REFERENCES A. Current IBC-International Building Code-Roofing Related Sections

B. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials. C. Factory Mutual (FM) Engineering Corporation - Roof Assembly Classifications. D. ASCE-7- American Society of Civil Engineers-Current Version for Wind Load Pressure

Calculation Procedures E. NRCA – National Roofing Contractors Association.

F. SMACNA – Sheet Metal and Air Conditioners National Association.



G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - Fire Hazard Classifications. H. FS – Federal Standard I. ANSI / SPRI ES-1 - (see also, 2009 IBC Section 1504.5)

1.4 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATION

A. A large part of the value of this work is contained in the bidder’s and the bidder’s proposed manufacturer’s capacity to provide long-term responsibility for the satisfactory performance of the roof. A 20-year, no dollar limit warranty for the benefit of the Owner is required. To that end, the following requirements are essential provisions of this specification:

1. By offering a bid for this work, the bidder certifies that he has visited the site and determined that all the conditions of the surrounding and underlying work are consistent with his proposed manufacturer’s requirements for the specified warranty. In the event that the bidder discovers any condition of the surrounding and underlying work that would prevent him or his manufacturer from providing the specified warranty, he shall report it to the design professional not less than ten days prior to the bid opening.

2. By offering a bid for this work, the bidder certifies that he has examined the Contract Documents, can meet all imposed time completion requirements and has found all the details and requirements of the scope of work are complete and consistent with his proposed manufacturer’s requirements for the specified warranty. In the event that the bidder discovers any detail or requirement in the Contract Documents that would prevent him or his manufacturer from providing the specified warranty, he shall report it to the design professional not less than ten days prior to the bid opening. After the work has been awarded, no additional concessions will be paid to the contractor for modifications to details required to meet manufacturer’s warranty.

3. By offering a bid for this work, the bidder certifies that he can, within ten calendar days of a notice of award from the Insurer, provide a surety bond for the performance of the work, a surety bond for payment of labor and materials, and a specimen warranty certificate from the manufacturer whose system that is proposed to be used on the project.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications

1. The manufacturer of the roofing system shall be the actual manufacturer of the roofing materials. The insulation and the component materials can be made by others, all testing requirements and implied warranties must be verifiable and labeled under the roofing manufactures name. All manufactures and sub manufactures shall have not less than fifteen (15) years experience in the production of thermoplastic membrane roof systems and their components. Manufacturer must provide approved uplift testing for induction welded roof systems.



2. The manufacturer shall certify the scrim reinforced membrane meets the physical properties specified.

3. The contractor shall include a certification from the manufacturer, on the manufacturer’s letterhead, that the proposed membrane, insulation and accessories will be covered in the warranty by the manufacturer of record.

B. Installer Qualifications

1. Applicator: A company approved by Manufacturer, and specializing in single-ply roofing systems with at least twenty (20) installations of thermoplastic, scrim reinforced membrane and 5 installations of heat inducted systems. The crew shall be composed of experienced installers skilled in this roof assembly. The contractor shall provide a superintendent /foreman on site full time that is aware of all project aspects and authorized to make on site decisions as required. The contractor will be required to properly staff the project at all times.

C. Inspections

1. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative: The manufacturer of the roofing system shall be required to attend the roof pre-installation conference to accept the conditions of the work and to perform interim inspections during installation. After the roof installation is complete, the manufacturer’s technical representative, unrelated to the sales department of the manufacturer, shall inspect the work and inform (by written report) the design professional, contractor, Insurer/Insurer’s consultant and the installer of defective/incomplete work to be remedied. Those areas indicated shall be corrected to the full satisfaction of the design professional, Insurer, and manufacturer. Copies of all inspection reports from the manufacturer shall be promptly submitted to the design professional and the roofing consultant. The manufacturer shall submit written acceptance of the project to the design professional in issuance of the weather-tightness warranty and that the system has been installed according to the Manufacturer's published specifications and details. Report describing inspections, corrective actions and certifying manufacturer's acceptance of installation shall be submitted to the Architect in accordance with Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.

2. Roofing Consultant: The owner reserves the right to retain, at the owner’s expense, an independent consultant service to review construction documents and provide full-time inspection of the roofing system installation. The inspector shall have free access to inspect and test all items related to the project and the work area. The consultant/inspector will be responsible for accepting the installed roofing on behalf of the Insurer. The roofing contractor/general contractor will keep the consultant informed of all schedules, delays and inspections of the manufacturer (2 week notice)

E. Work shall conform to:

1. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Latest Editions.

2. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 2003 Edition.

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification.

4. IBC International Building Code: related current code requirements.



5. ASCE-7- American Society of Civil Engineers-Wind Load Pressure Calculation Procedures and requirements.

6. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM): Roof assembly classification with a minimum of a wind uplift fastening pattern based of FM 1-75. Construction Bulletin 1-28, latest Edition to include perimeter and corner enhancements.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating;

a. Roof size, location, and type of penetrations required.

b. Roof assembly composition and attachment to deck.

c. Insulation assembly and cricket layout plan with cross sections and slope of tapered insulation.

d. Insulation fastening patterns that are required to conform to wind uplift design based on FM 1-75 insulation fastening requirements at the field, including enhancements at perimeter and corners.

e. Roof perimeter and corner areas as defined by FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 with the width dimensioned for each roof section.

f. Complete set of details for all perimeters, drains, penetration and roof accessories flashings and terminations and manufacturer’s published installation procedure details. All termination details must conform to project specifications and detail drawings provided.

g. All roof related sheet metal items submitted in conformance with the submittal requirements of Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim specification section, as well as SMACNA approved designs. Flashings at roof perimeters shall be certified ANSI / SPRI ES-1 details. (See also, 2009 IBC Section 1504.5).

2. Product Data Submittals:

a. Provide technical product data sheets on ALL materials and accessories that are to be used in the roof assembly and associated with the roof including UL product listing and FM System listing for each type of insulation. The data sheets should be clearly marked where choices occur for type and thicknesses.

b. The Insulation manufacturer shall certify a warranty to the membrane manufacturer in order to meet the complete system warranty.

c. For fasteners that are to penetrate into, or through, pressure preservative treated lumber use stainless steel, hot dipped galvanized coated or provide certification from manufacturer that coating is compatible with preservative used for wood treatment.



d. Manufactures acknowledge letter showing the requirements of attachment, required products, acceptance of details and assemblies.

e. Provide a complete phone list and resumes of all superintendents and foremen that will be on the projects as out lined in spec section 2.1, B.

3. Fire Resistance: Provide roofing system, insulation, and component materials that have been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by UL for Class A external fire exposure over decks specified herein. Provide confirmation in submittal package.

4. Wind Uplift: Provide rigid insulation, roofing system, and component materials as specified and that have been tested as a complete system for application for the structural deck and slopes for this project. The system needs to be listed in Factory Mutual Research Approval Guide. Provide attachment to the deck that meets FM 1-75 membrane/insulation fastening requirements. Submit data that confirms this requirement.

5. Copy of certificate documenting manufacturer's approval of installer as required in Paragraph 1.4-B-1.

6. Copies of test reports showing compliance with requirements as specified in Paragraph 2.02.

7. Samples:

a. 12 inch square minimum sample of roofing membrane including lap seam

b. Sample RhinoBond Plate and fastener provided by the membrane manufacturer.

8. Provide copy of manufacturers’ printed installation instructions and current recommendations.

9. Provide certification that Manufacture has accepted the proposed roof assembly and that the assembly will be eligible for their 20 year total system N.D.L. warranty.

10. Provide copy of warranties required in Paragraph 1.6 for review and approval by design professional. Warranty shall include a minimum wind speed warranty of 72mph.

11. Provide proposed Over Night seal detail including product data sheets.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide roofing manufacturer's total system leak-tight 20-year labor and 20-year material "No Dollar Limit Warranty,” including insulation and all components. The warranty shall contain no exclusion or limitation for improper installation, damage from water that ponds, or does not drain freely. Provide all details necessary to qualify for manufacturer’s “No Dollar Limit Warranty” and the manufacturer will respond within 48 hours and repair, within five (5) business days, any leaks in the roofing assembly for the warranty period stated above at no cost to the owner, unless the leak is determined to be caused by others. The warranty shall cover wind speeds up to and including 72 mph.



B. Roofer’s Guarantee: Provide written guarantee from the Contractor stating that the Contractor will respond within 24 hours and repair within five (5) business days, any leaks in the roofing assembly for 2 years at no cost to the owner.

1.8 PRE INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Conduct a pre-installation conference prior to commencing work of this section at project site under provisions in Section 01 3100 – Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system or whose work will interface with the roof assembly as part of the building envelope.

7. Review governing regulations and safety requirements.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

9. Review the number of 40 hour working weeks (or number of working days) that will be required to fully complete the roof installation and associated metal work.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in unopened containers showing brand names and instructions.

B. Store and protect temperature sensitive products in 55° to 80°F environment prior to usage. Store flammable or toxic material according to label instruction. Store each product in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.

C. Protect insulation from direct exposure to sunlight and moisture. For polyisocyanurate insulation, follow the recommendations of PIMA and the manufacturer’s requirements.

D. Mark wet, damaged & defective materials and remove from site the same day



1.10 JOB SITE CONSIDERATIONS (CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS)

A. Keep all adhesives, sealants and cleaning materials away from ALL ignition sources (i.e., torches, flames, fire, sparks, etc.).

B. Consult container labels and Material Safety Data Sheets for specific safety instructions for all products used on the project.

C. All bonding, splicing, and sealing surfaces must be free of dirt, moisture, and any other contaminants.

D. When the outside temperature is below 40°F (4.44°C), certain combinations of temperature and humidity may cause condensation on the surface of the membrane Bonding Adhesive. If this condition occurs, do not mate the surfaces. When the ambient air-conditions no longer cause condensation, apply additional Bonding Adhesive and proceed.

E. If Bonding Adhesive is used, temperature must be 40°F (4.44°C) and rising for the material to perform as designed.

F. Do not use open flame sources (i.e., propane torches, etc.) to expedite drying of adhesives, sealants, etc. Allow to air dry only.

G. Do not thin or modify any materials.

H. Deliver materials to job site in their original containers as labeled by the manufacturer.

I. Follow directions for protection of materials prior to and during installation. Do not use materials that have been damaged to the point that they will not perform as specified.

J. Care should be used when installing fasteners to avoid possible conduits and other piping in and under the deck.

K. Fumes from adhesive solvents may be drawn into the building during installation, through rooftop intakes. Refer to the Technical Information Sheet “Recommended Guidelines for Application of Roofing Materials to an Occupied Building” in the manufactures manual for specific guidelines.

L. Store the membrane in the original undisturbed plastic wrap in a cool shaded area and cover



with light-colored, breathable tarpaulins, in a manner to protect it from damage. membrane that has been exposed to the elements for approximately 12 hours or more must be prepared with (Splice Wash) prior to hot air welding.

M. The membrane is a reflective membrane. Adequate UV eye protection is necessary during installation.

N. Do not use oil base or bituminous base roof cement with PVC or TPO Membrane.

O. Contact Manufactures Technical Services and provide procedures for installing the membrane during temperatures less than 40°F (4.44°C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Roof System shall be a UL Class A rated system and attached to the deck in accordance with wind uplift designs based on FM I-75 fastening requirements including corner and perimeter enhancements for induction welded systems.

B. At all times the job must be staffed with trained employees in the system specified. There must be a superintendent in charge of the project at all times. The superintendent must be onsite as required to make sure the installation is completed properly and for all meetings. There must be a trained foreman on each project full time overseeing all aspects of the installation.

2.2 MEMBRANE

A. Induction Welded, 80 mil thickness, polyester scrim reinforced membrane.

B. Approved PVC Manufacturers:

1. Sika Sarnafil S-327 Membrane

2. Johns Manville – JM PVC (KEE) Membrane Polyester reinforced

3. Carlisle –Sureflex KEE

4. GAF – Everguard Membrane

C. Approved TPO Manufacturers:

1. Firestone

2. Carlisle

3. Johns Manville

D. Requests for approval shall be submitted a minimum of 10 days prior to bid, in order to



give the Owner Adequate time to review the proposal. The request shall be a complete package as noted below. Requirements to obtain consideration for approval of product include: (submit on Manufacturers letterhead)

1. Complete specification with details for Designers review, along with certification from Manufacturer of substitute membrane that proposed material and system is in compliance with the requirements of this specification.

2. Proof of experience as a manufacturer of the proposed membrane, with a minimum of five (5) years experience with thermoplastic membrane.

3. Provide manufacturer certification that membrane contains no liquid plasticizers, and must be high molecular weight PVC or TPO polymers.

4. Provide manufacturers listing of common chemicals that may affect the membrane or the roof system in general.

5. Verification of UL Class A and FM system rating with a membrane attachment and maximum sheet width, in order to minimize seams on the roof. Every roll of membrane shall be UL labeled.

6. Provide adequate background information to the owner, to demonstrate that manufacturer has the capability to service, and back the Warranty for the term herein specified.

2.3 ROOF MEMBRANE

A. Membrane Sheet Material: Membrane shall be 80 mil thickness, white membrane polyester reinforced. The sheet physical properties must be actual tested properties of the sheet, not typical or hypothetical values. Membrane must meet or exceed the physical properties of ASTM 4434 for PVC roofing membranes and ASTM D-6878-11 for TPO roofing membranes.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Flashing: Same membrane as Roofing (60 mil reinforced). For field fabricated vent stacks, pipes and corners provide unreinforced 55mil uncured white membrane.

B. Bonding Adhesive: Standard bonding adhesive provided by Manufacturer to hold flashings in place. Do not apply in seam areas.

C. PVC or TPO Coated Metal: as detailed in the plans other wise use specified colored finished metal as detailed.

D. Sealant: Provide to serve as water cut-off mastic, pitch-box sealer, and to caulk Ethylene Propylene membrane edge to metal. Provide cut edge sealant where required.

E. Primer: For preparing contaminated membrane for hot-air welding.

F. Seam Caulk: Shall be provided for the purpose of sealing any non encapsulated edge of reinforced membrane.

G. Overnight Seal: As provided by Manufacturer. All seals must be maintained every night.

H. Sealants: Sealants not a part of the Roofing System shall be compatible with membrane materials and applied according to manufacturer's instructions. Acceptable sealants are one part polysulfide and one part urethane.



I. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturer provided fasteners designed for use on Project roof deck based on requirements of induction welded membrane assemblies. Where installation incorporates insulation within the system, provide fasteners with anti-blackout devices as required by each manufacturer. Mechanical fasteners at exposed deck locations must penetrate the top deck flute and not extend more than 3/4” below the bottom of the deck flutes.

J. Polyurethane Insulation Foam Adhesive: One part or two part as recommended by the Manufacturer to adhere insulation in place and applied to meet wind uplift requirements.

K. Foam Backer Rod: Provide acceptable foam backer rod materials for expansion joints or other building envelope interfaces.

L. Nailers: No. 2 or better, pressure preservative treated lumber using specified preservatives.

M. Seam Cleaner: Use a surface cleaner at dirty or contaminated membrane prior to heat weld.

N. Termination Bar: As provided by manufacturer fastened 6” O.C.

O. Pipe Boots & Corners: Provide O.055 inches unsupported membrane flashing at 1” to 6” diameter pipes and at inside and outside corners.

P. Edge Metal Systems: As specified in Section 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim and/or as detailed in plans.

Q. Counterflashings: As specified in Section 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim and/or as detailed in plans. Regardless of manufacturer’s requirements, two piece counter flashings shall be installed where detailed on drawings or details.

R. Only Cast Iron drain strainer baskets in roof drains will be allowed.

S. Clean drains and pipes to insure that blockage doesn’t exist.

T. Walk Pad: Provide heavy embossed tread pad by membrane manufacture. Recycled products will be provided where possible.

U. T-Joints shall be installed on T- Joints.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION PRODUCTS

A. INSULATION

1. Description: Roof insulation consisting of closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core and glass reinforced mat laminated to the face. Nominal Size is 48”x 48” for adhesive application or 48”x 96” for mechanically attached application.

a. Reference Standards:

(1). FS HH-I-1972/Gen.

(2). FS HH-I-1973/3.

(3). ASTM C 209 - Water Absorption.

(4). ASTM E 96-Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

(5). ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Strength.

(6). ASTM D 1622 – Density.

(7). ASTM D 2126 - Dimensional Stability.



(8). ASTM E 84 - Flame Spread.

2. Provide a minimum of two layers of insulation. Minimum of 20 psi compressive strength, square edge

B. COVERBOARD

1. Cover board shall be either of the following as approved by membrane manufacturer for total system warranty, induction weld criteria and roof system code requirements, see drawings.

a. 1/4” DensDeck, or equal at all locations of standard metal deck

b. 5/8” DensDeck or equal at all Long Span Acoustic Deck locations.

D. INSULATION ATTACHMENT

1. Mechanical Fasteners:

a. Attach insulation using Fasteners and Insulation Plates in accordance with the manufacturer’s Induction Welded assembly to comply with the wind uplift design based on FM 1-75 as detailed in the specifications above. In a multi-layer insulation assembly, the type and thickness of the top layer of insulation determine fastening pattern. Insulation fasteners shall penetrate the top of the flutes and shall be sufficient to penetrate deck a minimum of ¾” for steel and 1” for wood and concrete. Structural concrete decks must be pre-drilled with a 7/32” carbide drill bit to a depth ½” deeper than the fastener engagement. Roofing contractor is liable for replacing fasteners that extend beyond the bottom of the flutes.

b. Reference Standard: SAE 1022, Heat Treated.

c. Product/Producer: Heavy Duty (HD) fasteners.

d. Provide fasteners sufficient to produce FM I-75 uplift resistance attachment patterns to the deck.

E. JOB REQUIREMENTS

1. Flat roof areas

a. Install specified deck cover material over structural metal deck. b. Polyisocyanurate Flat Insulation: Average R=30, 2 layers minimum,

cured value. See drawings for specific areas. c. Polyisocyanurate Tapered Insulation: Installed tapered insulation must

provide a ¼” per foot slope unless noted otherwise. Use 1.5” minimum start with an average R value of R=30.

d. Polyisocyanurate Crickets: Installed must provide at least a ¼” per foot reverse slope greater than the slope of the field. (Example: ¼” roof slope = ½” cricket) Install ½” to 0” taper edge board along cricket and field connection. Crickets drawn on drawings are shown for intent only. All crickets should be installed at a minimum 3 to 1 length to width ration and increased as necessary to provide positive drainage.

e. Install specified coverboard as top layer over the insulation and cricket layers.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install membrane and accessories in accordance with plans, specifications and manufacturer's specifications and current recommendations following the most stringent requirement of the three.

B. Do not expose the building and materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during the same day

C. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.

3.02 DECK EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Inspect roof decks for deficiencies and report to the Design Professional immediately any deficiencies. Do not proceed with installation of roof, until all deficiencies have been corrected. Start of roofing shall constitute acceptance of deck.

1. Verify that deck is supported, secured and free of depressions.

2. Verify that metal deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.

3. Verify that roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts & vents through roof are solidly set and wood nailers are in place

4. On roofs to be recovered, remove and replace any wet roofing and insulation, and remove base flashings, penetration flashings, gravel surfacing, blisters and ridges.

5. On roofs to be replaced, remove all roofing to the deck. Clean deck of all debris.

3.03 PHASED CONSTRUCTION & COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS

A. Phased construction will not be permitted on this project.

B. Once roofing operations are started, the roofing application, including all associated metal work, must be continuous and finalized with all punch lists completed in the number of work days calculated as follows:

1. 4,000 SF/40 hr Work week Completion Rate

2. Total SF of roofing area / Completion Rate = Number of 40-hr Working Weeks to complete the total roof installation.

The contractor will be responsible for additional fees for additional inspection time resulting from the contractor not completing the roofing installation in the allotted time period. The additional inspection fee is $750.00 per day.



3.04 WOOD NAILER LOCATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install wood nailers at roof edges, metal flashings, gutters, and elsewhere as shown on Drawings and approved shop drawings or as required by system manufacturer Install wood nailers as follows:

1. Position Wood Nailer: Wood nailers should be installed with a 1/8" gap between each length and each change of direction.

2. Nailer Height: The nailer height must match the total thickness of insulation. Where tapered insulation is used, the wood nailer must be tapered so that it will always be flush at the point of contact with the insulation (refer to Details).

3. Secure Wood Nailer: Fasten to structural roof and wall framing or deck with fastener heads countersunk with the surface of the nailer. Mechanically fasten wood nailers to resist 200 pounds force per linear foot of nailer in any direction. Nailers must be firmly fastened to the deck at 18 inches o c.

4. Chemical Treating of Wood Nailer: Chemical treating for fire resistance or other purposes (other than pressure treating for rot resistance) may affect the performance of the Membrane and accessories. Consult Manufacturer’s Technical Services Department regarding compatibility.

5. Treated Wood Fasteners: All fasteners used in wood that has been pressure treated with preservatives must be hot dipped galvanized coated, stainless steel or approved in writing by the fastener manufacturer for use in treated wood.

3.05 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install Insulation: Install only as much insulation as can be covered with roofing membrane and completed before the end of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather.

B. Fit Insulation: Neatly fit insulation to all penetrations, projections, and nailers. Insulation should be loosely fitted, with gaps greater than 1/4" being filled with acceptable insulation. Under no circumstances should the membrane be left unsupported over a space greater than 1/4". Tapered or feathered insulation should be installed around roof drains so as to provide proper slope for drainage.

C. Crickets: Crickets on plans are shown for intent only. The contractor is responsible for installing the crickets with a sufficient length to width ratio to provide positive drainage to drains/scuppers. If the crickets are overlaid with a layer of insulation, a row of fasteners should be applied along the cricket valley line to insure the overlay conforms to the cricket configuration. If the crickets are installed on top of all insulation, a tapered edge strip sized from the cricket edge height down to 0” shall be installed.

D. Insulation Attachment to Deck:

1. Mechanically Attachment: Attach insulation using Fasteners and Insulation Plates in accordance with the manufacturer’s Induction Welded assembly to comply with the wind uplift design based on FM 1-75 as detailed in the specifications above. In a multi-layer insulation assembly, the type and thickness of the top layer of insulation determine fastening



pattern. Insulation fasteners shall penetrate the top of the flutes and shall not extend into the building interior. Fastener length shall be sufficient to penetrate deck a minimum of ¾” for steel and 1” for wood and concrete. Structural concrete decks must be pre-drilled with a 7/32” carbide drill bit to a depth ½” deeper than the fastener engagement. Roofing contractor is liable for replacing fasteners that extend beyond the bottom of the flutes. Mechanical fasteners at exposed metal deck locations must not extend more than 1” below the bottom of the deck flutes.

E. Stagger Insulation Joints: All joints are to be staggered. When installing multiple layers of insulation, all joints between layers should be staggered.

3.06 COVER BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Stagger Joints: All joints are to be staggered. Fasten per manufacturers recommendations.

3.07 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Starting at the low point of the roof, place the membrane panels without stretching over the acceptable substrate. Position subsequent membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping the ends of adjoining sheets a minimum of 3" and side laps a minimum of 6". Install panels to insure that laps shed water.

B. Where Membrane has been cut to expose reinforcing membrane, Membrane Cut Edge Sealant or must be used to encapsulate exposed edge.

C. Weld membrane to Rhino fasteners using induction welding tools as recommended by manufacturer, following specified pattern provided by manufacturer

D. Follow manufacturers direction for verification of induction welding procedure of plate bonded attachment of membrane.

E. For corners and perimeters follow enhancement patterns as specified for FM 1-75 uplift design requirements.

3.08 MEMBRANE LAP SPLICING

A. Lap splice areas that have been contaminated must be wiped down with a dry or damp (water only) clean cloth prior to heat welding and allow to completely dry.

B. All field and flashing splices on the horizontal surface shall be completed using an automatic heat welder that has been designed for hot air welding of membranes.

C. Hand held welders are only to be used on vertical welds or where an automatic welder is not practical or cannot be used.



D. Seams made with the automatic welder shall be a minimum of 1-1/2" wide. Seams made with hand welders shall be a minimum of 2" wide. Use 2" side silicone or silicone coated steel hand rollers to assure proper mating of surfaces as hand heat welding proceeds.

E. Probe all completed welds using a slotted screwdriver or cotter pin puller type tool to verify seam integrity. Do not probe welds until they have had time to cool to ambient conditions. Any welds found to be insufficiently welded need to be repaired on a daily basis.

3.09 MEMBRANE SECUREMENT

A. Mechanical Fasteners:

1. Attach insulation using Fasteners and Insulation Plates in accordance with the manufacturer’s Induction Welded assembly to comply with the wind uplift design based on FM 1-75 as detailed in the specifications above. In a multi-layer insulation assembly, the type and thickness of the top layer of insulation determine fastening pattern. Insulation fasteners shall penetrate the top of the flutes and shall be sufficient to penetrate deck a minimum of ¾” for steel and 1” for wood and concrete. Structural concrete decks must be pre-drilled with a 7/32” carbide drill bit to a depth ½” deeper than the fastener engagement. Roofing contractor is liable for replacing fasteners that extend beyond the bottom of the flutes.

B. Secure field membrane with term bar up at perimeter edges on all walls, curbs, penetrations 2’ or greater and apply term bar sealant to provide compression seal. Term bar shall be attached at 12” o.c.

3.10 FLASHING - PENETRATIONS

A. General:

1. Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane.

2. The flashing seal must be made directly to the penetration.

B. Pipes, Round Supports, etc.

1. Flash with Pre-Molded PVC or TPO Pipe Flashings where practical

2. Flash using PVC or TPO unsupported Flashing membrane when Pre-Molded Flashing is not practical.

C. Roof Drains

1. Provide a clean even finish on the mating surfaces between the clamping ring and the drain bowl.

2. Taper insulation around the drain to provide a smooth transition from the roof surface to the drain.

3. Place sealant on top of drain bowl where the clamping ring seats below membrane.



4. Install the roof drain clamping ring and clamping bolts. Tighten the clamping bolts to achieve constant compression.

D. Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shaped Penetrations

1. Fabricate penetration pockets to allow a minimum clearance of 1" between the penetration and all sides.

2. Secure penetration pockets per Manufacturers recommendations.

3. Fill penetration pockets with Pourable Sealer, so as to shed water.

E. Flexible Penetrations

1. Provide a weather tight gooseneck set in Water Block Seal and secured to the deck.

2. Flash in accordance with Manufacturers Details.

F. Scuppers

1. Provide new Memebrane coated welded watertight scuppers.

2. Set welded watertight scupper in Water Block Seal and secure to the structure.

3. Flash in accordance with Manufacturers and Plan details.

G. Expansion Joints

1. Install as shown on roof drawings in accordance with Manufacturers details.

3.11 FLASHING - WALLS, PARAPETS, MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CURBS, SKYLIGHTS, etc.

A. General:

Using the longest pieces practical, flash all walls, parapets, curbs, etc., a minimum of 8" high per Manufacturers Details. When flashings will not achieve a minimum 8” finished flashing height, contact manufacturer for recommended details and approvals and notify specifier/owner of conditions.

B. Evaluate Substrate:

Evaluate the substrate and overlay per Manufacturers specifications as necessary.

C. Where it occurs, remove excessive asphalt to provide a smooth, sound surface for new flashings.

D. Apply Memebrane Bonding Adhesive at about the same time to both the membrane flashing and the surface to which it is being bonded so as to allow approximately the same drying time. Apply Bonding Adhesive by rolling the adhesive on to the mating surfaces evenly, avoiding globs or puddles.



E. Roll the flashing into the adhesive evenly and carefully so as to minimize wrinkles.

F. To ensure proper contact, compress the flashing to the substrate with a stiff push broom.

G. Provide termination directly to the vertical substrate as shown in Plan details.

H. Install PVC or TPO T-Joint covers at field and flashing splice intersections.

I. Install intermediate flashing attachment for walls greater than 24”.

3.12 FLASHING - ROOF EDGE METALS

A. Flash all roof edges using materials as outlined in specifications and Plan Details.

B. Use manufacturers coated PVC or TPO metal for drip edge, scuppers and similar terminations as shown in plan details.

3.13 ROOF WALKWAYS

A. Walkways shall be Membrane Walkway material (36” wide minimum per row). Heat weld the perimeters of the walkway material to the Membrane per Manufacturers requirements. Place 2 rows of walk pad along entire service side of HVAC units and other serviced equipment. Place walk pad one row wide on all other sides of HVAC units and other serviced equipment. Place walk pad one row wide minimum along access side(s) of all roof hatches, roof ladders, and other roof access points. Place walk pad one row wide minimum under all discharge points of scuppers, downspout nozzles and under all splash blocks.

3.14 CLEAN-UP

A. Clean all contaminants from building and surrounding areas.

B. Remove trash, debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas.

C. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.

D. Repair or replace damaged building components or surrounding areas to the satisfaction of the building owner.


FBT Architects - 07 4265 - Thermal Wall System (CI) [v4.0].docx

07 4265 - 1 THERMAL WALL SYSTEM (CI)

SECTION 07 4265 THERMAL WALL SYSTEM (Continuous Exterior Wall Insulation) CI

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide continuous insulation, air barrier, and water barrier in the following exterior wall

assemblies:

1. Metal Panel Systems on steel stud, concrete masonry unit or concrete walls

2. Brick cavity wall on steel stud, concrete masonry unit or concrete walls

3. Cement plaster exterior finish on steel stud, concrete masonry unit or concrete walls

B. Section Includes:

1. Aluminum Foil Clad Foam-Plastic Board Insulation

2. Glass Faced Foam-Plastic Board Insulation


A. Section 01 3100 – Project Management and Coordination

B. Section 04 2300 - Reinforced Unit Masonry

C. Section 07 2726 - Fluid Applied Water & Air Barrier

D. Section 09 2240 - Three Coat Stucco System

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Referenced Standards: These standards form part of this specification only to the extent they

are referenced as specification requirements.

1. Test Method for breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal

Insulation ASTM C203

2. Test Method for comprehensive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics ASTM D1621

3. Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics ASTM D1622

4. Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging

ASTM D2126

5. Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials ASTM E96/E96M

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 285: Standard Method of Test for the

Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall

Assemblies Containing Combustible Components Using the Intermediate-Scale,

Multistory Test Apparatus

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.



B. Submit Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, for each product verifying qualities of insulation components meet

or exceed specified requirements.

C. Submit Field Inspection and Field-Testing Reports in accordance with Field Quality Control

requirements.

D. Manufacturers printed installation instructions for each type of material to be used.

E. Samples: Submit the following material samples:

1. 12” square insulation panels of each type and thickness of insulation specified

2. Insulation fasteners

3. Joint tape minimum of 12” long

4. Flashing tape minimum of 12” long and of width specified

5. Thru-wall flashing minimum of 12” long and of width specified

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES

G. Mock-Up: See section 03-3100 Project Management and Coordination for Building



A. Source Limitations: Provide each type of building insulation and related accessories from one

single manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. Contractor shall provide evidence of having completed 3 projects of similar size and

scope in the past 3 years.

2. Contractor shall provide evidence of certification by the rigid insulation manufacturer

as having been properly trained in the proper installation of the submitted products.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.

D. Assembly Fire Propagation Characteristics: Provide results of tests performed on wall

assemblies tested by manufacturer in accordance with NFPA 285.

E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Prior to start of insulation installation review and document

insulation installation methods and procedures including:

1. Participants



2. Substrate conditions

3. Manufacturers installation guidelines

4. Construction schedule

5. Governing regulatory requirements and requirements for insurance

6. Review field quality control procedures


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and

concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to

Project Site before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in

each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION

A. Continuous Insulation:

1. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type I, Class 1, with

maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of ≤ 25 and ≤ 450,

respectively, per ASTM E84.

a. Minimum Compressive Strength ≥ 25 psi when tested per ASTM D1621

b. Minimum Tensile Strength ≥ 1000 when tested per ASTM C209

c. Minimum Flexural Strength ≥ 40 psi when tested per ASTM C203

d. Water Vapor Transmission ≤ 0.03 perms per inch when tested per ASTM

E96

e. Water Absorption Maximum ≤ 1% by volume when tested per ASTM C209

f. Dimensional Stability, Maximum ≤ 0.05% length and width, and ≤ 3.5%

thickness when tested per ASTM D2126

g. Recycled Content: Pre-consumer recycled content not less than 3.4%

2. Glass faced (at cement plaster locations), Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM

C1289, Type I, Class 1, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes

of ≤ 25and ≤ 450, respectively, per ASTM E84.

a. Minimum Compressive Strength ≥ 25 psi when tested per ASTM D1621

b. Minimum Tensile Strength ≥ 1000 when tested per ASTM C209



c. Minimum Flexural Strength 40 psi when tested per ASTM C203

d. Water Vapor Transmission ≤ 0.95 perms per inch when tested per ASTM

E96

e. Water Absorption Maximum ≤ 0.1277% by volume when tested per ASTM

C209

f. Dimensional Stability, Maximum ≤ .2% length and width, and ≤ 3.0%

thickness when tested per ASTM D2126

g. Recycled Content: Pre-consumer recycled content not less than 3.4%

3. Stabilized R-Value: Min 6.5 per inch (see drawings for thickness)

B. Basis of Design Firestone Building Products Co., Carmel, IN. www.firestonebpco.com.

Upland Corporation (505-266-3800). Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the

following:

1. Enverge CI Foil Exterior Wall Insulation manufactured by Firestone Building

Products LLC.

2. Enverge CI Glass Exterior Wall Insulation manufactured by Firestone Building

Products LLC.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Dow Thermax CI

2. Hunter XCI

3. Rmax EcoMax CI

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6300 Product Substitution Procedures

D. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Polyurethane construction adhesive with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and

substrates and as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Acceptable products include:

1. LN 950 as manufactured by Liquid Nails Adhesive.

2.2 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. For mechanical attachment over wood or steel framing provide the following as applicable:

1. Rodenhouse Grip-Lok® Auto Feed fastening system fasteners of length long enough

to penetrate framing a minimum of 1 inch.

2. Rodenhouse Thermal Grip® ci washers with Grip Deck fasteners of length long

enough to penetrate framing a minimum of 1 inch.

3. Wind-Lock ci-Lock plastic washer with coated fasteners of length long enough to

penetrate framing a minimum of 1 inch

B. For mechanical attachment over masonry and concrete back-up provide the following:



1. Rodenhouse Inc. Plasti-Grip® PMF fasteners

C. Adhesive:

1. Polyurethane construction adhesive

a. Liquid Nails LN 950

D. Insulation Board Joint Tape: Aluminum foil tape approved by insulation board manufacturer.

1. Acceptable products include:

a. 4” wide Shurtape AF 100 manufactured by Shurtape Technologies, LLC

b. 4” and 6” wide Shurtape AF 975 manufactured by Shurtape Technologies,

LLC

c. 4” and 6” wide Alumibond EB - AB 040-50 manufactured by Eternabond

E. Flashing Membrane

1. EPDM Compatible System

a. Enverge 40 mil EPDM FlashGard Thru-Wall Flashing in 12”, 16”, 18”, 20”,

24”, and 36” widths as applicable as manufactured by Firestone Building

Products LLC

b. Enverge 60 mil EPDM FlashGard Preformed; end dams, inside corners,

outside corners as manufactured by Firestone Building Products LLC

c. Bonding Adhesive as manufactured by Firestone Building Products LLC

d. Splice Wash as manufactured by Firestone Building Products LLC

e. 7877 Spray Adhesive/Primer as manufactured by Firestone Building

Products LLC

f. 1.5” Butyl tape

g. Termination bar

h. Coated drive pin

i. AP Fastener

j. Water Block Seal S-20

2. Elastomeric Bitumen Compatible System

a. Enverge Air and Vapor Barrier Self Adhered in 12” and 6” widths as

manufactured by Firestone Building Products LLC.

b. Enverge LVOC Primer as manufactured by Firestone Building Products LLC

c. Enverge Corner Guard as manufactured by Firestone Building Products LLC



3. Sealant: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to

substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates and a

demonstrated compatibility with adjacent wall components and flashings. Acceptable

products include:

a. EPDM Compatible System: Lap Sealant HS as manufactured by Firestone

Building Products LLC

b. Elastomeric Compatible System: Elastomeric Sealer as manufactured by

Firestone Building Products LLC

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation including removing projections

capable of puncturing foil facer, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Install insulation with the long edge horizontal and either side to the exterior.

B. Install in as large of pieces as possible to minimize joints.

C. Offset successive courses of insulation by a minimum of one stud space in framed

installations or 16 inches in solid back-up installations.

D. Abut wall insulation tightly together both horizontally and vertically, and at all openings.

E. Comply with insulation manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

F. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to

ice, rain, or snow at any time.

G. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around

obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

H. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard

thicknesses, widths, and lengths.

I. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers

are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

1. Stagger successive layers a minimum of 16” both vertically and horizontally so joints

in successive layers do not align.

3.3 INSTALLATION ON MASONRY BACK-UP



A. Mechanical Fastener Installation:

1. Fasten insulation to wall using manufacturer’s acceptable integral plastic washers and

fasteners as applicable for type of back-up and insulation thickness.

2. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted

tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

3. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with plastic

masonry fasteners at 24” o.c. both horizontal and vertical.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Fasten insulation to framing using manufacturer’s acceptable screws and washers as

applicable for type of framing.

1. Install field fasteners at 16” o.c. vertically and 16” o.c. horizontally in the field of the

board.

2. Install edge fasteners at 12” o.c. around perimeter of each board and at window and

door openings.

3.5 FOR WATER BARRIER INSTALLATIONS

A. Use manufacturer’s acceptable, compatible membrane flashing to seal all:

1. Joints between continuous insulation and adjacent materials.

2. Interruptions of the water barrier such as at base of wall, over window sills, window

and door heads, shelf angles and duct penetrations.

3. Joints between the water barrier and roofing materials.

B. Use manufacturer’s acceptable 4” wide aluminum foil tape in a shiplap configuration to seal

all:

1. Board-to-board joints

2. Fastener heads

C. Use manufacturer’s acceptable 6” wide aluminum foil tape in a shiplap configuration to seal

all:

1. End joints

2. Thru-wall penetrations such as window and door jambs, pipe and duct penetrations

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse,

and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to



abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after

installation.

B. Do not leave continuous insulation uncovered and exposed to UV for longer than an

aggregate of 60 days between storage and uncovered installation.

3.9 PROJECT CLEAN UP

A. Removal all packaging and properly recycle.

B. Remove all scrap materials and properly dispose of offsite


FBT Architects - 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim [v4.0].docx

07 6200 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM

SECTION 07 6200 – SHEET FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Flashings, counterflashings, sheet metal roofing flashings, scuppers, gutters, downspouts,

edge strips, formed wall flashing and trim and other fabricated sheet metal items.

B. Pre-cast concrete splash pads.


A. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry

B. Section 07 4170 – Induction Welded TPO or PVC Roofing

C. Section 07 7200 – Roof Accessories

D. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants

E. Section 09 9100 – Painting

1.3 PREFERENCES

A. ASTM 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1997.

B. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 1996.

C. ASTM 2178 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and

Waterproofing; 1997a.

D. ASTM 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 1993.

E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors' National Association; 2003, Sixth Edition.

F. NRCA – The NRCA Architectural Sheet Metal and Metal Roofing Manual, Latest Editions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01340 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide for all shop and pre-manufactured fabricated items. Indicate material

profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and

installation details. Submit color chart for pre-finished materials.



C. Submit roof manufacturer’s certification that metal fasteners and sealants are acceptable to

roof manufacturer.

D. Product Data Sheets on all products.

E. For fasteners that are to penetrate into, or through, pressure preservative treated lumber use

stainless steel, hot dipped galvanized coated or provide certification from manufacturer that

coating is compatible with preservative used for wood treatment.

F. Submit copies of all warranties.


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and The

NRCA Architectural Sheet Metal and Metal Roofing Manual requirements and standard

details and Manufacturer’s requirements, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Install all sheet metal so as not to allow water infiltration into building.

C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.


A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope

metal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.

1.7 WARRANTIES:

A. 20 year coating warranties on all coated metals

B. 20 year N.D.L. watertight installation warranty on all coping

C. All copings and edge metals must meet ES-1 Code requirements

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; 0.033 inch (22 gage)

thick steel; pre-finished fluorocarbon coating system unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

B. Membrane coated metal is to be used as shown in plans and roof membrane specification

section.

2.2 ACCESSORIES



A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. For fasteners that are to penetrate

into, or through, pressure preservative treated lumber use stainless steel fasteners, hot dipped

galvanized coated fasteners or coated fastener that is certified by manufacturer that coat is

compatible with preservative used for wood treatment.

B. Underlayment:

1. ASTM D 2178, glass fiber roofing felt.

2. Self adhering polymer modified bituminous sheet equal to W. R. Grace Ice and

Water Shield

C. Primer: Zinc chromate type.

D. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd.

E. Sealant:

1. One-part polyurethane caulking where the caulking is exposed to sunlight and used

as a fill between components.

2. Non-skinning butyl caulking where caulking is required between components and is

placed in compression and is not exposed to sunlight.

F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type.

2.3 FABRICATION GENERAL

A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.

C. Hem exposed edges on underside ½ inch.

D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use

sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.

E. Fabricated corners:

1. Metal corners are to be soldered/welded water tight at curb metal cover flashings.

2. Other, metal corners are to be folded and mitered together with the folded metal

sealed water tight with sealant between the folds. Seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.

F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward ¼” or ½”inch (6 mm) and hemmed

to form drip.



G. All metal roof counterflashings are to be 2-piece (reglet with flashing insert). All metal

flashing and reglet corners are to be mitered, folded, caulked and pop riveted in a watertight

manner. The reglet/receiver mitered corners are to be fabricated with legs no longer than 18”.

2.4 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION

A. Gutters: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Material gauge and profile shall be as

indicated on the Drawings. The finish shall match metal roof panels or shall be as indicated

on the Drawings. Each gutter joint will be cleaned, primed and covered with either a 6” wide

strip of uncured EPDM glued in place in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

with the edges sealed with recommended seam caulk, or a 6” wide strip of weather resistant

Eternabond.

B. Downspouts: See Drawings for profile and details. Material finish shall match metal roof

panels and be fabricated from 22 gauge metal, or as indicated on the drawings.

C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in

5 years in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Material finish shall

match metal roof panels, and be fabricated from 22 gauge metal; or as indicated on the

drawings.

D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.

2. Gutter Supports shall be indicated on the Drawings.

3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.

E. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28

days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment.

F. Downspout Boots: Steel.

1. At grade level and accessible to public: Eight foot high 16 gage primed steel. Wrap

with metal with same finish as downspouts.

2. Inaccessible to public: Two foot high 16 gage primed steel. Wrap with metal with

same finish as downspouts.

G. Seal metal joints.

2.5 COPING FABRICATION

A. Coping will be prefabricated from 22 gauge iron sheet metal with material finish matching

metal roof panels, or as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Cover and splice plates will be installed.



C. Coping will be tapered to drain water to the inside.

D. Coping corners are to be mitered, sealed and pop riveted with 30” maximum outside legs.

Pop rivets are to penetrate through sealant.

E. Coping Tee joints are to be fabricated with a 5’ top of the Tee and a 30” leg inserted under

the top of the Tee, sealed and pop-riveted. Pop rivets are to penetrate through sealant.

2.6 SOFFIT PANEL AND FASCIA

A. Soffit Panel:

1. Profile: 1" high, 15" wide panel with v-groove at 5" on center.

2. Material: 24 gauge, galvalume or galvanized with Kynar 500 or Hylar 500 coating.

3. Color: Selected by Architect and approved by Owner from manufacturer's full range

including premium metallic silver colors.

B. Fascia and Trim:

1. Profile: As required for closures and as indicated on drawings.

2. Material 22 gauge, galvalume or galvanized with Kynar 500 or Hylar 500 coating.

3. Color: Selected by Architect and approved by Owner from manufacturer's full range

including premium metallic silver colors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set,

reglets in place, and nailing strips located.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install starter, edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing pain.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to

SMACNA and NRCA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall

flashing with installation of wall opening components such as windows, doors and louvers.

B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where

permitted.



C. Apply plastic cement compound between asphalt primed metal flashings, felt flashings and

per NRCA standards.

D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make mitered corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes,

and lines accurate to profiles.

E. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with

neutralizing solution and rinse with water.

3.4 COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION

A. All metal roof counterflashings are to be 2-piece (reglet/receiver with flashing insert).

Counterflashings attached to metal and where slip metal is needed at mechanical curbs, one

(1) piece may be used unless Drawings indicate otherwise.

B. Masonry and saw cut reglets: Insert masonry reglets to form tight fit. Secure saw cut reglets

in place with appropriate wedges installed. Seal joint with one part polyurethane caulking.

C. Surface mounted flashing receiver: Set receiver into non-skinning butyl caulk and fasten

reglet to wall 12” O.C through butyl caulk. Seal top of receiver with one part polyurethane

caulking. For stucco stop type reglet: fasten reglet to wall 12” O.C.

D. All metal flashing receiver and reglet lap joints are to be lapped 3” and are to be caulked

water tight with polyurethane caulking between the two pieces. The two pieces are to fit flush

with one another. Wind clips 1” wide are to be installed spaced approximately 3’4” O.C.

E. All metal flashing and reglet corners are to be mitered, folded, caulked and pop riveted in a

watertight manner. The reglet/receiver mitered corners are to be fabricated with legs no

longer than 18”.

F. When masonry and stucco stop reglets are to be installed by other trades, insure that they are

fully informed on installation requirements.

3.5 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Where coping abuts a high wall, a splice plate with edge flanged up and out will be installed

against wall in non-skinning butyl sealant. A wall abutment flashing trimmed to fit tight

around the splice plate will then (1) be installed in sealant insuring the two corners at the

splice plate are completely sealed with the sealant, (2) fastened to the wall and (3) sealed

around the edges. Coping will be set in four rows of non skinning butyl sealant on the splice

plate as described above leaving a ¼” separation between coping and wall.

B. Coping butt joints are to have both a 6” wide splice plate and 6” wide cover plate at each

joint. Separation between coping joints shall be ¼”. On each side of the splice plate there is to

be two full rows of non-skinning butyl caulking. Under each side of the cover plate there is to



be one row of non-skinning butyl caulk. If the parapet is sloped, 2 pop rivets on the uphill

side of the cover plate will be installed through the cover plate, through the butyl caulk


FBT Architects - 07 7100 - Manufactured Roof Specialties [v4.0].docx

07 7100-1 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES

SECTION 07 7100 – MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Roof mounted pipe supports

B. Pipe and vent flashing


A. Section 05 1200 – Structural Steel

B. Section 07 4170 – Induction Welded TPO or PVC Roofing

C. Section 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

D. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealers

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D 2822 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement; current edition

B. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors' National Association; Current Edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures

B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and

locations.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter

conditions requiring special attention.


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Pipe and vent flashing

1. The Bilco Company

2. Nustrom

FBT Architects - 07 7100 - Manufactured Roof Specialties [v4.0].docx

07 7100-2 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES

B. Roof mounted pipe supports

1. Copper B-Line

2. Micro Industries

a. RAH Series Pipe Support (Basis of Design)

b. Mapa Products

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this

Section are in place and positioned correctly.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane

and base flashings.

C. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure

water tightness.


FBT Architects - 07 7200 - Roof Accessories [v4.0].docx

07 7200 - 1 ROOF ACCESSORIES

SECTION 07 7200 – ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof hatches.

2. Roof tie downs.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders,

and stairs for access to roof hatches.

2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking, and wood nailers.

3. Division 07 low-slope roofing Sections for roofing accessories.

4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated

metal flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous

sheet metal trim and accessories.

5. Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties" for fascia, copings, and gravel stops.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details,

material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts

of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,

required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations,

sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-

mounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.

2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.

3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,

piping, and conduit.

D. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required and for each type of

roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.




A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details

for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing

indicated.


A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent

damage.


A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field

measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base

flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight,

secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1. With Architect's approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would interrupt

roof drainage routes.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to

ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to

ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 METAL MATERIALS



A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275.

B. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 (AZM150) coated.

C. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and

prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coated.

2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50

(Class AZM150) coated.

3. Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer):

Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating

and resin manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by

manufacturer for type of use and mill finish.

E. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper

recommended by manufacturer for type of use, mill finished.

F. Stainless-Steel Shapes or Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or

Type 316, No. 2D finish.

G. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with

ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked-enamel finished.

I. Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with

ASTM A 123/A 123M.

J. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M.


A. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, fire rated pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for

aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.

C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil

(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of

asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

D. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick, polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.



E. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

1. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft.

F. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other

noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of

exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener

heads to exterior exposed fasteners.

G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or

flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

H. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polyurethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use

classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

I. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,

polyisobutylene plasticized, and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited

movement.

J. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel

application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.

2.4 ROOF HATCHES

A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated single-

wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate

with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous

weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized

hardware. Curb flashing to be able to clamp onto membrane when inserted into flashing.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Bilco Company (The).

b. J.L. Industries, Inc.

c. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company.

d. O’Keeffe’s Inc.

2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. external and 20-lbf/sq. ft.

internal loads.

3. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches.

4. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.

a. Furnish Galvanized: Mill phosphatized for field painting.

b. Finish for Aluminum: Clear anodic.

5. Insulation: Cellulosic-fiber board.



6. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as

outer metal lid.

7. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish

as metal curb.

8. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

9. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate hatch curbs with

height consultant.

10. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge

system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.

a. Provide 2-point latch on covers larger than 84 inches (2130 mm).

b. Provide remote-control operation.

11. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place

on full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position.

a. Meet ANSI A14.3 and OSHA requirements.

b. Height: 42 inches (1060 mm) above finished roof deck.

c. Material and Finish: Steel tube, galvanized.

d. Diameter: Pipe with 1-5/8-inch OD tube.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,

dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.

2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor

roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners,

separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory

installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,

leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by

other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.



1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum stainless-steel roof accessories with

bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious

construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories

directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and

cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory

manufacturers for waterproof performance.

D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in

alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.

E. Roof Hatch Installation:

1. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required.

Clean and lubricate joints and hardware.

2. Attach safety railing system to roof hatch curb.

3. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Heat and Smoke Vent Installation: Locate, install, and test heat and smoke vents according to

NFPA 204.

1. Check heat and smoke vent for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as

required.

G. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.

3.3 TOUCH UP

A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in

accordance with Division 09 painting Sections.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.


FBT Architects - 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping [v4.0].docx

07 8413 - 1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

SECTION 07 8413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the

following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings

containing penetrating items:

1. Floors

2. Roofs

3. Walls and partitions

4. Smoke barriers


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for construction of openings in concrete

slabs and walls.

2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for safing insulation and accessories.

3. Division 21 thru 23 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.

4. Division 26 thru 28 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.


A. General: For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that

are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist

passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly

penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-

protection-rated openings.

2. Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies.

3. Fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies.

B. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical

damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these

conditions both during and after construction.

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide

moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

2. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop

systems not requiring removal of insulation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of

construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of

penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for

each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting

agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration

for construction and penetrating items.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system

products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop

system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is qualified by having the necessary

experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements.

A manufacturer's willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to

Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on

buyer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration

and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that

comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements"

Article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A

qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing

and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened

containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and



manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and

inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing

instructions for multi component materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their

deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient

or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system

manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by

natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration

firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

through-penetration firestop systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop

systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems

indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering


following:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

2. DAP Inc.

3. Firestop Systems Inc.

4. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.

5. Instant Firestop Mfg. Inc.

6. International Protective Coatings Corp.

7. Isolatek International.

8. Nelson Firestop Products.

9. NUCO Industries.

10. RectorSeal Corporation (The).



11. Specified Technologies Inc.

12. 3M Fire Protection Products.

13. Termco.

14. United States Gypsum Company.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one

another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-

penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by

through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are

needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use

only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and

approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.

Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials

to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.

c. Fire-rated form board.

d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.

4. Collars.

5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials

indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by

reference to the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred

to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity

materials.

B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial

extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a

neoprene gasket.



C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during

exposure to moisture.

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with

intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric

sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.

F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,

inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum

foil on one side.

H. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic

cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to

form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases

filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-

retardant additives.

J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

K. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing

elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in

floors and other horizontal surfaces.

2. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other

surfaces.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration

firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,

water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,

mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality

with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting

performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration

firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer

and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign

materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Cleaning opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces

capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems.

Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

3.3 THROUGH-PENTRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance

Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and

published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support

fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional

shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following

results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and

penetrating items as required to achieve, fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system

manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure

through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of



Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out

and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and

install new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with

specified requirements.

3.5 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to the alpha-alpha-numeric

designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Firestop Systems with No Pentrating Items: Comply with the following:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- W-J- W-L-.

2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant.

b. Silicone sealant.

c. Intumescent putty.

d. Mortar.

C. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: Comply with the following:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- C-BK- F-A- F-B- F-C- W-J- W-K-

W-L-.


a. Latex sealant.



d. Mortar.

D. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing : Comply with the following:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-B- F-C- W-J- W-L-.


a. Latex sealant.



d. Intumescent wrap strips.

e. Firstop device.

E. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables: Comply with the following:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-B- F-C- W-J- W-L-.




a. Latex sealant.

b. Silicone Sealant.


d. Silicone foam.

F. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays: Comply with the following:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-B- F-C- W-J- W-K- W-L-.


a. Latex sealant.

b. Intumescent putty.

c. Silicone foam.

d. Pillows/bags.

G. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes: Comply with the following:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- C-BJ- F-A- F-C- W-J- W-L-.


a. Latex sealant.


c. Silicone foam.

d. Intumescent wrap strips.

H. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants : Comply with the following:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- F-A- W-L-.


a. Latex sealant.


c. Mortar.

I. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrations: Comply with the following:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- F-C- W-J- W-L-.

2. Type of Fill Materials: One or both of the following:

a. Latex sealant.

b. Mortar.

c. Intumescent wrap strips.



d. Firestop device.

e. Intumescent composite sheet.

END OF SECITON 07 8413

FBT Architects - 07 9200 - Joint Sealants [v4.0].doc.docx

07 9200 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 07 9200 – JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by

reference to this Section:

B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:

1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.

b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.

c. Joints in glass unit masonry assemblies.

d. Joints between different materials listed above.

e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and

windows.

f. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.

g. Other joints as indicated.

h. Joints in exterior plaster system.

2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Control and expansion joints.

c. Joints between different materials listed above.

d. Other joints as indicated.

3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.

c. Tile control and expansion joints.

d. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and

concrete walls and partitions.

e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows, and elevator entrances.

f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

g. Other joints as indicated.

4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.



b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.

c. Other joints as indicated.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers

and gaskets.

2. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for fire-resistant building joint-sealant systems.

3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.

4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of

gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers,

for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint

substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint

substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous

materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the

Work.

4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.

5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation

data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products

for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching

those submitted.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion

to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each kind of exterior sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected.

4. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.



1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each

substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to

opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include

data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For

sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing

adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with

requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere

to joint substrates during testing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured

sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.

D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with

requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint

sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose

work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service

performance.

B. Provide pull test after sealant has cured. Provide pull test for each sealant required and for

each material sealant system is applied to. Three tests per material.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels

indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing

time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or

other causes.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the

following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by

joint sealant manufacturer.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths

are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until

contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of

other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be

in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under

requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Provide 5 year warranty for all sealants, except where noted otherwise

2. Provide 20 year warranty for silicone sealants.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the

sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for

each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are

compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and

application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

for this characteristic.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS



A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated

for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at

the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade,

class, and uses.

B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that

will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with

21 CFR 177.2600.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description

indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible

with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for

applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory

testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density

to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.

2. Type O: Open-cell material.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide

self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-

substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to

promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and

surfaces adjacent to joints.



PART 3 – EXAMINATION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting

joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion

of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings

tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer),

old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and

frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,

mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound

substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose

particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out

joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Masonry.

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,

harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint

sealants.

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant

manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.

Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine

primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining

surfaces.



C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by

cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling

without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for

products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of

joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919

for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and

conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at

position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to

joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

4. Cover all backer rods with sealant by end of day.

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between

sealants and back of joints.

F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or

curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth,

uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and

adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.

2. Tool sealants dry. Do not use solvents.



3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless

otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by

methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants

and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating

substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so

sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite

such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated

joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the

original work.

3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are

indicated, provide products complying with the following:

1. Products:

a. 791; Dow Corning.

b. 795; Dow Corning.

c. HiFlex 393; NUCO Industries, Inc.

d. PSI-631; Polymeric Systems, Inc.

e. SM5731 Poly-Glaze; Schnee-Morehead, Inc.

f. SM5733 Poly-Glaze; Schnee-Morehead, Inc.

g. Spectrem 2; Tremco.

h. Tremsil 600; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).

3. Class: 25.

4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum

coated with a high-performance coating.

6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per

ASTM C 1248.

7. Applications: Glazing Systems, metal to metal seams.



B. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide

products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints

and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and

temperature extremes, and that comply with the following:

1. Products: Available products include the following:

a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning.

b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones.

c. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc.

d. 898 Silicone Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation.

e. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc.

f. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).

3. Class: 25.


5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, galvanized

steel, and ceramic tile.

6. Applications: All Interior Wet Locations

C. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated,

provide products complying with the following:


a. Vulkem 922; Mameco International.

b. Dynatrol II; Pecora Corporation.

c. Flexiprene 2000; Polymeric Systems, Inc.

d. Sikaflex – 2c NS; Sika Corporation.

e. DYmeric 511; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).

3. Class: 25

4. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent

in compression for a total of 100 percent movement.



indicated, O.



7. Applications: Exterior masonry control joints, and all other exterior locations.

D. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated,

provide products complying with the following:


a. Vulkem 255; Mameco International.

b. Sikaflex – 2c SL; Sika Corporation.

c. SL 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and P (pourable).

3. Class: 25.

4. Use Related to Exposure: T(traffic) and NT (nontraffic).


indicated.

6. Applications: Horizontal exterior surfaces and horizontal surfaces in the parking area.

3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Latex Sealant LS-#: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products

complying with the following:


a. Chem-Chalk 600; Bostik Inc.

b. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc.

c. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Chaulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc.

d. AC-20; Pecora Corporation.

e. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc.

f. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.

g. Tremflex 834; Tremco.

2. Applications: All non moisture interior locations.


FBT Architects - 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors & Frames [v4.0].docx

08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES

SECTION 08 1113 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.

B. Fire-rated steel doors and frames.

C. Thermally insulated steel doors.

D. Steel glazing frames.

E. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.


A. Section 08 7100 - Finish Hardware.

B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.

C. Section 09 9100 - Painting: Field painting.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/CABO A117.1 - American National Standard for Buildings and Facilities - Providing

Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; Council of American Building Officials;

Current Edition.

B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;

Current Edition.

C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for

Steel Doors and Frames; Current Edition.

D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; Current Edition.

E. ASTM C 236 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building

Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box; Current Edition.

F. ASTM 336 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation in

Buildings; Current Edition.

G. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; Current Edition.



H. ASTM E 1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound

Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; Current Edition.

I. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door

and Hardware Institute; current edition (ANSI/DHI A115 Series).

J. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; Current Edition.

K. NAAMM 862 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Security Hollow Metal Doors and

Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; Current Edition.

L. NAAMM HMMA 865 - Guide Specifications for Swinging Sound Control Hollow Metal

Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; Current

Edition.

M. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows; National Fire Protection Association;

Current Edition.

N. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection

Association; Current Edition.

O. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance

ratings and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.

6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control

systems, and security systems.

7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

8. Details of accessories.

9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

C. Samples:

1. Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; glazing and

hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement.



2. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate

section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if applicable.

D. Product Schedule: For doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using

same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Indicate access control

for both rough-in and complete installation. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.


E. Product Test Reports: For each type of door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.

F. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding

limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Doors and Frames:

1. Ceco Door Products.

2. Commercial Door and Hardware, Inc.

3. Republic Builders Products.

4. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6300 – Product Substitution Procedures

2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:

1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI A117.1.

2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.

3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.

4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.

5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; flush type, sizes and

configurations as indicated on drawings.

6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement

welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.

7. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-

coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness.



8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. All internal and external surfaces of

hollow metal frames to be factory primed.

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more

than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for

instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the

requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements

conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.3 STEEL DOORS

A. Exterior Doors:

1. Grade: NAAMM HMMA 862.

a. Face Sheets: 14 gauge, (.067 inches).

2. Core: Polystyrene foam.

3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

4. Top Closures for Outswinging Doors: Flush with top of faces and edges.

5. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed),

manufacturer's standard coating thickness.

6. Texture: Smooth faces.

7. Insulating Value: U-value of .09, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 236.

8. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.

B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated:


a. Face Sheets: 16 gauge (.053 inches).

2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb.

3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.


C. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated:



2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, with temperature rise ratings

as required by code, tested in accordance with NFPA 252.

a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.



b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.

3. Core: Mineral fiberboard.


D. Interior Doors, Sound-Rated:



2. STC Rating: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, tested in accordance

with ASTM E 336 or ASTM E 1408.

3. Core: Polyurethane.


5. Sound Seals: Separate; see Section 08 7100.

E. Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors.

2.4 STEEL FRAMES

A. General:

1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.

a. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames for interior openings.

b. ANSI A250.8 Level 4 Doors: 12 gage frames for exterior openings.

2. Finsih: Same as for door.

3. Provide 22 gage mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in

masonry or to be grouted.

4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches

high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.

5. Frames wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame

head, flush with top.

6. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and

overhead structure.

7. All frames shall be installed with anchors to suit wall construction. A minimum of 3

jamb anchors on each side of frame, and 2 base anchors per frame shall be supplied

and installed.

B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.

1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed),

manufacturer's standard coating thickness.



2. Weather stripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.

C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Fully welded type.

D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Fully welded type.

1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.

E. Sound-Rated Door Frames: Knock-down type.

F. Mullions for Pairs of Doors (where scheduled): Removable type, of profile similar to jambs.

G. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match

door frames, and as indicated on drawings.

H. Transom Bars: Fixed, of profile same as jamb and head.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components; factory-

installed.

B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000, factory installed.

C. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling;

thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. Locations as indicated on drawings.

D. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center

mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.

E. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil

dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos

fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities

2.6 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and

pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer

manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings

despite prolonged exposure.

2. Apply Prime Finish to all surfaces of hollow metal frames.




3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by

grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible

on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,

alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees

from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel

to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from

head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in

place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Seal frame to all

adjacent surfaces.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply

with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until

permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary

braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint

continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible

on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of

opening.

d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.

e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have

been properly set and secured.



f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.

Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,

and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of

postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop

Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Grout Solid.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout.

5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take

precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or

damaged by grout forces.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with

postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth,

flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill

and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead

structural supports or substrates above frame in ceiling space unless frame is

anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to

provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable

wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line

parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs

on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified

below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:



a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.

c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.

d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold):

Maximum 3/4 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to UBC Standard 7-2.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with

hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly

not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final

inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace

defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise

unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after

installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.


FBT Architects - 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors [v4.0].docx

08 1416 - 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1- GENERAL


A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated, non-rated, and acoustical.


A. Section 08 1113 – Hollow Metal Doors & Frames

B. Section 08 7100 – Finish Hardware.

C. Section 08 8000 – Glazing.

1.3 REFERENCES

The references listed below are declared to be a part of these specifications, the same as if

fully set forth, except as modified herein. Unless specifically stated otherwise, the

edition or revision of each document in effect at the beginning of work on this project

shall be used.

A. ASTM E 336 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation in

Buildings.

B. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

C. ASTM E 1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound

Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems.

D. AWI P-200 - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork

Institute.

E. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows; National Fire Protection Association.

F. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and

characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts

required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory



finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing.

D. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems

and security systems.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.

F. Product Schedule: For doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,

using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Indicate access

control for both rough-in and complete installation. Coordinate with final door hardware

schedule.

G. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches,

for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide

set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the

finished work.

F. Warranty: Sample of standard warranty


A. Perform work in accordance with AWI, Section 1300, Custom Grade.

B. Finish doors in accordance with AWI, Section 1300, Custom Grade.

C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section

with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire Door and Panel Construction: Conform to NFPA 252.

1. Listed and classified by UL as suitable to for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated

class as indicated.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

E. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.



F. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or

wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with

tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.


A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware

installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty for the following term:

1. Interior Doors: Two (2) years.

B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,

defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Veneer Doors:

1. Eggers Industries.

2. Algoma.

3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

4. VT Industries, Inc.

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 DOOR TYPES

A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core construction; fire rated and acoustic rated

as indicated, 5-ply door system. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.

2.3 DOOR CORES

A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: AWI, Section 1300, Type PC-

Particleboard.

B. Fire Rated Doors: AWI, Section 1300, Type FD, hourly ratings as indicated.

C. Sound Retardant Doors: AWI, Section 1300, Type SR - Sound Retardant (Acoustical).

2.4 DOOR FACINGS



A. Interior Doors - Veneer: Custom grade wood veneer, plain sliced, with slip matched grain, for

transparent finish. Book matched veneer will not be acceptable.

B. Species: To be selected by architect from manufacturers standard veneer including – Red Oak,

White Oak, Select White Maple, Select White Birch

B. Cross Banding Behind Laminate Finish: 1 ply; of hardwood material.

C. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style

tamper proof screws - See Section 08 8000 for Glazing.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements.

B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to door.

C. Sound Rating For Single Door Leaf and Frame Assembly: ASTM E 413, minimum STC 35.

D. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.

1. Provide solid blocking for other through bolted hardware.

E. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles - Veneer Faces: Of same species as veneer facing.

F. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.

G. Bond edge banding to cores.

H. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and

dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware.

I. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8

inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless

otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from

bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,

including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,

before finishing.



1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be

omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Finish doors at factory.

C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors

indicated to receive opaque finish.

D. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.

E. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom.

2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system.

3. Staining: None required.

4. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially

fill the wood pores

5. Sheen: Semigloss.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or

alignment.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated

below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-

rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises

after fitting and machining.

B Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch

from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated.

Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold

unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

C. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.

D Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only

to extent permitted by labeling agency.



E. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm).

1. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements.

F. Machine cut for hardware.

G. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

H. Coordinate installation of glazing.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Conform to AWI P-200 requirements for fit and clearance tolerances.

B. Conform to AWI P-200, Section 1300 for maximum diagonal distortion.

C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top

to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area.

D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to

edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust closers for full closure.

C. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.

Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no

evidence of repair or refinishing.

3.5 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS


FBT Architects - 08 1743 - AF Composite Doors [v4.0].doc

08 1743 - 1 AF Composite Doors

SECTION 08 1743 – AF COMPOSITE DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. AF Composite flush doors with FRP frames.


A. Section 08 7100 – Door Hardware.

B. Section 08 8000 – Glazing

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AAMA 920-11 – Specification for Operating Cycle Performance of Side-Hinged Exterior Door Systems.

B. AAMA 1304-02 - Voluntary Specification for Forced Entry Resistance of Side-Hinged Door Systems.

C. ASTM C 1363 – Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope

Assemblies by Means of Hot Box Apparatus.

D. ASTM D 256 – Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics.

E. ASTM D 638 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.

F. ASTM D 570 – Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.

G. ASTM D 790 – Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics

and Electrical Insulating Materials.

H. ASTM D 1761-06 – Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood.

I. ASTM D 2583 – Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol

Impressor.

J. ASTM D 3029 – Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Flat Rigid Plastic Specimens by Means of a

Falling Weight.

K. ASTM D 6670-01 - Standard Practice for Full-Scale Chamber Determination of Volatile Organic

Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products.

L. ASTM E 84-11 – Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

M. ASTM E 283-04 – Test Method for Determining Rate of Airflow Through Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

N. ASTM E 330-02 – Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors by

Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

O. ASTM E 331-00 – Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors, and

Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.



P. ASTM E 1886 – Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and

Storm Shutters Impacted by Missile and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.

Q. ASTM E 1996 – Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and

Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.


A. General: Provide door assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified

performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding standard systems.

B. Air Infiltration: For a single door 3’-0” x 7’-0”, test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM

E 283 at pressure differential of 6.24 psf. Door shall not exceed 0.45 cfm/ft2.

C. Water Penetration: For a single door 3’-0” x 7’-0”, test specimen shall be tested in accordance with

ASTM E 331. Door shall not have water leakage.

D. Uniform Load Structural: For a single door 3’-0” x 7’-0”, test specimen shall be tested in

accordance with ASTM E 330: Plus or minus 80 psf.

E. Forced Entry Resistance per AAMA 1304-02: Pass

F. Large Missile Impact Test per ASTM E 1996: Pass

G. Air Pressure Cycle Test per ASTM E 1886: Plus or Minus 75psf.

H. Indoor air quality testing per ASTM D 6670-01: GREENGUARD Environmental Institute Certified

including GREENGUARD for Children and Schools Certification

I. Thermal Transmission, Exterior Doors, U-Value, ASTM C 1363: Maximum of 0.18

BTU/hr x sf x degrees F.

J. Screw Pullout, ASTM D 1761-06, Minimum 924 pounds.

K. Cycle Test, AAMA 920-11, 2,000,000 Cycles.

L. Surface Burning Characteristics, FRP Doors and Panels, ASTM E 84:

1. Flame Spread: Maximum of 200, Class C.

2. Smoke Developed: Maximum of 450, Class C.

Surface Burning Characteristics, Class A Option On Interior Faces of FRP Exterior Panels and

Both Faces of FRP Interior Panels, ASTM E 84:

1. Flame Spread: Maximum of 25.

2. Smoke Developed: Maximum of 450.

M. FRP Face Sheet Properties:

a. Izod Impact Strength, ASTM D 256, Minimum 7 ft-lb/in notched.

b. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638, Minimum 18 x 103 psi.

c. Tensile Modulus, ASTM D 638, Minimum 18 x 106 psi.

d. Water Absorption, ASTM D 570, Maximum 0.16% / 24 hours @ 77°F.

e. Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790, Minimum 27 x 103 psi.

f. Flexural Modulus, ASTM D 790, Minimum .7 x 106 psi.



g. Barcol Hardness, ASTM D 2583, Minimum 40.

h. Gardner Impact Strength, ASTM D 3029, Minimum 30 in-lb.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials, components,

fabrication, finishes, and installation.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details,

indicating dimensions, tolerances, materials, fabrication, doors, panels, framing, and finish.

D. Samples:

1. Door: Submit manufacturer's sample of door showing face sheets, core, framing, and finish.

2. Color: Submit manufacturer's samples of standard colors of doors and frames.

E. Test Reports: Submit test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating doors comply with

specified performance requirements.

F. Manufacturer's Project References: Submit list of successfully completed projects including project name

and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of doors manufactured.

G. Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and cleaning instructions for doors, including

maintenance and operating instructions for hardware.

H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:

1. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified, with a minimum of

25 years successful experience.

2. Door and frame components from same manufacturer.

3. Evidence of a compliant documented quality management system.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with

labels clearly identifying opening door mark and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warrant doors, frames, and factory hardware against failure in materials and workmanship, including

excessive deflection, faulty operation, defects in hardware installation, and deterioration of finish or

construction in excess of normal weathering.



B. Warranty Period: Ten years starting on date of shipment. In addition, a limited lifetime (while the door is

in its specified application in its original installation) warranty covering: failure due to corrosion

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Special-Lite, Inc. 860 South Williams Street, Decatur MI 49045. Phone (800) 821-6531 Fax (269) 423-

6581 Web Site www.Special-lite.com E-Mail [email protected]

B. Curries Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Door and Aluminum Frame System 1502 12th Street NW |

Mason City, IA 50401Phone: 641-423-1334 | Fax: 641-424-8305 | www.curries.co

C. Ceco Door Products

2.2 FRP FLUSH DOORS

A. Model: AF-220 Sandstone Skin

B. Door Opening Size: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Construction:

1. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

2. Construction: Doors shall be fabricated using insulated pultruded stiles and rails with .120” FRP

face sheets. Stiles and rails to be secured at corners with pultruded corner clip.

3. Reinforcement: Solid high-density urethane shapes to be chemically welded at factory.

5. Top Rail: Pultruded FRP insulated stile material.

6. Bottom Rail: Pultruded FRP insulated stile material.

C. Face Sheet:

a. AF-220

1. Material: Exterior Grade UV resistant FRP, 0.120-inch thickness, finish color

throughout.

2. Texture: Sandstone

3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturers standard colors.

F. Core:

1. Material: Expanded Polystyrene foam (EPS)

G. Cutouts:

1. Manufacture doors with cutouts for required vision lites, louvers, and panels.

2. Factory install vision lite kits, louvers, and panels.

F. Hardware:

1. Pre-machine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and

hardware schedule.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Components: Door and frame components from same manufacturer.



B. Fasteners:

1. Material: Aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal.

2. Compatibility: Compatible with items to be fastened.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, and profile requirements shall be as indicated

on the Drawings.

B. Coordination of Fabrication: Field measure before fabrication and show recorded measurements on shop

drawings.

C. Assembly:

1. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and chemically welding of FRP before assembly.

D. Fit:

1. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.

2. Secure attachments and support at mechanical joints with hairline fit at contacting members.

2.5 ARCHITECTURAL PANELS

A. FRP Panels:

1. Model: 220

2. Size: indicated on the Drawings.

3. Thickness: 1 3/4 inch.

B. Face Sheets:

1. Material: FRP, 0.120-inch thickness.

2. Texture: Sandstone

3. Color: Choose from Manufacturer standard colors

C. Insulated FRP Panels:

1. Insulated Panels: Two 0.120-inch minimum thickness sheets.

2. Core: Urethane

3. Form components to function as single unit.

2.6 FRP FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing: AF-250

1. Size and Type: As indicated on the Drawings.

2. Materials: 3/16” thick solid pultruded FRP profiles having no corrosive components or

reinforcement.

3. Width: 2” face.

4. Depth: 5 ¾”

5. Assembly: Knock down (KD) for field assembly.

6. Door Stop: 5/8” x 2 ¼”.

7. Corner Construction: Mitered with 2” x 2” x 3/8” pultruded FRP angle reinforcement with

interlocking pultruded FRP brackets.

8. Reinforcing: ¼” pultruded FRP chemically welded at all hinge, strike and closer locations.

9. Mullions: [Fixed Pultruded FRP Center post 2” x 5 ¾”] [Fixed Pultruded 2” x 2 3/4” Rim mullion]

[Removable Pultruded 2” x 2 3/4” Rim Mullion].



10. Anchors: Furnished with type as specified on drawings.

11. Fasteners for reinforcing: 18-8 Stainless Steel.

2.7 HARDWARE

A. See hardware schedule section 08 7100.

2.10 FINISH

A. Finish For Door Edges and Frames: Primer with a finished color coat.

1. Painted Finish: Two-part aliphatic polyurethane, low VOC, Industrial Coating.

2. Thickness: 5 mils

3. Sheen: Gloss

4. Impact Resistance per ASTM D 2794: 140 in lbs.

B. Finish for Face Sheet: Finished color coat to match door edges

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or

subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Install doors plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack.

2. Anchor frames securely in place.

3. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and backseal.

E. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position.

F. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by

Architect.

H. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect.


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and

guidance for installation of doors.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors, hinges, and locksets for smooth operation without binding.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without damage or

deterioration at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 08 3113 - Access Doors & Frames [v4.0].docx

08 3113 - 1 ACCESS DOORS & FRAMES

SECTION 08 3113 – ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Access door and frame units, fire-rated, in wall and ceiling locations.


A. Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of

adjoining work.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to 2009 IBC code for fire rated access doors.

1. Provide access doors of fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they

are to be installed.

2. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for

the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Coordinate the work with other work requiring access doors.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Access Doors:

1. Access Panel Solutions

2. Acudor Products, Inc.

3. Alfab, Inc.

4. Babcock-David

5. Cendrex Inc.

6. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co; Div of Acorn Engineering Co

7. Jensen Industries; Div of Broan-Nuton, LLC



8. J.L. Industries, Inc; Div of Activar Construction Products Group

9. Karp Associates, Inc

10. Larsen’s Manufacturing Company

11. Maxam Metal Products Limited

12. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp

13. MIFAB, Inc.

14. Milcor, Inc.

15. Nystrom, Inc.

16. Williams Bros Corporation of America.

17. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 ACCESS DOOR UNITS – WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Ceiling Door and Frame Units: Formed Steel

1. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel

2. Door panels: 0.070 inch single thickness steel sheet

3. Minimum Sizes: 24 x 24 inches or as indicated on drawings

4. Hardware

a. Hinge: Concealed constant force closure spring type

b. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock

5. Finish: Prime coat with alkyd primer, paint to match adjacent surface

B. Wall Door and Frame Units: Stainless-Steel.

1. Frames and flanges: 16 gage

2. Door panels: 16 gage.

3. Sizes: 16 x 16 inches or as indicated on the drawings.

4. Hardware:

a. Hinge: Concealed constant force closure spring type.

b. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock.

5. No. 4 Finish

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Weld, fill, and grind joints to ensure flush and square unit.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Stainless-Steel Finishes:

1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into

finish.



2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross

scratches.

a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove

embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

c. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Review proposed locations with architect prior to installation.

B. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Center access hatches on other systems and equipment. Equally space with other

installations.

D. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.

E. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.


FBT Architects - 08 3313 - Coiling Counter Doors.docx

08 3313 - 1 COILING COUNTER DOORS

SECTION 08 3313 - COILING COUNTER DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Coiling Counter doors.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.

2. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for finish painting of

factory-primed doors.


A. Delegated Design: Design coiling counter doors, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design

criteria indicated.

B. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any

parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.

2. Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.0

C. Operation Cycles: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of

operating for not less than 10 cycles per day. One operation cycle is complete when a door is

opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of coiling door and accessory, include the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,

profiles for slats in curtain, bottom bars, guides, brackets, hoods, operating

mechanisms and special features.



B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed

in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments

to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and

textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

2. 18" square door curtain material

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Maintenance Data: For coiling counter doors to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single

manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Door Curtain

1. Solid Door Curtain (locations shown on drawings): Constructed of interconnected

heavy duty strip aluminum slats. The curtain shall be constructed of .058” thick

(height per model specified) slats. The finish on the door curtain shall be #4.

2. Coiling Grill Curtain (locations shown on drawings): Aluminum grill curtain

constructed as an open network of horizontal rods, spaced at regular intervals, which

are interconnected with vertical links, which are formed and spaced as indicated and

are free to rotate on the rods. Space rods 2” OC and Links 3” OC in a straight in-line

pattern. Aluminum finish: Clear anodized.

B. The bottom bar shall be constructed of tubular stainless steel, 2” high by 1-1/4” deep, and

including a safety edge system. The bottom bar shall receive a #4 finish.

C. The guides shall be constructed of a aluminum angle and channel, 2.3125” x1.125”.



D. The brackets shall be constructed of 1/8” thick aluminum plate and shall have aluminum end

covers.

E. The barrel shall be steel tubing of not less than 4” in diameter. Oil tempered torsion springs

shall be capable of correctly counter balancing the weight of the curtain. The barrel shall be

designed to limit the maximum deflection to .03” per foot of opening width. The finish on the

barrel shall be one (1) coat of bronze rust-inhibiting prime paint.

F. Endlocks for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate curtain

slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.

G. Integral Frame, Hood and Fascia shall be fabricated from 24 gauge aluminum and shall be

formed to fit the square brackets. The finish on the hood shall be #4.

H. Integral Metal Sill for Counter door: Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of type

aluminum in manufacturer’s standard thickness with No. 4 finish.

1. Locate at all counter doors unless noted otherwise.

2.2 OPERATION

A. The rolling counter door shall be crank operation.

B. Provide crank handle, locate in interior side of wall.

2.3 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating

handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: Provide cylinders specified in Division 08 Section "Door

Hardware." and keyed to building keying system.

2. Keys: Provide four for each cylinder.

2.4 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Crank Handel: Provide crank handle. Install on interior side of window assembly.

B. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire

perimeter of door for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated.

1. At door head, use 1/8-inch thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of

hood.

2. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch thick seals

of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene.



2.5 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Wheatbelt, Inc. (Basis of Design), Model EX60 (800)264-5171

b. Pentagon, Model 560, 1-866-705-4668

B. Substitution requests must be submitted per Section 01 6300.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install coiling counter doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,

anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written

instructions and as specified.

B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for

each door.

C. Accessibility: Install coiling counter doors and controls along accessible routes in compliance

with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of

warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.



C. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain coiling counter doors.


FBT Architects - 08 3613 - Overhead Sectional Doors.docx

SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1

SECTION 08 3613 – SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Commercial sectional doors.


A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous for steel supports.

B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware, locks, access panels.

C. Section 09 9100 - Painting: Field painting.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A 653/A 653M - Standard

Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated

(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C 518 - Standard Test Method

for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter

Apparatus.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E 283 - Standard Test Method

for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,

and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3000.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide drawings indicating track details, head and jamb conditions, spring

shafts, anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures, operator

mounts and other related information.

2. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: Provide shop drawings in

compliance with local Authority having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

D. Certifications:

1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified

requirements.

2. Submit installer qualifications.



E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color

chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size

6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.


A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on

projects of similar size and complexity and trained and authorized by the door

manufacturer to perform the work of this section.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within

limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products

under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty against defects in material and

workmanship, as further described in Part 2 of this Section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Raynor, which is located at: 1101 East River Rd. P. O.

Box 448 ; Dixon, IL 61021-0448; Toll Free Tel: 800-4-RAYNOR; Tel: 815-288-

1431; Fax: 888-598-4790; Email: request info ([email protected]); Web:

www.raynor.com

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of

Section 01 6000.

2.2 SECTIONAL RAIL AND STYLE ALUMINUM DOORS

A. AlumaView as manufactured by Raynor Garage Doors:

1. Doors:

a. Operation:

1) Provide doors designed for manual operation.

b. Jamb Construction:

1) Masonry jambs with anchor bolt fasteners.

c. Structural Performance Requirements:

1) Wind Loads: Uniform pressure of: 21 psf.

d. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) Requirements:

1) Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage of 0.4 cfm/ft2 is required.

Testing shall be performed in accordance with DASMA 105 test

procedure.



2) Raynor AV300 and AV200 provide an air leakage rating of 0.24

cfm/ft2 with optional IECC Compliance Package.

2. Sections:

a. AlumaView AV175:

1) Material: 1-3/4 inches (44mm) thick, 6063-T6 aluminum alloy

stiles and rails joined together with 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter

screws. Aluminum panels 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick or glazing

(when specified) fill the spaces between stiles and rails.

Combined dimension of two adjoining intermediate meeting rails

3-1/4 inches (83 mm). Bottom rail and top rail height 5-3/16

inches (132 mm). End stiles 3-3/8 inches (86 mm) or 6-1/2

inches (165 mm) wide as determined by overall door width.

Center stiles 1-7/16 inches (36 mm), 2 inches (51 mm), or 3-5/8

inches (92 mm) wide.

2) Finish: Aluminum frame extrusions and filler panels finish

coated.

a) Color: Clear anodized finish.

b. Seals: Bottom of door to have flexible U-shaped vinyl seal retained in

aluminum rail.

1) Bulb-type joint seal between sections.

2) Blade seal on top section to prevent airflow above header.

c. Trussing: Doors designed to withstand specified windload. Deflection

of door in horizontal position to be maximum of 1/120th of door width.

3. Windows: Provide door sections with windows in lieu of 0.050 inch (1.3mm)

aluminum filler panels. Locations to comply with door elevation drawings.

4. Impact Rated Glazing: Provide as follows.

a. 11/32 inch (8.7mm) Clear Impact Glass

5. Mounting: Sections mounted in door opening using:

a. Lap Jamb Angle Mounting: section overlap door jambs by 1 inch (25

mm) on each side of door opening.

6. Track:

a. Material: Hot-dipped galvanized steel (ASTM A 653), fully adjustable

for adequate sealing of door to jamb or weatherseal.

b. Configuration Type:

1) Configuration Type: Normal Headroom.

c. Track Size:

1) Size: 2 inches (51 mm).

d. Mounting:

1) Bracket-Mount using adjustable track brackets for use on 2-inch

track with wood jambs.

e. Finish:

1) Galvanized.

7. Counterbalance:

a. Counterbalance System: Provided with aircraft-type, galvanized steel

lifting cables with minimum safety factor of 5. Torsion Springs

consisting of heavy-duty oil-tempered wire torsion springs on a

continuous ball-bearing cross-header shaft.

1) Spring Cycle Requirements: Standard 10,000 cycles.

8. Hardware:

a. Hinges and Brackets: Fabricated from galvanized steel.



b. Track Rollers: 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter consistent with track size,

with hardened steel ball bearings.

c. Track Rollers: 3 inches (76.2 mm) diameter consistent with track size,

with hardened steel ball bearings.

d. Perimeter Seal: Provide complete weather stripping system to reduce

air infiltration. Weather stripping shall be replaceable.

1) For bracket mounted doors provide climate seal or vinyl seal

with aluminum retainer.

2) For angle mounted doors provide angle clip-on seal.

e. Furnish door system with locks: Interior lock with dead bolt provided

with hole to receive padlock provided by Owner.

9. Warranty: The door sections against defects in material and workmanship for

five years from date of delivery to the original purchaser. Window

components are warranted against defects in material and workmanship for

three years from date of delivery to the original purchaser. Raynor warrants

all hardware and spring components against defects in material and

workmanship for one year (or cycle life of the springs) from date of delivery

to the original purchaser. Additional Limited Warranty requirements in

accordance with manufacturer’s full standard limited warranty

documentation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. Verify that

site conditions are acceptable for installation of doors, operators, controls and

accessories. Ensure that openings are square, flush and plumb.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving

the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install door, track and operating equipment complete with all necessary

accessories and hardware according to shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts, and adjust doors for proper operation, balance,

clearance and similar requirements.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to

Owner's acceptance. Remove and legally dispose of construction debris from project

site.



B. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or

replace installed products damaged prior to or during installation.

C. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts, assure weather tight fit around door perimeter

and adjust doors for proper operation, balance, clearance and similar requirements.

Protect installed products until completion of project.

D. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 08 4113 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts [v4.0].docx

08 4113 - 1 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES

& STOREFRONTS

SECTION 08 4113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.

2. Storefront framing for window walls.

3. Storefront framing for ribbon walls.

4. Storefront framing for punched openings.

5. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.


1. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants

2. Section 08 5113 – Aluminum Windows

3. Section 08 7100 – Finish Hardware

4. Section 08 8000 - Glazing



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations,

sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-

framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds.

b. Anchorage.

c. Expansion provisions.

d. Glazing.

e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.



& STOREFRONTS

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard

sizes.

E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing

fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure

proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. Details of electrical

raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems and security systems


A. Qualification Data for Installer

B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories,

and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-

framed entrance and storefront.

C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.

D. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and

installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality-control

reports.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Sample Warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance

manuals.

B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed storefront to include in

maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for post-installation-phase

quality-control program.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and

approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.



& STOREFRONTS

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by

dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate

to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to

Architect for review.

D. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of storefront

systems.

1.7 MOCKUPS

A. Mock-Up: See section 03-3100 Project Management and Coordination for Building Assemblies

Mock-up requirements.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed

entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.

e. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing

of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project

without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in

construction.

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting

structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term

creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:



& STOREFRONTS

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

b. Glass breakage.

c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.

e. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to

glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or

an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch whichever is

less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever

is smaller.

a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing members

and operable units.

3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:

a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for

spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11

feet 8-1/4 inches.

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or

permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57

lbf/sq. 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Entrance Doors:

a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.



& STOREFRONTS

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested

according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load

design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at

dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less

than 10 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water

appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than

condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or

water that is drained to exterior.

H. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building

occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement.

2. Vertical Interstory Movement: Complying with criteria for passing based on building

occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.7 at design displacement.

I. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of

not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain

coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified

condensation resistance rating of no less than 62 as determined according to NFRC 500.

J. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332, as

follows.

1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 30.

K. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested

according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3.

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade.

L. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface

temperature changes:

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,

anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to

AAMA 501.5.



& STOREFRONTS

a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-

surface temperature of 180 deg F.

b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.

c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis of Design: Tubelite T14000 Series. (Thermally Broken)

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Arcadia, Inc.

2. EFCO Windows/Storefront/Curtainwalls/Sunshades

3. Kawneer Company, Inc.

4. Tubelite Architectural Systems

5. Vistawall Architectural Products

6. Manko Window Systems, Inc.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system,

including framing, spandrel panels, venting windows and accessories, from single manufacturer.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness

required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction:

a. Exterior: Thermally Broken

b. Interior: Nonthermal

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

3. Glazing Plane: Front

4. Finish: Clear anodic finish

5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not

integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,

nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209



& STOREFRONTS

b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221

c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.

d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation

and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in

SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.

c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Basis of Design: Tubelite Medium Stile Monumental Doors

2. Door Construction: 2-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch- thick, extruded-

aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Dual moment welded corner construction that

are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum

members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

3. Door Design: Top Rail: 5-inch. Vertical Rail: 5-inch Bottom Rail: 10-inch

4. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 08 7100

"Door Hardware."

B. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded

PVC.

2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with

nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

C. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners

on mounting strip.

D. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

E. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with

maximum height of 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).



& STOREFRONTS

F. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame

hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors.

2.6 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 8000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,

resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

D. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O;

chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system

components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-

sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed storefront manufacturers for this use.

1. Color: Match structural sealant.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate

fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials

and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts

complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of

finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.



& STOREFRONTS

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.

5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.

6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent

possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system.

F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for

installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three

silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs

of doors.

G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable

strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent

possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop

Drawings.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401

recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures,

sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.



& STOREFRONTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's

written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited

to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or

by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint

Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-

stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."

G. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind

sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.



& STOREFRONTS

H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware

according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed

fasteners to greatest extent possible.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the

following maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.

3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to

1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch

wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more,

limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum-

framed entrances and storefronts.

1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by

Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water

penetration.

a. Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect.

b. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Architect. Perform at least three tests,

prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion.

C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests

and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware:



& STOREFRONTS

1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and

removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.


FBT Architects - 08 4523 - Fiberglass Sandwich Panel Assemblies [v3].docx

08 4523 - 1 FIBERGLASS SANDWICH

PANEL ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 08 4523 FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the insulated translucent sandwich panel system as shown and specified.

Work includes furnish and installation of:

1. Flat factory prefabricated structural insulated translucent sandwich panels.

2. Factory prefabricated structural insulated translucent sandwich panels for use as

skylight assemblies

3. Aluminum installation system.

4. Aluminum sill flashing.


1. Structural Steel: Division 5

2. Flashing & Sheet Metal: Division 7

3. Sealants: Division 7

4. Glazing: Division 8

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s product data. Include construction details, material descriptions,

profiles and finishes of components.

B. Submit shop drawings. Include elevations, details, dimensions and attachments to other

work.

C. Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for factory

finished aluminum.

1. When requested, submit samples for each exposed finish required, in same thickness and

material indicated for the work and in size indicated below. If finishes involve normal color

variations, include sample sets consisting of two or more units showing the full range of

variations expected.

a. Sandwich panels: 14" x 28" units

b. Factory finished aluminum: 5” long sections

D. Submit Installer Certificate, signed by installer, certifying compliance with project

qualification requirements.

E. Submit product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating each type

and class of panel system complies with the project performance requirements, based on

comprehensive testing of current products. Previously completed test reports will be

acceptable if for current manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project.

1. Test reports required are:

a. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (UL 723) – Submit UL Card



PANEL ASSEMBLIES

b. Burn Extent (ASTM D-635)

c. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244)

d. Abrasion/Erosion Resistance (ASTM D-4060)

e. Impact Strength (UL 972)

f. Bond Tensile Strength (ASTM C-297 after aging by ASTM D-1037)

g. Bond Shear Strength (ASTM D-1002)

h. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E-72)

i. Insulation U-Factor (NFRC-100)

j. NFRC System Certification

k. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503)

F. Submit current documentation indicating regular, independent quality control monitoring

under a nationally recognized building code review and listing program.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications

1. Material and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly

employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten (10)

consecutive years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used

on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three (3) of the

projects shall have been in successful use for ten (10) years or longer.

2. Panel system must be listed by the International Code Council – Evaluation Service (ICC-

ES) which requires quality control inspections and fire, structural and water infiltration

testing of sandwich panel systems by an approved agency.

3. Quality control inspections and required testing shall be conducted at least once each year

and shall include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production

sandwich panels for conformance with “Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panels” as

regulated by the ICC-ES.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Installation shall be by an experienced installer, which has been in

the business of installing specified panel systems for at least five (5) consecutive years and

can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type.

C. Performance Requirements: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and

fabrication of the complete panel system.

1. When requested, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Mock-Up: See section 03-3100 Project Management and Coordination for Building


1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver panel system, components and materials in manufacturer's standard protective

packaging.



PANEL ASSEMBLIES

B. Store panels on the long edge, several inches above the ground, blocked and under cover in

accordance with manufacturer's storage and handling instructions.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer's and installer's written warranty agreeing to repair or replace panel

system work which fails in materials or workmanship within one (1) year of the date of

delivery. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include leakage, excessive deflection,

deterioration of finish on metal in excess of normal weathering and defects in accessories,

insulated translucent sandwich panels and other components of the work. (Contact local

representative for extended warranty periods.)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. CPI Daylighting, Inc.

B. Kalwall Corporation

C. Major Industries

D. Prior approvals submitted per the requirements indicated in the Bidding Documents.

2.2 PANEL COMPONENTS

A. Face Sheets

1. Translucent faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins, formulated

specifically for architectural use.

a. Thermoplastic (e.g. polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are not acceptable.

2. Flammability of interior face sheets:

a. Flamespread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic

unannounced retesting, with flamespread rating no greater than 50 (20) and smoke

developed no greater than 250 (200) when tested in accordance with UL 723.

b. Burn extent by ASTM D-635 shall be no greater than 1”.

c. Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame.

d. Face sheets shall not delaminate when exposed to 200°F for 30 minutes per IBC and

NBC (300°F for 25 minutes per UBC and SBC).

3. Weatherability of exterior face sheets:

a. Color stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more

than 3.0 CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D-2244 after 5 years outdoor South Florida

weathering at 5 degrees facing south, determined by the average of at least three (3)

white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color

stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching.

b. Erosion barrier: Exterior face shall have a permanent glass erosion barrier embedded

beneath the surface to provide long-term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure.

Exterior face surface loss shall not exceed .7 mils and 40 mgs when tested in

accordance with ASTM D-4060 employing CS17 abrasive wheels at a head load of



PANEL ASSEMBLIES

500 grams for 1000 cycles. Sacrificial surface films or coatings are not acceptable

erosion barriers.

4. Appearance:

a. Exterior face sheets: Smooth, 0.070” thick and _Crystal_ in color.

b. Interior face sheets: Smooth, 0.045” thick and _Crystal__ in color.

c. Face sheets shall not vary more than +/- 10% in thickness and be uniform in color.

5. Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand held

pencil and repel an impact equal to 70 (230) ft. lbs. without fracture or tear when

impacted by a 3-1/4” diameter, 5 lb. free-falling ball per UL 972.

B. Grid Core

1. Aluminum I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper with

provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter. Width of I- beam

shall be no less than 7/16”. The I-beam grid shall be machined to tolerances of not greater

than +/- .002”.

2. Thermal break: Minimum 1”.

C. Laminate Adhesive

1. Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with

minimum 25-years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the

International Code Council “Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives.”

2. Minimum tensile strength of 750 PSI when the panel assembly is tested by ASTM C-297

after two (2) exposures to six (6) cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM

D-1037.

3. Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D-1002 after exposure to five (5)

separate conditions:

a. 50% Relative Humidity at 73° F: 540 PSI

b. 182° F: 100 PSI

c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at room temperature: 800 PSI

d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at 182° F: 250 PSI

e. 500 Hour Oxygen Bomb by ASTM D-572: 1400 PSI

2.3 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets laminated to a grid

core of mechanically interlocking thermally broken (aluminum) I-beams. The adhesive bonding

line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat sharp edge.

1. Thickness: 2-3/4”

2. Light transmission: Wall- 20% LT, Roof -12% LT

3. Solar heat gain coefficient: Wall -0.10 SHGC, Roof -0.11 SHGC

4. Complete insulated panel system shall have NFRC certified laboratory U-factor of:

wall -0.29; roof- 0.22. Aluminum I-beam.

5. Grid pattern: Nominal 12” x 24” reverse shoji.

B. Panels shall deflect no more than 1.9” at 30 psf in 10’-0” span without a supporting frame

by ASTM E-72.



PANEL ASSEMBLIES

C. Panels shall withstand 1200ºF fire for minimum one (1) hour without collapse or exterior

flaming.

2.4 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM

A. Closure system: Extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 alloy and temper clamp-tite

screw type closure system.

B. Sealing tape: Manufacturer's standard, pre-applied to closure system at the factory under

controlled conditions.

C. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding final fasteners

to the building.

D. Finish: Exposed aluminum to be manufacturer’s factory applied finish that meets the

performance requirements of AAMA 2604. (Mill)

1. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, supporting structure and installation conditions. Do not proceed with

panel erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by

manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or method recommended by

manufacturer.

3. Where aluminum will contact pressure-treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by

methods recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install the panel system in accordance with the manufacturer's installation recommendations and

approved shop drawings.

1. Anchor component parts securely in place by permanent mechanical attachment system.

2. Accommodate thermal and mechanical movements.

3. Set perimeter framing in a full bed of sealant compound, or with joint fillers or gaskets to

provide weather-tight construction.



PANEL ASSEMBLIES

B. Install joint sealants at perimeter joints and within the panel system in accordance with

manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean the panel system inside and outside, immediately after installation, according to

manufacturer's written recommendations.


FBT Architects 08 7100 - Door Hardware.doc

087100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 3. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 4. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.

b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

D. Informational Submittals:

1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.



E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

F. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.



2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures

G. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware.



3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods:

1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 3. Five years for exit hardware. 4. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.

1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:



a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge

for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:

a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.

b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.

4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:

a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. Hager Companies (HA). c. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK).

B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs.


a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). c. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE).

2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM

A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.

1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor.



2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.

listed for windstorm components where applicable. 4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for

appropriate installation and operation.


a. Door Controls International (DC). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.

1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.

2. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.

3. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.


a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be

flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard.

D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following:



1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders.

E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.

1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements.

2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner.

3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.

F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

G. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.


a. Stanley Best (BE) – 40H-UN Series. b. No Substitution.

B. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 certified.

1. Furnish with solid cast levers, standard 2 3/4” backset, and 1/2" (3/4" at rated paired openings) throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt.

2. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.


a. Stanley Best (BE) – 9K Series. b. No Substitution.

2.6 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:



1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for

aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for

rescue hardware applications.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

2.7 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.

3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.

b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.



7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.

8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.

9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.

10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Stanley Precision (PR) - Apex 2000 Series.

2.8 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install

closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.



B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – DC6000 Series. b. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040 Series. c. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 7500 Series. d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 4400 Series.

C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Unitrol): Unitrol arms to have door stop mechanism to absorb dead stop shock on arm and top hinge. Hold-open arms to have a spring loaded mechanism in addition to shock absorber assembly. Arms to be provided with rigid steel main arm and secondary arm lengths proportional to the door width.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - Unitrol Series. b. Norton Door Controls (NO) - Unitrol Series. c. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - Unitrol Series.

2.9 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim

1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.

4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:

a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.

5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.





2.10 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.



C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.


a. Dorma (DO). b. Rixson Door Controls (RF). c. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).

2.11 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.



C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.

1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.13 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.



B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.

1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.




A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.

B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:

1. MK - McKinney 2. PE - Pemko 3. RO - Rockwood



4. BE - Stanley Security Solutions Inc (BE) 5. SA - Sargent 6. RF - Rixson 7. NO - Norton 8. AS - Altronix Corp

Hardware Sets

Set: 1.0 Doors: 002 1 Continuous Hinge CFMxxHD1 x Door Size PE 1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 15D S3 626 BE 1 Surface Closer UNIJ7500 689 NO 1 Threshold 271A PE Notes: Weatherseal and Door Bottoms to be an Integral part of the door and frame assembly and shall be furnished by the Aluminum Door and Frame Supplier.

Set: 2.0 Doors: 003, 007, 010, 011 6 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 NRP x Door Size US26D MK 1 Set Flush Bolt 555/557 (as required) US26D RO 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 1 Cylindrical Lock (storage Pair) 9K37D 15D S3 3/4 626 BE 1 Surf Overhead Stop 9-X36 652 RF 1 Door Closer CPS7500 689 NO 2 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 1" LDW US32D RO 1 Threshold 271A PE 1 Gasketing 303AS PE 2 Door Sweep 315CN X Door Size PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x FW PE 1 Astragal 357SP 84" PE

Set: 3.0 Doors: 008 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 x Door Size US26D MK

https://www.openingsstudio.com/AAOS/AAOS/CutSheetViewer.jsp?IDS=135578307,

https://www.openingsstudio.com/AAOS/AAOS/CutSheetViewer.jsp?IDS=88791914,43471644,43471645,






















1 Cylindrical Lock (classroom) 9K37R 15D S3 626 BE 1 Door Closer 7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW US32D RO 1 Wall Stop (concave) 409 US26D RO 1 Threshold 271A PE 1 Gasketing 303AS PE 1 Door Sweep 315CN X Door Size PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x FW PE

Set: 4.0 Doors: 001 1 Continuous Hinge CFMxxHD1 x Door Size PE 1 Cylindrical Lock (entry) 9K37AB 15D S3 626 BE 1 Door Closer 7500 689 NO 1 Wall Stop (concave) 409 US26D RO 1 Threshold 271A PE Notes: Weatherseal and Door Bottoms to be an Integral part of the door and frame assembly and shall be furnished by the Aluminum Door and Frame Supplier.

Set: 5.0 Doors: 005, 006 3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 NRP x Door Size US26D MK 1 Deadbolt (classroom) 8T37S S3 630 BE 1 Push Plate 70C US32D RO 1 Pull Plate 107x70C US32D RO 1 Door Closer PR7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW US32D RO 1 Wall Stop (concave) 409 US26D RO 1 Threshold 271A PE 1 Gasketing 303AS PE 1 Door Sweep 315CN X Door Size PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x FW PE

Set: 6.0 Doors: 122



























https://www.openingsstudio.com/AAOS/AAOS/CutSheetViewer.jsp?IDS=137184411,134342834,



3 Hinge TA2714 NRP US26D MK 1 Rim Exit Device LC 43 8804 ETL US32D SA 1 Rim Cylinder 12E-72 626 BE 1 Surface Closer UNI7500H 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D x Door Size PE

Set: 7.0 Doors: 104 3 Hinge TA2714 x Door Size US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (Storage) 9K37D 15D S3 626 BE 1 Door Closer 7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW US32D RO 1 Wall Stop (concave) 409 US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D x Door Size PE

Set: 8.0 Doors: 103 3 Hinge TA2714 NRP US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (Storage) 9K37D 15D S3 626 BE 1 Door Closer CPS7500 689 NO 1 Gasketing S88D x Door Size PE

Set: 9.0 Doors: 102 3 Hinge TA2714 x Door Size US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (entry) 9K37AB 15D S3 626 BE 1 Wall Stop (concave) 409 US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D x Door Size PE

Set: 10.0 Doors: 105 3 Hinge TA2714 x Door Size US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock (entry) 9K37AB 15D S3 626 BE 1 Door Closer 7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW US32D RO































1 Wall Stop (concave) 409 US26D RO

Set: 11.0 Doors: 012, 013, 126 3 Hinge TA2714 x Door Size US26D MK 1 Privacy Set 45H0L 15H VIN 626 BE 1 Door Closer 7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW US32D RO 1 Wall Stop (concave) 409 US26D RO

Set: 12.0 Doors: 024, 025, 028, 029 1 Continuous Hinge CFMxxHD1 x Door Size PE 1 Deadbolt (regular) 8T37K S3 630 BE 1 Flush Pull 94Px94L US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 Coat Hook 802 US26D RO

Set: 13.0 Doors: 026, 027 1 Continuous Hinge CFMxxHD1 x Door Size PE 1 Deadbolt (regular) 8T37K S3 630 BE 1 Flush Pull 94Px94L US32D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO 1 Coat Hook 802 US26D RO

Set: 14.0 Doors: 009, 020, 023, 030 1 Hardware by door Supplier AS




























Set: 15.0

1 Single Exterior Gate

Exterior Exit Device 99NL (LESS STRIKE) x 4' 626 (ED-2) VON DUPRIN INC. Rim Cylinder 0-057 "FG" KEYWAY 1-BITTED (CY-1) SCHLAGE Strike Gate Closer T8400 BLACK (CL-2) OTHER

Balance of Hardware required by Gate Manufacture


FBT Architects - 08 8000 - Glazing [v4.0].docx

08 8000 - 1 GLAZING

SECTION 08 8000 – GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Glass and plastic glazing.

B. Glazing compounds and accessories.


A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and Backings.

B. Section 08 1113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

C. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed doors.

D. Section 08 4113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances, Storefronts

G. Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath Accessories: Mirrors.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,

Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 1993.

B. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 1991 (Reapproved 1997).

C. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated

and Uncoated Glass; 1992.

D. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 1991 (Reapproved 1995).

E. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1996.

F. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1997.

G. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990.

H. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used

in Buildings.

I. Federal Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials 16CFR1201.


08 8000 - 2 GLAZING


A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air

barrier:

1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07 2100 and 07 9200.

2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly

from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.

B. Select thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to

plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with 2009 IBC code.

1. Test in accordance with ASTM E 330.

2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full

recovery of glazing materials.

3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,

size limitations, and special handling or installation requirements.

C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental

characteristics, limitations, special application requirements.

D. Samples: Provide sample of each glass material and assembly listed. Identify available colors.

D. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for

glazing installation methods.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene a minimum of one week before starting work of this section.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.

B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of

glazing compounds.


08 8000 - 3 GLAZING


A. Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict

compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

1. Protect materials from moisture, sunlight, excess heat, sparks and flame.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure,

interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Float Glass: 1/4 inch float glass.

B. Tempered Glass: 1/4 inch thick, tempered, in locations as required by 2009 International

Building Code, conforming to ANSI Z97.1, ASTM C 1036, ASTM C 1048, and Consumer

Product Safety Commission 16 CFR 1201.

C. Clear Float Glass: Float type, heat strengthened, clear conforming to ASTM E774 and ASTM

E773.

D. Low E Glass: Solarban 70 XL Low E #5, Float type, tempered, clear conforming to ASTM

E774 and ASTM E773.

1. Coating installed on third surface unless noted otherwise.

E. Laminated glass to comply with ASTM C1172.

F. Sandblasted Glass: Sandblast second surface.

I. All Glass shall be heat strengthened or tempered as required by codes, or as required to meet

thermal stress and wind loads.

2.2 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS

A. Glass Units – All Facades:

1. Insulating Glass: Double pane units with edge seal, each pane 1/4 inch thick, tinted outer

pane (color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors), inner pane

of Low E glass on clear glass cover plate, total thickness of 1 inch at locations indicated


08 8000 - 4 GLAZING

on drawings.

B. Tempered Glass:

1. Insulating Glass: 1/4 inch thick outer and inner pane, tempered, in locations as required by

current International Building Code, conforming to ANSI Z97.1, ASTM C 1036, ASTM

C 1048, and Consumer Product Safety Commission 16 CFR 1201. All other requirements

set forth above for exterior glazing are required for this glazing type as well.

C. Specialty Glass Material:

1. Provide Sandblasted glass at locations shown on drawings.

2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Dow Corning Corp.

2. GE Silicones.

3. Pecora Corp.

4. J.R. Four LTD

5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.

Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet

space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.

Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application,

self adhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15

Shore A duometer hardness; coiled on release paper, black color.

D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may

impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.


08 8000 - 5 GLAZING

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.

E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)

A. Install glazing material in accordance with the manufacture’s printed instructions or the

following information whichever is more stringent.

B. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal

corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant.

C. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full

perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal.

D. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.

E. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient

pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.

F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with butyl type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on

glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line.

G. Apply cap bead of butyl type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform

line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.4 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)

A. Install glazing material in accordance with the manufacture’s printed instructions or the

following information whichever is more stringent.

B. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)

above sight line.

C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.

D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane

or unit.

E. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 24 inch

intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line.


08 8000 - 6 GLAZING

F. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with butyl type sealant to depth equal to bite on

glazing, to uniform and level line.

G. Trim protruding tape edge.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

B. Remove labels after Work is complete.

C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.

3.7 SCHEDULE

A. Aluminum Storefront and Entrances

1. Exterior: As scheduled in 2.2 of this Section.

2. Interior: Tempered glass

3. Specialty glass material where indicated on drawings

B. Wood Doors:

1. Interior non-rated: Tempered glass.

2. Interior rated: FireLite PLUS

3. Specialty glass material where indicated on drawings


FBT Architects - 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing [v4.1].docx

09 2216-1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

SECTION 09 2216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.


1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing

and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and

roof trusses.

2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation installed with Z-shaped furring

members.

3. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed

with non-load-bearing steel framing.

4. Division 9 Section "Portland Cement Plaster" for metal lath supported by non-load-bearing

steel framing.

5. Section 09 2900 – Gypsum board




A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.




A. Evaluation Reports: Submit evaluation reports certified under an independent third party

inspection program administered by an agency accredited by IAS to ICC-ES AC98, IAS

Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Agencies

B. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification of product compliance with

codes and standards along with product literature and data sheets for specified products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.


to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to


2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 645 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or equivalent gauge steel

studs and runners.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 gauge = 0.0179 inch

b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm), 6 inches (152 mm), 4 inches (102 mm), 2-1/2 inches

(64 mm), and 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).

2. Equivalent Gauge Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 gauge = 0.015.

b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm), 6 inches (152 mm), 4 inches (102 mm), 2-1/2 inches

(64 mm), and 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).

3. See 3.3.B for stud gauge and installation requirements



D. Slip-Type Head Joints: As required, provide one of the following:

1. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep flanges

in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized

to friction fit inside runner.

2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:

1) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; MaxTrak Slotted Deflection Track or

BlazeFrame at rated partitions.

2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track or Slotted Deflecto

Track.

3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series.

4) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track or Vertical Slip Track II.

E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with

movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly

indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of

studs.


a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip.

b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

c. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series.

F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal width: 4-inches wide (100 mm).

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gauge = 0.0428 inch

3. Minimum Attachment: two (2) #12 screws at each stud.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 GAGE

2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).

H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce

sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ClarkDietrich Building

Systems; Resilient Channel RC Deluxe (RCSD), or a comparable product.

I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 18 GAGE uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-

wide flanges.

1. Depth: 3/4 inch.



2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-

steel thickness of 20 GAGE.

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 16 GAGE diameter

wire, or double strand of 18 GAGE diameter wire.

J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment

flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 25 GAGE, and depth required to fit

insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 16 GAGE diameter wire, or

double strand of 18 GAGE diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching

wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed

by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent

testing agency.

a. Type: Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-

resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and

capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction

as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053

inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide

flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch.

b. Depth: 1-5/8 inches.

3. Equivalent Gauge Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 GAGE.

b. Depth: 1-5/8 inches.



4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 GAGE.

5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound

transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

b. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ClarkDietrich Building

Systems; Resilient Channel RC Deluxe (RCSD), or a comparable product.

G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system

composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.

c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,

cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure



have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers

will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in

advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling

runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where

offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure

not more than 24 inches o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for

installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive

materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-

resistive materials from damage.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply

to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063

that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that

apply to framing installation.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to

framing installation.

B. Install studs of the following gages:

1. Partitions less than 15 feet high: 25 gage.

2. Partitions 15 feet or more high: 20 gage.

3. Double jambs at door and other openings: 20 gage.

4. Partition corners: 20 gage.

5. End of freestanding partition: 18 gage.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,

grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings

required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.



1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate

at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install

runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished

assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to

match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to

underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: As required, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs.

On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches

o.c.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing.

2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or

powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Z-Furring Members:



1. Erect insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold

in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with

concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners

spaced 24 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange

extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring

channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more

than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8

inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.

3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building

structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension

system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of

trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and

in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching

to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for

structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise

fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.



6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms.

7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems

meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other

and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (non

cumulative) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely

between parallel members that will receive finishes.


FBT Architects - 09 2240 - Three Coat Stucco System [v4.1].docx

09 2240 - 1 THREE COAT STUCCO SYSTEM

SECTION 09 2240 THREE COAT STUCCO SYSTEM

Part 1 - General

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Installation of the Portland cement stucco as an exterior wall cladding.

The extent of stucco base and finish coat assembly is as indicated on the drawings. This

system is to be mechanically attached over continuous insulation, sheathing, metal pan-

els, wood or steel studs, CMU and ICF, or concrete.

B. The types of stucco base coat assembly include:

1. Factory blended, fiber-reinforced cement plaster basecoat for jobsite mixing to pro-

vide scratch and brown coats to receive secondary fiberglass crack suppression rein-

forcement and an elastomeric acrylic based colored stucco finish.

C. Related Products:

1. Joint Sealant: Refer to Division 7 Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. Installation of

joint sealant shall be by coating applicator or a separate installer. Joint sealant in-

staller shall be experienced and competent in the installation of elastomeric construc-

tion sealants.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Scratch and Brown Concentrate fiber reinforced stucco that is a factory blended formula-

tion of Portland cement, lime, fibers and proprietary ingredients. For use with jobsite

added ASTM C-897 stucco sand and clean potable water.

B. Scratch and Brown Functional Criteria:

1. Stucco application shall be sloped a minimum of 4”/12” (15˚) for positive drainage.

2. Substrate conditions:

a. Sheathing substrates shall be sound, dry and free of dust, dirt, and other contami-

nants.

b. Substrate Dimensional Tolerances: Flat with ¼ inch (6.4 mm) within any 4 foot

(1219 mm) radius to maintain a uniform thickness of basecoat material.

c. Maximum deflection of substrate assembly under positive or negative design

loads shall not exceed L/360 of span.

C. Expansion Joints:

1. Continuous expansion joints shall be installed at all areas of dissimilar materials,

multiple story plate lines or existing engineered through wall expansion joints.

2. Per ASTM C 1063, “Expansion and or contraction joints shall be installed in walls

not more than 144 ft2 (13.4 m2) in area and not more than areas of 100 ft2 (9.30 m2)

for all horizontal applications. The distance between joints shall not exceed 18 ft

(5.5m) in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.”

3. Location and frequency of control joints to be detailed by the design professional and

shown on drawings when applicable.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Applicator to submit:

1. Manufacturer’s technical information including installation instructions and recom-

mendations.

2. Samples: Submit samples for approval. Samples shall be of materials specified and of

suitable size as required to accurately represent each color and texture to be used on

project. Prepare each sample using same tools and techniques for actual project appli-

cation. Approved samples shall be maintained and available at job site.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Install stucco basecoat assembly to comply with

all applicable codes and standards and with requirements of local agencies having juris-

diction.

B. Manufacturer: Shall have marketed stucco products in United States for at least ten years;

shall have completed projects of same building size and type as this project.

C. Applicator Qualifications: Applicators specializing in the installation of exterior stucco

assembly with a minimum of 5 years experience in work similar to that required by this

section.

D. Single Source Responsibility: All stucco base coat and finish materials shall be from a

single manufacturing source, and delivered to jobsite with labels intact.

E. Surface Deviation: Shall not be more then ¼” in 10’ when utilizing a straight edge placed

anywhere on the wall(s)

F. Mock-Up: See section 03-3100 Project Management and Coordination for Building As-

semblies Mock-up requirements.


A. Deliver manufactured materials in original packages or containers, with manufacturer’s

labels intact and legible.

B. Keep materials dry, above freezing, stored off ground, under cover and away from damp

surfaces. At the time they are mixed, all materials shall be at a minimum temperature of

40˚F (4˚C).

C. Remove wet, frozen, damaged or detrimental materials from site immediately.

1.6 PROJECT SITE AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations of environ-

mental conditions affecting product installation requirements.

1. Installation Ambient Air Temperature: Minimum of 40ºF (4ºC) and rising, and re-

main so for 48 hours thereafter. Maximum Ambient Air Temperature of 120˚F

(49˚C). Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry

weather.



2. Do not use frozen materials in cement stucco.

3. Do not apply cement stucco to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost or ice.

4. Inclement Weather: Do not apply basecoat during inclement weather, unless appro-

priate protection is employed.

5. Wall and Substrate Temperatures: Avoid, when possible, installation of the basecoat

and the finish coats over substrates that are over 120˚F (49˚C).

B. Protection:

1. Protect adjacent finished surfaces prior to stuccoing.

2. Maintain protection in place until completion of work.

3. Protect finished work when stopping for the day or when completing an area.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Specification Base and Basis of Design: Parex: 1870 Stone Mountain Road, Lithonia Rd,

Georgia, 30058 (770) 482-7872. Contact [email protected] or 505-338-4433

direct

B. El Rey Stucco, 4100 Broadway SE, Albuquerque New Mexico, 87105 (505) 873-1180

C. TEIFS: 220 Burleson, San Antonio Texas, 78202, 800-358-4785.

D. Sto Corp: 3800 Camp Creek Parkway, Atlanta GA, 30331, 800-221-2397

E. Dryvit Systems, Inc: One Energy Way, West Warwick, RI, 02893 (800) 556-7752.

F. Substitutions: See Specification Section 01 6300 – Product Substitution Procedures.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fluid Applied Water & Air Barrier: Over all sheathing substrates as specified in section

07 2726

B. Continuous Insulation: Expanded, Extruded or Polyisocyanurate, as specified in Section

07 4265 and in thickness as indicated on drawings.

C. Lath and Trim Accessories: Conform to ASTM C1063 lathing and furring.

1. Exterior components field walls: Minimum 3.4lb expanded metal self-furred to lath

to be used in accordance with ASTM C897.

2. Terminations: J-Metal or Stucco stop, Soffit Vent or Thin Stucco Drip Screed, gen-

eral purpose type with expanded or perforated flanges. Plaster stops to be utilized

around all through wall penetrations with gaps between the back of the plaster stops

and the window or door frames wide enough to installed backer rod and sealant. See

manufactures publish details.

3. Corner Reinforcement: (galvanized welded wire, minimum 18 gage): Manufac-

turer’s standard pre-formed corner reinforcement made from 1.7 lbs. (0.059 kg/m2)

per square yard of diamond mesh lath.

4. Square Edge Corner Beads: expanded or flanged to suit application. (For square cor-

ners).

5. Round-Edged Corner Beads: expanded or flanged to suit application. (For rounded



corners).

6. Control Joints: Single component control joints with ¼ inch slots and ¾ inch

grounds, or equal.

7. Expansion Joints: two piece adjustable expansion joints, free floating adjustments

from ¼ inch to 5/8 inch.

8. Weep Screeds: foundation weep screed, with perforations and minimum 3-1/2 inch

vertical attachment flange.

9. Fasteners: steel nail or screw of furring type with 1 inch cap of sufficient length for

minimum ½ inch penetration into brick, block, concrete or stud system.

10. 3.4lb. per square yard expanded metal strip-lath 4 inches wide to be used at around

all windows, doorways, openings and through wall penetrations.

11. 3.4lb density expanded metal lath for use on all soffits and overhangs as shown on

drawings.

D. Fiber-reinforced Portland cement stucco basecoat: The following stucco specification is basis

of design Parex Amourwall 300 Water Master Crack Shield HE. Therefore, all substitution

requests must be proven to be of equal quality no less than ten (10) days prior to project bid

date.

1. Fiber-47® Concentrate: Manufacturer’s standard factory formulated, concentrate

scratch and brown stucco basecoats consisting of Portland cement, lime, fibers, and

proprietary ingredients.

E. Acrylic Modified skim coat: Parex Level Coat. For use with Crack Suppression assem-

bly.

F. Fiberglass mesh for increased crack suppression:

1. Krak-Master mesh as manufactured by Parex USA for embedment into the surface of

the Level Coat while it is still wet. A 4.5oz fiberglass woven fiberglass that has been

treated for Alkali resistance.

G. Water: Potable.

H. Sand: Comply with all requirements of ASTM C 897.

I. Primer and Surface Conditioner:

1. Parex USA Tintable primer: Consisting of acrylic polymers and design for use over

fully cured brown coats prior to the application of acrylic finish coats. To be tinted to

the finish coat color, prior to the application of the finish coat.

J. Finish coat, Elastomeric Acrylic Based Tinted Stucco Finish:

1. e-Lastic finish by Parex USA Acrylic based stucco finish coat, consisting of Elasto-

meric Acrylic Polymers, properly graded aggregate, colorant and proprietary ingredi-

ents.

2. Texture and color to be selected by Architect.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. Sealant Type A:



1. For exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not

limited to:

a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.

b. Joints between architectural pre-cast concrete units.

c. Control and expansion joints in stucco

d. Butt joints between metal panels.

e. Joints between marble and/or granite or tile

f. Joints between different materials listed above.

g. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows,

storefronts, louvers and similar openings.

h. Control and expansion joints in EIFS, Exterior Insulation and Finish System

I Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.

2. Provide single-component, low-modulus, non-sag sealant; comply with ASTM C920,

Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, Class 35, Class +50/-50, Class +100/-50

3. Acceptable sealants:

a. Silicones

1. Single Component, Sikasil - WS 290, Sikasil – WS 295, Sika Silbridge 300, or

Sikasil 728 NS

Part 3 - Execution

3.1 INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of base and finish

coats.

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to stucco installation as follows:

1. Substrate shall be of a type listed in IBC current addition or as required by local

codes and agency’s having jurisdiction. Wood based sheathings substrates must be

gapped 1/8 inch (3 mm) between panels.

2. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and/or other harmful conditions.

3. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants.

4. Notify contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the stucco assembly.

B. Install lath tight utilizing approved fasteners, properly secured, and that all accessories

are properly set and secured.

C. Isolation: Where lath and metal support assembly abuts building structure horizontally,

and where partition wall work abuts the overhead structure, isolate work from structure

movements. Install expansion or control joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral

support. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints separately and do not bridge

joints with furring or lath.



D. Examine substrates, grounds and accessories to insure that finished stucco work will be

true to line, plane, level and plumb.

3.3 PREPARATION OVER MASONRY SUBSTRATES: DIRECT BOND APPLICATIONS

A. Conform to preparation requirements of ASTM C926.

B. Verify that masonry and concrete surfaces to receive direct bond applications of stucco

basecoats are rough, free from form release agents or otherwise properly prepared to pro-

vide for adequate bond.

C. Apply a uniform coating of the acrylic bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations and instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Apply fluid applied Weather Barriers over all substrates with sheathing tape at all

seams and through wall penetrations

2. Install continuous insulation utilizing fasteners that are long enough to penetrate the

stud assembly a minimum of ¾ inch.

3. Install lathing and accessories followed by stucco basecoat assembly in accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations as written in manufacturer’s

data sheets, and in compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations and

agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Lathing: Install according to ASTM 1063 and install through polyisocyanurate and into

block, brick or concrete and or stud assemblies with a minimum of 1 inch penetration into

framing or block substrates. Install at a rate of one fastener per square foot.

C. Interrupt stucco application only at junctions of stucco planes, at openings, at control

joints or at expansion joints.

D. Basecoat:

1. Apply scratch coat to a thickness of 3/8 inch using sufficient trowel pressure or spray

velocity to key stucco into lath or onto direct bond substrate.

2. Scratch horizontally and in order to provide for a key with the brown coat.

3. Apply Brown coat directly over scratch coat to a thickness of 3/8 inch (9.5mm), us-

ing sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to key brown coat into scratch coat.

4. Darby, then rod surface to true plane.

5. Once brown coat has cured, apply the skim coat of the acrylic modified leveling ma-

terial and while wet, embed fiberglass reinforcement utilizing a wood float, and

smooth to flush. Take care to completely embed mesh not more than 1/32 inch into

surface of wet brown coat. Overlap all seams 2 inches and remove all wrinkles, rough

edges etc.

6. Float or lightly broom surface to provide bond with cement stucco finish coat, or

trowel smooth in preparation for acrylic finish coat.

7. Tool brown coat to provide a V-joint at intersection of stucco with frames or other

items of metal, wood, or plastic which act as stucco grounds.

D. Finish Coat: Acrylic Based Elastomeric Stucco Finish



1. Apply primer coats to fully cured basecoats, allow to dry until tacky.

2. Apply exterior wall finish coat to thickness recommended by manufacturer to achieve

texture indicated, using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to bond finish

coat to basecoat.

3. Apply exterior wall finish in number of coats and consistency required to achieve

texture to match approved sample.

3.5 CURING

A. Moist cure cement base coats with a fog spray of clear water with sufficiently frequent

applications to maintain stucco uniformly moist for a minimum of 48 hours following ap-

plications. Allow an additional 5 days of air curing before the application of any primers

or finish coats.

B. Air Cure acrylic finish coats only, do not wet cure.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Patching:

1. Repair damaged exterior wall finish coat to match surrounding finish.

B. Cleanup:

1. Remove excess finish and protective materials from adjacent surfaces.

2. Remove all excess materials from the project site.

END OF SECTION 09 2240 THREE COAT STUCCO SYSTEM

FBT Architects - 09 2900 - Gypsum Board [v4.1].docx

09 2900-1 GYPSUM BOARD

SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.

3. Tile backing panels.

4. Texture finishes.


1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls.

2. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

3. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for

ceramic tile.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory

indicated.

2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on

same backing indicated for Work.

3. Mock-Up: See section 03-3100 Project Management and Coordination for Building



A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack

panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.




A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold

damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy

surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an

independent testing agency.


to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to


C. Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of

the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following

1. American Gypsum.

2. CertainTeed Corp.

3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.

4. Lafarge North America Inc.

5. National Gypsum Company.

6. PABCO Gypsum.



7. Temple-Inland.

8. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and

mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.


3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.

D. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board (VHI): ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 2.



3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated to

both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Sheathing.

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Dens-Glass Gold.

c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond, e(2)XP.

d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Sheathing.


2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's

standard edges.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer.

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.


3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.



2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. Bullnose bead.

c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.

f. Expansion (control) joint.

g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

h. Expansion (control) joint.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable

strip covering slot opening.

C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Fry Reglet Corp.

b. Gordon, Inc.

c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of

ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials

specified.

2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.

3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.



C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim

flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,

sandable topping compound.

2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel

manufacturer.

2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

3. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-

type, sandable topping compound.

2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum

panels to continuous substrate.

1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according

to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033

to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel

manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag

wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.



E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative

assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.

b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.

c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.

d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.

e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

2.9 TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

B. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture.

b. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture.

2. Texture: Light spatter

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer

present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid

abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels

not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with

not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered

edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not

make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,

etc., except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,

coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4-

to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments

(including but not limited to load bearing walls, columns, roof deck, etc.), except floors. Provide

1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of

panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical

sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to

open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner

construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,

including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control

joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings

and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both

faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with

manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking

paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily

installed after panels have been installed on one side.



3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type ‘X’: In all areas – except as noted below.

2. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.

3. Impact-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: At all wet areas.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent

possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of

panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise

indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end

joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on

walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to

framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum,

from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-

rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically

(parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and

face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on

opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer

either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with

vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over

furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate

(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum

board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels

until fastening adhesive has set.

E. Curved Surfaces:



1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,

across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to

them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center

gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced

12 inches o.c.

3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.

1. Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural

penetrations.

2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated and locations indicated to receive

tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Install where indicated with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut

other construction or penetrations.

C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a

uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners

used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved

by Architect for visual effect. At minimum provide control joints in the following conditions:

1. At all construction joints (expansion, seismic or building control elements)

2. At a wall or partition runs an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet.

3. At an interior ceiling with perimeter relief so that dimensions between control joints does

not exceed 50 linear feet or the area of the ceiling between joints exceeds 2,500sf

4. At an interior ceiling without perimeter relief so that dimensions between control joints

does not exceed 30 linear feet or the area of the ceiling between joints exceeds 900sf

5. At an exterior ceiling or soffit so that dimensions between control joints does not exceed

30 linear feet or the area of the ceiling or soffit between joints exceeds 900sf

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. Bullnose bead.

3. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.



4. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

5. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.

6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for

decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile and that are substrate for acoustical tile.

3. Level 3: Storage rooms, mechanical, electrical and other service type

rooms, at other locations noted on drawings.

4. Level 4: At all other locations

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

5. Level 5: Where wall heights exceed 16’-0” or surface area exceeds 500sf uninterrupted

by wall mounted equipment. This surfaces will be approved by the architect

in writing prior to primer and paint applications.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for

use as exposed soffit board.

F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Tolerances: Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness - 1/32

inch in 1 foot, 1/16 inch in 2 feet, 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction (non-cumulative).



3.8 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces

receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a

uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application

patterns.

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture

finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these

precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray

to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other

non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall

application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction,

and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy

surface contamination and discoloration.


FBT Architects - 09 3013 - Porcelain Tiling [v4.0].docx

09 3013 - 1 PORCELAIN TILING

SECTION 09 3013 – FLOOR AND WALL TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain, Ceramic & Glass wall and floor tile.

2. Solid surface thresholds installed as part of tile installations.

3. Waterproof membrane for tile installations.

4. Crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations.


1. Joint sealants: Section 07 9200

2. Tile backer units: Section 09 2900.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus

joint width indicated.

B. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.

C. Wet Area: Tile surfaces that are either soaked, saturated, or regularly and frequently

subjected to moisture or liquids (including water), such as gang showers, tub enclosures,

showers, laundries, saunas, steam rooms, swimming pools, hot tubs, and exterior areas.


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with

the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar, grout, and other products specified.


A. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile

manufacturer and Installer.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with

project names and addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information

specified.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of

successful in-service performance.



B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety

of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for

each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without

delaying the Work.

C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform

quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each

aggregate from one source or producer.

D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the products specified in this Section

from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product.

E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

of Division 01 Section "Project Meetings."


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels

intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile

packages.

B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other

causes.

C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces

from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of

tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with

referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match

products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with

labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount

installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in the

porcelain tile installation schedules at the end of this Section.


following:

1. Tile Products:

a. As noted on drawings.

b. Approved equivalent.



2. Tile-Setting and -Grouting Materials:

a. American Olean Tile Company.

b. Dal-Tile Corporation.

c. Custom Building Products.

d. Laticrete International, Inc.

e. Mapei Corporation.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Porcelain Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1,

"Specifications for Porcelain Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics

indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.

2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified

in Part 1 "Definitions" Article.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI

standards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for

tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and

other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the

following requirements:

1. Provide tile color, texture and patterns indicated on Finish Schedule on the ID

Drawings.

2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during

Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package

show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved

Samples.

E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile

assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated.

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools, on exteriors, or in wet areas,

do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in

writing that this type of mounting is suitable for these kinds of installations and has a

record of successful in-service performance.

F. Waterproofing/Crack Suppression Membrane for thin set applications: Acceptable Product;

Laticrete Hydro Ban Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Membrane.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Refer to Interior Finish Legend on Drawings.

B. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to

comply with the following requirements:

1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable.

2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight.

b. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.



c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.

d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except with coved base and cap

angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.

2.4 THRESHOLDS AND EDGE PROTECTION

A. Thresholds:

1. Solid Surface Thresholds:

a. Type: Solid surface type. DuPont, Corian or equivalent.

b. Color and Finish: Refer to Finish Legend on Drawings.

c. Size: 1-1/2 by 1/2 inch size by full width of wall or frame opening.

d. Edges: Beveled one side when abutting other floor surfaces, radius edges from

bevel to vertical face.

2. General: Provide solid surface thresholds that are uniform in color and finish,

fabricated to sizes and profiles indicated to provide transition between tile surfaces

and adjoining finished floor surfaces.

B. Edge Protection: Roll-formed Type 304 stainless steel, height as required to accept

scheduled tile thickness.

1. Acceptable Products:

a. Tile-to-Hard Surface Flooring: “RENO-U,” model AEU as manufactured by

Schluter Systems, in height as required to accommodate scheduled tile and

setting bed thickness.

b. Tile-to Carpet:“RENO-TK,” model AETK as manufactured by Schluter

Systems,

in height as required to accommodate scheduled tile and setting bed thickness.

2.5 WATERPROOFING FOR TILE INSTALLATIONS (in shower pan)

A. General: Provide products that comply with ANSI A118.10 and the descriptions in this

Article.

B. Polyethylene-Sheet Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product consisting

of composite sheets, 60 inches (152 mm) wide by a nominal thickness of 0.030 inches (0.76

mm), composed of an inner layer of non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene sheet faced

on both sides with laminated, high-strength, non-woven polyester material, designed for

embedding in latex-portland cement mortar and as the substrate for latex-portland cement

mortar setting bed.

C. Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard factory-packaged, job-mixed,

proprietary, 2-part formulation consisting of liquid-latex rubber and powder for trowel

application and glass-fiber-fabric reinforcing.

D. Acrylic-Latex Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product consisting of

one-part acrylic-latex additive and flexible cementitious fiber mortar, factory packaged for

job-mixing and trowel application.

E. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard proprietary

product consisting of 1-part liquid-applied urethane in a consistency suitable for trowel

application and intended for use as both waterproofing and tile-setting adhesive in a 2-step

process.

F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Polyethylene-Sheet Waterproofing:



a. Nobleseal TS; Noble Company (The).

2. Latex-Rubber Waterproofing:

a. Trowel & Seal Waterproof Membrane; Custom Building Products.

b. Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane; Laticrete International, Inc.

c. S-9000; Summitville Tiles, Inc.

3. Acrylic-Latex Waterproofing:

a. PRP 315; Mapei Corporation.

4. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive:

a. Hydroment Ultra-Set; Bostik.

b. Deck-Seal 1000; Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.

G. Waterproofing Membrane:

1. Polyethylene-Sheet Product: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing

for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 39 inches (1000 mm) wide by 0.008-

inch (0.203-mm) nominal thickness.

2. Acceptable Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI

2.6 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, composed as follows:

1. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar

mix and liquid-latex additive complying with the following requirements:

a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.

b. For wall applications, provide non-sagging, latex-portland cement mortar

complying with ANSI A118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-

2.1.2.

B. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Porcelain Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy:

ANSI A118.3 with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Provide product capable of resisting continuous and intermittent exposure to

temperatures of up to 140 deg F(60 deg C) and 212 deg F(100 deg C), respectively,

as certified by mortar manufacturer for intended use.

C. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.

2.7 GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Chemical-Resistant Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, color as indicated.

1. Provide product capable of resisting continuous and intermittent exposure to

temperatures of up to 140 deg F(60 deg C) and 212 deg F(100 deg C), respectively,

as certified by mortar manufacturer for intended use.

B. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.

C. Grout Sealer:

1. Water-based acrylic sealant, 15 percent resin solids, designed to effectively seal grout

from common staining materials and prevent the absorption of liquids leaving a

smoother finish with a clear film on top of the grout.

2. Does not turn white when exposed to standing water.

3. Not easily removed by common household cleaners.

4. Acceptable Product: CeramaSeal Grout Sealer by Bostik, Middleton, MA.



2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply

with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section

"Joint Sealants."

1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant

manufacturer.

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed

joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Chemical-Resistant Sealants: For chemical-resistant floors, provide sealants compatible

with chemical-resistant mortars and grouts, approved for use indicated by manufacturers of

both mortar/grout and sealant and with chemical-resistance properties equivalent to

mortar/grout.

D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealants:

a. Dow Corning 786; Dow Corning Corporation.

b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones.

c. Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant; Pecora Corp.

d. Rhodorsil 6B White; Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.

e. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco, Inc.

2.9 TILE BACKER UNITS

A. Refer to Section 09 2900.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-

based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for

installations indicated.

B. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect

exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with tile,

mortar, and grout products; and is easily removable after grouting is completed without

damaging grout or tile.

1. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is

specially formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for

tile.

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile

and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and

grout manufacturers.

2.11 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout

manufacturers' written instructions.



B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,

and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum

performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present,

for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films,

and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced

ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and

mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been

completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations;

if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample

submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken

from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and

match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles

at Project site before installing.

B. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to

prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of

tile against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating them with a continuous film of

temporary protective coating indicated below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces:

1. Grout release.


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation

standards in "Specifications for Installation of Porcelain Tile" that apply to types of setting

and grouting materials and to methods indicated in porcelain tile installation schedules.

B. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for Porcelain Tile Installation."

Comply with TCNA installation methods indicated in porcelain tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete

covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without

marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in



items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and

other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when

adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile

cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints

within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Movement Joints: Locate movement joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials,

mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

2. Locate joints where tilework abuts restraining surfaces, such as perimeter walls,

dissimilar floors, curbs, columns, pipes, ceilings, and where changes occur in backing

materials.

3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 07 Section

"Joint Sealants."

H. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:

1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.

I. At wet walls and elsewhere indicated on the Drawings, install tile backer units and treat

joints to comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of

application indicated.

J. At restroom locations adjacent to Classrooms, install tile per TCA W-816 recommendations

at wall tile.

3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing per sheathing manufacturer’s written recommendations and to comply

with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce a waterproof membrane

of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate where required.

B. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to

determine that it is watertight.

3.5 SHEET MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Thoroughly clean existing surfaces scheduled to receive tile finish to ensure the removal of

all grease, oil or dust film.

B. Apply a latex modified cementitious levelling coat wherever a slight substrate irregularity

exists.

C. Crack Suppression Membrane: Install uncoupling membrane over structural concrete slab.

Apply uncoupling membrane to substrate with recommended bonding mortar for substrate,

applied using a notched trowel. Solidly embed scrim membrane into mortar.

D. Waterproofing Membrane (in shower pan): Install waterproofing to comply with

waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce a waterproof membrane of

uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.



1. Fully adhere waterproof membrane to substrate with tile setting adhesive, with no air

pockets.

2. Tightly butt adjacent sheets and cover with a 125 mm (5 inch) strip of waterproofing

membrane sealed to primary membranes.

3. Provide manufacturer’s waterproofing strips where required to span expansion joints

or terminate waterproofing into movement-joint type tile-setting accessories, as

detailed per manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Adhere waterproofing membrane to fixtures, joints around pipes, door and window

frames, etc. with transparent waterproof sealant.

E. Cover tile-backer board joints with fibre mesh tape set in latex-Portland cement mortar

3.6 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Porcelain Tile Floor Installation

Schedule, including those referencing TCNA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of

tile installation standards.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:

1. Porcelain Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

2. Paver Tile: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by

complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced

ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:

1. Exterior tile floors.

2. Tile floors in wet areas, including showers, tub enclosures, laundries, and swimming

pools.

3. Tile floors installed with chemical-resistant mortars and grouts.

4. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (203 by 203 mm) or larger.

5. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

D. Solid Surface Thresholds: Install solid surface thresholds at locations indicated; set in same

type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would

otherwise be exposed above adjacent non-tile floor finish.

E. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets

carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

3.7 WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the

Porcelain Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCNA installation

methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.

B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:

1. Porcelain Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

2. Glass Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

3. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch(1.6 mm).

C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by

complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced

ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:

1. Tile installed with chemical-resistant mortars and grouts.



3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all porcelain tile surfaces so they

are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating

manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove

coating to prevent it from clogging drains.

B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,

unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer

and Installer, that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial

Completion.

1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective

cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper

or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and

wear.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile

surfaces.

3.9 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. On or Above-Ground Concrete, Unbonded Mortar Bed, Floor Tile & Epoxy Grout

1. Installation Method: TCNA F114-12

2. Tile Type: As noted on drawings

3. Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method:

B.

C. Porcelain Tile Floor Installation – (thin-set mortar bonded to concrete sub-floor, with epoxy

grout): For interior floor installations of this designation, comply with the following:

1. Tile Type/Products: Refer to Finish Legend on Drawings.

2. Installation Method: TCNA F115.

3. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI A108.5 with the following mortar and grout:

a. Chemical-resistant epoxy grout.

4. Seal grout.

D. Porcelain Floor Tile Installation in showers – (thick set mortar bed over slab-on-grade, with

epoxy grout): For interior floor installations of this designation, comply with the following:


2. Installation Method: TCNA F112.

3. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI A108.1A with the following grout:

a. ANSI A118.6 or ANSI A118.7.

4. Seal grout.



3.10 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Porcelain Tile Wall Installations - (thin-set bonded to gypsum Tile Backer on metal studs):

For interior wall installations of this designation, comply with the following:


2. Installation Method: TCNA W243.


a. Sanded Grout

4. Seal grout.

B. Porcelain Tile Wall Installations - (thin-set bonded to gypsum Tile Backer on CMU): For

interior wall installations of this designation, comply with the following:


2. Installation Method: TCNA W2021.


a. Sanded Grout

4. Seal grout.


FBT Architects - 09 6513 - Resilient Base & Accessories [v4.0].docx

09 6513 - 1 RESILIENT BASE & ACCESSORIES

SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient wall base.

2. Resilient molding accessories

3. Resilient flooring accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.

B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches (300

mm) long, of each product color and pattern specified.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section

who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project

and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with

resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties

without delaying the Work.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.

2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per

ASTM E 662.


A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers,

each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and

handling instructions.

B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures

maintained between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).

C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation,

unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.




A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F

(35 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation,

during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written

recommendations specify longer time periods. After post-installation period, maintain a

temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F(35 deg C).

B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to

be installed.

C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during installation

and for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.

D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of

damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after

other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with

protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet(3 linear m) for each 500 linear feet(150 linear m)

or fraction thereof, of each different type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product

installed.

2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Johnsonite.

2. Roppe.

B. Products: Refer to Finish Legend.

2.2 VINYL WALL BASE

A. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I solid, homogeneous.

2. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: All areas.

B. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.



C. Height: 4 inches.

D. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches.

E. Outside Corners: Preformed.

F. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES

A. Vinyl Accessories:

1. Special radius flexi-track transitions for curved flooring transitions.

2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based

formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications

indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products

and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Edge Strips: As manufactured by Schluter Systems.

D. Sealant: Silicone sealant acceptable to resilient base and sheet vinyl flooring manufacturers.

Refer to Section 07 92 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur,

with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for

maximum moisture content. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for

resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with

installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing

substrates indicated to receive resilient products.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.



C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible

with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods

recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient

products. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or

dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation

instructions.

B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,

and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops

of adjacent pieces aligned.

2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

3. Do not stretch base during installation.

4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of

resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

5. Install pre-molded outside and inside corners before installing straight pieces.

C. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with

adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.

D. Sealant (in wet areas): Apply sealant to seal joint between resilient base and sheet vinyl

flooring. Comply with base, flooring, and sealant manufacturers’ published instructions.

E. Apply resilient products to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's written

installation instructions.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient

products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:

1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient

product manufacturers.

2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.

3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient

product manufacturer.

4. Damp-mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil.



C. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from

construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of

construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by

resilient product manufacturer.

1. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.

D. Clean resilient products not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended

to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project.


FBT Architects - 09 6519 - Resilient Tile Flooring [v4.1].docx

09 6519 - 1 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

SECTION 09 6519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl composition floor tile.


1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer

strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.

B. Samples for Verification: Full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile

specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.

1. For resilient accessories, manufacturer's standard-size samples, but not less than 12 inches

(300 mm) long, of each resilient accessory color and pattern specified.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient products certifying that each product

furnished complies with requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor tile to include in the maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has

specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a


B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source

with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties

without delaying the Work.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.



2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per

ASTM E 662.


A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each

bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling

instructions.

B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained

between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).

C. Store tiles on flat surfaces.

D. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless

longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.


A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in

spaces to receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at

least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer

time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13

deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be

installed.

C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation

recommended in writing by manufacturer.

D. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed.

E. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond

with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with

protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,

pattern, class, wearing surface, and size of resilient tile flooring installed.

2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. As Follows: Armstrong World Industries

2.2 RESILIENT TILE

A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Provide vinyl composition floor tile complying with the following:

1. Products: As shown on drawings.

2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and

patterns produced for tile complying with requirements indicated.

3. Class: Class 2 (through-pattern tile).

4. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

5. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

6. Size: As shown on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with

Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and

conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements

specified.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other

materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness

characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by flooring

manufacturer.

2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for

preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.



C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with

flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods

recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After

cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed

with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so

tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths

that equal less than one-half of a tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as

manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken,

cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles in basket-weave pattern with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures,

including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings.

E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by

repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining

marking device.

G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply

with tile manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive

mixing, and adhesive open and working times.

1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,

telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

H. Hand roll tiles according to tile manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING OF VINYL COMPOSITION TILE

A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:

1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient

product manufacturers.

2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.

3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.



4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil.

B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period.

Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer.

1. Apply protective floor polish to floor surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and

surface blemishes, if recommended in writing by manufacturer.

a. Use commercially available product acceptable to flooring manufacturer.

2. Cover products installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until

inspection for Substantial Completion.

3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or

hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll

objects over panels without moving panels.

3.5 VINYL TILE FOR ACCESS FLOOR INSTALLATION

A. Preparation:

1. The subfloor or access floor must be clean and free of all foreign matter: grease, oil, paint,

wax, dirt, dust and old adhesives.

B. Layout:

1. Establish chalk guidelines, which are at right angles to each other from which the tile are

to be laid. Measure the area from which the tile are to be laid. Measure the area to find

the best starting point for maximum size perimeter cuts. Layout tiles to cover the seam of

the access floor panels.

C. Adhesive:

1. Using a conductive or standard commercial type releasable (pressure sensitive) adhesive,

apply adhesive to cover the floor with a thin coating using either a flat trowel or with a

brush or roller. Care should be taken to avoid adhesive seepage into the access floor seams.

Follow releasable adhesive manufacturer recommendation for time to allow adhesive to

become tacky, typically around 60 minutes. Adhesive is dry when it feels tacky but does

not transfer to fingers.

2. Instead of full spread, adhesive can be applied sparingly to the back of the tile or on access

floor to tack tiles in place only. Allow adhesive to dry before putting tiles in place.

D. Tile Installation:

1. Lay tiles starting at the center of the room working towards the walls. Lay following the

directional arrows on back of tiles. The perimeter tiles must be cut up to the wall from the

field tile. The perimeter tiles should be accurately scribed against the wall and any

projections coming out from the walls. Cut tiles from the face side with a sharp knife. Do

not jam tiles. Keep foot traffic off laid area while installing to prevent shifting.

2. Do not wax tiles.



E. Protection:

1. Use extreme care to protect the newly installed floor from rolling load for the first 48 hours.

Always use strips of hardwood or plywood when moving heavy objects.

2. Avoid damage from tracked-in dirt and grit by placing floor mats at outside entrances.

Follow manufacturers recommended cleaning and maintenance instructions.


FBT Architects 09 6723 - Resinuous Flooring.docx

09 6723 - 1 RESINUOUS FLOORING

SECTION 09 6723 – RESINUOUS FLOORING (CERAMIC CARPET)

Part 1 - General

1.01 Work Included

A. Furnish necessary material, labor, and equipment required to prepare designated areas

and install a 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System.

1.02 Related Work

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract including General and Special Conditions

and Division I, excepting special Submittal and Quality Assurance provisions in this

section.

1.03 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications Obtain 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System

materials from a single manufacturer with a minimum of five (5) years verifiable

experience providing materials of the type specified in this section.

B. Contractor's Qualifications Installation must be performed by a manufacturer approved

contractor with skilled mechanics having not less than three (3) years satisfactory

experience in the installation of the type of system as specified in this section and must be

approved in writing by the manufacturer of the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring

System.

C. Floor System Thickness Verification: At the owner's discretion and under his supervision

the contractor shall take one (1) 1" random cores per 1,000 sq. ft. through the system into

the substrate to verify proper system thickness. Cored areas less than specified thickness

shall be removed and replaced or increased in thickness by the installing contractor, in a

manner that does not affect the performance or integrity of the system. Cored areas which

comply with the recommended system thickness shall be built-up to match the surrounding

surface elevation prior to applying the seal coat(s). Cores taken and patched will be

noticeable; therefore, cores should be taken from areas where aesthetics are less critical.

Cost associate with repair of cored areas that comply with specification thickness are the

responsibility of the owner.

1.04 Warranty

A. The contractor and the manufacturer shall furnish a standard guarantee of the 1/8"

Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System for a period of one year after installation.

The labor and material guarantee shall include loss of bond and wear-through to the

concrete substrate from normal use.

B. Not included in the warranty are damage due to structural design deficiencies including

but not limited to slab cracking from lateral, vertical or rotational movement, and gouging

or other damage due to fork lifts, other equipment, delamination caused by vapor



transmission, Acts of God, or other elements beyond the scope of protection of this system

nor causes not related to the system materials.

C. In case of a warranty claim, the owner will notify the manufacturer and contractor in

writing within 30 days of the first appearance of problems covered under this warranty.

The owner will provide free and unencumbered access to the area during normal working

hours for warranty rework. Property protection is also the owner's responsibility. Remedy

is limited to direct repair of the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System.

1.05 Submittal

A. System Data Submit manufacturer's specifications on cured system and individual

components of the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System, including physical

properties and performance properties and tests described in part 2.01 B and submit

Material Safety Data Sheets. Each individual component of the system will be evaluated

on the basis of these standards. For any tests not listed in the manufacturer's standard

nationally published data, the manufacturer must supply the missing data accompanied by

the independent testing laboratory's test results which prove compliance in accordance with

the referenced standard(s). Furnish five (5) sets of this information. Manufacturer's

standard color chart shall also be submitted.

B. The contractor shall submit a 6" x 6" cured system sample which the contractor has

made for verification purposes and finish texture approval.

C. The contractor shall furnish a list of projects using either specified material or

equivalent that they have installed during the last five (5) years. Information shall include:

project name, square footage, owner contact name with owner's address and phone number.

Also, the contractor shall furnish résumés detailing the experience of key project personnel

including supervisors and mechanics.

D. It is the intention of this Section to provide the products as named. Substitutions will be

considered only when received by the Architect through a bidding Prime Contractor at least

ten days prior to the date set for receipt of bids. Upon receipt of any such submission, the

Architect will determine whether or not the proposed product is an equal. In the event the

Architect determines that a proposed system is an approved equal, he will issue an

addendum and notify all bidders at least 48 hours prior to receipt of bids. No substitutions

will be considered after contract bid date.

E. The contractor shall submit a copy of the manufacturer's packing slip, tagged for this

specific job, along with calculations, signed by an officer of the primary material supplier

demonstrating that the quantity of material furnished for the project will achieve the

specified coverage and mil thickness.

1.06 Material Delivery, Handling and Storage

A. Primary system materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's undamaged,

unopened containers. Each container shall be clearly marked with the following:

•Product name(s) and/or Number(s)

•Manufacturer's name

•Component designation (A, B, etc.)

•Product Mix Ratio



•Health and Safety Information

•CHEMTREC Emergency Response Information

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle the materials by methods which prevent

damage.

C. The contractor shall promptly inspect direct jobsite material deliveries to assure that

quantities are correct, comply with requirements and are not damaged.

D. The contractor shall be responsible for materials furnished by him, and he shall replace,

at his own expense, such materials that are found to be defective in manufacture or that

have become damaged in transit, handling or storage.

E. Store material(s) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels

intact and legible. Maintain temperatures within the required range. Do not use materials

which exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended shelf life.

1.07 Job Conditions

A. The contractor shall visit the jobsite prior to the installation of the 1/8" Decorative

Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System to evaluate substrate condition, including substrate

moisture transmission, quantity and severity of cracking, and the extent of repairs needed.

Substrate imperfections should be repaired only after mechanical preparation of the

substrate. Surface preparation reveals most imperfections requiring repair. Concrete

substrates shall be tested to verify that the moisture vapor transmission of the substrate

does not exceed the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System manufacturers'

recommendations. Cost associated with repair, leveling and remediation of the substrate

are the responsibility of the provider of the substrate.

B. The contractor should exercise care during surface preparation and system installation

to protect surrounding substrates and surfaces, as well as in-place equipment. The

contractor shall prepare the substrate to remove laitance and open the surface. This shall

be achieved by light brush grit blasting. Surface profile achieved shall be similar to medium

grit sandpaper and free from bond-inhibiting contaminants.

C. Sub floor tolerances are specified in Section 03 300 (in accordance with ACI 302). Each

drain in the installation area must be working and raised or lowered to the actual finished

elevation of the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System.

D. System must be protected by the General Contractor or, as a separate bid item, by the

installing contractor until it is inspected and turned over to the owner.

E. The minimum slab temperature must be conditioned to 60 degrees F before commencing

installation, during installation, and for at least 72 hours after installation is complete. The

substrate temperature must be at least 5 degrees F above the dew point during installation.

F. Maintain lighting at a minimum uniform level of 50 or more foot candles in areas where

the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System is being installed. It is the

recommendation of the manufacturer that the permanent lighting be in place and working

during the installation.



G. Leaks from pipes and other sources must be corrected prior to the installation

of the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System.

Part 2 - Products

2.01 Materials

A. System Overview: The General Polymers Ceramic Carpet #400, 1/8" Decorative

Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System, as manufactured by Sherwin-Williams, consists of

3579 Standard Primer / Binder as the primer, 3561 Epoxy Resin Glaze as the binder resin,

5900F ESTES Colored Quartz Aggregate, and 3745 Self-Leveling Epoxy as the grout.

B. Typical Physical Properties

Color Pre-Blended Standard Colors-See ID Drawings

Hardness @ 24 hours Shore DASTM D 2240 70/65

Compressive strength ASTM C 579 12,000 psi

Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 ASTM D 638 2,500 psi

6,000 psi

Abrasion Resistance

ASTM D 4060, CS-17 Wheel, 1,000 cycles

90-100 milligrams lost

Flexural Strength

ASTM C 580

ASTM D 790

4,500 psi

10,000 psi

Adhesion

ACI 503R

300 psi

concrete failure

Flammability

Self-extinguishing over concrete

Resistance Elevated Temperatures

MIL-D-3134J No slip or flow at required temperature of 158°F

Impact Resistance

MIL-D-3134J

Withstands 16 ft-lbs without cracking, delaminating

or chipping

ASTM C = Mortar system

ASTM D = Resin only

Part 3 - Execution

3.01 Surface Preparation

A. For thorough instructions regarding preparation of concrete substrates consult

"Instruction for Concrete Surface Preparation" (Form G-1).

3.02 Installation

A.General: Apply each component of the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring

System in compliance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and strictly

adhere to mixing and installation methods, recoat windows, cure times and



environmental restrictions. The 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System is

to be installed directly over non-moving control joints and cracks which have been

treated with EPO-FLEX epoxy, and the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring

System will terminate at the edge of isolation and expansion joints as designated by

the Architect, Engineer or Design Professional. Integral cove base shall be installed

where specified in the drawings.

B. Cracks After preparation, evaluation of quantity and severity of cracks in concrete

will determine the needed repairs. Original bid assumes repair and treatment of ten(10)

linear feet of cracks and control joints. Additional treatment is considered excessive

and must be bid on a per linear foot basis. For information pertaining to the treatment

of cracks in concrete substrates, consult Manufacturer’s publication, Concrete 102.

C. Control Joints: Original bid assumes repair and treatment of ten(10) linear feet of

cracks and control joints. Additional treatment is considered excessive and must be bid

on a per linear foot basis. For information pertaining to the treatment of control joints

in concrete substrates, consult Manufacturer’s publication, Concrete 103.

D. Isolation/Expansion and Other Joints Subject to Movement

All expansion joints must be honored through the flooring system. For

information pertaining to the above, consult Manufacturer’s publication,

Concrete 105.

E. System Primer: 3579 Standard Primer / Binder

F. First Broadcast: 3561Epoxy Resin Glaze 5900F ESTES Colored Quartz

Aggregate

G. Second Broadcast 3561 Epoxy Resin Glaze 5900F ESTES Colored Quartz

Aggregate

H. Grout Coat and 3746 Self-Leveling Epoxy

I. Seal Coat: 3746 Self-Leveling Epoxy

3.03 Curing, Cleaning and Protection

A. Cure the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System materials in

compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent contamination

during stages of the installation and prior to completion of the curing process.

B. Protect the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System from damage and

wear during other phases of the construction operation, using temporary coverings

as recommended by the manufacturer, if required. Remove temporary covering

just prior to final inspection.

C. Clean the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System just prior to final

inspection, using materials and procedures suitable to the system manufacturer.



D. Some cleaners will affect the color, gloss or texture of your polymer floor surfaces. To

determine how your cleaner will perform, first test each cleaner, in a small area, utilizing

your cleaning technique. This precaution will demonstrate the effect of your cleaner and

technique. If no deleterious effects are observed, continue with the procedure. If deleterious

effects do occur, modify the cleaning material and/or procedure. For recommendations

regarding types of cleaners, contact the 1/8" Decorative Broadcast Epoxy Flooring System

manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

FBT Architects - 09 7200 - Wall Coverings.docx

097200 - 1 WALL COVERINGS

SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl wall covering.

B. Owner-Furnished Materials: High Resolution Image for use as the wall covering.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 WARRANTIES

A. Submit manufacturer’s certification that wallcovering furnished meets or exceeds the architect’s

specification requirements.



1. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response

characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate pattern placement

seams and termination points.

C. Samples: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and finish specified,

full width by 36-inch long in size.

1. Wall-Covering Sample: Show complete pattern repeat.

D. Product Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. High

resolution image to be provided by the Owner.




A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each wall covering, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, color, texture, and finish, full width by length to

equal to 5 percent of amount installed.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for installation.

1. Build mockups for each type of wall covering on each substrate required. Comply with

requirements in ASTM F 1141 for appearance shading characteristics.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and

temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity

conditions at levels intended for occupants after Project completion during the remainder of the

construction period.

B. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time

recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied

with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.




b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2. Fire-Growth Contribution: No flashover and heat and smoke release according to

NFPA 265.

2.2 VINYL WALL COVERING

A. Description: Provide mildew-resistant products in rolls from same production run and complying

with the following:

1. FS CCC-W-408D and CFFA-W-101-D for Type I, Light Duty products.

2. ASTM F 793 for peelable wall coverings.

a. Category: I, Decorative Only.

B. Total Weight: n/a.

C. Width: 54 inches.

D. Backing: Scrim fabric.

1. Fiber Content: Polyester

E. Repeat: n/a

F. Stain-Resistant Coating: 0.37 thick Teflon film

G. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Vinyl wall covering shall have a high resolution photographic

image to be provided by Owner.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering

and substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering

manufacturer.



B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Section 09 9100 Painting and

recommended in writing by primer/sealer and wall-covering manufacturers for intended substrate.

C. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended in writing by wall-

covering manufacturer.

D. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease,

mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.

C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking,

unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.

1. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer

manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.

D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semi-gloss, and eggshell finish with

fine sandpaper.

E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and

similar items.

F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas

not less than 24 hours before installation.

3.3 WALL LINER INSTALLATION

A. Install wall liner, without gaps or overlaps. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished

installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried.



3.4 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products

and applications indicated.

B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at partition breaks and

corners.

C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll.

1. For solid-color, even-texture, or random-match wall coverings, reverse every other strip.

D. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage.

E. Match pattern as necessary to align image above the finish floor.

F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 6 inches from inside

corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. Horizontal seams are not permitted.

G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without

overlaps or gaps between strips.

H. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.

B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.

C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.

D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and

similar items.


FBT Architects - 09 8116 - Acoustic Blanket Insulation [v4.0].docx

09 8116 - 1 ACOUSTIC BLANKET

INSLUATION

SECTION 09 8116 – ACOUSTIC BLANKET INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustic preformed unfaced fiber batt insulation installed:

1. In stud partitions and ceiling spaces in thickness and locations shown in

drawings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 665, Type l, Class A (unfaced)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 3300

B. Product Data: For product specified.

C. Samples for verification.


1. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this

Section.


A. Deliver, and handle batts in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Owens Corning

2. Knauf Fiber Glass

B. At decks where shown in Drawings, use SelectSound Black Acoustic Blanket Fiber Glass,

by Owens Corning.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of product will occur. With

Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for

FBT Architects - 09 8116 - Acoustic Blanket Insulation [v4.0].docx

09 8116 - 2 ACOUSTIC BLANKET

INSLUATION

maximum moisture content. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for product installation

and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and inspections completed.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Vacuum clean areas to be covered immediately before installing product. After cleaning,

examine for moisture or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install products in accordance with manufacturers printed recommendations.

B. Install batts full width and length with tight joints between wall, ceiling or floor framing

and around penetrating electrical service boxes, piping, air ducts and frames.

C. Place batts between studs ensuring friction fit, free from sags, folds or open joints.

D. Install batts from bottom up, tightly adjusted and trim accurately with a utility knife.


FBT Architects 09 9100 - Painting [v4.0].docx

09 9100 - 1 PAINTING

SECTION 09 9100 – PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:

1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces, pavement markings and curbs.

2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.

3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition

to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

4. Painted Signage and Graphics

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material

is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention

an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or

surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or

finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts

(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal

surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

2. Painting includes identifying fire-rated wall assemblies with stenciled lettering above

ceiling.

3. Stairs: Paint all exposed surfaces, including underside.

4. Concrete curb fire lanes, and pavement markings, as shown in the drawings, and as

directed by the authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,

and labels.

1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Architectural woodwork and casework.

b. Metal lockers.

c. Elevator entrance doors and frames.

d. Elevator equipment.

e. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment (except where noted

otherwise).

f. Light fixtures.

g. Distribution cabinets (except where noted otherwise).

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible

spaces:

a. Furred areas.

b. Ceiling plenums.

c. Utility tunnels.

d. Pipe spaces.

e. Duct shafts.

f. Elevator shafts.

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:



a. Anodized aluminum.

b. Stainless steel.

c. Chromium plate.

d. Copper.

e. Bronze and brass.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

a. Valve and damper operators.

b. Linkages.

c. Sensing devices.

d. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or

other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or

nomenclature plates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured

at an 85-degree meter.

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when

measured at a 60-degree meter.

3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured

at a 60-degree meter.

4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when

measured at a 60-degree meter.

5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured

at a 60-degree meter.


A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include primers.

1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each

material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify

each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including

label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating

material proposed for use.

3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local

regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

B. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate

actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and

primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit

until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each

sample for location and application.



3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and

texture only:

a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch- (100-mm-) square samples for each color and

finish.

b. Concrete Masonry: Provide one 4-by-4-inch (100-by-200-mm) sample of

masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color.

c. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch-(300-mm-) square samples of each color

and material on hardboard.

d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm)

samples of natural- or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces.

e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch-(100-mm-) square samples of flat metal

and two 8-inch-(200-mm-) long samples of solid metal for each color and

finish.

4. ONEshot Painted Graphic Signage Submit:

a. Submit shop drawings showing sign size, form and letter heights. Submit a

schedule for owner review and approval i

b. Submit manufacturer's technical data and method of installation for each type

of sign required.

c. Submit supplier’s standard color samples for purposes of color selection and

verification by architect. Color samples must be actual materials used in

signage, printed color charts are not acceptable.

d. Manufacturers must submit 3 references showing products for projects

completed within the last 5 years.

e. Submit copy of manufactures product warranty.


A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with

project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other

information specified.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting

system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a


B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from

the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

C. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved

Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

D. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and

finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.



1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application

of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services

have been activated.

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional

benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added

cost to Owner.


A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and

containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.

2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).

3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.

6. Application instructions.

7. Color name and number.

8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum

ambient temperature of 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and

residue.

2. Protect from freezing.

3. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.

4. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from

fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.


A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F.

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F.

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85

percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.



1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted

are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during

application and drying periods.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the

quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers

for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the

Owner.

1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or

1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.


A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area

summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each

product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and

cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint

schedules.

B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules

by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (BM)

2. Diamond Vogel Paints. (DV)

3. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. (DE)

4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. (PPG)

5. Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).

2.2 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING

A. See Section 09 3500 Water Repellent

a. Location:

i. All exposed Masonry

ii. All stucco surfaces

iii. Other locations indicated on Drawings

2.3 HAND PAINTED GRAPHIC SIGNAGE

A. Hand painted graphic signage using a pounce pattern outline for visual reference for

painting the shape.



a. Manufacture:

i. ONEshot

b. Location and Graphics:

i. As shown in construction documents

2.4 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials

that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service

and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating

types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product

identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate

colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be

used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish

manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed

substitutions.

C. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply

with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not

apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.

3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than

250 g/L.

4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.

5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.

6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.

7. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.

8. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.

9. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than

250 g/L.

10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.

11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.

12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.

13. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.

D. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints

and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the

following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that

are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more

benzene rings).



2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein.

b. Acrylonitrile.

c. Antimony.

d. Benzene.

e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.

f. Cadmium.

g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.

h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.

i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.

j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.

k. Diethyl phthalate.

l. Dimethyl phthalate.

m. Ethylbenzene.

n. Formaldehyde.

o. Hexavalent chromium.

p. Isophorone.

q. Lead.

r. Mercury.

s. Methyl ethyl ketone.

t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.

u. Methylene chloride.

v. Naphthalene.

w. Toluene (methylbenzene).

x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.

y. Vinyl chloride.

E. Colors: Provide custom colors of the finished paint systems to match the Architect's

samples.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with

requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of

work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture

meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

3. Wood: 15 percent.

4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

5. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.



D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and

surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting

fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is

impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied

protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed

using workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of

substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before

cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning

process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's

written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime.

2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster,

and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove

efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required

to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use

mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.

b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing

appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint

to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint

surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's

written instructions.

c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid

or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid,

neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral

spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust

off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white

shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After

priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.



b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime

edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets,

counters, cases, and paneling.

c. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other

wet wall construction occurs on backside.

d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of

varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop

coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use

solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures

Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations.

a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and

according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10.

b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash

coat before priming.

c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.

Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and

touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents

so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from

galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce

clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of

foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as

required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,

remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended

limits.

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when

multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the

finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each

separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and

techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.

2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in

fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar


09 9100 - 10 PAINTING

components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the

system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind

permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible

through registers or grilles.

7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed

surfaces.

8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.

9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

10. Work will include accent color walls. Paint surfaces to receive accent colors as

indicated on the drawings. When drawings do not indicate accent wall locations,

coordinate locations of colors with Architect prior to painting.

11. For graffiti removal, consult coating manufacturer, ProSoCo, Inc., or call Rinker

Materials, Albuquerque, NM, (505) 345-4451.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or

otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before

subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of

application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured

as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth,

even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between

applications.

2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.

3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply

additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give

special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners

receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not

recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel

sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint

does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other

applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of

appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended

by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by

the manufacturer for the material and texture required. Confirm use of spray

equipment is acceptable to building owner in occupied areas.

4. Back roll finish coat at all spray painted areas to facilitate touch up. Patches will not

be accepted; entire wall shall be repainted (corner to corner).

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturers

recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as

recommended by the manufacturer.


09 9100 - 11 PAINTING

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to

items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.

F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Piping, pipe hangers, brackets, collars, and supports.

2. Heat exchangers.

3. Tanks.

4. Ductwork.

5. Insulation.

6. Motors and mechanical equipment.

7. Accessory items.

8. Unfinished and primed louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels. Remove and

paint separately.

9. Exposed and insulated pipes.

10. Interior surfaces of ducts and dampers that are visible through grilles and louvers.

Provide one coat of flat black paint to limit sight line.

11. Factory primed equipment.

12. Exposed factory finished equipment on roof, exterior of building, and in finished areas.

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Conduit and fittings, boxes,

2. Switchgear.

3. Panelboards (shall include pre-finished panel boards located in normally occupied areas).

H. Exterior metal items to be painted include, but are not limited to,

1. Lintels.

2. Bollards.

3. Architectural steel.

4. Galvanized metal flashings.

5. Miscellaneous exposed steel.

6. Steel doors and frames.

7. Stairs.

8. Handrails and railings.

I. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete

coverage with pores filled.

J. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended

by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not

been prime coated by others. Apply one coat of primer on gypsum wallboard surfaces prior

to texture application, apply a second coat of primer over gypsum wallboard after texture

has been applied. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or

unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other

defects due to insufficient sealing.

K. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,

opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,

holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be

acceptable.

L. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of

even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,

orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.


09 9100 - 12 PAINTING

1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

M. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no

evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface

imperfections.

N. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,

refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.

O. Identification: Provide 3 inch high stenciled block letters in red to identify each rated wall

assembly. Refer to Section 09 29 00.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at

any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being

applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified,

sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove

noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces

painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected

materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials,

the two paints are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded

paint materials from the site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove

spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent

finished surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.

Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by

Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective

wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged

or defaced painted surfaces.

3.7 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE


09 9100 - 13 PAINTING

A. Apply paint in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified.

Listing order does not indicate preference. Use only one manufacturer throughout Project

as conditions allow. Do not intermix manufacturers.

B. Steel (includes all exterior hollow metal, except for steel canopy structure, guardrails and

handrails see below):

a. First Coat: Red Oxide Primer (unless shop primed), 1.6 mils.. DFT.

1) Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Acrylic Primer PO4.

2) Dunn-Edwards Bloc-Rust Premium WH BRPROO-1-WH.

3) PPG Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM, 90-712, 123 g/L VOC.

4) Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 series,

<100 g/L VOC.

b. Two Coats: gloss enamel, 65 percent or greater on a 60 degree gloss meter. Each coat

to be 2.0 mils.. DFT.

1) Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP DTM Acrylic Gloss P29.

2) Dunn Edwards UltraShield Acrylic DTM Gloss.

3) PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Interior/Exterior Gloss, 99-1210, 90 g/L VOC.

4) Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss, B66-650 series, <50 g/L

VOC.

C. Steel (exterior steel canopy structure, guardrails and handrails):

a. First Coat: Rust Inhibitor Primer (shop primed),

1) Fabricators standard alkyd rust inhibiting primer.

b. Second Coat: Rust Inhibitor Primer 2.0 mils. DFT.





<100 g/L VOC.

c. Two Coats: Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane, two component aliphatic acrylic urethane.

Each coat to be 2.0 mils.. DFT.

1) Benjamin Moore Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Gloss Finish P74.

2) Carboline Industrial - 134 WB Carbothane by Dunn Edwards.

3) PPG Durethane Water-Based Urethane Gloss, 98-8200, 118 g/L VOC.

4) Sherwin-Williams Water-Based Acrolon 100 Polyurethane Gloss, B65-700

series, <100 g/L VOC

D. Mechanical Equipment, Piping, Conduits, Ductwork and Galvanized Metal:

a. Etching: Etch galvanized metals as specified above.

b. First Coat: Alkyd Primer, 2.0 mils. DFT.


09 9100 - 14 PAINTING





<100 g/L VOC.

c. Two Coats: Semi-gloss enamel, 50 to 60 percent on a 60 degree gloss meter. Each

coat to be 2.0 mils.. DFT.

1) Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss P29.

2) Dunn Edwards UltraShield Acrylic DTM SemiGloss.

3) PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss, 99-1210, 90 g/L VOC.

4) Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 series, <50

g/L VOC

E. Concrete Masonry –

a. See Section 09 3500 Water Repellent

F. Concrete Curbs, Parking lot markings, roadway lanes, and crosswalks - Flat Alkyd.

a. One coat Benjamin Moore Alkyd Safety & Zone Marking paint M56.

G. Exposed Finished Concrete (Architectural) – Penetrating stain and sealer by Okon when

noted on Drawings.

H. Painted Graphic Signage - ONEshot – installation per manufacture recommendations

3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board – Semi Gloss: At wall surfaces unless noted otherwise

a. One Coat: Acrylic Copolymer Latex Primere, 1.5 mils. DFT.

1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Primer N534.

2) Dunn-Edwards Enso Low Odor Zero VOC Interior Primer, ENSO00.

3) PPG Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer, 9-900, 0 g/L VOC.

4) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600,

0 g/L VOC.

b. Two Coats: Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel, 50 to 60 percent on a 60 degree gloss meter.

Each coat to be 1.5 mils. DFT.

1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss Finish N539.

2) Dunn-Edwards Suprema Semi-Gloss Paint 50.

3) PPG Pure Performance Inteiror Latex Semi-Gloss, 9-500, 0 g/L VOC.

4) Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Semi-Gloss B31-2600 series, 0 g/L

VOC.


09 9100 - 15 PAINTING

B. Gypsum Board – Epoxy Semi-Gloss: At areas in close proximity to sinks and throughout

Toilet Rooms.

a. One Coat: Acrylic Copolymer Latex Primer, 1.5 mils. DFT.

1) Benjamin Moore Waterborne Epoxy Primer M08/M09.

2) Carboline Sanitile 120 Heavy Duty Bonding Primer (voc 72 g/l) as supplied

by Dunn-Edwards.



0 g/L VOC.

b. Two Coats: Two Component Polyamide/Epoxy Resin Coating or waterborne epoxy

semi-gloss finish. Each coat to be 4.0 mils.. DFT.

1) Benjamin Moore Super Spec HP Acrylic Epoxy Semi-Gloss P43/P43-86.

2) Carboline Sanitile 555 High Performance Waterborne Epoxy (voc 79 g/l) as

supplied by Dunn-Edwards.

3) PPG PITT Glaze Interior Semi-Gloss Pre-Catalyzed Water-Borne Acrylic

Epoxy, 16-310, 97 g/L VOC.

4) Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Water-Based Epoxy Semi-Gloss, B73-300

series, <50 g/L VOC.

C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1) See Section 09 3500 Water Repellent

D. Ferrous Metals: Hollow metal doors, metal door frames, borrowed light frames,

exposed structure, non-galvanized piping and conduit.

a. First Coat: Red Oxide Primer (unless shop primed), 1.6 mils.. DFT.





<100 g/L VOC.

b. Two Coats: Semi-Gloss enamel, 50 to 60 percent on a 60 degree gloss meter. Each

coat to be 2.0 mils.. DFT.





g/L VOC.

E. Steel (interior guardrails, handrails and all steel stair elements):

a. First Coat: Rust Inhibitor Primer (shop primed),


09 9100 - 16 PAINTING

1) Fabricators standard alkyd rust inhibiting primer.

b. Second Coat: Rust Inhibitor Primer 2.0 mils. DFT.





<100 g/L VOC.

c. Two Coats: Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane, two component aliphatic acrylic urethane.

Each coat to be 2.0 mils.. DFT.

1) Benjamin Moore Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Gloss Finish P74.

2) Carboline Industrial - 134 WB Carbothane by Dunn Edwards.

3) PPG Durethane Water-Based Urethane Gloss, 98-8200, 118 g/L VOC.

4) Sherwin-Williams Water-Based Acrolon 100 Polyurethane Gloss, B65-700

series, <100 g/L VOC

F. Galvanized Metals:

a. Etching: Etch galvanized metals as specified above.

b. First Coat: Acrylic Primer, 20 mils. DFT.





<100 g/L VOC.

c. Two Coats: Semi-Gloss Enamel, 50 percent-60 percent on a 60 degree gloss meter, 2.0

mils.. DFT.





g/L VOC.

G. Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating and Electrical Items:

a. General: Exposed unpainted, prime coat painted, and insulated items, hangers,

straps, junction boxes, and ducts of plumbing, heating, air conditioning, and

ventilating and electrical work shall be painted in finished space where exposed.

b. Insulated or Wrapped Work: First Coat as recommended by paint manufacturer,

Two Coats - Semi Gloss Latex Enamel 50 to 60 percent on a 60 degree gloss meter,

1.3 mils.. DFT.




09 9100 - 17 PAINTING



g/L VOC.

c. Non-Insulated Work: Two Coats – SemiGloss Latex Enamel 50 to 60 percent on a 60

degree gloss meter. Each coat to be 1.5 mils. DFT.





g/L VOC.

H. Intumescent Paint: At plywood telephone backer boards and electrical panels.

a. First Coat:

1) Benjamin Moore Regal First Coat 216

2) Carboline Sanitile 120 Heavy Duty Bonding Primer (voc 72 g/l) as supplied

by Dunn-Edwards.



0 g/L VOC.

b. Two Coats:

1) Benjamin Moore Latex Fire Retardant Coating M59.

2) Carboline Nulifire S607 Waterborne Intumescent Coating (voc 116 g/l) as

supplied by Dunn-Edwards.

3) PPG Albi Fire Retardant Coating as supplied by PPG.

4) Sherwin Williams Flame Control 2020.

I. Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall: At Tectum wall/ceiling tile.

a. Two Coats:

1) Sherwin Williams Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall B42W1

J. Sealed or Epoxy Coated Floors:

a. Two Coats:

1) Sherwin Williams General Polymers 3479 Water-Based Epoxy

2) Tint color to be selected by Architect


FBT Architects 10 1400 - Signage [nm].doc

10 1400-1 SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 1400 – SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior Room and Wayfinding Signage B. Building Lettering C. Pool Signage


A. Signs shall be designed and installed for use by handicapped persons in accordance with

ANSI A117.7 1.3 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit shop drawings listing sign size, letterform and letter heights. Submit a schedule for owner review and approval including all building signage – room name, number & other text that will be printed on the changeable insert. Owner/Architect will provide “artwork” for printed background insert that will be printed and installed by the sign manufacturer.

B. Submit manufacturer's technical data and method of installation for each type of sign

required.

C. Submit one full size sample sign of type, style and color specified, including method of attachment.

D. Submit supplier’s standard color samples for purposes of color selection and verification.

Color samples must be actual materials used in signage, printed color charts are not acceptable.

E. Manufacturers must submit 3 references showing products for projects completed within

the last 5 years.

F. Submit copy of manufactures product warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Century Sign Builders. 2117 Commercial St NE. Albuquerque, NM 87102. Telephone: (505) 888-2901. Fax: (505) 888-2902. Email: [email protected]. www.csbsigns.com (Basis of Design).

B. Manufacturers of equivalent products submitted and approved in accordance with

Section 01 6300 - Product Substitution Procedures.

2.2 FABRICATION / MATERIALS


10 1400-2 SIGNAGE

A. Interior Room, Exterior Room, Pool Signage and Wayfinding Signs shall be constructed

to be code compliant (see 1.02a). Each sign will have the following components where applicable:

1. Sign Face - Romark Ultra Matte Clear Modified Acrylic 1/16” with Direct to substrate print UV Digital printed sandstone graphic on 2nd Surface

2. Sign Backer – Romark ultra matte Dark Brown Modified Acrylic 1/8” (Standard color from manufacture)

3. Tactile Pictogram – Romark 1/32” black modified acrylic or Eq 4. Tactile Characters – romark 1/32” black modified acrylic or Eq 5. Clear rasterized braille 6. Owner Logo – printed modified acrylic 7. Sign Face - Romark Ultra Matte Canyon Color Modified Acrylic 1/8” (Standard

color from manufacture) 8. Tactile Pictogram - Romark Ultra Matte Dark Brown Color Modified Acrylic 1/8”

(Standard color from manufacture) 9. Tactile Characters - 1/32” Ash Color modified acrylic 10. Clear rasterized braille 11. Sign Face - Romark Ultra Matte Clear Modified Acrylic 1/16” with Direct to

substrate print UV Digital printed sandstone graphic on 2nd Surface Typical sign layout:

B. Cast Aluminum letters

1. Acceptable Manufacturer or Manufacturer’s Representative A. Gemini Incorporated

103 Mensing Way Cannon Falls, MN 55009 Phone: 800-538-8377 or 507-263-3957 Fax: 800-421-1256 or 507-263-4887 Email: [email protected] Web: www.signletters.com

C. Exterior Document Holder B13.5x17-DOC (Landscape)

1. HEADER/FOOTER TRIM SUBSTRATE Size for Landscape: 1-3/16" H x 17" W Material/Thickness: 1/16" Exterior Modified Acrylic Color: TBD by Architect, provide available options

2. SPACER SUBSTRATE Size for Landscape: 1-1/16" H x 17" W Material/Thickness: 1/32" Modified Acrylic Color: Ultra Matte Clear (312-101)


http://www.signletters.com/


10 1400-3 SIGNAGE

3. FRONT LENS SUBSTRATE Size for Landscape: 13-3/16" H x 17" W Material/Thickness: 1/16" Exterior Modified Non Glare Acrylic

4. INSERT: Size for Landscape: 11" H x 17" W Media: Transparency 5. BACK LENS SUBSTRATE Size for Landscape: 13-3/16" H x 17" W

Material/Thickness: 1/16" Clear Acrylic Exterior Rated Modified Acrylic 6. MOUNTING: Custom Magnetic railing system. 7. Qty. 3

2.3 SIGN DESIGN

A. The architect will provide sign schedule with room numbers and corresponding room function or occupant’s name and tile (if applicable). Manufacturer’s price is to include preparation of vector based graphics from those provided by owner.

B. Interior Room, Exterior Room, Pool Signage and Wayfinding Signs: (Furnish and

install signs at all spaces)

1. Scheduled Signage: a. Restrooms: 10 1/2”X8 3/4” a. Stor/Mech/Elec/Support Spaces: 4 1/2”X8 3/4” b. Exit sign: 3 1/2”x5 3/4” b. All other spaces: 4 1/2”X8 3/4”

2. Additional signage required (not scheduled):

a. Code Required Pool Signage, (refer to pool drawings and specifications)

b. Emergency Exit (Qty. 1): 3 1/2”x5 3/4” c. Pool Capacity (Qty. 1): 4 1/2”X8 3/4”

i. Read: “Maximum Pool Capacity 946”

C. Cast Aluminum letters: 1. Pool Name: “Farmington Outdoor Aquatic Center”

a. Cast Aluminum letters to be font and shown in drawings. b. Size to be 8” c. Finish is to be natural satin with a semi-gloss finish, material to be 319

Alloy/514 Alloy. d. Mounting is to be blind stud mounted on stand-offs at 1” from surface

with studs set in adhesive. Concealed mounted letters. 2. Street Address number: “1901”

a. Cast Aluminum letters to be font and shown in drawings. b. Size to be 10” c. Finish is to be natural satin with a semi-gloss finish, material to be 319

Alloy/514 Alloy. d. Mounting is to be blind stud mounted on stand-offs at 1” from surface

with studs set in adhesive. Concealed mounted letters.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION


10 1400-4 SIGNAGE

A. Signs shall be mounted using double vinyl foam tape (1/16” thickness), silicon adhesive, or concealed drywall screws when mounted to walls and at exterior locations.

B. Signs shall be mounted using concealed masonry screws and adhesive when mounted to exterior wall locations

B. Mounting height of all ADA required signage shall be in accordance with ICC/ANSI A117.1-current edition.

C. If condition 3.01 B cannot be met, approval may be given to install in alternate location.

D. If a sign should need to be mounted on an interior window (side light) apply a 1/32” ADA alternative (color to be selected by architect) cover to the surface of glass, then mount sign (as above) to cover in such a way that mounting method is not visible from interior of room.

3.2 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE

A. The signs in the building are made primarily from a laminated acrylic plastic.

It is imperative when cleaning the sign never to spray anything directly on the sign. For removing smudges or streaks, apply a cleaner (see below) on a soft, lint-free rag and wipe the sign. The following cleaners are approved: (only spray on the rag - Do Not Spray Directly On The Sign): • Any household glass cleaner (such as Windex) • Denatured Alcohol • Warm water and a very mild soap

B. The following cleaners and solvents should never be used to clean your building’s signs: • NO Acetone • NO Paint Thinner • NO Mineral Spirits • NO products containing bleach • NO “bathroom” cleaners

3.3 CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTATION

A. Provide copy of manufacturer’s recommended care and cleaning methods B. Provide written copy of manufacturer’s warranty and contact. C. Provide template file to end-user as described in Part 2 Section 2.02.A.2.2.

3.4 WARRANTY

A. Interior signage must be provided with an unconditional manufacturer’s building lifetime warranty.

FBT Architects - 10 2113 - Toilet Compartments [v4.0].docx

10 2113 - 1 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

SECTION 10 2113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid-polymer units as follows:

1. Toilet Enclosures: Floor Mounted, Overhead Braced.

2. Urinal Screens: Floor Supported, Overhead Braced.


1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for blocking to attach wall mounted brackets.

2. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, and

similar accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.

2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 6-

inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.


A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."




A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction

contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


following:

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.

2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.

3. Capitol Partitions, Inc.

4. Comtec Industries.

5. Global Steel Products Corp.

6. Metpar Corp.

7. Santana Products, Inc.

8. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

C. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor Mounted, Overhead Braced.

D. Urinal-Screen Style: Floor Supported, Overhead braced.

E. Door, Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE). panel material,

not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges and with homogenous color and

pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges.

2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to

exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning.

3. Color and Pattern: As noted on drawings.

F. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps):

1. Pilaster shoes to be anchored to the finish floor with #14 x 1 ½” stainless steel phillips

head screws and plastic anchors. Base assembly to be concealed with 3” high 20 gage

stainless steel pilaster shoe, through bolted to pilaster with stainless steel, tamper resistant

sex bolts.

G. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) square,

aluminum tube with satin finish; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster.

H. Brackets (Fittings):



1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

I. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to

exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware

and accessories.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with anti-

grip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Support Posts for Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum post with floor shoe for

anchoring to floor construction.

D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or

chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads.

Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip

galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling

mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to

conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for

standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a

minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible

to people with disabilities.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors

open at any angle up to 90 degrees.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for

emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Door latch

shall be aluminum slide. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with

disabilities.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized

to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.

Cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper.

5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides

of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,

straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended

anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with continuous brackets.

a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.

b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters

with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) into structural floor unless

otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each

pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels,

and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and

plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written

instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open

approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging

doors to return doors to fully closed position.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Field touch-up of scratches or defaced finish will not be permitted. Damaged, scratched

or marred defective materials will be rejected, and shall be replaced with new materials.

B. Remove protective masking. Clean surfaces free of oil and imperfections.


FBT Architects - 10 2600 - Wall Protection [v4.0].docx

10 2600 - 1 WALL PROTECTION

SECTION 10 2600 - WALL PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Corner guards.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;

current edition.


A. Corner Guards: Resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs at any point without damage or

permanent set.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in

measurements.

C. Samples: Submit two sections of corner guard, 12 inch long, illustrating component design,

configuration, color and finish.


A. Fire Resistance: Where fire ratings are specified for components, provide assemblies that have

been tested and rated in accordance with ASTM E 119.


A. Coordinate the work with wall or partition sections for installation of concealed blocking or

anchor devices.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wall and Corner Guards:

FBT Architects - 10 2600 - Wall Protection [v4.0].docx

10 2600 - 2 WALL PROTECTION

1. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.

2. Construction Specialties, Inc.

3. JL Industries

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6300 - Product Substitution Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Corner Guard - Surface Mounted: Extruded one-piece unit, installed with screws. Typical at

all exposed corner locations where tile is not indicated on either face in Restrooms or where

noted on Drawings.

1. Material: Stainless Steel.

2. Size: 3 inches both sides by full height of wall.

3. Length: One piece.

B. Corner Guard – Surface Mounted: Extruded one-piece unit, installed with screws. Typical at

all external corners in gypsum board corners in all Corridors and Vestibules and where noted

on Drawings.

1. Material: Stainless Steel

2. Size: 3 inches both sides by 4’-0” high

3. Length: One piece.

C. Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.

B. Pre-drill holes for attachment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that rough-in for components are correctly sized and located.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured

rigidly in position to wall framing members only.

B. Position corner guard 4” above finished floor to 52 inches.


FBT Architects 10 2800 - Toilet & Bath Accessories [FarmingtonOA].doc

10 2800 - 1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 2800 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Accessories for toilet rooms.

B. Grab bars


A. Section 102113 - Toilet Compartments.

1.3 REFERENCES

The references listed below are declared to be a part of these specifications, the same as if fully set forth, except as modified herein. Unless specifically stated otherwise, the edition or revision of each document in effect at the beginning of work on this project shall be used.

A. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

B. ASTM A 269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.

C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

D. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

E. ASTM B 456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.

F. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.

G. FS DD-M-411 - Mirrors, Glass; Federal Specifications and Standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. Provide backing at all wall mounted accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products listed are made by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corp. 4. Substitutions: Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions.

C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Provide two (2) keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A 269.

E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90/Z275.

F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2 (ASTM C 1036), with silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing in accordance with FS DD-M-411.

G. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.

H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.

I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.

B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B 456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.



C. Baked Enamel: Pre-treat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel.

D. Galvanizing for Items other than Sheet: ASTM A 123/A 123M to 1.3 oz/sq yd. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.

E. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

2.4 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Double-roll toilet tissue dispenser shall be type-304 stainless steel with satin finish. Unit shall accommodate two standard-core toilet paper rolls up to 5-1/2'' diameter. Flanges and support arms shall be 22 gauge and equipped with concealed, 18‑ gauge mounting brackets that are secured to concealed, 19-gauge wall plates with stainless steel setscrews. Spindles shall be equipped with heavy-duty internal springs. Manufacturer's service and parts manual shall be provided to the building owner/manager upon request.

1. Product: B-7686 manufactured by Bobrick. 2. Unless noted otherwise on drawings

B. Semi-Recessed Roll Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle: Stainless steel with lockable hinged front.

1. Paper towel dispenser capacity: 800 multi-fold paper towels. 2. Waste receptacle capacity: 12 gallons. 3. Product: B-3942 manufactured by Bobrick. 4. Unless noted otherwise on drawings

C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, wall mounted with stainless steel cover and vertical stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve and window gauge refill indicator, tumbler lock. Provide with unbreakable window type refill indicator.

1. Minimum capacity: 40 ounces. 2. Product: B-2111 manufactured by Bobrick. 3. Unless noted otherwise on drawings

D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror.

1. Size: 24 x 36 inches, or as indicated on Drawings. 2. Frame: 0.05 inch angle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and

tamperproof hanging system; No.4 finish. 3. Backing: Full-mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch galvanized steel sheet and non-

absorptive filler material. 4. Product: B-290 series manufactured by Bobrick.

E. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, diameter as indicated on the drawings, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, non-slip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar.

1. Length as indicated on drawings



F. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, surface mounted, self closing door, locking bottom panel with full-length stainless steel piano type hinge, removable receptacle.

1. Product: B-254 manufactured by Bobrick.

G. Mop Rack: Type 304 Stainless Steel with satin finish, 24” long with three (3) holders, spring loaded rubber cam holders.

1. Product: B-223 manufactured by Bobrick.

H. Shower Curtain Rod; Concealed Mounting: 1” diameter 20 gauge satin finish steel curtain rod.

1. Product: B-207 manufactured by Bobrick. See Plans for length.

I. Shower Curtain; Heavy duty Vinyl with nickel plated grommets and hooks. 1. Product: B-204-3 manufactured by Bobrick. See Plans for length

J. Solid Phenolic Folding Shower and Dressing Seat: One-piece solidly fused plastic laminate seat. Frame, Mounting Flanges, Baseplate, Spring & Guide Bracket all stainless steel. 1. Product: B-5191 manufactured by Bobrick

K. Horizontal, recessed mounted, fold down, stainless steel baby diaper changing station with concave changing bed; Model 100-SSR-R as manufactured by Brocar Products, Inc (Basis of Design).

1. Construction:

a. Body: 16 gage stainless steel with seamless welds, softened edges, and rounded plastic corners.

b. Replaceable tray liner: Insulating polystyrene. 2. Nominal size: 36 inches 914 mm wide by 23-1/4 inches 591 mm high and projecting 1

inch 25 mm when closed. When open, bed projects 21 inches [533 mm from back wall of station.

3. Rated load capacity: 400 pounds. 4. Operation: Opens and closes with pneumatic gas spring mechanism in concealed

cylinder and stainless steel hinges. 5. Equip changing station with child protection safety strap with cam buckle adjustable with

one hand.

L. Trash Receptacle – 1. Product: TA-4 manufactured by Bobrick

M. Surface Mounted x 24 Hook Strip 1. Location: Shower Dressing Stall and Changing Cabanas and as noted on plans 2. Bobrick B-232 3. Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish. Hooks are 1" W, 6 ½" H; projects 2 ¼" from wall.

Mounting strip is 4" H and has ¼" return

N. Stainless Steel Shelf 1. Location: Changing Cabanas and as noted on plans 2. Bobrick B-295 3. 5" wide, 18-gauge, Type-304 stainless steel, satin finish. 4. 3⁄4" return edge; front edge is hemmed for safety. Brackets are 16-gauge. Available in

one-piece lengths: 18"



O. Folding Utility Shelf 1. Location: Showers 2. Bobrick - B-287 3. Wall mounted, Type-304 stainless steel, satin finish. Pull-down shelf returns to upright

position when not in use. Shelf 14 ½" L, 5 3⁄4" W

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. Verify backing has been installed.

B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

D. See Section 06 1000 for installation of blocking, reinforcing plates, and concealed anchors in walls and ceilings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings:

D. END OF SECTION 10 2800

FBT Architects - 10 4400 - Fire Extinguishers & Cabinets [v4.0].docx

10 4400 - 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

& CABINETS

SECTION 10 4400 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & CABINETS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fire extinguishers.

B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.

C. Mounting Brackets

D. Accessories.


A. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association;

current edition.

B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current

edition.


A. Conform to NFPA 10.

B. Provide Extinguisher and Cabinet from single manufacturer

C. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose

specified and indicated.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide color and finish and anchorage details.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination

requirements.



& CABINETS

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories:

1. JL Industries, Inc.

2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.

3. Potter-Roemer.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Ten (10) pound Cosmic Series by JL Industries, Class ABC.

1. Location: All areas.

2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type: Larsen 2409-6R at non-rated walls, FS 2409-6R at

fire-rated walls. Fully-recessed type: 2409-R2. Surface mounted: 2409-SM.

1. Cabinet box: 9 1/2 by 24 by 6 inches formed steel box, 18 gage with white baked enamel

finish.

2. Trim: Returned to wall surface with 2 1/2" rolled edges for semi-recessed type; 5/16”

rolled edges for fully recessed type.

3. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim

and door stiles.

B. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; lock with break glass access.

Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge. Provide nylon catch.

C. Door Glazing: Full Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick float. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing.

D. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.

E. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.

F. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, white color suitable for field

painting.

G. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.

B. Signage:



& CABINETS

1. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinets with "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" lettering applied to

door. Provide letter in size, style and location per jurisdictional authorities requirements.

2. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter

decals applied to wall surface. Use letter size, style and location as directed by Architect.

3. Identify valve cabinets with "FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION" lettering applied to

door glazing. Provide letter in size, style and location per jurisdictional authorities

requirements

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 48 inches from finished floor to fire

extinguisher operating mechanism.

C. Secure rigidly in place.

D. Place extinguishers in cabinets or on surface mounted brackets where noted.

E. Position cabinet signage as noted in Part 2.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Provide where indicated on the Drawings and as noted in subparagraph 2.02 of this Section.


FBT Architects – 10 5126 - Solid Plastic Lockers.docx

10 5126 - 1 SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS

SECTION 10 5126 - SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Solid plastic lockers [and locker room benches].


1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements.

2. Division 06: Rough carpentry.

C. References

1. UL – GREENGUARD certified low emitting materials.

2. ASTM - B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

3. ASTM – A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:

1. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned layouts, elevations, trim, closures and accessories.

2. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive data

3. Samples: 3 x 3 inch samples showing available colors, in each available color.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years of experience in manufacture of solid plastic lockers

with products in satisfactory use under similar service conditions.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years of experience in work of this Section.


A. Store in an upright condition. Protect plastic lockers from exposure to direct sunlight. This product is

not intended for outdoor use.

1.5. WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s 25 year warranty against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal

conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Contract documents are based on products by Scranton Products. (www.scrantonproducts.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01



C. Materials

1. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE): polyethylene thermoplastic formed into solid plastic

components with homogeneous color throughout, with smooth orange peel finish.

2. Heavy Duty Extruded Aluminum: B221, 6063-T6

3. Chromium Plated Steel: A167

4. Color: To be selected from manufacturer’s color range.

2.2 STANDARD PLASTIC LOCKERS

A. Locker Configuration: Four tier

B. Locker Dimensions:

1. Height, Nominal: 72 inch

2. Width: 18 inch

3. Depth: 18 inch

C. Material: High density polyethylene (HDPE) plastic,

D. Sides, Tops, Bottoms, Backs, and Shelves: 3/8 inch thick HDPE plastic, grey finish.

1. Sides: 3/8 inch thick HDPE plastic, grey finish,

E. Locker Tops: Slope top finished in same color as locker door

F. Doors and Frame: ½ inch thick HDPE plastic

1. Doors: ½ inch thick HDPE plastic with horizontal venting

2. Handle: ADA compliant ergonomic handle, injection molded plastic

3. Locks: Coin collect

4. Hinge: Heavy duty extruded aluminum with corrosion free stainless steel pin with silver finish.

5. Engraving: Match Owner’s artwork.

6. ADA Compliance Package: 3134 aluminum Series 1100, H18, satin matte finish ADA plaque,

adjustable 3/8 inch HDPE plastic shelf with plastic clips

7. Latch Bar: 3/8 inch thick HDPE plastic with multiple latch points, fastened with stainless steel

tamper-resistant screws

G. Assembly profile: Full height of lockers, PVC plastic, snap fit assembled onto locker sides.

H. Accessories

1. Coat hook: Two-prong, high impact plastic, black finish, mounted to bottom of shelf or divider, one

per door opening.

2. End Panels: [1 inch] [½ inch] thick HDPE plastic, color and finish same as locker door

3. Filler Panels and Trim: ½ inch thick HDPE plastic, color and finish same as locker door

4. Number Plate: 3134 aluminum, Series 1100, H18, satin matte finish, fastened to locker with

corrosion resistant stainless steel rivets

5. Locker Base: 1 inch thick HDPE plastic, with color and finish same as locker door, 4 inch; field

assembly required.

6. Wall hook: one per door opening.

7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s color range.

2.7 LOCKER BENCHES



A. Bench Tops: 1-1/2 inch thick HDPE with edges rounded to ¼ inch radius, 9-1/2 inches wide x 72

inches long.

B. Pedestals: Aluminum, 16 inches high, secured to bench tops with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx

head screws and secured to the floor with lead expansion shields and 2 inch long stainless steel

machine bolts.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate locker components square and rigid; finish free from scratches and chips.

B. Fabricate locker components for snap-together assembly or slide-together dovetail connections

providing solid and secure, anti-racking construction.

C. Fabricate adjacent lockers with common side panel.

D. Fabricate locker units for assembly in maximum of three adjacent lockers.

E. Fabricate locker benches to sizes indicated in single lengths.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lockers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. [Set lockers directly on floor.] [Set lockers on prepared locker base].

C. Set plumb, level, rigid, and aligned.

D. Attach lockers to supporting construction with anchors best suited to substrate conditions.

E. Attach locker benches to floor.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and latches to operate correctly.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 9999-TOWER CLOCK

SECTION 10 9999 - 1 TOWER CLOCK

PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.01 Section Includes

A. Tower Clock Components and Remote Control System.


A. Section 09 2240– 3-Coat Stucco

B. Division 26 - Electrical


A. Basic Materials and Methods: All raceways, junction boxes, and conduit wire to be provided by

electrical contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CLOCKS

A. Furnish complete clock system consisting of (1) tower clocks and (1) remote control

system.

B. Manufacturer: Electric Time Company, Inc., 97 West Street, Medfield, MA, USA (508)-

359-4396/(800)-531-2562 FAX (508)-359-4482 - http://www.electrictime.com -

[email protected]

C. Tower Clock Components

• Finishes: Dial markings and hands to be made of aluminum and to have a polyurethane

painted finish – please specify color from manufacturer’s Standards.. Our standard

painted finishes are: medium or dark bronze (matches Duranodic 312 & #313), off-white,

matte-black, satin aluminum, forest green, red, bright white or gold.

• Hands: “IS” design .

• Dial Markings: “T1” design.

• Movement: Style MI Design. 24VAC drive motor and electronics. 8 second maximum run

time. Alternating hall effect switched closed loop minute impulse operation. Composite

lubrication free bearings. Style C1MI-GX rear access clock movement with straight

mounting straps. Single source: Clock and movement to be manufactured by the same

company.

• Style: WP-J-1042-MI, 42” o.d. of the dial markings, exterior, rear access silhouette clock.

D. Provide Type 99B-MI automatic reset control;

• IP65 Enclosure – Indoor & Outdoor Use

• Automatically resets clock after power failures.

• Automatically resets clocks for daylight savings time (if required)

• Precision Quartz Time base 4 minutes per year maximum drift.

• Built in 100 year daylight savings time calendar.

• 2 Line 16 character backlighted LCD display.

• ETL listed to UL 863.

• Power Failure Event logging.

• Standard MI output – 4 clocks maximum standard

• Standard 24VDC RP output -20 clocks maximum

• Sweep Second hand output

• Hour Strike Capability.

• RS-232 and RS-485 output ports

• 24 VAC hour strike output – configurable pulse output

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Installation

A. Inspect substrates, supporting items and related conditions, to ensure that they are ready to

receive each item, prior to commencement of installation.

B. Install each item at locations indicated on drawings, as detailed, and in accordance with

manufacturers’ instructions.

END OF SECTION

Counsilman-Hunsaker - a3afe73580c3fcfaebd6fb6a2dac2b17 Counsilman-Hunsaker - a3afe73580c3fcfaebd6fb6a2dac2b17

131100-1 SWIMMING POOLS

SECTION 13 1100 SWIMMING POOLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE

CONTRACT and applicable parts of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, as listed in

the Table of Contents, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK (for general guidance-not all inclusive)

A. Introduction

1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to construct the following: (1) a

Recreation pool and (2) a plunge pool. This work shall include the structure(s) and installation

of pool finishes as well as all products listed in Part 2 of Section 131100.

B. Work included in this section

1. It is the intent of this section to place the entire responsibility for the construction of the

pool(s) (including the construction of the pool shell(s)) under one vested CONTRACTOR.

Under this section the Swimming Pool Contractor will provide but is not necessarily limited to

the following:

a. Provide all equipment and services required for erection and delivery onto the premises of

any equipment or apparatus provided. Remove equipment from premises when no longer

required.

b. Layout, excavate, remove from the construction site, replace and grade materials as

required beyond the limits of excavation of the pool shell(s) to complete the work described

in this section. Reference Division 31 - Earthwork.

c. Grade and replace load bearing or high plasticity index soil, pump and dewater as

necessary to keep excavations free from water during construction, and provide sub-

surface drainage beneath the surge tank(s) as needed or required in the project

geotechnical report. Reference Division 31 - Earthwork.

d. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing utilities, sewers and

building foundations where required for related excavations. Reference Division 31 -

Earthwork.

e. Provide all electrical conduit, wiring, junction boxes etc. to all low voltage pool equipment

within pool filter/chemical rooms per Division 26 - Electrical. (Low voltage is considered

less than 110 V.)

f. Coordinate for all required bonding and grounding of the pool shell, fittings, and

equipment.

g. Provide all necessary piping and valving as shown on the drawings and specified herein.



h. Provide individually sized housekeeping pads for each pool pump. Provide housekeeping

pads for pool equipment as required in the drawings.

i. Provide the main drain hydrostatic relief system and a sight sump as shown on the

drawings. Reference Division 31 - Earthwork.

j. Provide winterization products and services for the outdoor swimming pool(s) for a

period not less than 12 months including a minimum of one (1) closing and one (1)

opening. The Contractor shall provide one (1) additional opening if the outdoor facility

is open for less than 40 days. Contractor to include winterization procedures with owner

training.

k. Construct the cast in place or pneumatically applied concrete pool shell(s) and cast in place

surge tank(s) as described in these specifications and detailed on the drawings, including

reinforcement steel, inserts, fittings, main drain sumps and all embedded items (piping,

anchors, etc.) for the pool(s). Reference Division 3 - Concrete and Structural. Before

commencing the placement of concrete, verify electrical bonding of the pool embedded

items and reinforcing steel. Also, coordinate and arrange any required electrical, plumbing

and or building inspections. Provide any structure drainage around the pool as shown on

the drawings. Backfill and compact fill around the pool structure, piping trenches and

excavations required by this work. Reference Division 31 - Earthwork.

l. Provide a proprietary aggregate cementitious finish finish in the pool(s) with a slip resistant

surface with a vertical tile band. Provide specialty tile for the gutter nosing, wall targets,

recessed steps, floor lane markings, depth markings and warning signs, construction joint

installation bands and all other tile installation within the pool structures. Reference

Section 131103 - Swimming Pool Tile - including the tolerance requirements for the

concrete substrate.

m. Assemble and install the cleaning and maintenance equipment for the pool(s) as specified

herein.

n. Provide for the storage of all pool related equipment, materials and systems. All items are

the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR until accepted by owner.

o. Obtain final acceptance by jurisdictional health department(s).

p. Start, test, calibrate and adjust all mechanical equipment, electrical equipment,

recirculation, chemical, and other supplied systems including deck, loose, maintenance, and

safety equipment. Instruct the Owner's representative in the systems operation and

maintenance as described herein.

q. Provide the heating system for the pool(s). Include all piping, heaters, heat exchangers,

booster pumps, controls, gauges, thermostats, control valves and wiring required to draw

water from the recirculation line, heat the water and return it back to the recirculation line

and interlock with pool recirculation pumps.

r. Provide a complete set of structural drawings for the pool structure bearing the seal and

date of a licensed engineer in the State of New Mexico. Drawings shall include plans,

elevations, cross sections and details required to construct the pool structure. Structural



drawings shall clearly identify all reinforcement, construction joints, embedded items

including waterstops, excavation lines and finish concrete elevations, under drainage

requirements, under drain routing, clean out locations and location dimensions of all

accessory items provided under this section. A licensed engineer shall utilize existing

soils and geotechnical data in the preparation of the structural design criteria. Provide all

design calculations and support data required to show compliance with performance

requirements specified, including design assumptions concerning element restraint. All

calculations shall be certified and sealed by the licensed engineer. Provide a design in

response to actual site conditions; however, the minimum thickness of walls shall be 8

inches. Floors shall have a minimum thickness of 6 inches.

C. Related work specified in other sections

1. Section 131104 – Swimming Pool Cementitious Finish

2. Section 131103 – Swimming Pool Tile

3. Section 131413 – Waterslides

4. The following work related to the swimming pools shall be completed by other trades.

a. Provide, erect and maintain all necessary barricades, signs, lights and flares for pool

construction to protect workers and the public.

b. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing utilities, sewers and

building foundations where required for swimming pool related excavations. Reference

Division 31 - Earthwork.

c. Provide the under drain system beneath the pool(s).

d. Provide sub-surface drainage beneath the pump pit and backwash pit. Reference Division

31 - Earthwork.

e. Construct the cast in place concrete pool shell(s) and cast in place concrete surge tank(s) as

described in these specifications and detailed on the Drawings, including reinforcement

steel, inserts, fittings, main drain sumps and all embedded items (piping, anchors, etc.) for

the pool(s). Reference Division 3 - Concrete and Structural. Before commencing the

placement of concrete, verify electrical bonding of the pool embedded items and

reinforcing steel. Also, coordinate and arrange any required electrical, plumbing and or

building inspections. Provide any structure drainage around the pool as shown on the

drawings. Backfill and compact fill around the pool structure, piping trenches and

excavations required by this work. Reference 31 - Earthwork.

f. Construct pump pit and backwash pit including reinforcement, inserts, wall sleeves,

anchors, access hatches, and fittings. Reference Division 3 - Concrete.

g. Layout, excavate, remove from the construction site, replace and grade materials as

required beyond the limits of excavation of the pool shell(s) to complete the work described

in this section. Reference Division 31 - Earthwork.



h. Prior to concrete pours, verify electrical bonding of the pool embedded items. Coordinate

and arrange any required electrical, plumbing and or building inspections to be performed

on embedded items. Reference Division 26 - Electrical.

i. Provide sanitary sewer and storm drain connections. Reference Division 22 - Plumbing.

j. Layout and install all deck mounted anchors, sockets, and inserts for the pool(s).

k. Provide deck finish beyond perimeter tile band. Reference Division 32 - Exterior

Improvements.

l. Provide rules and regulations signage as required by code. Reference Division 1 - General

Requirements.

m. Provide chlorine resistant caulking (sealant) and backer rod on pool decks. Reference

Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection.

D. Related work specified in Plumbing section. Reference Division 22 - Plumbing. Work to be

completed by other contractors.

1. Provide trench drains and area drains on pool deck.

2. Provide sanitary sewer piping from the filter room including floor drains, sumps, and sump

pump.

3. Provide water service to all hose bibbs, flush hydrant boxes and auto-fill bypass to air gap

above fill funnel(s). Install the slow closing solenoid valve(s) in the bypass auto-fill piping.

4. Install Plumbing Contractor supplied water meter on the fresh water supply line upstream of

the manual fill valve and the slow closing solenoid valve.

E. Related work specified in Mechanical section. Reference Division 23 –HVAC. Work to be


1. Provide any related systems for supplemental pool water heating.

2. Provide air recirculation systems for pool related spaces.

F. Related work specified in Electrical sections. Reference Division 26 – Electrical. Work to be


1. Provide power to the exhaust fans for the chemical rooms.

2. Provide motor starters, auxiliary contacts, magnetic relays and other electrical control devices

necessary for the complete operation of the pool systems. Install power to Variable Frequency

Drive pool pump starters and power from VFD to the pool pump motor.

3. Ground and bond all pool structures, fittings and equipment in accordance with Article 680 of

the N.E.C. Test and verify that the system electrical ground is true and solid. Provide

certification to this effort.



4. Obtain permits, inspections, and approvals of all wiring including grounding and bonding of

all metal components associated with the pool in accordance with Local, State and National

Electrical Codes.

5. Confirm all electrical conduits that penetrate the pool shell are watertight and installed per

N.E.C. Article 680.


A. The specifications and drawings illustrate and detail three (3) swimming pool (2 BOD pools plus

1 alternate) systems that shall be utilized for recreational use. Certain technical aspects of the

design are common only to pool systems planned for public use. Understanding these aspects,

their functions and interaction through experience is vital to completing a successful operating

system. It is a mandatory requirement that all bidders will have achieved such experience as a

prerequisite for bidding this project.

1. CONTRACTOR to refer to section 002113 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS for bonding

requirements.

2. If the Contractor has not received prior written approval for this project or has not been

included in the pre-approved list of Contractors, they must submit a list of projects meeting the

aforementioned qualifications, including contact information of the General Contractor shall

be submitted for review and approval at least 10 days prior to bidding of the project. The

Contractor must have completed at least five (5) public-use recreation pools with individual

water surface areas in excess of 6000 square feet and a depth of 4’-0” or more within the past

10 years.

3. The Contractor must submit prior to the start of construction the name of the on-site Project

Superintendent including their relevant experience. The Contractor’s on-site Project

Superintendent must have completed at least five (5) public-use recreation pools with

individual water surface areas in excess of 6000 square feet and a depth of 4’-0” or more

within the past 10 years. A list of projects meeting the aforementioned qualifications,

including contact information of the General Contractor as well as Owner shall be included

with the experience submittal. Project Superintendent must not change on the project unless

written authorization has been provided by the Architect and Owner.

4. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of,

such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the

obligation of the contract and to complete the work described or if the bidder does not have the

qualifications stated herein. Subject to compliance with item 2 above on this specification.

5. The following bidders have been pre-approved. All bidders shall meet the requirements listed

above.

Acapulco Pools

Bernie Gall

1550 Victoria St. N.

Kitchener, Ontario N2B3EZ

Phone: 519 - 743-6357

Fax: 519-743-9698

The Pool Company, Inc.

Matt Ruzicka

3077 20th St E Suite D

Tacoma, WA 98424

Phone: 253-926-6875

Fax: 253-926-0590



Weson Construction, Inc

Steve Kraft

4815 Hawkins St NE #C6

Albuquerque, NM 87109

Phone: 505-345-2511

Fax: 505-345-2512

Shasta Industries

Curt Lonsdale

7220 N. 16th St., #C-200

Phoenix, AZ 85020

Phone: 602-997-7896

Fax: 602-943-8692

1.4 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS AND ENGINEERING SERVICES

A. The system shall comply with all necessary pre-construction approvals obtained by the Owner and

Owner’s Consultants from local regulatory agencies governing the design and construction of

public swimming pools.

B. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government fees,

and other costs in connection with his work, including the filing of all necessary as-built drawings,

prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of governmental departments having

jurisdiction over their work. The Contractor shall also be responsible for obtaining all required

certificates of inspection for his work and deliver same to the Owner and Owner’s Consultants

before requesting acceptance and final payment for the work.

C. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials,

services, apparatus or drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and

regulations, whether or not shown on drawings and/or specified.

1.5 COORDINATION AND CLARIFICATION

A. Coordinate with other contractors or subcontractors all work relating to this section.

B. The Contractor must establish with other contractors or subcontractors, having related work in this

section, that all work necessary to complete the pool(s) as shown on the drawings and in the

specifications is included in the base bid and alternates to the Owner.

C. If in doubt regarding the responsibility for work covered in this section and/or discovery of errors

or omissions in the bidding documents, the Contractor shall notify the Architect through channels

established by the specifications and request a clarification ten (10) days prior to the bid date.

1.6 ALTERNATES

A. Review the description of the alternates in Division 1 and on the drawings for possible effect upon

work in this section. Alternates related to the work in this section are described in this division

and on the bid proposal form.

B. Pool Alternates

1. Alternate #1: LAP POOL

1.7 CONTRACTOR’S ALTERNATE PROPOSAL



A. Contractor shall submit his bid to the owner based on materials, equipment and methods as

specified in this Section. No substitutions of material will be allowed.

B. It is the intent of the contract documents to encourage competition. The base proposal must be on

providing the construction methods and equipment as specified and detailed. Any proposed

system substitution must have prior written approval by the Architect.

C. If there is any deviation from the basis of design equipment it is the responsibility of the

contractor to confirm that all engineering criteria are appropriate for the substituted equipment.

D. All proposed substitutions of specified construction methods and equipment shall include a

complete submittal as required by these specifications and drawings of appropriate scale

incorporating all required changes. The Contractor shall provide a list of at least ten (10)

satisfactory installations comparable to this project that have been manufactured and installed

under the manufacturer's current legal name. Submit a list of such projects with the name, address

and current telephone number of the Owner's Operator and Architect of Record to the Architect

on the bid date.

E. Any changes or modifications to the Contract Documents that are not authorized by the architect

shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 - General

Requirements and in strict compliance with the following procedures and guidelines.

B. Six (6) sets of shop drawings and engineering data shall be tabbed, indexed, referenced to the

specifications, bound in 3 ring binders and submitted in two stages. Provide 8 ½” x 11” cover

sheet for each item submitted identifying item and product number. The first stage shall include

all embedded items for the pool shell(s) (including piping diagrams) and the second stage shall be

for all remaining items. Electronic submittals will be acceptable in lieu of the six (6) hard copies.

All electronic submittals shall be organized, numbered, and submitted in the same format as the

project specifications. Only complete sets will be reviewed.

1. Engineering data covering all systems, equipment, structures and fabricated materials, which

will become a permanent part of the work under this contract, shall be submitted for review.

This data shall include drawings and descriptive information in sufficient detail and scale to

show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of component materials and devices; the

external connections, anchorage and supports required; performance characteristics;

fabrication and dimensions needed for installation and correlation with other materials and

equipment. A certification, in writing, shall be provided indicating that all equipment will fit

in the space allotted and as shown on the drawings.

2. All submittals regardless of origin shall be stamped with the approval of the CONTRACTOR

and identified with the name and number of this contract, CONTRACTOR’S name, and

references to applicable specification paragraphs and contract drawings. Each submittal shall

indicate the intended use of the item in the work. When catalog pages are submitted,

applicable items shall be clearly identified. The current revision, issue number, and date shall

be indicated on all drawings and other descriptive data.



3. The submittals will not be accepted from anyone but the CONTRACTOR. Submittals shall be

consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts

or trades.

4. The CONTRACTOR’S stamp of approval is a representation that the CONTRACTOR accepts

full responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field construction

criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data, and that he has reviewed or coordinated

each submittal with the requirements of the work and the contract documents.

5. Each submittal shall include a statement prepared by the originator of the drawings and data,

certifying compliance with the contract documents except for deviations, which are

specifically identified.

6. All deviations from the contract documents shall be identified on each submittal and shall be

tabulated in the CONTRACTOR’S letter of transmittal. Such submittals shall, as pertinent to

the deviation, indicate essential details of all changes proposed by the CONTRACTOR

(including modifications to other facilities that may be a result of the deviation) and all

required piping and wiring diagrams.

7. The CONTRACTOR shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each submission,

and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions previously noted have been

taken into account. In the event that more than one resubmission is required because of failure

of CONTRACTOR to respond to exceptions and rejections previously noted, CONTRACTOR

shall make all further resubmissions in person at the consultant’s office.

8. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining review of

submittals, will not entitle the CONTRACTOR to an extension of the contract time unless

delay of the work is directly caused by a change in the work authorized by a change order.

9. Review of drawings and data submitted by CONTRACTOR will cover only general

conformity to the drawings and specifications, external connections and dimensions that affect

the layout. Review does not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and

details of the material, equipment, device or item shown. Review of submittals shall not

relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations, or

responsibility for compliance with the contract documents.

10. When the drawings and data are returned marked REJECTED, REVISE AND RESUBMIT or

SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM, the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed

and six corrected copies (or one copy and one corrected reproducible copy) resubmitted.

11. Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.) to

indicate the sequence of the resubmittal. All resubmittals shall be indexed, tabbed, referenced

to the specifications and bound in a three-ring binder and submitted at one time.

12. When corrected copies are resubmitted, the CONTRACTOR shall, in writing, direct specific

attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made other than those called for

on previous submissions.



13. When the drawings and data are returned marked NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN or MAKE

CORRECTIONS NOTED, no additional copies need to be furnished unless specifically

requested to do so for record.

C. Permits, Receipts and Test Reports

1. Provide the Architect with copies of all permits and receipts for fee payments.

2. Submit a sample format for each test report intended for use. Submit test reports required

herein only on approved forms.

D. Include complete product data indexed, tabbed, and referenced to specifications with 8 ½” x 11”

cover sheet covering:

1. Paragraph 2.1 - Overflow System

2. Paragraph 2.2 - Pumping Equipment

3. Paragraph 2.3 - Filtration Equipment

4. Paragraph 2.4 - Recirculation Fittings

5. Paragraph 2.5 - Piping Systems

6. Paragraph 2.6 - Chemical Treatment Systems

7. Paragraph 2.7 - Chemistry Monitoring and Control Systems

8. Paragraph 2.8 - Flow Meters

9. Paragraph 2.9 - Water Level Controllers

10. Paragraph 2.10 - Inserts and Anchor Sockets

11. Paragraph 2.11 - Deck Equipment

12. Paragraph 2.12 - Loose Equipment

13. Paragraph 2.13 - Maintenance Equipment

14. Paragraph 2.14 - Safety Equipment

15. Paragraph 2.15 - Thermometers

16. Paragraph 2.16 – Swimming Pool Finishes

17. Paragraph 2.17 - Sealants

18. Paragraph 2.18 - Water Features and Support Equipment

19. Paragraph 2.19 - Pool Cover



20. Paragraph 2.20 - Pool Heaters

21. Paragraph 2.21 - Pool Concrete Coping

E. Include engineering/construction drawings for the pool structure.

1. Reference Division 3 - Concrete.

F. Include engineering construction drawings for all pool piping.

G. Provide a complete set of structural drawings for the waterslide and associated feature footing

structures bearing the seal, signature, and date of a licensed professional engineer in the State

of NM. Drawings shall include plans, elevations, cross sections, details, and calculations

required to construct the waterslide and associated feature footing structures. Structural

drawings shall clearly identify all reinforcement, construction joints, embedded items including

waterstops, excavation lines and finish concrete elevations, under drainage requirements, under

drain routing, clean out locations and location dimensions of all accessory items provided under

this section. A licensed professional engineer shall utilize existing soils and geotechnical data

in the preparation of the structural design criteria. Provide all design calculations and support

data required to show compliance with performance requirements specified, including design

assumptions concerning element restraint. All calculations shall be certified and sealed by the

licensed professional engineer. Provide a design in response to actual site conditions.

H. Installation of the waterslide and associated feature footings shall not commence until detailed

plans and specifications are approved by the department of Building and Safety. The

responsibility for all costs associated with obtaining such approval shall be part of the General

Construction contract.

I. Reference Section 131104 – Swimming Pool Cementitious Finish

J. Reference Section 131103 – Swimming Pool Tile

K. Reference Section 131413 – Waterslides

1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS

A. Detailed operation and maintenance information shall be supplied for all equipment requiring

maintenance or other attention. The equipment supplier and/or CONTRACTOR shall prepare an

operation and maintenance manual for all equipment. Parts lists and operating and maintenance

instructions shall be provided.

B. Each operation and maintenance manual shall include the following:

1. Equipment function and calibration, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment and checking instructions.

3. Operating instructions for start up, routine and normal operation, regulation and control, shut

down and emergency conditions.

4. One (1) copy of all instructional videos.



5. Operating cycles shall be specifically described in outline format and in referenced detail. A

wall-mounted color-coded piping flow diagram shall be provided in the pool equipment room.

The diagram shall be engraved on laminated plastic with color-coded piping to match color of

coding on piping, and including valves identified with number on tags. The minimum size

shall be 11 inch x 17 inch.

6. Include manufacturer recommended maintenance schedule, parts lists, piping diagram (to

agree with wall mounted diagram) and trouble-shooting information for all pool mechanical

equipment.

7. Using reference to keyed valves and wall diagram, include specific written instructions for

procedures to be followed for the following:

a. Emptying and refilling the pool(s) including de-watering during the period that the pool(s)

will be empty;

b. Water level control adjustment and chemical control operation;

c. Normal surge tank operation and balancing;

d. Filter operation and backwashing; and

e. Super chlorination.

8. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.

9. Guide to “trouble-shooting”.

10. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.

11. Outline, cross section, and assembly drawings; engineering data and wiring diagrams.

12. Test data and performance curves, where applicable.

13. Specific written instructions for procedure for emptying and refilling the pool(s) including de-

watering during any period that the pool will be empty. Include furnishing and installing a

yellow warning sign 8-1/2 in. x 11 in., to be mounted in the filter room, that reads:

WARNING

Prior to emptying Pool

Consult O & M Manuals for Procedures

Add another sign shall read:

Keep all Caps, Plugs and Tops Tight Fitting to Prevent Escape of Fumes.

14. One set of applicable submittals shall be included in each manual.

C. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists

packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which may be required by the

CONTRACTOR.



D. Manuals and other data shall be printed on heavy, first quality paper, 8-1/2 x 11 inch size with

standard 3-hole punching and inserted in plastic covers. Drawings and diagrams shall be reduced

to 8-1/2 x 11 inches or 11 x 17 inches. Where reduction is not practical, larger drawings shall be

folded separately and placed in envelopes that are bound into the manuals. Each envelope shall

bear suitable identification on the outside.

E. Six (6) bound volumes of each manual shall be submitted. All parts lists and information shall be

assembled in substantial manuals and permanent, three-ring or three-post binders. Material shall

be assembled and bound in the same order as specified, and each volume shall have a table of

contents and suitable index tabs.

F. All material shall be marked with project identification. Non-applicable information shall be

marked out or deleted.

G. Shipment of equipment will not be considered complete until all required manuals and data have

been received.


A. Deliver material in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and crates with all labels intact

and legible.

B. Deliver materials in sufficient time and quantity to allow continuity of work and compliance with

approved construction schedule.

C. Handle materials in a manner to prevent damage.

D. Store all materials on clean raised platforms with weather protective coverings. Provide

continuous protection of materials against damage or deterioration.

E. Remove damaged materials from site.

1.11 WARRANTIES

A. The CONTRACTOR warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment provided

under the contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the

contract documents, that the work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or

permitted, and that the work will conform with the requirements of the contract documents. Work

not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and

authorized will be considered defective. The CONTRACTOR'S warranty will exclude remedies

for damage or defect caused by abuse, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operations,

modifications not executed by the CONTRACTOR or improper wear and tear under normal use.

If required by the Architect, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind

and quality of materials and equipment. All warranties shall be for a period of one year from the

date of substantial completion or the owner begins using the pool unless otherwise specified.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall agree to repair or replace any defective or non-complying work at no

cost to the Owner upon written notification from the Owner within the warranty period. Pro-rated

warranties are not acceptable.



C. Submit all warranties covering, but not limited to the following:

1. All pool deck equipment and accessories against defects in material, manufacturer and

installation for a period of one (1) year.

2. Defects in material, manufacture or installation of the recirculating overflow system and

interior coating of the trench for a period of one (1) year.

3. Defects in material, manufacture and installation of the filtration, backwash, chlorination, pH

adjustments and cleaning systems, including controls for a period of one (1) year.

4. Defects in material or workmanship of the pool structure causing a loss of water for a period of

three (3) years.

5. Defects in material, workmanship, and installation of the pool piping system for a period of

three (3) years.

6. Defects in material, workmanship, and installation of the pool pumps for a period of one (1)

year.

7. Manufacturer's minimum five (5) year warranty against defective materials, components and

workmanship in the pool chemical controller. ORP, pH, flow and temperature sensors shall be

covered by a standard two (2) year warranty. All other sensors and flow cell components shall

be covered by a standard one (1) year warranty.

8. Manufacturer's minimum eighteen (18) month warranty against defective materials,

components and workmanship in the Variable Frequency Drive system effective the date of

supply

9. Defects in material, workmanship, and installation of the pool cementitious finish against

cracking and delamination for a period of three (3) years.

10. Defects in material, workmanship, and installation of the pool painted finish against

delamination for a period of one (1) year.

11. Defects in material, workmanship, and installation of the tile finish against cracking and

delamination for a period of five (5) years.

12. Manufacturer's minimum fifteen (15) year warranty on the filter tank and lining against

defective materials or workmanship of the tank and components. (Additional warranty time

may be purchased from the manufacturer.) Prorated warranties are not acceptable.

13. Manufacturer's minimum one (1) year warranty against defective materials, components and

workmanship in the sanitizing feed system.


workmanship in the pH buffer feed system.

15. Manufacturer's minimum three (3) year warranty against defective materials, components and

workmanship in the movable bulkhead. The entire bulkhead shall be guaranteed against

delamination or structural defect for a period of twenty-five (25) years.



16. Manufacturer's minimum fifteen (15) year systems warranty against defective materials,

components and workmanship in the pool tile setting materials.

17. Manufacturer's minimum five (5) year warranty against defective materials, components and

workmanship in the pool cover system and reels.

18. Manufacturer's minimum five (5) year warranty on the complete heat exchanger assembly.


workmanship in the ultraviolet sanitizing system (excluding the UV arc tube). UV arc tubes

are warranted to operate for 4000 hours when operated continuously. A continuously operated

UV arc tube that fails prior to 4000 hours of operation shall be replaced free of charge.

Intermittently operated UV arc tubes (>1 on/off cycle per day) will be replaced free of charge

if failure occur prior to 2000 hours and prorated between 2000 and 4000 hours.

1.12 SYSTEM TRAINING

A. A qualified representative of the CONTRACTOR performing work under this section shall put

the equipment into operation and instruct the Owner's representatives in the operation of this

equipment to the Owner's satisfaction immediately after project’s substantial completion.

B. The CONTRACTOR’S training representative shall have completed the equipment/system’s

manufacturer’s training requirements and be certified, by the manufacturer, to provide and teach

system training.

C. The representative from the CONTRACTOR shall be either a CPO (Certified Pool Operator) or

have an AFO (Aquatic Facility Operator) certification.

D. Training periods shall consist of 32 hours of on-site training and scheduled as follows:

1. 16 hours of initial training on the complete swimming pool system. Training to include

winterization procedures – Refer to Section 1.2 for winterization protocol. The 16 hours of

initial training is to be comprised of at least 4 hours of training on water chemistry analysis and

adjustment. The water chemistry training will include in depth review of the use of the

Langlier index and its computation.

2. The initial 16 hours of training shall include information on the care, operation, adjustment,

and maintenance of all items provided by the CONTRACTOR under the “Part 2 – Products”

section of this specification.

3. 16 hours of training after the Owner's staff has had experience operating the system. This time

may be requested any time after the pool has been placed in operation within a period of one

(1) year from the time the pool was accepted by the Owner. The additional training shall

contain at least 2 hours of review of water chemistry.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a project specific video recording instruction manual in

addition to the training sessions. The video instructions shall be project specific and shall

include information on the care, operation, adjustment, and maintenance of all items provided

by the CONTRACTOR under the “Part 2 – Products” section of this specification. This video

recording shall be done separate from the Owner training.



5. The CONTRACTOR shall include one (1) copy of all video recording instructions in each

Operations and Maintenance Manual.

1.13 POOL FILL WATER QUALITY

A. The Owner shall bear the cost of the water required for two (2) complete fillings of the pool (the

initial water tightness test and the final filling). Removal of iron or copper (if in excess of .3 ppm)

will be required for the final fill to avoid staining of the pool finish. Any subsequent fillings or

partial fillings (more than 25%) of the pool shall be by the CONTRACTOR, at its own expense.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary plant equipment so that the temperature of fill

water will be within plus or minus 10 degrees of the ambient air and/or the pool structure at the

time of filling. Extreme caution is urged if the temperature variance is greater than 10 degree F.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary chemicals and to adjust and balance the water

chemistry in the pools to the following levels:

pH 7.4 - 7.6

Calcium Hardness 200 - 400 PPM

Total Alkalinity (Calcium Hypochlorite) 60 - 80 PPM

Langelier saturation index -0.3 - +0.3

Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) not to exceed 1,500 PPM

1.14 START-UP CHEMICALS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the chemical balance of the pool water (including the cost of

all chemicals required) until the pool and mechanical system(s) are fully operational and accepted

by the Architect and the Owner.

B. Provide the Owner with sufficient quantities of the necessary chemicals to maintain the pool

operation for a minimum of thirty (30) days from substantial completion or the owner begins

using the pool.

C. Chemicals to be provided to the Owner shall include those required by the chemical feed systems

installed.

1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Provide a complete set of record drawings of the entire pool system(s) including all sub-systems.

All record drawings shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of 017839 and shall be

a complete, stand-alone set. The CONTRACTOR shall be permitted to obtain original documents

and copy them for this purpose only. Provide the record set on compact disk (AutoCAD Release

2010 or compatible software).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OVERFLOW SYSTEM



A. It is the intent of the specifications that the perimeter overflow system and surface cleaning be

maintained under all conditions of normal operation and that no water be discharged to waste

except when cleaning the filters or emptying the pool.

B. Concrete Perimeter Overflow System

1. A perimeter overflow system consisting of a continuous concrete and tile overflow channel as

detailed and shown on the drawings shall be installed on the pool(s). The bottom of the trough

shall be level throughout.

2. The walls and floor of the gutter shall be coated with epoxy paint. Refer to section 2.16.

Areas not meeting the manufacturer's recommended thickness will be recoated without

additional cost to the Owner.

3. The grating shall be formed of molded PVC sections. Modular, interlocking pieces of UV

stabilized PVC grating. The top surface shall have a raised, diamond ridge design to create

good friction, wet or dry and be 11/16” wide with an outside depth of 1.0” and a middle depth

of 1-3/8” for extra strength. The space between pieces shall not exceed 3/8”. Each piece of

grate shall have a slotted hole at the ends for insertion of a stainless steel fastener clip and

anchor screws every 5 feet and shall be easily removable. Grating surface bars shall run

parallel to the pool wall and with the gap, provide at least 35% open space per foot for

unrestricted water flow. The color of the grate shall be selected by the Architect. The width of

the grating shall allow the insertion of the touchpad holding brackets between the grating and

the gutter lip.

a. Basis of Design: Grating shall be manufactured by Lawson Aquatics supplied by Neptune-

Benson, or approved equal.

4. All materials, anchors and fasteners shall be 304L (Outdoor) stainless steel.

2.2 PUMPING EQUIPMENT

A. Any proposed substitutions shall include a mechanical drawing incorporating all required changes

in layout, piping and valves. The cost of such changes shall be included in the price of the

substitute. CONTRACTOR to confirm voltage prior to ordering pump. All motors shall be

capable of continuously running without overloading at any point on the characteristic curve of

the pump without overload or harm. CONTRACTOR shall confirm by 1/4 inch scale shop

drawing that the pumps and filters to be provided will fit in the available space and can be

removed for servicing.

1. Pumps shall be certified by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) and bear the

certification mark.

2. Pump casing shall be cast iron fitted with a replaceable bronze case wear ring. Mechanical

seals shall be provided specific for a clear, mildly chlorinated water application. Pump

impeller shall be enclosed type of cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, and

trimmed for the specified design conditions. If a VFD is to be used in conjunction with a

pump, the impellor shall be trimmed to the maximum diameter based on the rated motor horse

power. All bronze materials shall be suitable for use in a chlorinated environment. Suction



and discharge flanges shall be provided and tapped for gauge connections. Provide steel or

cast iron bases.

3. If the pump is powered with a VFD, the impeller to be trimmed to a maximum diameter based

on the most limiting condition of either the diameter of the maximum non-overloading rated

motor horse power at the design point or a diameter resulting in 10% greater head than the

specified head.

4. Pump motor shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) and premium efficiency of the

horsepower and speed specified. A pump requiring larger horsepower shall not be acceptable.

5. Provide a hair and lint strainer, for each pump, of fiberglass or epoxy coated stainless steel

construction with a clear observation top in the sizes (or pipe sizes) indicated on the drawings.

Provide hair and lint strainers with perforations no greater than 1/16” for feature pumps (PP4).

Verify and coordinate pipe and pump suction sizes in the field. Strainer to be of a low

pressure drop full-open or a tapered eccentric reducing type. Straight reducing type strainers

will not be acceptable without the addition of an approved tapered eccentric reducer between

the strainer and the pump (in which case, sufficient space in the pump pit must be verified).

Provide a stainless steel basket with at least 4 times the free open area as the inlet pipe, and

one spare basket with each strainer.

a. Basis of Design: As manufactured by MerMade Filter Inc., or Neptune/Benson Inc., or

Fluidtrol Process Technologies, Inc.

6. Provide a fusion-bonded epoxy coating on all wetted parts to protect pump internals from

corrosion, including pump volute interior and complete pump impeller. Sandblast to bare,

white metal. Thickness shall be 8 to 12 mils (heavy film). Verify thickness by non-

destructive testing. Coat parts as recommended by manufacturer, including preheating parts

to 400 degrees and electrostatic deposition or fluidized bed technique. Provide primers if

required to resist chlorinated water <10 ppm. Coating shall be Scotchkote 134

manufactured by Fusecote or approved equal.

7. Entire pumping unit shall be mounted on a base using cap screws to preserve the back pull-

out feature of the pump. Pumps shall not be secured with floor studs. The pump base shall

be coated with the same epoxy coating as the pump. An OSHA approved guard shall protect

coupling and exposed rotating components of the pump and motor where required.

8. Vibration Isolation

a. All pumps shall be mounted on concrete inertial bases similar to Mason Industries Type

BMK/KSL, and travel limited spring and neoprene isolators similar to Mason Industries

SLR. Provide Twin Sphere flexible connectors at pump suctions and discharges where

vibration isolation is provided.

b. All piping is to be isolated from the building structure by means of vibration isolators,

resilient lateral supports and resilient penetration sleeve/seals.

1) When the required static deflection of these isolators is greater than ½”, isolators

similar to Mason Industries type SLF or 30N shall be used.



2) All other pipe support isolators within the specified limits should be either Type ND

or HD achieving at least ¼” static deflection.

9. Recirculating Pumps and Motors

a. Recreation Pool (PP7)

1) Provide one (1) horizontally mounted centrifugal pump, as shown on the drawings and

described in these specifications. Each pump is to be of a straight centrifugal, end

suction, bronze fitted, close coupled type, capable of pumping 1500 GPM against 75 ft.

TDH with an efficiency of no less than 88% and a required net positive suction head

(NPSHr) no greater than 6.13 ft. It shall be provided with a 40 HP, 1200 RPM, 208

VAC, 3 phase, 60 cycle electrically driven motor meeting these specifications.

a) Basis of Design: The system design is based upon Paco, ITT Marlow, Griswold, or

Aurora. Pumps manufactured by Paco, ITT Marlow, Griswold, or Aurora shall all

be considered, provided they meet the requirements.

b. Plunge Pool (PP1)










c. Closed Flume Slide Pump (PP2)

1) Provide one (1) horizontally/vertically mounted centrifugal pump, as shown on the

drawings and described in these specifications. Each pump is to be of a straight

centrifugal, end suction, bronze fitted, close coupled type, capable of pumping 500

GPM against 60 ft. TDH with an efficiency of no less than 78% and a required net

positive suction head (NPSHr) no greater than 6.55 ft. It shall be provided with a 15

HP, 1200 RPM, 208 VAC, 3 phase, 60 cycle electrically driven motor meeting these

specifications.




d. Open Flume Slide Pump (PP3)












e. Lazy River Pump (PP5)










f. Vortex Pump (PP6)







specifications.




g. All recirculation pumps shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Confirm voltages

prior to ordering pumps.

10. Other System Pumps and Motors

a. Provide one (1) portable utility pump(s). The pump(s) shall be a 1 HP, 3600 RPM, 115

volt, 1 phase, 60 cycle unit capable of 60 GPM at 25 ft. TDH.

1) Basis of Design: Pump to be a Godwin GSP10 or approved equal.

b. Provide one (1) self-priming pump for pool draining (PP8) as shown on the drawings.

Pump to draw water from the deep main drain and deposit water into the backwash pit.

The pump shall be 1 HP, 3450 RPM, 208 volt, 3 phase, 60 cycle unit capable of 100 GPM

at 35 ft. TDH.



1) Basis of Design: Pump to be a Pentair Whisperflo WFK 4 or approved equal.

11. Feature Pumps and Motors

a. Feature Pump (PP4)







specifications.




B. Variable Frequency Drive Starters

1. Provide VFD starters for all pool pumps. Provide VFD starters for pumps only PP1 – PP7.

VFDs shall be a product of ABB.

a. Basis of Design: ABB550 – VDR or ACH550 - VDR.

1) Features TO BE INCLUDED with VFD:

a) Integrated or external disconnect switch

b) Integrated or external bypass mechanism

(i) VFD shall be provided with a bypass function to allow for pump motor operation

by bypassing the variable frequency drive. Bypass mechanism may be internal to

the VFD cabinet or provided in a separate enclosure with NEMA rating

equivalent to the specified drive enclosure. NEMA 12 ‘vented’ panels are not

acceptable. The bypass shall be UL listed as a motor disconnect device.

2. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all equipment is provided with the correct

operating voltage and that all interconnected electrical and electronic equipment shall

adequately communicate and operate the specified pumping equipment. All equipment

installations shall meet or exceed the requirements of the National Electric Code and all other

local and state regulations.

3. Specified equipment in this section shall be mounted in accordance with manufacturer’s

requirements and in a suitable location where indicated on the plans or approved by the

Architect/Engineer. All electronic equipment installed where a corrosive atmosphere may exist

shall be enclosed in NEMA 4 stainless steel or NEMA 4X nonmetallic enclosures. In other

locations NEMA 12 enclosures are acceptable. The programmable and display features of all

electronic equipment shall be accomplished via NEMA 4X enclosed key pads and operator

backlit LCD Graphical/Alpha/Numerical Displays. VFD’s installed within a supplementary



panel shall not be vented or cooled from ambient external air. With the exception of the

VFD’s heatsink and water-resistant heatsink fan, the VFD’s electronics shall be fully sealed

within the NEMA 12 or higher enclosure. So called ‘NEMA 12 or NEMA 4 Vented’

enclosures are not permitted.

4. The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three phase AC power into a variable voltage

and variable frequency three phase output utilizing pulse width modulation. Advanced Space

Vector Control will be utilized to reduce motor heating and provide precise control of the AC

motor.

5. The VFD shall be capable of adjusting the pump motor speed based upon specific flow

requirements. A 4-20 milliamp output signal from a Programmable Aquatic Controller, PLC,

electronic flow meter transmitter or other electronic device shall supply the required flow

information to the VFD to regulate motor speed. The VFD shall be capable of interfacing to

this analog output signal be commissioned to achieve a ‘constant flow’ condition. The VFD

shall also be provided with a manually operated potentiometer to adjust the pump speed in the

case of an electronic communication failure.

6. Electronic equipment shall be supplied with a phase rotational check capability. The contractor

shall also be required to assure that a phase rotational check is accomplished with the bypass

switch, herein specified, in the across the line position to assure correct rotation when

connected to all motor power sources.

7. The VFD shall include a built-in Line Filter to mitigate harmonic distortions being transmitted

back through the supply lines.

8. The VFD shall utilize DC link reactors to filter out bus ripple and provide smooth DC power

to the transistor section.

9. The VFD shall utilize IGBT transistors to produce a pulse width modulated output. SCR

output stages are not acceptable.

10. The VFD shall have a full load amp rating which exceeds or meets NEC Table 430-150. The

VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, and shall be able to

provide 110% of its variable torque rating and 150% of its constant torque rating for one

minute.

11. The VFD shall utilize space vector control to reduce motor harmonics and torque ripple.

12. The VFD shall include the ability to reliably protect the pump from any of the following

abnormal pump conditions: Run Dry/Loss of Prime; Cavitation; Dead head/Closed Valve;

Worn impeller; Blocked Filter; Bearing Failure/Wear Detection. Protection using measured

current (Amps), as a method for these protective features shall not be acceptable.

13. The VFD shall provide a display with selectable readout of parameters, including: Speed;

Torque; Electrical Power; Current; Output Voltage; Frequency; Heatsink Temperature; Motor

Temperature; Run Time; Energy Consumed; Mains Time.



14. The VFD shall include the capability for copying of settings when multiple similar pumps are

involved. Settings established in one VFD shall be transferred to the others via a removable

keypad.

15. All VFDs shall be provided with a bypass function to allow for pump motor operation by

bypassing the variable frequency drive. Bypass mechanism may be internal to the VFD

cabinet or provided in a separate enclosure with NEMA rating equivalent to the specified drive

enclosure. NEMA 12 ‘vented’ panels are not acceptable. The bypass shall be UL listed as a

motor disconnect device.

16. Three Motor Contactors shall be included. Contactor A is required to be in series with the Line

Power supply and the VFD, Contactor C is required to be in series with the VFD and the motor

and Contactor B is required to bypass the VFD. In ‘VFD’ operation, contactors A and C are

engaged and contactor B is open. When in ‘Bypass’ mode, contactors A and C are open and

contactor B is engaged.

a. All contactors shall be appropriately rated for the supply voltage and pump motor specified

and shall be in accordance with NEC standards.

b. Contactor B shall include an appropriately rated Motor Overload.

c. Resettable pump motor overload protection shall be provided for both the VFD and across

the line sources of power to all motors.

17. A Control Power Transformer shall be included so as to provide the necessary control voltage

required to operate the Motor Contactors. The VFD panel or separate Bypass panel, shall

include a door mounted 3-position lockable selector switch. The switch shall be labeled: VFD-

OFF-BYPASS. The switch is to require a key to move from one position to another. Two keys

shall be provided to the customer. The Bypass panel shall be manufactured in accordance with

and approved to UL508.

18. All applications shall require the inclusion of an appropriately rated Line Reactor to reduce

harmonic distortion. The Line Reactor shall be housed in an enclosure according to the

manufacturer’s instructions, taking careful note of the device radiated heat and the chemical

environment in which it may be installed. Pentair Acu-Drive includes as standard a built in

DC Link Reactor (equivalent to 5% Line Reactor). Where this is insufficient, a separate larger

Line Reactor shall be provided.

19. All applications that will have a cable length between the VFD and the Pump Motor which

exceeds 300 feet shall require the inclusion of an appropriately rated Motor Protection Filter

(dV/dt filter). When included, the Motor Protection Filter shall be housed in an enclosure

according to the manufacturer’s instructions, taking careful note of the device radiated heat

and the chemical environment in which it may be installed.

20. The VFD shall include additional contacts for interface with a remote start/stop panel and/or

emergency stop function. VFD supplier shall provide compatible remote start/stop control

panel for remote on/off control of all feature pumps (PP2-PP6). Refer to electrical for

installation and verify location of remote start/stop panel with architect.



21. Installations in locations where a Power Disconnect is not within ‘line of sight’ of the VFD

Control Panel, or where deemed necessary by local electrical codes, shall require the installer

to provide a suitably rated Circuit Breaker Disconnect.

22. The VFD shall be UL listed to accept a supply voltage of -15% / + 10% of its stated supply

rating.

23. The VFD shall be electronically lockable in order to prevent unauthorized or unintended

program changes.

24. Motors to which the VFD is to be installed shall have a minimum insulation of “Class F”.

25. User Interface for initial programming and day to day operation.

a. The VFD shall include a programmable Controller with an operator backlit LCD Graphical

/ Alpha / Numerical Display. The Controller shall comprise the following features:

b. Real Time Clock

c. Password protection

d. Hard-wired tamper protection feature

e. Custom software to control the VFD via a Modbus communication network.

f. Automatic Flow Control. The Controller and VFD are to automatically adjust the pump’s

speed in order to compensate for a filter becoming dirty. The system is to maintain a

minimum flow (GPM) required to meet State mandated turnover rates.

g. Programmable speeds for daytime and nighttime turnover rates.

h. Non-volatile memory. All programmed parameters as well as the real time clock settings

shall be maintained in the event of a power outage.

i. The Controller shall be capable of interfacing to an analog output signal from a Flow

Transducer and displaying measured flow in GPM

j. Automatic reset of alarms caused by power brown outs/power loss

k. External input for seasonal/unoccupied speed

26. Equipment specified in this section shall be programmed and tested under power after

connection to the required motor by a factory trained technician. All low voltage control

wiring connections to the respective pool systems shall be provided by the Swimming Pool

Contractor. Line voltage and/or high voltage connections and interlocks shall be provided by

the Electrical Contractor.

C. Pump Gauges

1. Pressure gauges shall be installed on the discharge of the pumps.



2. Compound gauges shall be provided at the intake port of the pumps, after the hair and lint

strainer.

3. Gauges shall be liquid filled, 316L stainless steel bourdon tube type with a minimum 2-1/2

inch diameter dial, high impact polypropylene or stainless steel case, corrosion resistant white

scale with black divisions and numerals, 300 Series stainless steel heavy duty rotary bushed

movement, , black enameled balanced Micrometer pointer.

a. Basis of Design: Gauges shall be as manufactured by Weksler Instrument Corporation or

approved equal.

4. Scale ranges shall be selected to indicate the normal system operating pressure of each system

or location within the system. Pressure ranges shall be calibrated in psig (0-60 psi) and

compound gauge shall be calibrated in inches of mercury (0-30 in Hg / 0-60 psi).

5. A stainless steel filter type pressure snubber shall be provided for each pressure gauge installed

consisting of a 3/8 inch diameter by 1/8 inch thick micro metallic stainless steel filter and

placed in the line just before the pressure gauge. Provide isolation brass valves or brass gauge

cocks at each gauge for easy replacement and maintenance.

D. Provide link seals for all pipe penetrations as indicated on the drawings. Locations will include

the surge tank, the pump pit, foundation wall penetrations (if expansive soils are present) and

other locations as noted. Link seals shall be provided in the sizes and quantities shown on the

drawings and installed to provide a flexible watertight penetration. Metal parts shall be made of

316L stainless steel. Links shall form a continuous rubber seal that is tightened with a series of

stainless steel bolts to form a watertight seal. Link seals shall be manufactured by Thunderline

Corporation, Calpico Inc. or approved equal. The CONTRACTOR is to provide factory plastic

wall sleeves of the appropriate sizes designed for the specific application and seal size and type.

Each sleeve is to have an integrated water stop.

2.3 FILTRATION EQUIPMENT

A. The filter system shall consist of high rate pressure sand filter tanks as shown on the drawings.

Every aspect and component of the filter system must be certified by the National Sanitation

Foundation (NSF) and bear the certification mark. The filter must have an engraved metal data

plate permanently affixed on the face of the system that describes operational data and

instructions and indicates start up date.

B. It is the intent of these specifications to describe a filtration system complete in every respect

with all accessory items and supplied and warranted by one manufacturer.

C. Horizontally Oriented Fiberglass Tanks

1. The filter tanks shall be horizontally oriented single cell fiberglass tanks, minimum 42

inches in diameter. The filter system must be listed as approved by National Sanitation

Foundation prior to bid date.

a. Basis of Design: Fiberglass filters shall be the product of Paragon Aquatics / Stark,

Waterco, or Neptune Benson provided they meet the specifications and layout. System



design based upon Paragon Aquatics / Stark. Valves must be provided to backwash one

filter at a time.

2. Filter tanks must incorporate all components and feature as described in this section.

3. Two (2) saddle style bases shall be provided for tank support. Systems that incorporate

stacked tanks shall include similar bases and mounting saddles for the upper vessel. Tank

supports and connections shall be seismic rated to support the filter tank(s) for the

appropriate seismic zone where the project is located. Access to the tank shall be provided

by a 14" x 18" manhole with two (2) curved yokes. Manhole seal shall be complete with a

one piece 1/4" neoprene gasket and positioned so that internal pressure from the filter will

augment the seal. No additional hardware or through bolts will be allowed.

4. Each filter tank shall be equipped with the necessary flanges and connections for the

internal and external piping. Connections shall be comprised of fiberglass flanges and

schedule 80 PVC flanges.

5. All tank connections 2 inches and smaller shall be 150 lb. Type 316L stainless steel

threaded full couplings. All tank connections 3 inches and larger shall be heavy steel bosses

drilled and tapped both sides to receive standard flanged fittings or Sch. 40 Type 316L

stainless steel nipples.

6. The discharge from the automatic air release valve shall be hard piped to waste. Each filter

tank shall have a means of releasing air. Each coupling or orifice is to be provided with a

slotted PVC sand retainer or stainless steel strainer. An automatic air release system shall

be provided for each tank.

7. The drain system shall consist of a 3/4 inch 316L stainless steel coupling mounted at the

lowest point in the bottom head. This drain shall be valved and piped to the nearest floor

drain or backwash pit.

D. Filter Piping - Internal

1. The lower internal distribution system shall be a horizontal header/lateral arrangement. The

header shall be Schedule 80 PVC construction, capped on one end and flanged or threaded

at the other end for field connection. Lateral connections shall be spaced no more than 6

inches on centers, and shall be 1-1/2 inch FPT connections. All attachments to header shall

be solvent welded and thermo-welded to insure integrity of connection.

2. Under drain system shall be factory installed and constructed of extra heavy Schedule 80

high impact PVC. Multiple PVC main headers to be tapped and threaded to receive laterals.

3. Laterals shall consist of 1-1/2 inch Schedule 80 PVC pipe with openings as required. Each

lateral shall be fabricated complete with socket cap on one end and male adapter on the

other end. Both fittings to be solvent welded to the slotted pipe. Laterals shall be designed

and sized at the factory so as to be installed in the field and over the entire cross sections

area of the filter.

4. The upper distributor shall consist of PVC piping Schedule 80 and/or deflector plate per

manufacturer standard design.



5. Each filter shall be supplied with a pressure equalizing upper internal distribution system

consisting of a horizontal header/lateral arrangement. The header piping shall be

constructed of Schedule 80 PVC. The header/lateral piping and all connections shall be

designed and sized to provide uniform distribution and unrestricted flow during the filtration

and backwash cycles.

6. Upper laterals shall be constructed of Schedule 80 PVC pipe with machine slotted openings

or orifices. All machined slots or orifices shall be clean, de-burred and free of any

obstructions that would not permit the free flow of water through the opening. Details of

the lateral attachment to the header shall be submitted for review and approval.

7. The lower and upper distribution systems shall be properly supported and anchored. All

hardware in wetted areas shall be Type 316L stainless steel or non-metallic. Tank interiors

must be inspected prior to the media being placed in the filters.

E. Filter Piping - External (Face)

1. External face piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings. Flanges shall be located so

as to allow for easy dismantling of face piping. All fittings shall be solvent cemented.

2. Piping shall be drilled and tapped where necessary to accommodate gauge tubing

connectors.

3. All valves 3" and larger shall be constructed with cast aluminum S12A alloy (as defined by

ASTM B275) housing and fully coated with Rilsan on all interior and exterior surfaces.

Internal components include EPDM resilient lining, Rilsan coated ductile iron disc and

316L stainless steel shaft. Valves shall be rated for 150 psi bubble tight shutoff. Unless

otherwise specified, all nuts and bolts shall be stainless steel with stainless steel washers to

be used when secured to PVC flanges. Systems incorporating solenoid, pneumatic, pressure

amplified, hydraulic or multi-directional valves shall not be acceptable.

4. Standard accessory items shall include sight glass rated for 50 psi with polycarbonate glass,

remote mounted gauge panel with two 4½" diameter pressure gauges, ¼" petcocks, ¼" poly

vent tubing with PVC compression adapters.

F. Backwash Control

1. The filter manifold face piping shall be designed to allow for one (1) filter tank to be

backwashed at a time while the recirculation system is operating. A manual backwashing

system shall be provided with the filter system.

2. Manual Backwash System

a. The manual backwash system shall be equipped with a face piping configuration such that

the operator shall be manually control and operator both the time and sequencing of the

backwash cycle. Valving on the filter face piping shall be a mechanical linkage device

allowing the operator to simultaneously move two (2) valves at once. All mechanical

linkage components shall be PVC or Type 316L Stainless Steel.

G. Automatic Air Relief Valve



1. A 1” valve shall be provided to automatically and continuously release air in the filter. The

valve shall be fabricated of plastic with Buna-N seals. A plumbing kit shall be provided

with two (2) PVC ball valves to allow manual air relief and isolation of the automatic valve.

Valves fabricated of cast iron, bronze or stainless steel valves will not be accepted.

H. Filter Media

1. Filter media shall be a carefully selected grade of hard uniformly graded silica material.

Media shall be milled angular shaped particles of silica quartz. The filter sand shall have a

particle size between 0.45 mm and 0.55 mm and have a uniformity coefficient not to exceed

1.53. Specific gravity shall not be less than 2.5 with a pH of 7.0.

2. All media (sand) shall be cleaned and free from any clay or limestone deposits. Bottom

layer of support media shall be placed by hand to avoid damage to the under drain system

and leveled before the addition of the upper layer of filter media.

3. All media shall be delivered after approval by the manufacturer of the filter and stored in

100 pound bags for ease of handling and elimination of possible contamination.

4. Media to be supplied by the filter manufacturer and approved by the filter manufacturer

prior to shipping.

I. Filter Size

1. Filters have been sized based on a maximum allowable filtration rate of 12.80 GPM/SF:

Units Recreation

Pool Plunge Pool Alternate Pool

Volume Gallons 110,319 15,708 45,430

Flow Rate GPM 1500 345 345

Filter Model N/B SHFFG 48-60 (x5) 48-72 (x1) 48-72 (x1)

Filter Size Sq. Ft. 23.70 (118.5) 27.70 27.70

Turnover Rate Hours 1.23 0.87 2.19

Filtration Rate GPM/Sq.Ft. 12.66 10.83 12.45

2.4 RECIRCULATION FITTINGS

A. Main outlets (main drains) shall be concrete sumps with 12 gauge PVC frame and PVC grating

or PVC/Fiberglass box with PVC grating and sized as shown on the plan. Grate openings shall

not exceed 11/32 inch in width, providing an open flow area to allow water velocity not to

exceed 1.0 fps. The grate shall be PVC and fit closely and flush with top surface of frame, and

secured to frame with vandal proof fasteners. Provide additional stainless steel flanged pipe

connections where required by the drawings for approved equalizer lines. Provide no-leak seal

flange at the midpoint of the boxes. All exposed edges of main outlets shall be rounded and

smooth, free of burrs and sharp edges. All main drain covers shall comply with the Virginia

Graeme Baker Act and ASME A112.19.8-2007.

B. Provide hydrostatic relief valves consisting of a 2” cycolac relief valve connected to a FPT

commercial style Schedule 80 PVC collector tube. The collection tube shall have seepage

holes, 3/8 inch in diameter, and shall be screwed securely to the valve body. The hydrostatic



relief valve shall be designed to seal with minimum pressure and shall have a non-plugging,

self-cleaning raised valve seat. Hydrostatic relief valve to be Hayward Number SP1056 with

collector tube model Hayward Number SP1055, or approved equal.

C. Concrete drop out boxes (converters) shall be concrete sumps with 12 gauge 316L stainless

steel frame and PVC grating and sized as shown on the plans. Grate openings shall not exceed

11/32 inch in width, providing an open flow area to allow water velocity not to exceed 1.0 fps.

The grate shall be PVC and fit closely and flush with top surface of frame, and secured to

frame with vandal proof fasteners. Provide no-leak seal flange at the midpoint of the boxes.

D. Wall inlet fittings shall be Hayward Model SP-1421-E (1 inch opening) cycolac directional

inlet mounted in Hayward Model SP-1022S or approved equal from Paddock, Sta-Rite, or

Swimtime.

E. Static water line inlet fitting for the automatic water level controller shall be provided

consisting of a cycolac body, grate and construction shield. The body shall have a 1-1/2 inch

solvent weld connection and provided with an integral molded "knock-out" membrane to

facilitate line pressure testing. The static water line inlet fitting shall be a Hayward SP-1026

mounted in a Hayward Model SP-1022S or approved equal.

F. The outlet fitting grate from the fill funnel piping to the pool shall be a 9” x 9” cycolac frame and

grate.

G. Adjustable floor inlet fittings shall be provided each consisting of an ABS plastic body and ad-

justing top plate with a positive locking device. A spanner wrench shall be provided to

facilitate flow adjustment. The inlet body shall be provided with a 2-inch cycolac solvent weld

connection and internal NPT threads to facilitate line pressure testing. Floor inlet fittings shall

be Sta-Rite No. 8417-0000-White/ Sta-Rite No. 8417-0200-Black or approved equal.

H. Sight sump frame(s) and cover(s) shall be size appropriately to provide access to the vertical sight

sump standpipe as indicated in the plans. Frame and cover shall be Zurn model #ZANB-1461-14-

VP, nickel bronze with polished scored top, vandal proof screws or approved equal.

I. Valve box covers and frames that are not specified on the drawings or specifically identified as

another size or material shall be Zurn model #ZANB-1461-12-VP, nickel bronze with polished

scored top, vandal proof screws or approved equal. Valve box covers and frames that are not

specified on the drawings or specifically identified as another size or material shall be a PVC

frame and a solid PVC lid by Lawson Aquatics supplied by Neptune-Benson. Color selection

shall be by the Architect.

J. Anti-vortex plates shall be provided at the suction points of the main recirculation pump(s) in the

surge tank(s). Each plate shall be connected to the suction pipe via a PVC flange and shall be ½

in. thick with minimum dimension of at least 2.5 times the connecting pipe diameter. The plate

shall be located 4 inches above the finished floor of the surge tank. Four (4) 3/4 in. stainless steel

threaded rods, nuts, anchor bolts and washers shall be used to fix the offset distance and provide a

secure base for the suction pipe.

2.5 PIPING SYSTEMS

A. General



1. Provide all recirculating piping between the pool(s) and the filter room, fill receptor and all

interconnecting piping to and from the chemical feed systems and chemical controller.

2. Provide all necessary pipe supports and support systems required to support all associated

piping and valves.

3. Provide all other tubing, conduit, or piping associated with equipment specified herein.

Coordinate with other trades.

B. Pipes

1. Pipe routing as shown and detailed on the contract drawings is diagrammatic only and is not

intended to show minor details or exact locations of piping systems. Installation is required

to be adjusted to accommodate interference and adjustments anticipated and encountered.

Pipe sizes on plans refer to nominal inside diameter of the pipe.

2. All PVC swimming pool piping shall be NSF approved and conform to the requirements of

ASTM D-1785.

3. All PVC pipes shall be the product of one manufacturer. Approved manufacturers of PVC

piping are Eslon, Harvel, and Chemtrol or approved equal.

4. Swimming pool piping above the floor or deck in the filter room shall be Schedule 80 PVC.

5. Swimming pool piping below the filter room floor or deck shall be NSF approved, Schedule 80

PVC.

6. All swimming pool piping under the pool floor shall be NSF approved, Schedule 40 PVC and

concrete encased. All transitions between Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 shall be encased in

concrete.

7. All below grade swimming pool piping not located beneath the pool floor can be backfilled

with native granular material free of ice, clay, debris, organic matter, and rocks larger than 4"

across their greatest dimension, and per recommendations indicated in the project geotechnical

report.

8. The influent and effluent lines to the heat exchanger unit shall be CPVC. Connections

between metallic piping and/or equipment and PVC shall be flanged.

9. All PVC and CPVC fittings shall be the product of one manufacturer. Molded fittings shall be

as manufactured by Asahi, Eslon, Chemtrol, Harvel, Spear, Lasco or acceptable substitute.

Fabricated fittings shall be as manufactured by Harrison Machine, Plastinetics, or acceptable

substitute.

10. Vertical sight sump piping shall be NSF approved, Schedule 40 PVC. Horizontal sight sump

piping shall be NSF approved, Schedule 40 PVC that is perforated and wrapped with fabric

and have 3/8” diameter holes located top and bottom on 4 ft centers. Horizontal sight sump

piping shall extend 1 ft minimum beyond the main drain.



11. Chemical feed lines from chemical feeders to recirculation piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC

piping. Piping shall be hard piped into the recirculation plumbing. All required valves shall

be of all PVC construction.

12. All flanged plumbing connection hardware shall be stainless steel.

13. All materials shall be installed by workmen thoroughly skilled in their trades and all work shall

present a neat and mechanical appearance when complete. The CONTRACTOR, at no

additional expense to the Owner, shall replace or correct any work not judged acceptable by

the Architect, Owner’s testing agency, or their consultants.

14. All support hardware, brackets, fasteners, hangers, etc. installed in the surge tank shall be 316L

stainless steel.

15. No installation shall be made that will provide a cross-connection or interconnection between a

distributing supply for drinking purposes and the swimming pool, or between the pool and a

sanitary or storm water sewer system that will permit a backflow of water into the pool water

system.

16. All piping shall be hydrostatically (water) pressure tested for leaks before and after backfilling

to guarantee water tightness. Pneumatic (air) pressure test not allowed.

17. The CONTRACTOR shall provide 1/4” PVC water stops for this work for watertight

penetration of concrete walls. Water stops shall be round and the O.D. shall be sized to 150%

of the O.D. of the pipe. The water stops shall be thermo-welded to the pipe from both sides

and shall be located at the centerline of the wall being penetrated prior to placing the concrete

to assure a watertight seal.

18. CONTRACTOR must adhere to all the applicable provisions in Division 22 - Plumbing,

"General Provisions" and "Basic Materials and Methods" for installation of piping system.

19. All mechanical equipment to be connected into the recirculation piping system shall be done

so using flanged or union connections.

20. Provisions shall be made to purge all pipes in the system.

21. Concentric reducers shall be fiberglass by MerMade Filter, Inc., or equivalent reducers of

schedule 80 PVC construction.

C. Pipe Hangers and Supports

1. Manufacturer

a. Subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe hanger and support systems shall be

manufactured by Cooper B-line (basis of design), Inc, TOLCO, and Anvil International or

approved equal.

2. Hangers

a. Pipes 2 inches and smaller



1) Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line models B3100 or B3104.

2) Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line model B3170.

b. Pipes 2-1/2 inches and larger

1) Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line model B3100.

2) Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, B-Line model B3114.

3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers

a. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A1011 SS, Grade

33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inch minimum, B-Line B22 strut or stronger as

required.

b. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe, B-Line

B-2000 series.

4. Wall Supports

a. Pipes 2-1/2 inches and smaller

1) Steel offset “J” hook hanger, B-Line model B3600.

b. Pipes 3 inches and larger

1) Welded strut bracket and pipe straps, B-Line models B3064 and B2000 series.

2) Welded steel bracket B-Line model B3066 or B3067 with roller chair or adjustable steel

yoke pipe roll. B-Line model B3120 or B3110.

5. Floor Supports

a. Electroplated carbon steel adjustable pipe saddle and nipple attached to steel base stand

sized for pipe elevation. B-Line model B3093 and B3088T or B3090 and B8088. Pipe

saddle shall be screwed or welded to appropriate base stand.

6. Vertical Supports

a. Steel riser clamp sized to outside diameter of pipe, B-Line model B3373.

7. Plastic Pipe Supports

a. V-Bottom clevis hangers with galvanized 18-gauge continuous support channel, B-Line

models B3106 and B3106V, to form a continuous support system for all plastic pipes

smaller than 1 inch or flexible tubing.

b. A vented and sloped continuous PVC Schedule 40 pipe no smaller than 1-1/2 inch outside

diameter will be used to route flexible tubing with the appropriate pipe supports.



8. Supplementary Structural Supports - Design and fabricate supports using structural quality

steel bolted framing materials. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gauge ASTM A1011 SS

Grade 33 steel, 1-5/8 inch or greater as required by loading conditions. Submit design for pipe

tunnels, pipe galleries etc. for approval. Use clamps and fittings designed for use with the strut

system.

D. Hanger Attachments

1. Upper Attachments

a. Beam Clamps

1) Beam clamps shall be used where piping is to be suspended from building steel. Clamp

type shall be selected on the basis of load to be supported, and load configuration.

2) C-Clamps shall be locknuts and cup point set screws similar to B-Line model B351L or

B3036L. Top flange c-clamps shall be used when attaching a hanger rod to the flange of

structural steel, B-Line model B3034 or B3033 or approved equal. Refer to

manufacturers recommendations for set screw torque. Retaining straps shall be used to

maintain the clamp position on the beam where required.

3) Center load beam clamps shall be used where specified. Steel clamps shall be B-Line

models B3050 or B3055. Forged steel beam clamps with cross bolt shall be B-Line

B3291-B3297 series or approved equal as required to fit beams.

b. Concrete Inserts

1) Cast in place spot concrete inserts shall be used applicable, either steel or malleable iron

body, B-line B2500 or B3014 or approved equal. Spot inserts shall allow for lateral

adjustment and have means for attachment to forms. Select inserts to suit threaded

hanger rods sizes, B-line models N2500 or B3014N series.

2) Continuous concrete inserts shall be used where applicable. Channels shall be 12 gauge,

ASTM A1011 Grade 33 structural quality carbon steel, complete with styrofoam inserts

and end caps with nail holes for attachment to forms. The continuous concrete insert

shall have a load rating of 2,000 lbs/ft. in concrete, B-Line models B22I, 32I, or 52I or

approved equal. Select channel nuts suitable for strut and rod sizes.

E. Hanger Accessories

1. Hanger rods shall be threaded on both ends or continuously threaded rods of circular cross

section. Use adjustable lock nuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or

perforated straps are allowed.

F. Hanger Finish

1. Indoor Finishes

a. Hangers shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 OR shall have an electro-

deposited green epoxy finish.



b. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 SS Grade 33 G90

OR shall have an electro-deposited green epoxy finish.

c. Zinc Plated hardware is not acceptable for use in chemical rooms.

G. Valves

1. Valves 3 inches and larger shall be butterfly type valves, with PVC body, 150# SWP with

stainless steel shaft, polypropylene disc and replaceable resilient seat bonded to a rigid shaft

and guaranteed for bubble tight shutoff from 27 inch vacuum to 150 PSI. Extended neck 2

inch beyond flanges for any insulated piping shall be provided with handle for manual

operation. All valve components shall be suitable for swimming pool chlorinated water

service. Butterfly valves shall be Georg Fischer Type 563, Asahi/America Type SP Pool-Pro,

Chemtrol Model-B, Simtech VP series, Colonial Valve 411 Series, or approved equal.

2. Valves smaller than 3 inches shall be PVC true union ball valves, full port, three-piece con-

struction, blowout-proof stem, Viton seal with socket end connectors.

3. Check valves shall be a quick closing non-slam type, either self-aligning wafer or flanged type,

of corrosion resistant materials suitable for use in a swimming pool environment. Install check

valves in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Locate check valves at least 5

pipe diameters from pumps and fittings. Check valves shall be either by Technocheck Corp.,

model 5050, with epoxy coated cast iron body and bronze swing plates on a stainless steel

spring; or approved equal, for installation between 150 lb flanges.

4. Modulating float valve in the surge tank(s) shall have PVC body and stainless steel wafer disc.

All hardware shall be non-corrodible. The float-operated valves shall be provided horizontally

on the main drain lines in the surge tank(s). Valve shall consist of all non-corrosion

components including shaft, float arm, pins and floats. Valve shall be suitable for mounting on

a 125E class standard PVC flange. The float arm leverage weight and pivot lengths shall be

adjustable to obtain desired ratio of surge tank level change to pool gutter overflow level

change. Two floats and stabilizer required. Valve shall be Model FV-D XWB (Extra Weight

Ball) as manufactured by MerMade Filter, Inc. or approved equal manufactured by EPD, or

Fluidtrol Process Technologies, Inc.

5. Submerged valves up to 3 inches shall be PVC true union ball valves. Submerged valves over

3 inches shall be PVC bodied, wafer type, butterfly valves with stainless steel handle

extensions as required. Valves shall be by approved manufacturers listed above. Submerged

valves must be provided with all stainless steel connectors. The stem housing extensions shall

be properly supported and braced.

6. All butterfly type valves 8 inches and larger shall be fitted with a water tight gear operator.

7. All valves located 7 feet or greater off the floor shall be fitted with a chain operator.

8. All submerged valves, valves buried below grade, or valves not readily accessible, shall be

provided with a stainless steel reach rod and handle.

H. Pipe and valve identification



1. All exposed pool piping shall be equipped with color coded flow directional arrows at thirty

(30) inch intervals per local and state swimming pool health code The Contractor shall verify

that all pool piping identification is in accordance with all local and state health regulations.

2. All valves shall be identified with minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter brass tags stamped with

minimum 1/2-inch high numbers and attached to valves with #16 brass jack chain. (Plastic

laminate engraved tags with nylon attachment acceptable.) Valves shall be described as to

their function and referenced in the operating instruction manual and wall mounted piping

diagram to be prepared by the CONTRACTOR.

2.6 CHEMICAL TREATMENT SYSTEMS

A. Calcium Hypochlorite (Chlorinator Briquettes)

1. Shop drawings complete with a piping diagram depicting the location in which the dry

chlorination feeder is to be connected to the system shall be provided and approved prior to

installation. Installation of the system shall be as specified in the manufacturer’s directions

and no exceptions shall be taken.

2. A factory-authorized representative shall provide training to the owner and the training shall be

video taped per 131100, Section 1.12 of the project contract documents.

3. Accu-Tab PowerBase

a. General Description

1) The system shall be designed to feed low concentrations of calcium hypochlorite in

solution intermittently or continuously as required for pool applications. The system

shall be a single pre-assembled, package unit with a welded aluminum frame consisting

of chlorinator, electrical box, centrifugal pump, and solution tank for ease of installation

and operation. The system shall be the Accu-Tab PowerBase Model by Axiall

Corporation. Only Accu-Tab® Blue SI calcium hypochlorite tablets by Axiall

Corporation shall be used, the patented blue colorant added for safety (to help prevent

accidental mixing with other chemicals).

2) The base proposal requires providing equipment as specified herein, though

substitutions will be considered. The bidder is cautioned that substitutions must meet

the quality and operational requirements of each feature specified in Section 2 below.

Batch systems with pressure mixing components producing chlorine concentrations

exceeding the limits of the specifications will not be considered.

3) Any system offered shall use an NSF Standard 50 listed erosion feeder and tablet

combination, and shall be capable of meeting all requirements of the Health Department

having jurisdiction over the installation.

b. System Features

1) A maximum chlorine solution level of 0.05% (500 ppm) shall be maintained to prevent

calcification in system components. Systems producing chlorine concentrations higher

than 0.05% shall not be acceptable.



2) Delivery shall be by erosion feed technology to control accurate and consistent

concentration limits in the chlorine treatment solution. Soaking type, spray and/or

vortex technology systems shall not be acceptable.

3) The chlorinator shall automatically and continuously feed a limited quantity of chlorine

in solution as needed; when the system is not running, no more chlorine than that

amount which can be fed in one minute or less shall be left in the tank to prevent

dilution. Batch systems preparing excess quantities of solution for delivery over an

extended period shall not be acceptable.

4) A centrifugal pump wired to the system electrical box shall feed freshly mixed chlorine

treatment solution only as required for maximum efficiency. Batch systems requiring

the use of a metering pump or pumps to feed pre-prepared standing solution shall not be

acceptable.

5) All piping in the chlorinator unit shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Systems with flexible

tubing shall not be acceptable.

c. System Components

1) Tablet Chlorinator. Accu-Tab® chlorinators by Axiall Corporation are designed

exclusively for Accu-Tab® Blue SI calcium hypochlorite tablets by Axiall Corporation

Tablets are placed on a sieve plate inside the chlorinator; as water flows across the sieve

plate, the tablets erode at a rate proportional to the flow rate.

2) Inlet Water Supply Connection.

a) Plunge/Alternate Pool

(i) Model 1030 - 1” FNPT (water supply of 10 GPM required).

b) Recreation Pool

(i) Model 3070AT - 1-1/2” FNPT (water supply of 30 GPM required).

3) Inlet Water Strainer. A strainer to protect chlorinator components from start-up debris

and sand from broken filter laterals.

4) Flow Meter. A rotameter flow meter, measuring the flow of the water-eroding stream to

the chlorinator.

5) Solution Tank shall be PVC. Capacities:

a) Model 1030 7.5 gallon

b) Model 3070AT 22 gallon

6) Float Valve. Made from Schedule 80 PVC and 316L stainless steel, this float valve

maintains the solution tank level.



7) Solution Delivery Pump. Delivers chlorinated solution to the return line. A single-stage

centrifugal pump is provided for systems with pressures up to 20 PSIG. (For systems

requiring a discharge pressures greater than 20 PSIG, a custom selected pump shall be

utilized.)

8) Discharge Check Valve. A PVC swing check valve prevents reverse flow of water into

the system.

9) Discharge Control Valve (manual). Used to balance system output water flow with

system input water flow.

10)Outlet Connection

a) Model 1030 1” NPT

b) Model 3070AT 1.5” NPT

11)Aluminum Frame. Type 6061-T.

12)Nema 4X Electrical Enclosure

d. Optional Equipment

1) High Pressure Pump. On systems requiring unit discharge pressures greater than 20

PSIG.

2) High-High-Low (HHL) Level Switch. A second high level switch (Hi-Hi) is installed

above the high level switch that will run the solution delivery pump in case of an upset

condition in the solution tank. A low level switch will protects the pump by preventing

it from running dry.

e. Electrical Requirements

1) Two electrical circuits are required for operation: (1) 110v 15 amp power, and (1) 110v

control circuit from a pool controller.

B. pH Buffering System (CO2)

1. Shop drawings complete with a piping diagram depicting the location in which the CO2 feeder

is to be connected to the system shall be provided and approved prior to installation.

Installation of the system shall be as specified in the manufacturer’s directions and no

exceptions shall be taken.

2. Bulk Storage

a. Provide a system for storing, regulating and feeding carbon dioxide for pH control. The

system shall consist of CO2 storage tank(s), a lockable fill box for bulk delivery, a pressure

reducing/regulating system, a feed and rate of flow adjustment control system, injection or

mass transfer system, and all valves, tubing, fittings and appurtenances required for a

complete and operable system. The system is to include the following components.



1) CO2 Storage Tanks

a) Provide one (1) 600 lb mass storage tank(s) meeting ASME requirements,

specifically designed and configured for use with CO2. The tank(s) shall be of an

insulated, vacuum-jacketed double wall construction with a rated service pressure of

at least 292 psig. The outer shell shall be stainless steel and given a 10 mil dry film

thickness epoxy coating, the inner shell shall be of stainless steel.

b) Each tank shall include shut off and pressure regulating valves, gauges for accurate

output pressure control, a 350 psig pressure relief valve, and shall be provided with a

dual pressure building/economizer regulator that includes a 7.5 amp, 120 VAC

heater extending into the tank and the liquid CO2.

c) Usage rate capacity shall have a range of 3.2 pounds per day to 20 pounds per hour.

Secure tank to building wall with a coped saddle and a 16 GA x 3” stainless steel

strap bolted to wall.

d) Fill tank with CO2 for initial testing and operation, and provide full tank(s) at the

time of Owner acceptance.

e) The tank(s) shall be as manufactured by Taylor-Wharton, MVE, or approved equal.

2) Remote Fill Box

a) Provide a remote fill station capable of filling the tank(s) at the rate of approximately

30 to 50 pounds per minute in a manner that does not require entry to the storage

room containing the CO2 tank(s). Length of tubing between remote fill box and bulk

storage tank shall not be more than 20’, unless otherwise noted. Each fill station

shall consist of a flush mounted (recessed) lockable fill box located at the exterior of

the building, as indicated, connected to the CO2 system. It shall include a quick

disconnect and automatic closure coupling. Box shall be 8" x 8" x 2” and

constructed of painted 16 gauge galvanized or stainless steel, or sized to module with

exterior masonry.

b) Tanks are to be connected to outside fill station(s), as indicated, with two lengths of

1/2 inch ODT copper for the purpose: one to transfer liquid to the tanks from a bulk

delivery vehicle, and the other from the relief valves to the outside of the building.

All copper tubing from remote fill box to storage tank shall be fitted with either

double ferrule swage fittings, or silver soldered fittings.

3. Adjustable Rate of Flow Feed Unit(s)

a. Provide an adjustable rate of flow feed unit to control the flow of CO2 from the storage

tank(s) to each pool to receive CO2. The feed unit(s) shall be connected to the storage

system with thick wall 3/8 inch OD reinforced braided polyethylene tubing enclosed in

schedule 40 PVC. Feed system shall include 120 volt AC solenoid operated valve for

remote on/off control of CO2.

1) Recreation Pool requires one (1) Stranco Model # CO2-9, 20-200 SCFH



2) Plunge/Alternate Pool requires one (1) Stranco Model # CO2-9, 20-200 SCFH

C. Ultraviolet Dechloramination and Disinfection System

1. Ultraviolet Disinfection Equipment: Shall operate within the UVC electromagnetic

spectrum emitting wavelengths in the range of 200nm to 400nm. This required wavelength

will provide constant disinfection/inactivation of bacteria, algae, molds, viruses and

destruction of Monochloramines, Trichloramines, and Dichloramines. Ultraviolet

Lamp/Chamber and Spectra Touch Control Panel by Engineered Treatment Systems or

Architect/Engineer approved equal. Any deviation/exception must be provided in writing to

and approved by the designer prior to the bid date.

a. Ultraviolet disinfection equipment by Aquionics and Prominent are approved equals.

2. The UV System shall have an MET or equivalent (ETL, CSA, or UL) listing, be NSF-50

2014 certified including Section 14.18 (crypto inactivation) or 3rd party validated to the

USEPA UVDGM 2006 Guidelines.

a. Equipment General Description: The Ultraviolet System shall be provided in a complete

package to include: 316L Schedule 10 Stainless Steel Chamber, Spectra Touch Control

System located in a NEMA 12 (IP52) rated panel, Medium Pressure Bulb(s) designed to

emit wavelengths within the UVC electromagnetic spectrum, UV EZ Clean strainer,

automatic wiper system, and Project Commissioning by a Certified ETS Ultraviolet

Technician.

3. ECF Units: Ultraviolet manufacturer to offer unit capability of a horizontal OR vertical

installation application using state of art design and direct flow through characteristics.

Direct flow will be required in order to reduce total head loss through the system. Unit shall

be a Multiple Lamp medium pressure system with a bulb range of (2) 1.0 kW – (4) 3.0 kW

power range. Multiple lamp system is required in order to maintain quality disinfection in

the event of a single bulb failure. ANSI or PN (as specified) flange range of 4”/100MM –

12”/300MM and flow pattern of 350 to 3700 GPM (1540 m3/hr to 16,313 m3/hr). @ 94%

UVT. Any systems validated or designed for flows based on 98 % UVT are not acceptable.

Chamber and Control Cabinet shall be as indicated on the drawings. Electrical requirements

are indicated in the table below. The electrical contractor is to take into account plus/minus

3% for external breaker. All required electrical work to be performed by licensed

electrician.

Pool Type Model

Number

US EPA 3-

log and

calculated

40mj/cm2

(GPM)

Calculated

60 mj/cm2

(GPM) Lamps Power

(KW)

Voltage (V) with

Breaker Size

Plunge/Alternate

Pool

ECF-

210-4V 540 350 2–1.0kW 2.0

208 V (1ф)– 20A

Recreation Pool ECF-

230-12V 2046 1680 2–3.0kW 6.0

208 V (3ф)– 50A

4. Ultraviolet Chamber



a. Pressure rated for 100 psi/8 Bar (tested to 150 psi/11 Bar), and pressure drop across the

unit will be minimal. The unit shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel, schedule 10

pipe, passivated to prevent corrosion within the harsh pool environment. The Ultraviolet

chamber shall come complete with the following equipment.

I. Ultraviolet intensity monitor factory calibrated to provide intensity in mw/cm2, it

must include a built-in alarm system to notify operator when output level drops below

required level of 60 mj/cm2 for indoor pools or 40mj/cm2 for outdoor pools (or

operator set dosing levels).

II. Ultraviolet temperature control system shall be provided to maintain system integrity

in the event of flow interruptions to the chamber.

III. Ultraviolet chamber shall come complete with annealed quartz sleeve with “O” ring

seals for water tightness.

IV. Chambers shall be complete with ANSI or DN flanges (as specified) and all ports or

vents shall be threaded NPT. The Ultraviolet chamber must be capable of installation

in the system so that it remains full under all conditions.

V. The Ultraviolet unit must be complete with integrated brackets or feet for ease of

installation in either vertical or horizontal mounting.

VI. The Chamber shall have a sacrificial anode attached to the chamber, extending inside

the chamber and be bonded to the installation bond loop.

5. Ultraviolet Lamp

a. Ultraviolet lamp shall be medium pressure high intensity. Lamp shall be designed to

emit continuous Ultraviolet wavelengths in the range of 200nm to 400nm. This will

provide optimal disinfection benefits and destruction of the Monochloramine,

Dichloramine, and Trichloramine compounds. Lamp must remain unaffected by

temperature variance of 0 degrees F (-17 C) to 200 degrees Fahrenheit (93 degrees

Celsius).

b. The lamp system must provide a constant dose of not less than 60 mj/cm2 until the end of

the lamp life for indoor applications and not less than 40 mj/cm2 for outdoor disinfection

and this must be based on constantly monitoring the full recirculating flow rate, not on a

side stream treatment. The system must be equipped with variable power control to control

the intensity & dose of the lamp in 1% increments.

6. Automatic Wiper System

a. An automatic cleaning system shall be provided for cleaning of quartz sleeve and

Ultraviolet monitor probe. The system shall travel the entire length of the quartz sleeve

twice per desired cleaning cycle. Precision molded wiper rings shall be provided to

ensure thorough quartz tube cleaning and quartz tube protection. Wiper cycle shall be

user selectable and adjustable within a range of 5 minutes to 24 hours depending on

anticipated application and deposit build-up.



7. UV Strainer

a. The UV system must be provided with a downstream strainer to protect against the

possibility of lamp/quartz breakage traveling downstream.

8. Ultraviolet Control System

a. Control cabinet shall be an ETS SPECTRA Touch control unit and or pre-approved

equal. The cabinet shall be an epoxy coated NEMA 12 / IP52 rated cabinet. If mounted

outdoors it must be a NEMA4X /IP56 rated cabinet with an integral A/C unit to protect

the components from the environment. The power must be controllable to provide full

power, half power and infinite variable power based on real time interface with changes

in UVT, Flow Rate or Combined Chloramines. Three levels of operation shall be

provided to meet the needs of the operator and pool environment: Simple Control (start,

stop and reset), Full Parameter Display, and Customized Operator Configuration. Modes

of operation shall be password protected to secure system critical setup functions. Touch

Control system shall have clearly identifiable start, stop, and reset icons (suitable for

gloved operation) with Running and Fault LCD indicators.

I. The main Touch screen shall display a minimum of the following: Ultraviolet

calculated dose (derived from flow and intensity inputs), Ultraviolet intensity (as a %

and mw/cm2), Lamp Current, Flow rate (accepts signal from optional flow meter –

displayed as gallons per minute or m3/hour), Chamber temperature (displayed as deg.

F or deg. C), Operation hour meter, and fault indicators to include Lamp fault, low

Ultraviolet & temperature alarm, Ground fault trip, Wiper fault. All alarm functions

shall have simple text message display to assist in fault finding.

II. Touch Control system shall have a minimum of the following system interface

controls: Remote operation, Process interrupt features (from valves, flow meters),

Low UV dose (configurable to shutdown or alarm only), Flow meter input, Auto-

Restrike, Half to full power Ultraviolet setting with 24 hour/7 day settable timer.

Variable power/Dose pacing interface.

III. Touch Control system shall have built in data-logging capabilities to record the

following information: Ultraviolet intensity required, Ultraviolet intensity measured,

Lamp current, Chamber temperature, Flow rate (if flow meter is connected), Time

and date stamp, All alarms generated.

IV. Touch Control system must be able to be interfaced with a Chemistry Controller that

can measure Total or Combined Chloramines in order to maintain the proper dosage

required during the life of the lamp.

V. Touch Control system must be able to interface with any automatic or semi-automatic

filtration controller.

VI. Touch Control system must be capable of operating through Ethernet or Wi Fi.

VII. Touch Control system must be capable of interfacing with a SCADA system

including both Profibus and Modbus.



9. System Startup

a. Install in accordance with contract documents and manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Commissioning:

I. Ultraviolet Chamber and Control Panel shall be commissioned by a qualified factory

trained technician to institute the warranty.

II. Final electrical and control cabling will be connected from the Touch Control cabinet

to the Ultraviolet disinfection chamber during the commissioning process.

III. Daily operation and simple maintenance instructions shall be provided during the

commissioning process.

10. Warranty

a. All components, excluding lamps, quartz and seals, shall have a limited warranty to be

free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of 12 months from date of

start-up. Medium pressure Ultraviolet bulbs shall be warranted for a period of 8,000

hours. Intermittently operated lamps ( 1 on/off cycles per day) will be replaced free of

charge should failure occur prior to 4,000 hours and replacement will be prorated

between 4,000 and 8,000 hours.

b. Manufacturer must maintain spare or replacement parts in the USA for same day or not

longer than next day delivery in North America.

2.7 WATER CHEMISTRY MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. The water chemistry control system for the Recreation pool and Plunge/Alternate shall provide

continuous monitoring and control of sanitizers, oxidizers, pH, ORP, free chlorine, total

chlorine, combined chlorine, temperature, system flow rate, and water chemistry balance

calculations. The controller shall manage the recirculation pump with a programmable Fireman

Cycle feature, which automatically turns off the Heater, UV and Auxiliary systems prior to

shutting off the recirculation pump. All line-voltage wiring shall be performed in a separate

NEMA 4X enclosure that precludes access to the controller electronics. The control system

shall also provide automatic control of the filtration system including backwash operation.

Installation of the system shall be per the manufacturer’s specification and no exceptions shall

be allowed. A factory trained/authorized representative shall provide training to the Owner and

the training shall be videotaped per 131100, Section 1.12 of the project contract documents. The

specified controller, a BECSys7 manufactured by BECS Technology, Inc. shall be provided or

Chemtrol by SB Control Systems, AcuTrol by Pentair, ProMinent, or a technically equal

system capable of providing equal performance for all operating functions.

B. Certifications

1. The controller shall carry the following product certifications

a. NSF/ANSI Standard 50;

b. UL 61010-1



C. Sensors

1. The controller shall come with the following sensors

a. pH - The controller shall provide a measurement of pH by utilizing a sensor with the

following characteristics:

1) 0 – 14 sensing range

2) ABS body with ½” NPT process connection

3) Minimum of 32 milliliters of inorganic electrolyte gel; organic electrolytes,

susceptible to breakdown in the presence of strong oxidants, shall not be considered

equal

4) A porous Teflon liquid junction to provide a stable, low impedance reference contact,

and to prevent fouling and clogging of the liquid junction

5) A silver/silver chloride (Ag/AgCl) reference element

6) A general purpose glass membrane pH sensing element

7) Operating temperature range of 0 - 80 degrees C

8) Operating pressure range of 0 - 100 psiG.

9) The controller shall continuously monitor, display and data log pH with 0.1 or 0.01

resolution (programmable).

b. ORP - The controller shall provide a measurement of ORP by utilizing a sensor with the

following characteristics:

1) -1000 to +1000mV sensing range

2) ABS body with ½” NPT process connection

3) Minimum of 32 milliliters of inorganic electrolyte gel; organic electrolytes,

susceptible to breakdown in the presence of strong oxidants, shall not be considered

equal

4) A porous Teflon liquid junction to provide a stable, low impedance reference contact,

and to prevent fouling and clogging of the liquid junction

5) A silver/silver chloride (Ag/AgCl) reference element

6) A solid platinum or solid gold ORP sensing element with a minimum of 1 cm2 surface

area; platinum-plated and gold-plated sensing elements, which are susceptible to

abrasives, shall not be considered equal

7) Operating temperature range of 0 - 80 degrees C



8) Operating pressure range of 0 - 100 psig

9) The controller shall continuously monitor, display and data log ORP with 1mV

resolution

c. Flow Sensor - The controller shall provide a measurement of pool circulation flow rate

and volume by utilizing a flow sensor with the following characteristics:

1) 0-8800 gpm (0-33265 liter/min) measuring range,

2) Magmeter flow sensor with a frequency output,

3) Dual O-ring seal,

4) Cable to meet length requirement for installation,

5) Saddle to meet return line size,

6) Flow volume: 999 trillion gallons, 1 gallon resolution; 999 trillion liters, 1 liter

resolution.

7) The controller shall continuously monitor, display and data log flow rate with 0.1

gpm resolution.

d. Temperature - The controller shall provide a measurement of water temperature by

utilizing a sensor with the following characteristics:

1) 32 – 212°F (0 – 100°C) sensing range;

2) 2 wire, 100Ω resistive temperature detector (RTD) with a 0.00385 Alpha.

3) The controller shall continuously monitor, display and data log temperature with 1°F

resolution.

e. Free Chlorine Sensor - The controller shall provide a measurement of free chlorine by

utilizing an amperometric sensor with the following characteristics:

1) 0.0 to 20.0 mg/l (ppm) measuring range with fully selectable scale,

2) 32 - 113F operating temperature range,

3) A PVC body,

4) Replaceable PTFE membrane and electrolyte,

5) Gold cathode and silver/silver chloride anode.

6) The controller shall continuously monitor, display and data log free chlorine with 0.1

mg/l resolution.

f. 4-20mA Sensors



1) Total Chlorine Sensor (with Combined Chlorine Reading) - The controller shall

provide measurement of total chlorine utilizing a sensor with the following

characteristics:

a) 0.0 to 20.0 mg/l (ppm) measuring range,

b) 41 - 113F operating temperature range,

c) Replaceable PTFE membrane and electrolyte,

d) Gold cathode.

e) The controller shall continuously monitor, display and data log total chlorine with

0.1 mg/l resolution. The controller shall also continuously monitor, display and

data log combined chlorine (from the total chlorine and free chlorine sensors) with

0.1 mg/l resolution.

D. User Interface

1. Standard Display - The standard display shall be a backlit transflective LCD with 14 line x

40 alpha/numeric graphical characters that will continuously display information related to

the following:

a. All installed sensor readings

b. Set points, with current control status

c. All active alarms, including time activated

d. Smart menus w/ integrated on-screen help

e. Contrast adjustment of the backlit LCD shall be provided through clearly marked keys on

the front-panel without the need for access to internal controller circuitry. After initial

adjustment, controller shall monitor internal temperature and automatically adjust

contrast to prevent LCD blackout in extreme ambient temperature conditions. Controllers

that do not include front-panel contrast adjustment and automatic temperature

compensation shall not be considered equal.

f. The standard user interface shall include single-touch access to Set Points, Relay Modes,

Calibrations, Backwash status and settings, Menu access, and Reset Fail/Safes. An

alphanumeric keypad shall be provided for ease of system configuration.

E. Control Functions

1. Water Chemistry

a. pH Control: The controller shall continuously control pH. Chemical feed shall be

configurable for feed-up, feed-down, or dual feed and either on/off or time-based

proportional feed.



b. Sanitizer Control: The controller shall continuously control sanitizer based upon the

ORP reading, the amperometric sensor, or both with a bracketed control program.

Chemical feed shall be configurable for either on/off or time-based proportional feed.

c. Bracketed Sanitizer Control: With the amperometric ppm sensor, the controller shall

be configurable for bracketed sanitizer control; The bracketed control algorithm shall

allow either the ORP or ppm setpoint to be chosen as the primary control point, while

using other parameter to create a secondary boundary (min and max settings) that must

be maintained in addition to the primary control point.

d. Sanitizer Booster Feed: The controller shall have a sanitizer booster program with

selectable ORP and/or ppm set points with separate ending set points, allowing the

option of the booster sanitizer to control to a lower set point while the primary system

can recovers.

e. UV Control: A Fireman Cycle feature shall turn off (ramp down) the UV relay 0 to 60

minutes (settable) prior to backwash initiation or recirculation pump shutdown.

f. Auxiliary: A Fireman Cycle feature shall turn off (ramp down) the Auxiliary relay 0 to

60 minutes (settable) prior to backwash initiation or recirculation pump shutdown. The

Ozone Fireman control and relay shall have the ability to be renamed in the menus to

provide the Fireman Cycle feature for Auxiliary equipment instead of ozone as needed.

g. Combined Chlorine UV Control: The controller shall provide turndown control of a

UV system based upon combined chlorine set point; when combined chlorine is below

set point the UV system will be turned down to decrease energy consumption and

extend bulb life.

h. Superchlorination: The controller shall have a programmable superchlorination

function, based upon ORP or ppm superchlor setpoint, which is triggered manually.

i. Dechlorination: The controller shall have a programmable dechlorination function,

based upon ORP or ppm dechlor setpoint, which is triggered either manually or by the

completion of the superchlorination function.

j. LSI & RSI: The controller shall compute the Langelier Saturation Index and the

Ryznar Saturation Index based upon current inputs and the Ca Hardness and Alkalinity

entered by the operator.

2. Expanded

a. Flow Monitoring: The controller shall continuously monitor, display, and datalog system

flow, maintaining a total flow volume. A Low Flow Alarm shall be operator settable,

which can be programmed to disable chemical feeds. Controller shall also have a

Minimum Flow Rate setting to turn off heater whenever system flow is less than this

programmed minimum level.

b. Heater Control: The controller shall perform on/off control of a heater based upon an

operator settable temperature set point. A Fireman Cycle feature shall turn off the Heater

0 to 60 minutes (settable) prior to recirculation pump shutdown. The controller shall



immediately turn off the Heater when system flow is less than the heater Minimum Flow

Rate setting. The Heater control algorithm shall include an Energy Conservation mode,

with on/off set time and secondary temperature set point.

c. Sensor Wash: The controller shall include a programmable sensor wash with start and

end time, feed duration, and number of cycle to allow multiple feed cycles per day.

3. Energy Conservation

a. Alternate Setpoints: The controller shall have alternate Sanitizer, Heater, and Autofill

setpoints, based upon a 4 event 28 day timer.

b. Energy Conservation Mode: The controller shall have the capability to disable all

mechanical and chemical functions during programmed conservation cycle. The Energy

Conservation Mode shall include the ability to periodically monitor and satisfy all

operation requirements based upon a programmed time schedule.

F. Main Recirculation Pump

1. On/Off Control with Relay

a. Controller shall provide the capability to interface to and control a recirculation pump

with a programmable relay. The controller shall provide 3 operator-settable independent

Fireman Cycle settings and relays for the Heater, UV and Auxiliary controls. The

controller shall include the following capabilities, available as appropriate based upon

installed sensors and implemented features:

1) Fireman Cycle: Upon the following events, the controller shall automatically delay

recirculation pump shutdown until the Heater, UV and Auxiliary controls have been

deactivated and the corresponding Fireman Cycles have expired:

a) Backwash Operations

b) Energy Conservation mode (24 hr., 7 day function)

c) Manual off (per Operator)

2) Immediate: Upon the following events, the controller shall immediately turn off the

recirculation pump (and Heater, UV and Auxiliary controls), without first satisfying

Fireman Cycle timing requirements:

a) Surge Tank Level Low Alarm: Turn off pump immediately (surge tank is almost

empty)

b) Strainer Vacuum High Alarm: Turn off pump immediately (possible entrapment)

c) Emergency shutdown, triggered by front-panel Emergency Off: Turn off pump

immediately (per Operator)



2. VFD Interface with 4-20mA signal

a. Controller shall provide the capability to interface to and control a recirculation pump

equipped with a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) through a 4-20mA signal. The

controller programming shall allow the operator to manage the VFD entirely from the

water chemistry controller, by providing the following capabilities:

1) Programmable setpoint specified as either flow rate, effluent filter pressure, or fixed

setting,

2) Four programmable operator-triggered alternate profiles (“Manual Turndowns”),

3) Four programmable scheduled alternate profiles (“Scheduled Turndowns”),

4) Override setting for backwash,

5) Ramp up and ramp down settings,

6) Minimum output setting.

7) Remote access to current VFD status and all VFD parameters shall be provided

through the BECSys for Windows PC software provided with controller. The name of

each alternate profile shall be changeable by the operator, so that VFD menus and

data log entries are intuitive and recognizable by the users of the system.

8) Systems that do not provide both local and remote management of the VFD through

the water chemistry controller shall not be considered equal.

G. Control Outputs

1. Relay Outputs

a. Solid-State Relays

1) The controller shall come with a total of 4 integral line or dry contact 5A solid-state

relay outputs capable of switching 3A under all normal operating conditions,

accounting for the effects of the temperature gradient inside the NEMA 4X enclosure.

Systems that utilize relays that are not de-rated must submit an engineering evaluation

justifying the use of relays at their full, optimal-condition capacity. All solid-state

relays shall have a provision for an electrical interlock with the circulation pump

motor starter.

2. Mechanical Relays

a. The controller shall come with a total of 5 mechanical relays:

1) 1 integral 8A dry contact mechanical relay, and

2) 4 integral 3A dry contact or line powered mechanical relays.



3) Since mechanical relays have the inherent risk of failing in the closed (active)

position, as a safety measure the controller shall preclude the ability to assign any of

the integral mechanical relays to chemical feed functions. Systems that do not

preclude mechanical relays from being configured for chemical feeds shall not be

considered equal. All mechanical relays shall have a provision for an electrical

interlock with the circulation pump motor starter.

3. Solid-State Relay Expansion Modules

a. Each Solid-State Relay Expansion Module provides 5 integral 5A solid state dry contact

or line powered relays capable of switching 3A under all normal operating conditions.

Systems that utilize relays that are not de-rated must submit an engineering evaluation

justifying the use of relays at their full, optimal-condition capacity. All solid-state relays

shall have a provision for an electrical interlock with the circulation pump motor starter.

4. Mechanical Relay Expansion Modules

a. Each Mechanical Relay Expansion Module provides 5 integral mechanical relays:

1) 1 integral 8A dry contact mechanical relay, and

2) 4 integral 3A dry contact or line powered mechanical relays.

3) Since mechanical relays have the inherent risk of failing in the closed (active)

position, as a safety measure the controller shall preclude the ability to assign any of

the integral mechanical relays to chemical feed functions. Systems that do not

preclude mechanical relays from being configured for chemical feeds shall not be

considered equal. All mechanical relays shall have a provision for an electrical

interlock with the circulation pump motor starter.

5. 4-20mA Outputs

a. The controller shall come with eight separately isolated 4-20mA output signals with a

load capacity of 440Ω per output channel. Each output signal shall be independently

configurable for either of the following functions:

1) Any enabled input, scaled between two operator-defined end points,

2) VFD control of recirculation pump.

H. Safety Features

1. Manual-On limit

a. The controller shall have built-in limits to the amount of time any relay control output

may be forced on (i.e. in “Manual On” mode). This is an important safety feature to

prevent control outputs from inadvertently being left forced on after service or

diagnostics.



2. High/Low Alarm Settings & Control Lockouts

a. The controller shall have programmable high and low alarm settings for pH, ORP, PPM,

temperature, low flow & no flow and chemical overfeed, turbidity, pressure & vacuum,

surge tank levels, chemical inventory. The controller shall have a programmable lockout

of sanitizer feed upon pH high or low alarm.

3. No Flow Alarm & Flow Restored Delay

a. The controller shall activate a No Flow alarm when the dedicated sample stream flow

switch indicates there is insufficient flow through the sample stream. This No Flow

alarm shall lockout all chemical feed control operations. The controller shall include a

Flow Restored Delay, which shall extend the No Flow lockout user-programmable

amount of time after the No Flow alarm ends (i.e. flow is restored). This feature is

necessary to assure that the system has valid, stable sensor readings of circulating water

prior to making chemical feed control decisions.

4. Feed Limit Alarms

a. The controller shall trigger a FailSafe alarm if a chemical feed relay remains on longer

than the programmable Feed Limit Timer. Chemical feeds shall automatically be

disabled if the corresponding reading goes into a FailSafe alarm condition.

5. Emergency Off

a. The controller shall have a dedicated Emergency Off button on the front panel of the

system, which immediately halts all chemical feeds and control outputs when pressed.

This feature shall be password protectable, which shall require entry of one of the

Security passwords.

6. Safety shield

a. The controller shall include a safety shield or other mechanism for allowing fuse

replacement without access to high voltage circuitry or wiring.

I. Security

1. The controller shall have three security password levels: six for operators, two for managers

and one for the distributor providing for a history of access identified by the user.

J. Data Logging

1. The controller shall have 512K battery backed-up RAM for input level recording and

events. All input level shall be recorded for 10 to 56 days depending on sample rate (2 to 10

minutes).

2. The controller shall record and maintain the latest 1100 events over a maximum of 14 days

recording all alarms, parameter changes, user logins, and operational cycles related to all

control features.



K. Local Alarms Indicators

1. The controller shall signal all alarm conditions with the following indicators:

a. A bright red flashing LED on the front of the controller,

b. Activation of a master alarm signal provided as a dry contact relay enabling the use of 0-

240 VAC alarms, and

c. Each active alarm listed on the LCD display along with time activated.

L. Remote Communication, Access & Alarm Notification

1. Ethernet

a. The controller shall come with a standard, integral 100BaseT Ethernet connection. The

controller shall be capable of providing Remote Access via PC with Ethernet

connection and Alarm Notification via email or text message via an Ethernet

connection to the Internet.

2. Remote Access

a. The controller manufacturer shall provide BECSys for Windows graphical remote

operation software, for interactive connection to the controller from a PC. Remote

operation software shall be Vista-compatible, and have all of the following operational

modes:

1) Site Data Base – for organizing and accessing multiple controllers on site, or at

multiple sites.

2) Graphical Operator’s Console – to display current readings, setpoints, alarm points

and control status in an easy-to-read graphical mode.

3) Data Log Graphing – to review data logs with time-synchronized event data; data log

traces shall be configurable, with color and line style selectable by operator.

4) Full Menu Tree – All system parameters accessible through a full menu tree interface.

5) Auto-Polling – to allow automatic download of data logs from all controllers in site

database.

3. Alarm Notification

a. The controller shall be capable of providing alarm notification to 8 different recipients.

Each recipient shall be individually configurable to receive alarm notification by one of

the following methods.

1) Email: Notification message shall include system type, serial number, location,

system ID, and all active alarm including the date and time each alarm was triggered.



2) Text Message: Notification message shall include system type, serial number,

location, system ID, and all active alarm including the date and time each alarm was

triggered.

3) Fax: Notification message shall include system type, serial number, location, system

ID, and all active alarm including the date and time each alarm was triggered.

4) Numeric Pager: Notification message shall include callback number. Controller shall

acknowledge pager notification when callback is received, and not notify subsequent

recipients programmed for pager notification.

M. Enclosures

1. The controller shall be housed in a NEMA 4X polycarbonate enclosure.

2. Field wiring enclosure

a. All high voltage field wiring shall be through a separate NEMA 4X enclosure that

precludes access to controller electronics. All high voltage connections shall be clearly

identified and a field wiring diagram shall be provided with the controller for installer

reference. All controller high-voltage relay assignment parameters shall be programmed

at the factory prior to delivery to installation location.

1. Lighted flow cell

b. The flow cell shall have a polyethylene body with two ½“ NPT ports for pH and ORP

sensors, two ¼“NPT ports for temperature sensor and sensor wash acid injection,

integrated flow switch and clear acrylic front viewing windows. The flow cell shall also

include a port for the CP-1 free chlorine sensor, if present. The flow cell shall be backlit

to support inspection of sensors, and red LEDs shall illuminate to indicate a No Flow

condition. The flow cell design shall provide precise sample flow rate and water velocity

regulation past the sensors. The flow cell shall come provided with PVC ½” isolation

ball valves and PVC ¼” wet test valve.

a. Each flowcell shall be equipped with a pressure-sensing device. The pressure sensor

shall consist of a compound pressure/vacuum gauge manufactured in stainless steel, 2 ½”

diameter, liquid filled with an operating pressure range of 0 to 60 psig and vacuum of 0

to -30 in./ Hg.

N. Start-up and Manuals

1. The control system shall be provided with on-site start-up, on-site operator training, and 1

year on-site warranty service performed by a representative trained and authorized by the

controller manufacturer.

2. Manufacturer shall supply an Operation and Maintenance Manual describing features,

operating instructions, maintenance procedures and replacement parts.

2.8 FLOW METERS

A. Flow Meter



1. Flow meters (5 required) shall be installed according to the manufacturer in the filtered water

return lines to each of the pools. Flow sensor shall be the GF Signet 2551 insertion magmeter.

Provide the coaxial cable from the sensor to the display/transmitter. Flow meter accuracy

shall be +/- 2% of reading. The flow instrument shall have a LCD for simultaneous display of

four-digit flow rate and eight-digit totalizer. Display/Transmitter capability will be part of

chemical controller function or as separate Signet GF Signet 9900 display/transmitter. Signet

GF Signet 9900 display/transmitter shall be powered by 24VDC and provide a 4-20mA output.

b. Provide three (3) GF signet 9900 display/transmitters for the recreation pool zoned return

lines.

2. Backwash piping flow meter (2 required) shall be a pilot, impact ball, variable area type with

one piece, impact resistant machined acrylic plastic body. GPM scale to be permanently

etched or imprinted on the meter. Flow rate indicator to be of stainless steel material. Scale

range to be appropriate for specific flow rate. Pipe size to accommodate backwash rate.

Backwash piping flow meter shall be BLUE-WHITE series F-300 or approved equal.

B. Refill Flow Meter

1. Refill flow meter (2 required) shall be installed on dilution piping to backwash tank. Flow

meter shall be one piece meter body of injected molded polysulfone adapters, viton o-ring

seals, and 316L stainless steel floats and float guide, impact resistant machined acrylic plastic

body. GPM scale to be permanently etched or imprinted on the meter. Flow rate indicator to

be of stainless steel material. Scale range to be appropriate for specific flow rate.

Manufacturer shall be BLUE-WHITE or approved equal Model F-45750L-12, 3/4” M/NPT

@ 1.0 to 10.0 GPM.

2.9 WATER LEVEL CONTROLLERS

A. In Surge Tank Water Level Controller (For surge tank pools)

1. Provide a water level sensing and control system for the Recreation Pool and plunge Pool that

will monitor the water level in the surge tank and automatically activate the auto water make-

up control valve. For sensing water level and activating make-up water control valve for each

pool, use Series ELC-810 Controller housed in a watertight NEMA 4X UL94 5V UL

flammability rated polycarbonate enclosure to meet IP66 and NEMA 4, 4X, 12 and 13 ratings.

The Controller shall utilize one sensor(s) to control water level. ELC-810 series shall have a

menu-driven LCD display screen and utilize a five-switch user interface for navigation through

the menu. The menu shall allow changing the following settings: delay to shutoff, alternate

sensor option, maximum time on, manual override, delay to normal, type of sensor, high level

option, flow sensor active, and sounder with alarm. All menu settings shall be capable of

password protection. The Controller shall be capable of displaying the following data: last fill

time, last drain time, last alarm. The Controller shall be capable of determining the following:

maximum time on exceeded, over current to solenoid valve, no valve/valve wiring problem,

and sensor not working properly. The Controller shall have a low voltage interlock with auto

water make-up solenoid valve, shall provide adjustable time delay for increasing level and

manual override; and shall require 115 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz power. Manufactured by

AquatiControl Technology, Model ELC-810-SS/DS-ST-XXX (Contractor to coordinate the

specific length(s) of cable required for each controller prior to ordering). Refer to drawings for



additional information. Provided and installed by CONTRACTOR and connected by

electrical.

2. Provide a proximity switch sensor that shall be sensitive to within +/- 1/8” (4mm) of nominal

water level. Supply voltage to sensor shall be 12V to 24V DC from Controller. Current

consumption shall be < or = 15mA. Response frequency shall be 100Hz. Maximum control

output shall be 200mA. Sensor operating temperature shall be -25 Deg. C to 70 Deg. C.

Operating humidity shall range from 35% RH to 95% RH. Sensor shall be mounted in a 1”

SCH80 PVC pipe (length to be determined by depth of surge tank). Sensing pipe to be

mounted to surge tank wall with composite/non-metallic hangers and stainless steel hardware.

Sensing pipe shall be capable of being submerged under water safely. Refer to drawings for

additional information.

3. Wiring from the sensor to the Controller shall be provided and shall be connected to the

terminal points mounted within a corrosion-resistant, nonmetallic NEMA 4X enclosure. All

wiring connections shall be made through the bottom of the enclosure. The enclosure size

shall be no less than 8” wide x 5” high x 4”deep. The access door shall be the entire front face

panel of the enclosure. Confirm location in field.

4. Major components shall be plugged in using WAGO terminal blocks for ease of installation

and replacement. Unit shall be designed to activate a 24-volt AC solenoid valve.

5. Provide a make-up water solenoid valve, normally closed, stainless steel fitted, bronze body,

24 VAC slow closing type. Size to pipe. Interlock with automatic water level control system.

Refer to the Drawings for additional information. Such as ASCO, or approved equal.

6. Discharge of make-up water shall be into a fill standpipe and piping to the Recreation Pool /

Plunge Pool. Refer to the Drawings for additional information.

2.10 INSERTS AND ANCHOR SOCKETS

A. Sockets and anchors shall be provided as stainless steel or cast bronze for swimming pool

accessories. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm compatibility of deck equipment and deck

anchors with the deck equipment manufacturer. All anchors or sockets shall be provided with

flush closure caps and escutcheons with set screws where indicated. Escutcheons shall be of the

keyhole or oblong shape, similar to the casted, electro-polished stainless steel escutcheon with set

screw by Paragon #28303SS, or approved equal.

1. Anchor sockets for all railings and grab rails shall be of the wedge type, cast bronze, 4 inches

in depth and made to receive 1.50 inch OD tubing as manufactured by Paragon #28105, or

approved equal. The wedge shall be cast bronze, incorporate a stainless steel tightening bolt

and flat washer, and be designed as the sacrificial element to the anchor system. All metallic

components shall be passivated, in compliance with ASTM A967-99, incorporating organic

acid passivation techniques for maximum corrosion resistance.

2. Anchor sockets for all stanchions shall be of cast bronze, sized to receive a full 6 inches

penetration of 1.900 inch OD tubing as manufactured by Paragon Aquatics Catalog No.

38201TC, Spectrum Products No. 23626, Kiefer No. 700103, or approved equal. Each anchor

socket is to be provided with a flush threaded, vandal proof closure cap Paragon Aquatics

Catalog No. 38201TC or Spectrum Products No. 23628, or Kiefer No. 700103C, and a



grounding lug with screw. Provide Paragon Aquatics catalog no. 38303, Spectrum Products

catalog no. 23630, Kiefer No. 700103K, or approved equal spanner wrenches for removing the

closure cap.

3. Cup anchors for racing lane lines, water polo tether and boundary lines etc. shall be

incorporated into the perimeter overflow system. Cup anchors shall be 316L stainless steel

with stainless steel threaded eyebolts. The heavy-duty cup anchors shall be 3-3/8” in diameter.

Cup anchors shall be KDI Paragon, model number 14-505.

4. Anchor assembly for pool lift shall be a pair of threaded bronze anchor sockets mounted on a

jig. The anchor assembly shall include a grounding lug for proper bonding. Install in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions and provide the concrete foundation reinforcing

required to properly anchor and support the unit for its intended use. Manufacturer shall

provide an anchor that has a completely flush cover or flush plug for times when the lift is not

in use.

2.11 DECK EQUIPMENT

A. Grab rails shall be provided as required in the quantities and to the dimensions as shown on the

drawings. Grab rails shall be fabricated of one continuous length of polished and buffed tubing.

The tubing shall be ASTM-A-554 grade 304L (outdoor) stainless steel, 1.50 inch OD x .120 inch

minimum wall thickness, polished and buffed to 320 grit finish and shall be passivated, in

compliance with ASTM A967-99, incorporating organic acid passivation techniques for

maximum corrosion resistance. All bends shall be smooth and free of wrinkles. Grab rails shall

be pretzel bend style with dimensions as indicated in the plans and as manufactured by Spectrum,

SR Smith, Paragon, or approved equal.

B. Entry rails shall be provided as shown on the drawings, fabricated from one continuous piece of

polished and buffed ASTM-A-554 grade 304L (outdoor) stainless steel, 1.500 inch OD x .120

inch wall thickness, polished and buffed to 320 grit finish and shall be passivated for maximum

corrosion resistance. Bends shall be smooth and wrinkle free. Custom rails shall be as

manufactured by Spectrum Products, or approved equal. Custom rail submittal drawings shall be

complete with details of custom fabrication and installation information.

C. Stanchion posts (backstroke) shall be provided as required and in the quantities shown on the

drawings. The posts shall be a straight length of type 304L (outdoor) stainless steel tubing, 1.900

in. OD x .145 in. wall thickness x 8 ft. 0 in. overall length, polished and buffed to 320 grit finish.

Stanchions shall be capped at one end with a closure plug containing a U-shaped hook and fitted

with a stainless steel eyebolt attached to an adjustable nickel plated bronze sliding collar.

Stanchion shall be as manufactured by Paragon Aquatics, catalog no. 38106, or Spectrum

Products catalog no. 23614 with Paragon Aquatics catalog no. 38301 or Spectrum Products

catalog no. 23625, sliding collar, with eyebolt or approved equal.

D. Lifeguard Chairs

1. Lifeguard chairs (4 required) shall be movable and provided with a molded plastic seat 6 feet

above the deck. The seat shall be capable of a 360-degree swivel and shall be supported on a

stainless steel tube structure. Platform shall be laminated wood coated with fiberglass and

polyester resin, and have a non-skid surface. Access to the platform shall be by means of a

sloping front ladder, 26” wide. Ladder steps shall be injection molded ABS, UV stabilized,



26” long x 5” wide with a raised slip resistant tread. The framework of the chair shall be

rigidly bolted. Ladder and guard rails shall be manufactured of polished and buffed ASTM-A-

554 grade 304L (outdoor) stainless steel, 1.50 inch OD x 0.083 inch wall thickness. All

metallic components shall be passivated, in compliance with ASTM A967-99, incorporating

organic acid passivation techniques for maximum corrosion resistance. 6” diameter wheels

shall be attached to the bottom of the rear legs and means of attaching a rescue tube and

umbrella shall be provided. Lifeguard chairs shall be the 6 Ft Discovery, by Spectrum

Products, catalog no. 20160 (6-foot) or approved equal.

a. A platform ballast system (TYPICALLY NEEDED FOR OUTDOOR POOLS) shall be

provided with each Discovery lifeguard chair. The ballast, when filled with water, shall

weigh a minimum of 184-pounds and shall provide additional stability to portable

lifeguard platforms. Ballast tank shall be fabricated of linear low-density polyethylene,

employing a UV inhibitor and shall be flame polished and will be pantone 072 (safety

blue) in color. The ballast tank will provide with a top-mounted fill port and side mount

drain port, each with cover. The ballast tank will be attached to two, 1-inch square x

0.062 wall thickness, square stainless steel tubing. The 1-inch square tubing will be

attached to the portable lifeguard platform. The ends of the square tubing will be close

using 1-inch plugs. Attachment hardware will be 18-8 stainless steel. The Discovery

platform ballast system shall be a part number 20145 as manufactured by Spectrum

Products.

E. Surge tank access hatch (2 required) shall be provided as shown on the drawings. The access

hatch shall be a single door 3 ft.-2 in. x 2 ft.6 in with 1” fillable pan to receive ceramic tile and

grout or concrete fill to match the surrounding deck. The frame shall be ¼ inch extruded

aluminum with built in neoprene cushion and continuous anchor flange. Door shall be ¼”

aluminum plate reinforced with aluminum stiffeners as required. Door shall be equipped with

heavy continuous stainless steel hinges and shall have compression spring operators for easy

operation. Door shall open to 90 degrees and lock automatically in that position. Door shall be

built to withstand a live load of 150 lbs. per square foot and equipped with a continuous Type

316L stainless steel hinge, tubular type, and an automatic hold open arm with release handle.

All hardware is to be type 316L, 18-8, stainless steel. A flush lift handle and a snap lock with

removable key wrench shall be provided. Factory finish shall be mill finish with bituminous

coating applied to the exterior of the frame. The access door shall be Type TER-3 single leaf

pan type door as manufactured by the Bilco Company. Surge tank and backwash catch basin

ladder rungs shall be ½ inch Grade 60 steel encased with co-polymer polypropylene plastic as

manufactured by M.A. Industries, Inc, phone 770-487-7761.

F. Pool Lift

1. Pool lift (2 required) shall be a battery powered handicap lift with footrest assembly. Lift shall

comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act Access Guidelines (ADAAG), be capable of

lifting 400 lbs, and shall include a stainless steel anchor socket, cover, spanner key, and a seat

belt assembly. The following accessories shall also be provided: caddy, arm rest assembly, lift

cover, stability vest, extra battery, wireless controls, and spineboard attachment. All stainless

steel components shall be 304L (outdoor). Lift to be a Splash Aquatic Lift, model #300-0000,

manufactured by S.R. Smith, the Traveler II XRC500 model #27610, manufactured by

Spectrum Products, or approved equal. Contractor to confirm with manufacturer that pool lift

fits on pool perimeter and operates correctly.



G. Provided a ship’s ladder in the size and shape shown on the drawings. Ladder shall be

aluminum with aluminum stiffeners if required by OSHA. CONTRACTOR shall provide

ladder to general contractor for installation. Refer to the Architect.

2.12 LOOSE EQUIPMENT

A. Lifeline shall be 3/4 inch blue and white polyethylene rope with floats that are 5 inch diameter by

9 inch long. Floats to be spaced on five foot centers. All metallic rope hooks shall be stainless

steel. Provide lifeline at five foot break between shallow and deep water as shown on the

drawings. Lifeline to be equal to Recreonics no. 14-381.BW or Lincoln Aquatics 44-115 safety

line rope, Recreonics no. 14-381 or Lincoln Aquatics 44-190 locking 5” x 9” floats, and

Recreonics no. 14-456 or Lincoln Aquatics 44-125 rope end hooks.

B. Water Basketball and Water Volleyball

1. Movable water basketball and water volleyball kit (1 each required) shall be provided

consisting of bases, goals, backboard, rim, net, mounting brackets, eye bolts, volleyball net,

and one ball per unit. Units shall be as manufactured by Dunn-Rite, Inc. (phone 800-798-

9646). Water Volley item no. V100, Splash & Slam item no. B100, and Basketball item no.

B110.

a. Additional volleyball kit required with ALTERNATE #1.

2. Deck mounted water volleyball shall be provided at the locations shown on the drawings.

Equipment shall include: heavy duty 2 3/8” dia. powder coated aluminum stanchion posts

with finishing rings, anchors with caps, heavy duty 24' net with net shortening kit, adjustable

height net clamps and hot colored ball. Hardware shall be brass and stainless steel. The

water volleyball shall be by Dunn Rite model Deck Volley item no. DMV100 with brass

anchored units item no. DMV100BR or approved equal.

C. Provided a removable handicap pool ramp. The ramp shall be a custom ramp as shown on the

drawings, fabricated from type 304L (outdoor) stainless steel. Bends shall be smooth and

wrinkle free. Ramp shall be provided over the gutter where shown on the plans to provide

handicapped access to the pool. Stiffeners shall be provided as required on the gutter. The

surface shall be slip resistant to meet the ADA code. The ramp shall be Recreonics access ramp

catalog no. 46-570, or approved equal.

D. T-wrench for operation of valve extensions shall be fabricated of ¾” diameter SCH 40 stainless

steel pipe. The T-wrench shall be 4’-0” in length with a 24” long welded “T” handle. The

wrench shall be fitted with a ¾” square stainless steel male end, 1” in length, for operation of

valve extensions at the surge tank. Two complete T-wrenches shall be provided.

2.13 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

A. The following items are to be supplied by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise noted. All

proprietary names are to designate performance only. Equal products will be accepted.

1. Wall brush (2 required) - Brush backing shall be a flexible polyethylene material with five (5)

rows of nylon bristles. Pool brush holder shall be permanent mold cast aluminum with

hydrofoil flap. Holder shall have stainless steel screws to facilitate brush changes. Handle



bracket shall be quick detachable mount to fit standard 1 ¼ or 1 ½ inch diameter handles.

Brush to be Recreonics no. 10-135, Lincoln Aquatics 31-020, or approved equal.

2. Skimming net (2 required) - Skimmer head shall consist of one-piece molded plastic frame

with a reinforced, integral handle bracket suitable for quick attachment to a standard 1¼ or 1 ½

inch diameter handle using bolts and wing nut. The standard nylon net shall be attached to the

frame using the groove and spline method. Net depth shall be 4 inches minimum in the center.

Skimmer net shall be manufactured by Skimlife No. SS8, or approved equal.

3. Telescopic Poles (2 required) - Cleaning tool handle shall be of the telescopic design and

fabricated from corrosion resistant, high-quality anodized aluminum. Poles shall be fully

adjustable, to desired length, with a simple twist of a cycolac threaded locking device. Poles

shall consist of a 1 inch tube fitted inside a 1¼ inch tube and be adjustable from a range of 8 ft.

to 16 ft. Handle shall be adjustable from 8 ft. to approximately 16 ft. having a threaded

bushing type clamp to lock handle at desired position. Poles shall be manufactured by Pool

King, or approved equal.

4. Portable Vacuum Poles

a. Stainless steel poles (2 required) –Vacuum head attachment poles are to have a heavy

duty 1¼ inch stainless steel handle with special brass male and female threaded inserts

on the ends. Poles are to be 8 ft. each, totaling a 24 ft. length for vacuum head

attachment. Poles are to be Recreonics no. 10-330 with female thread adaptor being

Recreonics no. 10-335 or approved equals.

5. Test Kits

a. Provide two (2) test kits FOR EACH MECHANICAL ROOM

1) The first test kit shall feature liquid reagents, color comparator, waterproof

instructions and treatment charts, chemistry guide and water gram. Test kit to have

the ability to test for free and total chlorine (0.5 – 5.0 ppm), bromine (1-10 ppm), pH

(7.0 – 8.0), acid and base demand, total alkalinity, calcium hardness and cyanuric

acid. Test kit shall be Taylor Complete 2005 test kit, or approved equal.

2) The second test kit shall be photometric and utilize tablet reagents for stability that

will allow accurate measurement of free and total chlorine (0-10 ppm), bromine, pH,

alkalinity, calcium hardness, and cyanuric acid. The test kit shall have solid-state

digital electronics and built-in filters. The test kit shall be direct-reading with

automatic blank settings, automatic power cut-off, and store the last 10 results in

nonvolatile memory. Test kit shall be a Pooltest 6 system based on the Palintest

system of water analysis. Provide SPH 006D Pooltest 6 - Hard Carry Case Kit and

SPC 006 Check Standard or AquaPRO 6 Test Kit manufactured by Orbeco-Hellige

Inc. and Reference Standard Kit (LP275680).

6. Vacuum Cleaner

a. Vacuum cleaner (filtered water return to pool) - (2 required) to be complete with a 36 inch

dual manifold head with 50 feet of 2 inch floating hose. Hose to be Recreonics, catalog no.

10-422 or approved equal. 24 ft. stainless steel pole shall be available for attachment. The



portable cartridge vacuum cleaner system shall include a 155 square foot T-316 stainless

steel up-flow single cartridge filter, a 1 HP self-priming thermoplastic self-priming pump 1-

1/2” suction and discharge connection and 110 cubic inch strainer capacity. Cartridge shall

be Harmsco no. ST/155 or approved equal. The pump motor shall be 115/230 volt single

phase, 60-cycle, open-drip proof and shall be UL and NSF listed. The pump motor shall be

provided with a 120-volt Hubbell switch, weather proof switch cover, in-line pre-wired

GFCI and a 100’ power cord. The cord shall be wired to a 20 amp, 115/230 volt switch

which shall be mounted on pump motor. All interconnecting pipe and fittings shall be

schedule 40 PVC. The entire assembly shall be bolted to a T-316 stainless steel cart and

shall have pneumatic wheels with grease fittings and roller bearing hubs. The system shall

be provided with one spare cartridge filter. Unit to be Recreonics, catalog no. 10-806,

Lincoln Aquatics no. 27-010, or approved equal. Accessories shall include a 1½ inch x 25

ft. discharge hose with stainless steel hose clamp. Hose to be manufactured by Quaker

Plastic Corporation no. QT-131, or approved equal.

7. Robotic Pool Cleaner

a. DuraMax Robotic Pool Cleaner

1) Provide one (1) dual motor driven automatic swimming pool vacuum device. Cleaner

weighs 37 lbs and has internal water-cooled brushless drive motor with automatic

program to clean the pool floor and walls, travelling 1 ft per second, scrubbing pool

surfaces with onboard rubber brushes. Separate internal oil-cooled, water-cooled,

brushless pump motor filters 4,800 GPH, vacuuming a 2 ft wide path using two offset

7½ square inch suction inlets underneath, filtering fine debris <10 microns small and

solids as large as 1½ inch into an internal reusable filter bag. Solid ½” 316 stainless

steel axles extend the length of the cleaner connecting to a commercial-grade drive-

train with Kevlar reinforced drive belts. Stainless steel reinforced side plates are

capped with soft gray tracking wheels for durability and corner and curve tracking

agility. Unit complete with remote control, air sensor, UltraKart Junior, 120 ft cord, set

of SK3017BL deep clean super brushes (for most surfaces) –or- SP3009PK PVA

brushes (for tile finishes) , filter bag, digital timer, power supply with 24 volt

transformer, operator manual. Requires 110 volt GFCI receptacle onsite, consumes 3

amps electricity. The pool cleaner shall be a DuraMax R/C as manufactured by Aqua

Products, Inc., or approved equal.

2) Provide one (1) dual motor driven automatic swimming pool vacuum device. Cleaner

weighs 45 lbs and has internal water-cooled brushless drive motor with automatic

program to clean the pool floor and walls, travelling 1¼ ft per second, scrubbing pool

surfaces with onboard rubber brushes. Two separate internal oil-cooled, water-cooled,

brushless pump motors filter 9,600 GPH, vacuuming a 2 ft wide path using two offset

7½ square inch suction inlets underneath, filtering fine debris <10 microns small and

solids as large as 1½ inch into an internal reusable filter bag. Solid ½” 316 stainless

steel axles extend the length of the cleaner connecting to a commercial-grade drive-

train with Kevlar reinforced drive belts. Stainless steel reinforced side plates are

capped with soft gray tracking wheels for durability and corner and curve tracking

agility. Unit complete with remote control, air sensor, UltraKart Junior, 120 ft cord, set

of SK3016BL7 deep clean super brushes (for most surfaces) –or- A3008APK PVA

brushes (for tile finishes) , filter bag, digital timer, power supply with 24 volt

transformer, 1 hour cleaning cycle delay option, operator manual. Requires 110 volt



GFCI receptacle onsite, consumes 5 amps electricity. The pool cleaner shall be a

DuraMax Duo Junior as manufactured by Aqua Products, Inc., or approved equal.

Include with 120 ft cord/150 ft cord optional.

8. Stainless Steel Cleaner - Provide a stainless steel cleaner. The cleaner shall comprise of one

(1) gallon of organic passivation solution. It shall be complete with instructions for proper

maintenance of stainless steel surfaces and material safety data sheets for the passivation

solution. The cleaner shall be the Spectra-Clean System 2 as manufactured by Spectrum

Products. Product to be applied with 3M scouring pad, or equivalent.

2.14 SAFETY EQUIPMENT



1. Ring buoy and extension rope (2 required) – Buoy shall be 24 inch diameter vinyl clad PVC

foam with a metal ring molded inside. Buoy shall have a 3/8 inch polyethylene rope attached

to it at four points and be a minimum 60 feet in length. Preserver shall be U.S.C.G. approved.

Buoy and rope to be mounted at each lifeguard chair on hooks. Ring buoy to be manufactured

by Cal-June no. G-24-WH or approved equal. Throw rope to be Recreonics no. 12-261,

Lincoln Aquatics No. 42-050, or approved equal.

2. Life hook and pole (2 required) – Life hook shall be an anodized aluminum 3/8 inch OD

"shepherd's crook" with a 1-1/8-inch OD handle attachment suitable for a 1¼-inch 16 ft.

aluminum extension pole. Hook shall be of looped construction. Each pole to be provided

with a set of spring type stainless steel pole clamps for mounting on each lifeguard chair. Life

hook shall be equal to manufactured by Rainbow no. 153. Pole clamps shall be Recreonics no.

10-353, or approved equal.

3. Spineboards (2 required) - Spineboard shall be 72” long x 20” wide, constructed of 100%

virgin high density polyethylene. The design shall provide stiffness and torsional rigidity

while remaining lightweight. The spineboard shall accommodate up to 500 lbs and shall

feature customizable buoyancy that allows users to adjust the buoyancy by inserting

polyethylene foam rods (supplied with the spineboard). There shall be (10) handholds

around the perimeter of the board. The spineboard shall be supplied with one (1) 2-piece

head immobilizer, one (1) head strap, four (4) body straps, one (1) head immobilizer with

head bed, and two (2) flotation rods. The spineboard shall be CJ Rescue 6 package as

manufactured by CJ spineboard at 1-206-824-8886 or approved equal. The CONTRACTOR

shall provide one (1) set of heavy duty stainless steel utility hooks per spineboard for storing

the spineboard at a convenient and readily accessible location near the pool (Recreonics

catalog no. 10-362).

4. First aid kit (2 required) - First aid kit shall be a 24 unit kit per American Red Cross standards

as manufactured by Swift First Aid, or approved equal.

5. Rescue tube (2 required) - Provide one rescue tube for each lifeguard chair. Rescue tube to be

Recreonics No. 12-303, or approved equal.

6. Safety eyewash station (2 required) - Safety eyewash station shall be a self-contained system in

which eyewash bottles are securely positioned in a portable holder. Eyewash bottles shall be



32 ounces and easily removable from case, and shall contain a sterile, saline solution with the

ability to neutralize a varying quantity acids or caustics. Eyewash stations shall be equipped

with a double back screw and holes for easy mounting in location to be determined by the

Architect. Stations shall be Recreonics 12-033, Lincoln Aquatics 49-026, or approved equal.

7. Safety eyeglasses - Provided a safety eyeglass dispenser station containing ten (10) pairs of

safety glasses. Eyeglasses shall be ANSI/OSHA accepted, and be equal to Lab Safety Supply

Inc. (1-800-356-0783) no. WQ-14740B.

8. Bag Valve Masks – Provide two (2) bag valve mask assistant resuscitation systems, one size

Adult (1500ml tidal volume) and one size Infant/Child (450ml tidal volume). Product shall be

a latex free disposable bag mask unit with support strap, transparent patient valve, and textured

surface to eliminate slipping. Integral swivel valve, available with a closed reservoir system.

Standard pack includes resuscitator, oxygen reservoir and a transparent bag for storage. Bag

Valve Masks shall be Ambu SPUR II, or approved equal.

2.15 THERMOMETERS



1. Portable thermometer (2 required) shall be a molded ABS plastic tube body type with the

ability to measure temperature in both degrees Fahrenheit and Celsius. A 3 ft. polyethylene

cord is to be attached to thermometer. Thermometer is to be manufactured by Pac-

Fab/Rainbow no. R141036 or approved equal.

2. Inline thermometer to be near the heating loop and shall have a 9 inch adjustable angle with

a minimum 6 inch stem. There shall be a minimum of two (2) thermometers per loop, and

must have ability to read temperature in both degrees Fahrenheit and Celsius.

Thermometers are to be Recreonics no. 32-702, Lincoln Aquatics no. 21-125, or approved

equal.

3. Digital temperature indicator (2 required) shall be a 115 volt, wall mounting case, sensor and a

stainless steel immersion well. Weiss Instruments model 20DT or approved equal. Digital

thermometer not required if Chemtrol 3000 is used.

2.16 SWIMMING POOL FINISHES

A. Pool Cementitious Finish, Diamond Brite - Reference specification section 131104, Swimming

Pool Cementitious Finish.

B. Pool Tile – Reference specification section 131103, Swimming Pool Tile.

2.17 SEALANTS

A. Provide sealed expansion joints as shown on the pool and pool structural drawings or noted on the

Contractor’s construction/expansion joint layout, and as required. Expansion joints shall be

constructed and sealed as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

Sealant to be manufactured by LATICRETE International, Inc., Mapei, or Deck-O-Seal.



1. For submerged joints:

a. Latasil, one component, neutral cure, high performance, 100% silicone sealant in the

color(s) as selected. Shall be used in conjunction with Latasil 9118 Primer per

manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. Mapesil T, 100% silicone sealant in the color(s) as selected.

2. For joints behind the coping, or other horizontal deck joints:

a. Deck-O-Seal, two component (gun-grade or pourable, self-leveling), high resilience, non

sag, non flowing, polysulfide-based sealing compound in the color(s) as selected. Shall be

used in conjunction with P/G Primer per manufacture’s recommendations.

B. Material Storage

1. All materials are to be stored in the original unopened factory containers in a cool dry location

60 to 80 degrees F. Protected from the elements and the hazards of construction. Open only as

many containers as can be used in any particular period.

C. Joint Preparation

1. Clean the joints of all deleterious material, to sound, clean and dry substrate.

2. Joint is to be formed or filled with an approved, resilient, non-asphaltic, closed cell,

polyethylene joint filler material down to firm substrate. Allow space at the top of the joint for

the installation of approved closed cell polyethylene backer rod and install same to the

required depth below the surface of the slab to control the depth of the sealant bead to within

manufacturer requirements.

D. Surface Preparation

1. Concrete surfaces to receive sealant must be fully cured, clean, dry and free of dirt, dust and

any deleterious material that might compromise the adhesion and performance of the sealant.

Curing aids, form release agents and joint former residue must be completely removed, if

necessary by sand blasting and/or grinding. Loose dust must be brushed off.

2. Prime all surfaces to receive Latasil sealant with Latasil 9118 Primer prior to sealant

application, and surfaces to receive Deck-O-Seal sealant with P/G Primer prior to application.

E. Application

1. Apply sealant in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Tool the joint immediately after application to insure a firm, intimate contact with the joint

interface.

3. Remove excess sealant and smears from adjacent surfaces with Xylol or Toluol before sealant

cures.



4. After the sealant has fully cured (generally a minimum period of five days at 72 degrees and

50% humidity), paint the surface of the sealant with a chlorine resistant chlorinated rubber or

equivalent pool paint, such as Ramuc, in a compatible color as selected by the Architect.

NOTE: Latasil cannot be painted.

2.18 WATER FEATURES AND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT

A. AP150 Play Structure with Tipping Bucket (Base Bid)

1. Custom AquaPlay 150-TB – Interactive Water Play System by WhiteWater, or approved

equal.

a. The Participatory Water Play System will be suitable for installation in public swimming

facilities and specifically designed for use by children and adults.

2. Materials

a. All materials are structurally sound and suitable for safe play. Durability is insured on

all steel components by the use of proven coatings such as galvanization. Main piping of

the structure is of schedule 40 steel pipe. All Steel below water level will be schedule 40

Stainless Steel.

b. All parts not required to be structural may be fabricated from PVC or fiberglass and

suitably protected from ultraviolet deterioration.

c. All nozzles (if required) are stainless steel, brass, or PVC.

3. Tipping Bucket - A tipping bucket containing 150 gallons will be provided; with an

appropriate splash roof to dissipate the water’s energy.

4. Manifold System

a. The play system has integrated into its overall design a manifold system for regulating

the water flows and pressures to each individual effect. The manifold is constructed of

PVC, steel or fiberglass and utilizes PVC ball valves.

b. The manifold system is accessible for adjustment and each valve will be permanently

labeled as to the location it controls.

5. Hardware

a. Primary structural fasteners (bolts, nuts, washers and screws) are stainless steel or

galvanized. Secondary fasteners are stainless steel where required (slides and skirting).

No bare steel hardware is allowed.

6. Decks and Stairs

a. All decks and stairs are fiberglass and have an integral non-slip finish on the exposed

surface. Each fiberglass panel is structurally capable of supporting a minimum load of

489kg/m² (100 lbs/ft²).

7. Enclosed Waterslide



a. Slide sections are of high quality fiberglass with the body of the flume having a

minimum 3/16” thickness and joint flanges a minimum ¼” thick. Premium quality

isothphalic resins are to be used throughout. Interior of waterslide to have a minimum

0.020 inches thick gelcoat. Exterior of slides are to be protected by a flood coat of

gelcoat or urethane. Slides shall have a bolt to the floor foam landing pad, supplied by

Zebec, or equal.

8. Side Panels

a. All areas below platforms and stairs less than 1.5m - 1.8m (5' - 6') high are completely

sealed off from the public and secured with a 9.5mm (3/8") reinforced PVC or fiberglass

panels. All panels are ultra-violet protected with a polyurethane or gelcoat finish.

9. Valves

a. Main operating valves: All operational wheel valves are fabricated of stainless steel and

EPDM seat or 100% PVC.

b. Wheels and connecting hardware is specially fabricated so as to provide minimum

opportunity for injury during rotation.

c. All rope operated valves are self-closing with stainless steel or brass bodies and/or

operating parts. The valves as well as the supply pipe are capable of withstanding a 79kg

(175 lb) live load.

10. Waterguns

a. All waterguns are manufactured with trigger or handle operated mechanisms so water

flow may be controlled completely by the operator. This operating mechanism is

encased and isolated inside of a sealed galvanized steel tube.

b. The watergun is mounted on a swivel base that will allow the gun to travel

approximately 60° horizontally and 45° vertically.

11. Finishing

a. All exposed galvanized metal and PVC components are first prepped and primed with

two coats primer then painted with a top coat which is chemical and ultraviolet resistant.

This topcoat provides a high gloss finish that is extremely hard and damage resistant.

12. Mechanical System:

a. The mechanical system is supplied and installed by the mechanical contractor and shall

include a below grade mechanical system providing +/- 500 gpm to the play equipment

system.

b. Pump electrical connections require 480V 3 phase power. Hook-up, switches, motor

starter are by others.

B. One (1) Trout Head Mini-Squirts (Base Bid)

1. Trout Head Mini-Squirts as manufactured by Playtime, or approved equal.

a. Specifications



1) Dimensions (approx.): 24”L x 15”W x 15”H

2) Weight (approx.): 30 lbs.

b. Installation requirements

1) Water requirement: 10 GPM

2) Supply line: 1” minimum

3) Anchor: 3” bolt / 1.5” anchor

4) Anchors points: 2

5) Water depth: 0-6”

C. One (1) Bald Eagle in Tree (Base Bid)

1. Bald Eagle in Tree as manufactured by Playtime, or approved equal.

a. Specifications

1) Dimensions (approx.): TBD

2) Weight (approx.): TBD







D. Boulder Tot Slide and Pad (Base Bid)

1. Boulder Tot Slide as manufactured by Playtime, or approved equal.

a. Specifications

1) Dimensions (approx.): 8’L x 7’-2”W x 45”H

2) Weight (approx.): 300 lbs.









c. Surface Padding

1) Dimensions (approx.): 4’L x 4’W x 1 5/8”H

2) Weight (approx.): 2.5 lbs./sq. ft.

3) Anchor: included

4) Water depth: 0”-6’ Maximum

E. Cascades N1 (Base Bid)

1. Cascades N1 Play Feature by Vortex, or approved equal.

a. Play Product Structure: The Cascades No.1 VOR-7042.2008 shall include one (1)

Bubbling Basin, one (1) Lily Pond, one (1) Play Ponds, one (1) Waterway, and one (1)

Waterway with star wheels. The Bubbling Basin: shall be constructed of 304/304L

stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.375” (60mm) and a wall

thickness of 0.109” (2.8mm). The overall height of the structure shall be no less than

35” (89cm). The basin shall be constructed of red translucent SEEFLOW™ polymer.

The flower shall be constructed of three (3) layers of ¾’’ (20mm) laminated High

Density Polyethylene and shall be fastened to the bell with tamper-resistant hardware.

The Lily Pond shall be constructed of 304/304L stainless steel structural tubing with an

outside diameter of 2.375” (60mm) and a wall thickness of 0.109” (2.8mm).The overall

height of the structure shall be no less than 17.50” (45cm). The pond basin shall be

constructed of red translucent SEEFLOW™ Polymer. The lily shall be constructed of

¾’’ (20mm) laminated High Density Polyethylene and shall be fastened to the basin with

tamper resistant hardware. The Double Flower Bucket Table shall be constructed of

304/304L stainless steel structural tubing with an outside diameter of 2.375” (60mm) and

a wall thickness of 0.109” (2.8mm). The overall height of the structure shall be no less

than 21.50” (55cm). The basins shall be constructed of red translucent SEEFLOW™.

The table shall be constructed of ¾’’ (20mm) laminated High Density Polyethylene and

shall be fastened to the basins with tamper resistant hardware. The Waterways shall be

supported by ¾’’ (20mm) High Density Polyethylene panels fastened to the

SEEFLOW™ Waterways with tamper-resistant hardware. The overall height of the

structure shall be no less than 28” (71cm). The Waterways shall be constructed of

translucent SEEFLOW™ Polymer. The flow gates shall be constructed of High Density

polyethylene guides and a Neotex foam gate. The star wheel shall be constructed of

stainless steel support brackets and netotex foam wheels. The rotational shaft shall be

constructed of stainless steel. The Bubbling Basin shall be anchored with a

SAFESWAP™ Anchoring System. All other basins shall be fastened to the surface with

mechanical anchors. The Waterways shall have two (2) leveling supports with two (2)

holes on each face allowing for installation on sloped surfaces.

b. Overall play product dimensions: The overall height of the Cascades Nº1 shall be no less

than 35” (89cm) with a width of 91” (232cm) and a length of 117” (296cm).

c. Play Product Interactivity: Users must work together to keep the water flowing from one

piece to the next in the Cascade, giving everyone a chance to participate and encouraging

team play.



d. Hydraulic Activity/Components: The bubbling basin shall be filled with water from the

water line connection and then cascade into 3 different directions, filling the Waterways

and pond. Once the Lily Pond is filled, the water will cascade in three different

directions. Cascading water from the Bubbling basin shall fill the first basin of the Play

Pond before cascading to the second basin.

e. Hydraulic Requirements: The hydraulic requirements shall be 10-30 gpm (38-114 lpm)

@ 5-10 psi (0.3-0.7 bar).

F. Monkey Ropes (Base Bid)

1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

a. Deck-mounted Overhead Pool climbing and traversing feature spanning the width of the

pool. Components consist of Net System and Steel Frame manufactured off site.

Designed to withstand chlorinated environments. Monkey Ropes crossing activity by

AquaClimb, or approved equal.

2. COMPONENTS

a. Netform Rope System

a) Rope System consists of 16mm Steel Core Netform with Solid Plastic Connectors,

Solid Plastic Rungs (Yellow, Red or Black)

b) Spreader bars – 2” Sched 40 SS pipe powder coated black or tan.

c) Termination Hardware: Turnbuckles.

d) Span to be ~ 25’ and Width: 3’ Activity Length: 16 ft.

b. Support Frame

a) The support frame shall be fabricated of 304 SS sections powder coated in Bengal

Silver, consisting of base assembly mounting plate with a 304 SS Tube Support

Frame of various lengths to achieve the required height and a lug plate to attach

the suspension cords. The Frame height is 82.89" and maximum width of 44"

with an overall length of 408" end to end from eye bolt anchors.

c. Anchors

a) Standard anchor system includes five 5/8” D x 4” L stainless steel mechanical

wedge anchors per base section with a safe working load of 2075lbs/ea.

Tightening torque is 90lbs per anchor.

b) Additional anchoring options may be required for various types of gutter and

coping configurations. This will be determined based on gutter details provided.

c) Eyebolt anchor plate is 304 stainless steel powder coated to match the frame,

secured to the deck by 3 x SS wedge anchors 3/8” diameter 3-1/2” long.

d. Fasteners



a) All fixed connections Hex Bolts, Flat Washers, Lock Washers are attached by

grade 18-8 stainless steel or higher. Wedge Anchors will be 18-8 or high grade of

Stainless Steel.

e. Cable Assembly

a) 3/8" 6x37 IRWC Galvanized

b) Copper Swaging sleeve

c) SS Thimble

3. WARRANTY

a. AquaClimb Monkey Rope is warrantied to the original purchaser to be free from defects

in material and workmanship from the date of installation:

b. Frame & Netform – Limited 5-Year Warranty, during normal use and installation, with

exclusions of cosmetic defects through wear and tear.

4. DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS Deck & Gutter

a. The pool deck in the AquaClimb Monkey Rope installation area should be as level as

possible. If the pool has a coping greater than 1”, or does not meet the standard base

concrete requirements below, additional hardware components may be required.

b. Please complete the AquaClimb Gutter Configuration Worksheet available at

www.aquaclimb.com (Resources) and contact an AquaClimb representative to determine

the proper installation hardware and anchoring required.

c. Concrete Requirements

d. Standard length wedge anchoring system requires a minimum concrete depth of 4” with

4000 psi rating or greater embedded to a minimum depth of 2 ¾”. See Hilti requirements

for flush-mount anchors.

5. Clearances & Safety Recommendations

a. Please contact an AquaClimb representative for current product information regarding

pool depth and clearance zone recommendations based on the deck and configuration to

be installed.

b. State certified engineered drawings and/or drawings specific to actual site installation

details may be required for approval of AquaClimb Monkey Rope installation. Standard

structural engineering drawings are available at no charge. State or site specific

engineered drawings may be an additional cost. Please contact the appropriate local

governing department for more information.

6. Additional Information

a. AquaClimb product guide, installation instructions, owner’s maintenance guide and other

resources are available by contacting us for assistance at 800-956-6692.

G. Waterslides (Base Bid)

http://www.aquaclimb.com/



1. Refer to Specification 131413 – Waterslides

2.19 POOL COVERS

A. The swimming pool cover system shall be the standard catalogued product of a company regularly

engaged in the manufacture of such products. Alternate swimming pool cover systems shall not be

considered unless equal to the specified product and must be submitted for approval not less than

ten (10) days prior to bid date. Submittal data must include complete documentation relating to

all the specified features and include manufacturer’s sales literature, specification sheets, energy

conservation audit, installation/maintenance manuals and engineering drawings.

B. The swimming pool cover system shall be of the energy conservation type. The covers shall be

supplied in panel sections, allowing for ease of storage, and ease of installation and removal. The

cover panel materials shall withstand the commercial aquatic facility’s environment. Panels shall

receive edging materials to strengthen the panel and to allow for deployment and retrieval without

damaging the panel’s main body materials. All materials shall be ultraviolet stabilized to ensure

long life. The cover panels shall be reversible, allowing for the panels to be rotated, using both

sides and end to end, every other year, supporting additional panel life. Warning labels shall be

affixed in four places to both sides of the panel and shall instruct in the panels proper use and

warn patrons of hazards associated with covered swimming pools. Cover panel systems shall be

supplied with a protector, for use when panels are not deployed.

C. Basis of design: The swimming pool cover system and its accessory items shall be manufactured

by T- Star Enterprises, Spectrum Products or approved equal.

D. Cover Material

1. Material shall be woven, twelve by twelve count per inch, high-density polyethylene,

ultraviolet stabilized film fabric, flame laminated to both sides of a 1/8-inch thick, closed cell,

medium density, white, polyethylene foam. The woven polyethylene film fabric shall be

coated on the exposed sides with an ultraviolet stabilized, chemically resistant polyethylene

coating. The combination of film, foam and woven components shall be non-toxic, non-

absorbent, non-permeable and buoyant. Color shall be blue on upper surface and on under

surface. In addition to the above, cover shall meet the following requirements:

2. Cover Design Criteria

a. Cover panels shall be divided into widths suitable for convenient daily use (removal and

deployment), totally covering the surface of the swimming pool without gaps or overlaps.

Cover panels shall be compatible for use with storage reel(s) and not exceed a width equal

to one foot less than the length of the storage reel winding tube on which it is to be stored.

3. Edging

a. Protective-reinforcement edging shall be installed along ends and sides of each panel. A

weighted non-metallic/non-corroding material shall be sewn into the panel protective

edging. The weighted edge shall be flat and shall conform to the shape of the cover. Cover

end edges shall be reinforced with a double layer of polyethylene-coated film fabric. The

end edging shall be designed, in such a manner as, to prevent panels from diving when they

are being pulled across the surface of the swimming pool. The encapsulated weighted



edging shall be wrapped around the cover corners. The entire corner construction shall be

reinforced with a 1/8-inch thick load dispersion plate. Both ends of each cover panel shall

be equipped with no less than three (3) non-corrosive/metallic grommets and quick-release

loops for easy connection to a storage reel or to the next cover panel.

4. Sewing

a. All sewing shall be double locking chain stitch, using ultraviolet stabilized, chemically

resistant, 100% polyester thread. Main body seams shall be double overlap parallel double

chain lock stitched. No butt, welded, glued or heat-sealed seams will be employed. All

sewing shall be accomplished with computer-controlled machines, synchronizing speed

with stitch length to assure uniformity and strength.

5. Warning Labels

a. Warning labels consistent with the recommendations of the Federal Consumer Protection

Agency shall be permanently affixed to each end of each cover panel and to the sides of

perimeter panels on both side of the panel.

E. Products

1. The pool cover system shall be the Energy Saver by T-Star Enterprises, the Marias II for

standard rectangular swimming pools model #500013 by Spectrum Products, or approved

equal.

2. The pool cover system shall be the Energy Saver by T-Star Enterprises, the Marias II for

irregular shaped swimming pools model #500014 by Spectrum Products, or approved equal.

3. The Portable Storage Reel Assembly shall be the Bitterroot II 15-foot double tube storage reel

model #50130 or approved equal.

2.20 POOL HEATERS

A. The pool heater for the Recreation pool shall having an input rating of 3,998,000,000 Btu/hr.

1. Basis of design: the pool heaters (2) for the Recreation pool shall be manufactured by

RAYPAK, model X-THERM 2005A.

B. The pool heater for the plunge pool shall having an input rating of 999,000 Btu/hr.

1. Basis of design: the pool heater for the plunge pool shall be manufactured by RAYPAK,

model X-THERM 1005A.

C. Heater Features

1. Provide low water cut-off option

2. Provide PVC vent adapter

3. Provide with direct vent



4. Provide with optional bronze header

D. The pool heater shall be orificed for operation on (Natural Gas) (L.P. Gas).

E. The water containing section shall be of a “Fin Tube” design, with straight cupro-nickel tubes

having extruded integral fins spaced seven (7) fins per inch. The tubes shall terminate into a

one piece, glass lined, cast iron header. There shall be no bolts, gasket of “O” rings in the head

configuration. There shall be access to the front header of the heat exchanger for the purposes

of inspection, cleaning or repair. The heat exchanger shall be mounted in a stress free jacket

assembly in order to provide a “free floating design” able to withstand the effect of thermal

shock. The pool heater shall bear the ASME “H” stamp for 160 PSI working pressure and shall

be National Board listed.

F. The combustion chamber shall be sealed and lined with Loch-Heat ceramic fiberboard

insulation. High temperature stainless steel burners of a premix design shall be used. A fan

assisted combustion process shall precisely control the fuel/air mixture for maximum

efficiency. Combustion air blowers shall operate for a pre-purge period before burner ignition

and a post-purge period burner operation.

G. The pool heater shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, galvanized on

both sides. All exterior surfaces shall be finished in a 3-coat acrylic enamel finish.

H. The pool heater shall be certified by the American Gas Association Laboratories. The pool

heater shall operate at a thermal efficiency of 96% and comply with the energy efficiency

requirements of the latest edition of the ASHRAE Standard 90.1-1999.

I. The pool heater shall have a factory supplied pumped bypass assembly to insure proper

operation without condensation. The bypass assembly shall include a sealed all bronze pump.

The bypass assembly shall be constructed of schedule 80 CPVC piping with brass inserts and

an automatic three-way valve.

J. Standard operating controls shall include an electronic temperature control and immersion limit

controls for pool water temperature, a heater safety high limit and auxiliary heater limit control.

All controls shall be factory installed within the weatherproof enclosure and include a lighted

on/off main power switch and indicating lights for call for heat and flame failure.

K. The pool heater shall use a hot surface ignition system with full flame monitoring capability.

Multiple main gas valves with redundant valve seats and built in low gas pressure regulators

shall be supplied as standard. Additional standard controls shall include a blocked flue

pressure switch, a low air pressure switch for each fan, a 24 VAC transformer for the control

circuit and an ASME temperature and pressure relief valve. All components shall have multi-

pin plug in type connectors to ease service, troubleshooting and lower removal and replacement

cost. Proper operation of the burners, all controls and the heat exchanger shall be verified with

a full factory fire test prior to shipping. A quality test report shall be supplied.

L. The pool heater shall be approved for indoor or outdoor installation. The pool heater shall be

approved for conventional venting (see mechanical detail) and shall be classified Category I,

negative draft, and non-condensing, using a type “B” double wall vent material.



M. The pool heater shall have an independent laboratory rating for Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) of

less than 20 ppm corrected to 3% O2.

N. The Contractor shall provide the pool water heating system. Heating system to include all piping,

heaters, booster pumps, controls, gauges, thermostats, control valves and wiring required to draw

water from the recirculation piping, heat the water and return it back to the recirculation piping.

The Contractor shall interlock pool heating system with pool recirculation pumps.

O. Contractor shall have pool heater manufacturer representative on site to start and adjust pool

heater. Copies of the startup report shall be sent to the Manufacturer and Architect/Engineer

prior to final site observation and shall include the following information for each pool heater:

4. Temperature settings

5. Inlet Gas Supply Pressure

6. Manifold Gas Pressure

7. Air Pressure

8. Gas Piping Configuration

9. Venting Configuration

10. Booster pump interlocked with recirculation pump

11. Separate circuits for pump and heater

12. Flow switch installed

13. A component and integrated check shall be made of all controls. Factory tests do not

substitute for this test.

2.21 POOL CONCRETE COPING

A. Cast-In-Place Coping

1. The coping shall have the shape as shown on the construction drawings. All concrete shall

have an equal strength and reinforcing per the Swimming Pool concrete specifications. The

concrete forms shall be by Stegmeier Corporation (1-800-382-5430), Commercial Form part

number 3CF000, or approved equal. The expansion joint control shall be done with

Stegmeier (Frontier Deck Joint) part number SDJ1 and (Frontier Nose Cap) 3NC or

approved equal. Joint strip and nose clip color shall be selected by Architect from

manufacturer’s standard color options. Control joints shall be saw cut joints, deep hand

tooled joints, or shall utilize the same Frontier Deck Joint system as expansion joints, and

placed at a maximum of 4’-0” on center. Full depth expansion joints shall be placed at all

radius points along perimeter of pool or at a maximum of 20’-0” spacing. Expansion joint

detailing and locations shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations.



2. Contractor to follow manufacturer guidelines and recommendations for the concrete mix

and concrete finishing procedure. Per Stegmeier’s recommendations, the minimum concrete

mix design requirements are the following:

a. A minimum of 3500 psi.

b. Use pea gravel or an equivalent small 3/8” size stone aggregate.

c. 4 ½” to 5 ½” slump.

d. Air entrainment, if added shall not exceed 6%.

e. Fiber-mesh shall be considered if structural steel is lacking.

3. Contractor to schedule an on-site training session on proper installation technique with

Stegmeier Corporation at the time of purchasing. Stegmeier Corporation can be reached at

(800) 382-5430 and is located at 1111 West Harris Road, Arlington, Texas 76001. The

current point of contact for Stegmeier Corporation is Mike Austin.

B. Precast Coping

1. The precast pool coping shall be SBN/DBN style by Federal Stone

(www.federalstone.com), equivalent by Dallas Cast Stone, Co. (www.dallasstone.com), or

approved equal. Coping shall have the shape and dimensions as shown on the construction

drawings. Custom cast radius coping sections shall be provided where required to match the

pool profile. All concrete shall have an equal strength and reinforcing per Division 3 –

Concrete. Coping color selections by Owner/Architect. Contractor shall include

manufacturers complete range of custom color options in the base bid.

2. Precast Coping Sealer

a. When recommended by coping manufacturer, coping shall be sealed with Sure Klean®

Weather Seal Siloxane PD by Prosoco, or equivalent sealer product, to reduce the

possibility of staining. Refer to coping manufacturer requirements. Ensure that sealer

does not create a slip-resistance issue on coping surface.

3. Precast Coping Installation & Setting Materials

a. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with ACI 302. The horizontal surface of the

pool beam shall be structurally sound and free of any foreign substances and debris that

could reduce or impair adhesion. Sound and remove all loose concrete to firm substrate.

Surfaces shall be roughened to a CSP of 3 to 5 (reference ICRI CSP Standards 7 to 9 for

acceptable profile height). Thoroughly wash/rinse with clean potable water. Surface

defects or holes in the substrate shall be patched per manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. Slurry Bond Coat

1) Horizontal surface of the pool beam where coping will be set shall receive a slurry

bond coat of either Laticrete 254 Platinum one-step, polymer-fortified, thin-set

mortar, or Mapei 4:1 bag mix with Planicrete AC Additive in compliance with ANSI



A108.1A (2.2 & 5.2), prior to thick bed mortar application. As manufactured by

Laticrete International, Mapei, Inc., or approved equal.

2) The complete underside surface of each piece of pool coping shall also receive a

slurry bond coat of either Laticrete 254 Platinum one-step, polymer-fortified, thin-set

mortar, or Mapei 4:1 bag mix with Planicrete AC Additive in compliance with ANSI

A108.1A (2.2 & 5.2), prior to final setting in thick bed mortar. As manufactured by

Laticrete International, Mapei, Inc., or approved equal.

3) Ensure bond coat is continuous and free of voids prior to application of mortar bed

and setting of coping stone. Mortar bed shall be set over slurry bond coat while bond

coat is still moist. Refer to manufacturer recommendations for proper setting and

curing procedures.

c. Mortar & Leveling Beds

1) Provide a dry pack, thick mortar bed on horizontal surface of pool beam for setting

and leveling of coping stones. Mortar bed shall consist of either Laticrete 3701

Fortified Mortar Bed, or Mapei, 4:1 bag mix with Planicrete AC Additive. Apply

over a properly prepared slurry bond coat. Maximum lift thickness not to exceed 2”.

Refer to manufacturer recommendations for proper setting and curing procedures.

d. Coping Grout

1) Use either Laticrete PermaColor Grout or Mapei Ultracolor Plus Grout in accordance

with the manufacturer’s requirements for grout joints between coping stones. Grout

products shall be as manufactured by Laticrete International, Mapei, Inc., or approved

equal.

e. Elastomeric Sealant

1) Use Laticrete Latasil sealant for all expansion/movement joints. Apply sealant over

Latasil 9118 primer. All primer and sealant installation shall be in accordance with

the manufacturer’s requirements. As manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc.,

or approved equal.

2) Provide sealed expansion joint with full depth expansion joint material and backer

rod at back of coping stone where coping is adjacent to pool deck slab or other

structures. Expansion joint material shall be non-crosslink polyethylene foam.

Ensure joint sealant is installed level with coping/deck surface and that ponding of

water does not occur at joint. Sealant shall be Laticrete Latasil sealant as

manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc. or approved equal. Sealant color shall

match coping/grout color.

3) For straight runs of coping over 40 feet in length, provide an expansion joint between

coping stones every 20 feet maximum. Expansion joint shall be installed for the full

depth of the coping stone and through the mortar setting bed. Expansion joint

material shall be non-crosslink polyethylene foam, trimmed to fit the void of the

coping joint, and leaving a 3/8” recess at the coping surface and nosing for

installation of sealant material. Sealant shall be Laticrete Latasil sealant as



manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc. or approved equal. Sealant color shall

match coping/grout color.

f. All mixing and application procedures shall be done in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements. The manufacturer’s representative

shall visit the site to verify field conditions, confirm materials and application

requirements and ascertain that all materials and systems are so installed.

Documentation shall be provided to this effect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS, INSPECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Carefully examine all of the contract documents for requirements that affect the work of this

section. Prior to starting any work, notify the General Contractor of defects requiring correction.

Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.

B. Verify that all work by others, related to this section, has been completed. This includes all

earthwork, concrete work, and mechanical, electrical and plumbing connections.

C. Protect all materials and work completed by others from damage while completing the work in

this section.

3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify benchmark and pool location prior to layout.

B. If field measurements differ from the construction drawing dimensions, notification shall be given

to the Architect prior to proceeding with work.

3.03 EXCAVATION, REINFORCING STEEL AND SWIMMING POOL PNEUMATICALLY

APPLIED OR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

A. Reference Division 31 - Earthwork

B. Reference Division 3 - Concrete

3.04 TOLERANCES FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE POOL SHELL

A. The completed structures shall be constructed level and to the dimensions, elevation, depths

and thickness as shown on the plans.

B. The elevation tolerance of the pool shell and gutter lip shall be plus or minus 1/8 inch.

C. The vertical wall surface tolerance of the pool shell, for the first 36 inches from the water

surface shall be plus or minus 1/4 inch from plumb measured with a 6 foot straight edge.



D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of a registered engineer or land surveyor who

shall measure and certify the elevations of the gutter lip at 10 foot centers.

E. Ground wires or grade pins, if used, shall be installed in such a manner that they accurately

outline the section of the pool shell as indicated on the plans. They shall be located at intervals

sufficient to insure proper thickness throughout and shall be maintained tight. Grade pins or

grounding wires shall not be permanently embedded in the pool shell.

3.05 WATER TIGHTNESS TEST

A. This test applies to the pool(s), surge tank(s), and the gutter system(s). The water tightness test

shall be completed prior to the application of the pool finish.

B. Water Tightness Test Procedure

1. Preparation

a. Allow the concrete structure to set 28 days for curing purposes. Once the pool shell has

gained sufficient strength to withstand the test load and after all the outlets have been

securely sealed, the pool shall be filled with water.

2. Fill: Fill and then isolate the pool(s), surge tank(s), and the gutter system(s). The water

tightness test shall begin after the vessel has been filled for a minimum of three (3) days.

During the filling, all outlets shall be monitored for water tightness and all concrete joints shall

be monitored for any visible leakage. If any visible leakage from the vessel is observed, the

condition shall be corrected prior to the start of the test.

a. After the initial fill, all ground water shall be removed from the pool sight sump or the

pool location de-watering system. This shall be completed prior to the start of the water

tightness test. De-watering of the pool sight sump shall be maintained during the entire

duration of the test.

3. Evaporation/Precipitation Measurement Procedure

a. Fill a floating, restrained, partially filled, calibrated, open container with water and allow

the container to float within the pool during the testing period. This will be used to measure

evaporation and precipitation.

4. Measurement

a. On a separate sheet of paper draw a sketch of the pool. Measurements shall be taken at the

pool(s), surge tank(s), and the gutter system(s). Multiple test points with averaging are

recommended for vessels which will be exposed to wind. Document the separate findings

on the chart below. Repeat the measurements and document every 12 hours for a total of

three (3) days. The General Contractor shall check the pool(s), surge tank(s), and the gutter

system(s) for water loss with the Architect or Owner’s representative every 12 hours.



Total

Allowable

Water Loss:

Total

Gallons: _________

_

(0.1%) x

0.001 =

_____

Allowable

Loss

Pan Depth

Per 24 Hrs.

Pool

Measurements

________

Pool

Pool

Gutter

System

or

_________

Surge Tank

or _________

Pan

Measurement

s

12 Hrs.

24 Hrs.

36 Hrs.

48 Hrs.

60 Hrs.

72 Hrs.

5. Total Loss = 7.481 x Structure Surface Area (SF) x Total Water Loss per Day (FT) –

Evaporation per Day (FT) + Precipitation per Day (FT)

a. Day #1 =

b. Day #2 =

c. Day #3 =

6. Repair

a. The allowable leakage rate for an unlined pool structure shall not exceed 0.1 percent of the

total water volume in a 24-hour period. (Example: 0.001 x 200,000 gallon pool = 200

gallons per 24 hour period.) This excludes the loss/addition of evaporation/precipitation.

7. Absorption

a. Waiting 3 days after the initial water fill will allow the concrete to absorb water and shall

be sufficient to minimize the effect of absorption on the test results.

8. Evaporation

a. Evaporation shall not have a significant effect on natatoria that are completely enclosed

with no air circulation during the water tightness test. However, evaporation will have a

significant effect on the water level in natatoria that has air movement across the water

surface or are still partially uncovered.

9. If leaks are detected, repair the vessel and make water tight in accordance with these

requirements.

10. With regard to this test, the curing requirements, the final fill and the cost of the water for two

(2) complete fillings shall be borne by the Owner. Any subsequent fillings or partial fillings

(more than 25%) of the pool shall be by the CONTRACTOR, at its own expense.

3.06 PIPING INSTALLATION



A. General

1. Provide and erect, according to the best practices of the trade, all piping shown on the

drawings and required for the complete installation of these systems. The piping shown on the

drawings shall be considered as diagrammatic in indicating the general run and connections,

and may or may not in all parts be shown in its true position. The piping may have to be off

set, lowered or raised as required or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the

CONTRACTOR from responsibility for the proper erection of the systems or piping in every

respect suitable for the work intended as described in the specifications and approved by the

Architect. In the erection of all piping, it shall be properly supported and proper provisions

shall be made for expansion, contraction and anchoring of piping. All piping shall be cut

accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe shall be

worked into place without springing and/or forcing, properly clearing all windows, doors, and

other openings and equipment. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to

facilitate installation will not be permitted. All pipes shall have burrs and/or cutting slag

removed by reaming or other cleaning methods in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings. All open ends of pipes and

equipment shall be properly capped or plugged to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of

the systems. Plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste or similar materials will not be used in

plugging. All piping shall be arranged so as not to interfere with removal and maintenance of

equipment, filters or devices, and so as not to block access to manholes, access openings, etc.

Flanges or unions as applicable for the type of piping specified shall be provided in the piping

at connections to all items of equipment. All piping shall be installed to ensure noiseless

circulation. All valves and specialties shall be so placed to permit easy operation and access.

B. Pipe Hangers and Supports

1. Pipes shall be adequately supported by pipe hangers and supports specified in Paragraph 2.05

Pipe, Hangers, and Valves.

2. Horizontal PVC Schedule 80 piping shall be supported in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations for fluid temperature not exceeding 120 degree F and as listed below:

Nominal Pipe Size

(Inch)

Hanger Support Spacing

(Feet)

Minimum Rod Size

for

Single Rod Hanger

(Inch)

1-1/4” and less 5 3/8”

1-1/2” to 3” 6 1/2”

4” to 6” 8 5/8”

8” to 12” 10 7/8”

Greater than 12” 12 1”

3. Horizontal CPVC Schedule 80 piping shall be supported in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations for fluid temperature not exceeding 140 degree F and as

listed below:

Nominal Pipe Size

(Inch)

Hanger Support Spacing

(Feet)

Minimum Rod Size

for

Single Rod Hanger



(Inch)

½” and less * 4 3/8”

¾” to 2” 6 3/8”

2-1/2” to 3” 7 1/2”

4” to 8” 8 7/8”

Greater than 12” 10 1”

C. Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact such as plastic coated hangers, copper

colored epoxy paint, or non adhesive isolation tape.

D. Install hangers to provide a minimum of 1 inch space between finished covering and adjacent

work.

E. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

F. Support vertical piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Support vertical pipes at

every floor. Wherever possible, locate riser clamps directly below pipe couplings or shear lugs.

G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide trapeze hangers

as specified in section 2.05.C.3. Trapeze hangers shall be spaced according to the smallest pipe

size, or install intermediate supports according to the support spacing schedules.

H. Do not support piping from other pipes, ductwork or other equipment that is not building

structure. Do not modify building structure for hanger installation.

I. Concrete Inserts

1. Provide inserts for placement in form work before concrete is poured.

2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced

concrete beams.

3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceilings, provide inserts to be flush with the slab surface.

4. Provide hook rods to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

J. Pipe Hangers and Supports

1. All piping shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by means of hanger

assemblies properly selected and sized for the application in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations and specifications.

2. All piping in a service tunnel, if required shall be supported by a structure of the

CONTRACTOR’S design. The structure shall be non-corrodible and shall be of a size and

configuration to rigidly support all the piping as shown in the plans at a minimum spacing as

shown below.

3. Piping hangers shall be spaced per the below schedule and shall have hangers not more than

one foot on each side of every change in direction. The piping systems shall be installed in an

approved manner and shall not overload the building structural frame. The CONTRACTOR



shall provide additional hangers and miscellaneous steel supports as required to distribute the

piping system load over several structural members where required or directed. Maximum

allowable spacing for piping shall be as follows:

PVC Piping Maximum Spacing

3/4" thru 2" 5'-0"

2 1/2" thru 4” 6'-0"

6" thru 10" 9'-0"

12” thru 14" 12’-0”

4. Round rods supporting the pipe hangers shall be of the following dimensions:

1/2" to 2" pipe -3/8" rod

2-1/2" to 3" pipe -1/2" rod

4" to 5" pipe -5/8" rod

6" pipe -3/4" rod

5. Hanger rods shall be galvanized steel. Provide for controlling level and slope by turn buckles

or other approved means of adjustment and incorporate lock nuts.

6. Where piping is installed side by side, the CONTRACTOR will support the piping by utilizing

trapeze type hanger assemblies. Horizontal trapeze member shall be non-metallic channel.

The CONTRACTOR shall provide heavier members as required for the load to be supported

for the entire span distance. Hanger rods shall be as specified above and properly sized for the

load supported, but not less than 5/8 inches diameter.

7. The use of pipe hooks, chains, or perforated iron for pipe hanger supports will not be

permitted.

8. Attachment of piping hangers to the building structure shall be provided in a manner approved

by the Architect. The CONTRACTOR shall provide concrete inserts to be installed by the

General Contractor in the building construction at the time the concrete is poured and hangers

shall be attached to these inserts.

K. Piping Installation

1. Trench bottoms shall be smooth and free of rocks and debris. If the trench is dug in ledge

rock, hardpan or where large boulders are not removed, place 3 inches of sand or compacted

fine-grained soil below pipe. Pipe must be supported over its entire length with firm, stable

material. Blocking will not be used to change pipe grade or provide intermittent support over

low sections in the trench. Surround the pipe with backfill meeting the requirements of

Section 312000 with a particle size of 1-1/2 inch or less and in accordance with the project

geotechnical report. Compact in layers not to exceed 6 inches with vibratory method. Follow

installation methods of ASTM D2774 "Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure

Piping".

2. Installations are to be installed in a straight run of pipe, with a minimum 10 pipe diameters

upstream and minimum 5 pipe diameters downstream of any pipe fitting.

L. Flushing, Draining and Cleaning Pipe Systems



1. The CONTRACTOR shall flush out all water systems with water before placing them in

operation. Other systems shall be cleaned by using compressed air or nitrogen. After systems

are in operation and during the test period, all strainer screens shall be removed and thoroughly

cleaned.

M. Expansion and Contraction

1. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary provisions for expansion and contraction of

piping with offsets, loops, flexible connections and anchors as required to prevent undue

strain. The CONTRACTOR shall provide shop drawings for proposed method and

arrangement for control of expansion and contraction of piping.

N. Testing

1. All piping installation and pressure testing shall be reviewed by the Owner’s testing agency

before commencement of backfilling. A minimum notice of one (1) week is required prior to

review. Results of review shall be documented.

2. All pool related piping, shall be hydraulically pressure tested (with water, not air) to a pressure

of not less than 50 PSI for a period of no less than two (2) hours.

3. Contractor is responsible for the maintenance of a sustained 20 PSI pressure on all pool related

piping throughout the course of construction.

4. The Contractor shall adhere to the applicable provisions of Division 22 - Plumbing, "General

Provisions" and "Basic Materials and Methods" for installation of piping system.

3.07 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall assemble and install all equipment, special parts and accessories as

shown on pool drawings, specifications and shop drawings of the equipment suppliers.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all anchors and inserts to be imbedded in the deck including

all fittings, inserts and structure sleeves and required anchorage as shown on the plans and as

indicated in this section of the specifications. Equipment shall be set true and plumb, using

factory jigs where available. Removable equipment items shall be easily removable from anchors

and shall fit without noticeable wobble.

C. Provide templates for all equipment anchors. Provide anchor bolts of the size and spacing as

required by the equipment manufacturer. All anchor bolts shall be stainless steel Type 316L and

of a length capable of adequate anchorage into rough slab-on-grade allowing for finish deck tile

and setting bed. Anchors shall be set and cast into place during building concrete work. Inspect

all anchor settings for horizontal and vertical alignment prior to placing concrete.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment and systems in accordance with manufacturer's

directions. Equipment shall all be assembled and in place for final observation.

E. All items necessary to complete this section are shown on the plans or described in the

specifications including items that may be purchased by the Owner. Items are detailed and



specified as a guide for dimensional purposes. The CONTRACTOR must make provisions

accordingly and submit shop drawings and submittals based on that data.

3.08 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall supply the services of an experienced swimming pool

operator/instructor for a period of not less than two days (total 16 hours) after the pool(s) have

been filled and initially placed in operation. During this period, the Owner's representatives who

will be operating the pool(s) shall be thoroughly instructed in all phases of the pool's operation.

The CONTRACTOR shall deliver six (6) complete sets of operating and maintenance instructions

for the swimming pool, structures, finishes and all component equipment. Prior to leaving the job,

the CONTRACTOR shall obtain written certification from the designated Owner's representative

acknowledging that the instruction period has been completed and all necessary operating

information provided. The CONTRACTOR shall, in his contract, include the cost of two (2)

additional days (total 16 hours) of instruction and operational check out by the qualified repre-

sentative of the CONTRACTOR during the first season of operation.

B. Written reports of each of these visits outlining the pool's operation, competence and performance

of the pool's operation personnel, and other pertinent comments shall be submitted to the Owner

and Architect/Engineer within one (1) week after each visit.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide specific written procedures to be followed for emptying and

refilling the pool as mentioned previously in this section. The procedures must be included in the

bound volume of operating instructions and references in the front index with a note headed by

the words: "CAUTION -- VERY IMPORTANT".


Counsilman-Hunsaker - c27e64fb-db08-4930-8663-856c3583676f

SWIMMING POOLS 131103-1 SWIMMING POOL TILE

SECTION 131103 SWIMMING POOL TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The cementitious pool finish shall have ceramic tile markings and trim at locations including the vertical tile band, stairs, nosings, the zero entry, depth markings, wall targets, floor lane markings and all other tile installations as shown and detailed on the contract drawings and in strict accordance with these specifications.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the work of this section.


A. Division 1 – Mock Ups

B. Division 7 - Joint Sealers

C. Division 9 - Ceramic Tile

D. Section 131100 - Swimming Pool

E. Section 131104 - Swimming Pool Cementitious Finish


A. Reference Standards: Conform to the following standards unless otherwise required herein.

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

a. A108.01 – General Requirements: Subsurfaces and Preparations by Other Trades.

b. A108.02 – General Requirements: Materials, Environmental, and Workmanship.

c. A108.1, Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Quarry Tile and Paver Tile installed with Portland Cement Mortar.

d. A108.1C – Contractor’s Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

e. A108.5 – Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.



f. A108.6 – Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy for the Epoxy Grouting Installation Process.

g. A108.10 – Installation of Grout in Tile Work.

h. A137.1 Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.


a. C144-99, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

b. C150-00, Portland Cement

c. C171-97a, Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

d. C206-97, Finishing Hydrated Lime

e. C207-91 (R1997), Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes

f. F-1869, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride

g. F-2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using In Situ Probes

3. Tile Council of North America (TCNA); 2013 Edition, Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

4. American Concrete Institute

a. ACI 302 – Guide for Concrete and Floor Slab Construction

5. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI)

a. Concrete Surface Profile (CSP)

B. Tile installers shall have two years experience in similar pool projects which the Owner may require written proof thereof and proper tools to install tile.

1.5 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements provide ceramic tile, mortar and grout of the following manufacturers: American Olean Tile Co. (tile), Dal-Tile Co. (tile), Buchtal (tile), KlinkerSire (tile), Mapei Corp. (thin-set, waterproofing, grout and admixtures), and Laticrete International Inc. (thin-set, waterproofing, grout and admixtures) or approved equal.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings indicating tile layout, patterns, joint layout, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, thresholds and setting details.



B. Submit product data indicating material specifications, characteristics, and instructions for using adhesives and grouts.

C. Samples:

1. Mount tile and apply grout on 24 x 24 inch backerboard to indicate pattern, color variation and grout joint size variations of each pattern. Furnish mounted tile samples as requested by the architect/owner.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instruction.

E. Submit maintenance data.

1. Include recommended cleaning and stain removal methods, cleaning materials.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver tile materials to site in unopened factory containers sealed with grade seals bearing printed name or manufacturer and the words "Standard Grade". Keep the grade seals intact and containers dry until tiles are used. Keep cementitious materials dry until used.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Inspect and verify job conditions. Report all defects in base surfaces for correction before proceeding.

B. Maintain a temperature range of 40 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit during installation of tile and grout materials. Tile installation should cure for a minimum 14 days with average an temperature of 70 degrees, while maintaining the minimum 40 degrees and maximum 90 degrees Fahrenheit, prior to filling pool with water.

C. Vent temporary heaters to outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to the new tile work.

1.9 COLORS

A. Colors to be selected by the Architect or Interior Designer. Note that swimming pool regulations may dictate color selections within the pool tank. See 2.01 Tile Materials for price group breakdowns.

1.10 WARRANTIES

A. The CONTRACTOR warrants to the Owner that materials and equipment furnished under the contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the contract documents, that the work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted and that the work will conform with the requirements of the contract documents. Work not conforming to these requirements including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The CONTRACTOR’S warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, modifications not executed by the CONTRACTOR or improper wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Owner, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the



kind and quality of materials and equipment. All warranties shall be for a period of five years, unless otherwise specified.

B. All setting materials shall be provided by the same manufacturer. All mixing materials and application procedures shall be done in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements. Documentation shall be provided to this effect by the contractor with verification from the manufacturer. This documentation shall be included in the operations and maintenance manual under warranties as documentation qualifying the project for a 15 Year Systems Warranty by Laticrete International, Inc., Mapei, Inc. or approved equal.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall agree to repair or replace any work at no cost to the Owner upon written notification from the Owner within the warranty period. Pro-rated warranties are not acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE MATERIALS

A. Standard grade conforming to ANSI A137.1. Provide trimmer units as indicated and specified, including special shapes as detailed or required. Tile patterns and colors shall be as indicated and specified, colors of approved shades. Mesh mounted or perforated paper backed tile is not allowed where the mesh of paper remains as a permanent part of the installation. If dot mounting is used, a minimum of 67% of the depth of the tile shall be free from any dots to ensure proper grout curing. All tiles shall be face mounted as guaranteed suitable for pool use by the manufacturer.

B. All tile shall be “frost-proof” and suited for an outdoor pool installation in a freeze/thaw climate.

C. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile

1. Slip-resistant porcelain unglazed ceramic mosaic tile, cushion or all-purpose edges, two inch square from price group 2 for floor, walls, and stair treads unless otherwise noted. Minimum dynamic coefficient of friction shall be 0.42 for wet surfaces and 0.65 for ramped surfaces. Where (special shapes) are required they shall be selected from price group 3. Equivalents provided by Knoxtile, Dal-Tile or American Olean. For wet surfaces: Buchtal Chroma Mosaics with front mount film (seven color options) 2x2 7161HVF or American Olean Unglazed color-body porcelain mosaics 2”x2”, price group 1-3. For ramps: Buchtal Chroma non-slip mosaics with glass fiber net (four color options) 2x2 7161H. Or for wet surfaces or ramps: Buchtal Chroma non-slip 5x5 32020H thirteen color options) or Dal-Tile or American Olean Unglazed color-body mosaics 2”x2” with 7.5% abrasive grain (7 color options). All colors to be selected by the architect.

2. Ceramic tile band below the pool gutter lip, crown detail at stairs, and recessed steps shall be selected by Architect from Dal-Tile, Keystone Unglazed Mosaic, 2” x 2” price group 4, American Olean Unglazed color-body porcelain mosaics 2”x2” price group 1-3, or powder glazed 2x2 Buchtal Chroma Mosaics provided by Knoxtile.



3. Ceramic tile deck band that contains the depth marker letters and numerals shall be selected by the Architect from Dal-Tile, Keystone Unglazed Mosaic, 2”x2”, price group 4, American Olean Unglazed color-body porcelain mosaics 2”x2”, price group 1-3.

4. Contrasting ceramic tile nosings at pool stairs, recessed steps, underwater bench, shall be selected by the Architect from Dal-Tile, Keystone Unglazed Mosaic, price group 3 and 4, American Olean Unglazed color-body porcelain mosaics 2”x2”, price group 1-3.

5. 4” wide contrasting ceramic tile stripe and 12” lane markers on the pool floor shall be selected by Architect from Dal-Tile, Keystone Unglazed Mosaic, 2”x2” price group 3, American Olean Unglazed color-body porcelain mosaics 2”x2” price group 3, or from Knoxtile, as 4x4 Buchtal Chroma Colors 22010H-717, 5556 Grey Black and 5535 Blue or 2x2 Mosaic 7160HVF 5535 Grey Black. The alternate pool race course wall targets and lane markers shall contrast the pool finish.

D. Handhold Tile at pool perimeter shall be provided as C701 available from Dal-Tile.

E. Provide tile trim units where indicated or necessary for a complete and finished installation. Provide rounded units for external and internal corners and angles. Provide trim units of material and finish identical to the adjoining tile. Provide SCR/L701 units where the C701 hand hold is interrupted to permit draining. Contractor should request via non-standard production. The SCR/L701 units are available through DalTile at 314-997-6970 or 1-800-672-2086.

F. Message Tile and Depth Markings

1. Horizontal and vertical depth markings and warning signs shall be 6” x 6” with 4” high numbers and letters. All horizontal depth markers shall be slip resistant. Single tile abbreviations shall be used for ‘FT’ and ‘IN’.

2.2 SWIMMING POOL TILE SETTING MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION

A. Surface Preparation

1. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with ACI 302. The surface shall be structurally sound and free of any foreign substances and debris that could reduce or impair adhesion. Sound and remove all loose concrete to firm substrate. Surfaces shall be roughened to a CSP of 3 to 5 (reference ICRI CSP Standards 7 to 9 for acceptable profile height). Thoroughly wash/rinse with clean potable water. Surface defects or holes in the substrate shall be patched per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Slurry Bond Coat

1. Horizontal surfaces to receive a thick bed mortar application shall be installed over a slurry bond coat of either Laticrete 254 Platinum one-step, polymer-fortified, thin-set mortar, or Mapei 4:1 bag mix with Planicrete AC Additive over a clean concrete slab, in compliance with ANSI A108.1A (2.2 & 5.2). As manufactured by Laticrete International, Mapei, Inc., or approved equal. Note that slurry bond coats are not required under vertical applications of the render and scratch coat.

C. Mortar & Leveling Beds



1. Bonded Thick Bed Method (Floor / Horizontal Surfaces): Provide a dry pack, thick mortar bed on horizontal surfaces consisting of either Laticrete 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed, or Mapei, 4:1 bag mix with Planicrete AC Additive. Apply over a properly prepared slurry bond coat. Maximum lift thickness not to exceed 2”.

2. Render- Scratch and Float Coats (Wall / Vertical Surfaces): Provide wall render (scratch and float coats) on vertical competition turning surfaces to a depth of 4 feet below the water surface, consisting of either Laticrete 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed, or Mapei, 4:1 bag mix with Planicrete AC additive for lift thicknesses up to ½”. Wall render is made to a plastic consistency when used vertically. Fill all holes and bring surface up to line and plane as required. As manufactured by Laticrete International, Mapei, Inc. or approved equal. Note that slurry bond coats are not required under vertical applications of the render and scratch coat.

D. Tile Thin-Set

1. Use either Laticrete 254 Platinum one-step, polymer fortified, thin-set mortar or Mapei Ultraflex 3 one-step, polymer modified, thin-set mortar, used in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. As manufactured by Laticrete International, Mapei, Inc., or approved equal.

E. Tile Grout

1. Use either Laticrete PermaColor Grout or Mapei Ultracolor Plus Grout in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. As manufactured by Laticrete International, Mapei, Inc., or approved equal.

F. Elastomeric Sealant

1. Use Laticrete Latasil sealant for all inside/outside corners, expansion/movement joints, and to seal lighting/plumbing fixture penetrations. Apply sealant over Latasil 9118 primer. All primer and sealant installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. As manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc., or approved equal.

G. All mixing and application procedures shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements. The manufacturer’s representative shall visit the site to verify field conditions, confirm materials and application requirements and ascertain that all materials and systems are so installed. Documentation shall be provided to this effect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Complete water tightness test prior to tile installation. Concrete tank shall be watertight per ASTM D5957, the Tile Council of North America, and specification 131100.



B. Clean substrates of dust, dirt, oil, grease and deleterious substances and mechanically roughen concrete and shotcrete for bond. Conform to applicable reference standards and to recommendations of manufacturers of materials used and meeting ICRI, CSP of 3-5.

C. Substrates to Receive Mortar Setting Beds

1. Dampen concrete substrate to receive tile work according to above referenced standards or tile manufacturer’s instructions, as required.

D. Substrates to receive thin set tile applications shall meet normal construction tolerances of 1/4" in 10' where competition tolerances do not apply, and shall meet competition tolerances where required elsewhere in these specifications, and shall be free of bumps, dips and surface irregularities that may effect the satisfactory installation of the tile.

E. Tile Wetting

1. Dampen tile according to above reference standards or tile manufacturer's instructions, as required.

F. Screeds

1. Accurately set temporary screeds to control the finish plane of mortar-bed set tile and remove as soon as setting bed is sufficiently hardened. Fill void spaces from screeds with same mortar.

3.2 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Arrange tile according to patterns detailed. Set tile with flush well-fitted joints, finished in true planes, plumb, square, joints of uniform size. Provide approved trimmers as shown or required. Cut tile without marring. Carefully grind and joint tile edges and cuts.

B. Follow Tile Council of North America installation methods P601 and B417 to achieve total tile system thickness for thin or thick-set.

1. Thick Set

a. Apply specified setting bed mortar, up to 2” in thickness, on cured and dried concrete pool shell. Tamp and screed to required planes. Spread no more mortar than can be covered with tile before initial set. Do not use re-tempered mortar. Trowel 3/32” to 1/8” thick bond coat over plastic setting bed mortar just before setting tile or apply bond coat to back of each tile placed. 95% coverage of the back of the tile or tile sheet is required. Set tile in position and beat firmly into the setting bed mortar. Bring tile faces to a true and correct plane. Complete all beating and leveling before mortar sets and in no case later than one hour after first placing. When ready, wet and remove paper and glue avoiding excess water. At this time adjust any out-of-line or out-of-level tile.

2. Thin Set

a. Apply specified bond coat on cured and dried concrete pool shell. Trowel 3/32” to 1/8” thick bond coat over concrete pool shell just before setting tile or apply bond coat to back of each tile placed. 95% coverage of the back of the tile or tile sheet is required. Set tile in



position and beat firmly into the setting bed mortar. Bring tile faces to a true and correct plane. Complete all beating and leveling before mortar sets and in no case later than one hour after first placing. When ready, wet and remove paper and glue avoiding excess water. At this time adjust any out-of-line or out-of-level tile.

C. Finished tile surface shall be level and in plane, with no sharp or protruding edges. Tiles out or plane more then 1/16" shall be removed and replaced. Sharp edges shall be stoned smooth.

D. Grout Joint Sizes

1. Unless otherwise approved, install tile with uniform 3/32 inch joint width. A maximum 1/8" joint width may be utilized to meet specific installation requirements, if required.

E. Ceramic Tile Joint Grouting

1. Mix grout to a thick creamy consistency and force into joints for entire thick depth, flush with surface. Clean off all excess and fill skips and gaps before grout sets. Color selection by Architect or Interior Designer. Provide dampness for minimum 3-day curing and polish with clean dry cloths (not required when epoxy grouts are used).

F. Expansion Joints

1. Place expansion joint per applicable TCNA Method P601MB, P601TB, or P602 and conforming to Method EJ171. Provide shop drawings showing backer rod and joint dimensions. All expansion, control, construction, cold, and seismic joints in the pool structure should continue through the tile work, including such joints at vertical surfaces. Movement joints shall be placed at all changes in direction and elevation. Refer to the structural engineer for additional required movement joints. Joint size shall be a minimum of 1/8”. Joints through tile work directly over structural joints shall not be narrower than the structural joint. The Contractor shall use cement compatible coatings when using chalk lines for joint layout purposes.

G. Fill and Empty Rates

1. Use a fill and drain rate of 2 feet per 24 hours to minimize thermal shock and structural movement. Maintain a temperature differential of 10 degrees Fahrenheit or less between the pool water and the substrate during fill and drain cycles.

3.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Before filling of the pool, and its subsequent provisional acceptance at substantial completion, the tile installation shall be visually inspected and sounded in the presence of the Architects and/or the Owner’s representative to verify adhesion of the tile to its substrate as well as its overall compliance with the requirements of this Section.

B. Any and all tile work found to be loose, improperly adhered, out of plane, misaligned or otherwise non-conforming shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.4 CLEANING



A. Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean tile installation as recommended by TCNA and manufacturers of proprietary materials. Tile shall be cleaned with pH neutral solutions, free of both sodium and potassium, in accordance with the tile and grout manufacturer's printed instruction.

B. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, un-bonded or otherwise defective tile work.

C. Protect installed tile work with non-staining Kraft paper, polyethylene sheeting, or other approved heavy covering during the construction period to prevent damage.

3.5 REPLACEMENT TILE

A. Provide Owner with approximately 10% or 25 square feet (whichever is least) of each color and type tile used on the project for Owner’s repair and replacement requirements.


Counsilman-Hunsaker - 5de92ac419fd827d50e9bda0fc35dcf9

1311046-1 SWIMMING POOL CEMENTITIOUS FINISH

SECTION 131104 SWIMMING POOL CEMENTITIOUS FINISH PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide a proprietary aggregate plaster finish (Diamond Brite) to the pool structure(s). Provide installation of bond coat prior to application of pool finishes. A ceramic tile trim shall be furnished and installed on the vertical tile band, stairs, nosings, the zero entry, depth markings, wall targets, floor lane markings and all other tile installations as shown and detailed on the contract drawings and in strict accordance with these specifications.

B. Provide water analysis and pre-fill requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples

1. Prepare 12-inch square panel at the site showing color and texture for pool plaster. Finished cementitious finish work shall match the approved sample panel.

B. Certificates

1. Submit certificates attesting that the materials furnished meet the requirements specified herein.

C. Test Report

1. Submit results of domestic water analysis and calculation of amounts of chemicals required to balance pool water on initial fill of pool.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver manufactured materials to site in manufacturers' original unbroken packages or containers bearing manufacturers' name and brand labels. Keep cementitious materials dry until ready to be used and stored off the ground, under cover and away from damp surfaces.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Apply plaster in swimming pool only when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F and below 90 degrees F, and protect applied plaster from rapid drying by sun or wind until curing is completed or pool is filled with water. Confirm and comply with all applicable manufacturers installation requirements.


A. Plaster installers shall have two years experience in similar pool projects which the Owner may require written proof thereof and proper tools to install plaster.

1.6 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation



1. Surface shall be structurally sound and free of any foreign substances and debris that could reduce or impair adhesion, free of dirt, oil, grease or other foreign materials. Sound and remove all loose concrete to firm substrate. Surfaces shall be roughened by sand blasting, water jetting, shot blasting, scarifying, or grinding. Pressure-wash the entire surface. Wash with trisodium phosphate (TSP) using a stiff broom. Thoroughly wash/rinse with clean potable water. Surface defects or holes in the substrate shall be patched per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Apply and cure bond coat per manufacturer’s recommendations. After proper curing of bond coat, lightly moisten with clean potable water prior to application of cementitious finish. Ensure bond coat is free of any foreign matter prior to plastering.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIAMOND BRITE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall install a slip-resistant proprietary plaster finish in the areas indicated on the drawings. Description: Diamond Brite finish shall be a blend of selected quartz aggregates and fortified white Portland cement. Color and texture shall be selected by the Architect. Confirm all installation requirements with the manufacturer.

B. Bond Coat

1. Bond Kote by SGM, Inc., or approved equal. Apply and cure bond coat per manufacturer’s recommendations. After proper curing of bond coat, lightly moisten with clean potable water prior to application of cementitious finish. Ensure bond coat is free of any foreign matter prior to plastering.

C. Mixing

1. Thoroughly mix Diamond Brite to a homogeneous lump-free consistency using 1-1/2 to 2 gallons of potable water per 80 lb. bag.

D. Application

1. Diamond Brite shall be applied to a uniform thickness of 3/8” to 1/2” over the entire surface. The walls shall be scratch-coated followed by a finish coat. Material applied to the floor after the walls have been applied shall be accelerated to assure uniform setting time throughout the pool surface.

E. Coverage

1. Each 80 lb. bag shall cover approximately 25 square feet to a thickness of 3/8”.

F. Proprietary plaster finish is to be applied by a licensed applicator as approved by the manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES AND BOND COAT



A. Clean base surfaces of projections, dust, loose particles, grease, bond breakers, and foreign matter; make sufficiently rough to provide a strong mechanical bond. Sandblast, acid etch, or waterblast to achieve appropriate profile. If acid etching, surfaces must be neutralized and powerwashed prior to proceeding. Do not apply cementitious finishes directly to the surfaces of masonry or concrete that is coated with any acidic solution compound or similar agent until compound or agent is completely removed by water blasting. Thoroughly wash entire surface with 2,000 psi high-pressure water immediately prior to application of finishes. Wet cementitious base surfaces with a fine fog water spray to produce a uniformly moist condition and check screeds, pool equipment, and accessories for correct alignment before work is started. Do not apply finish materials to base surfaces containing frost. Install temporary coverings as required to protect adjoining surfaces from staining or damage by plastering operations.

B. Prepare and clean concrete surfaces by removing oil or grease. Repair all cracks, surface damage as required prior to proceeding. Protect or mask all adjacent surfaces that are not scheduled to receive cementitious finish. If expansion or construction joints exist in the areas where cementitious finish will be applied cover plastic joints for protection (if plastic joints are used). Additionally, mark joints for saw-cutting if area will be saw-cut.

C. Apply and cure bond coat per manufacturer’s recommendations. After proper curing of bond coat, lightly moisten with clean potable water prior to application of cementitious finish. Ensure bond coat is free of any foreign matter prior to plastering.

D. Contractor to thoroughly verify the site conditions prior to the application of cementitious finish. Verify concrete is free of ridges and sharp projections. Verify that all concrete surfaces that are to receive a cementitious finish have cured for a minimum of 5 days. Consideration should be given for the application of a primer for all concrete structures that is over 28 days old to improve bonding.

3.02 APPLICATION OF CEMENTITIOUS FINISH

A. General

1. Confirm all application requirements with the manufacturer. Apply finish plaster to the properly prepared substrate at the minimum thickness required by the manufacturer, but no less than 3/8 inch thickness at any location. Apply finish plaster by hand or machine. If plastering machine is used, control fluidity of plaster to have a slump not exceeding 2-1/2 inches when tested using a 2" by 4" by 6" high slump cone. Do not add additional water to the mix subsequent to determining water content to meet this slump. Perform slump test according to following procedure:

a. Place cone on level, dry non-absorptive base plate.

b. While holding cone firmly against base plate, fill cone with plaster taken directly from hose or nozzle of plastering machine, tamping with a metal rod during filling to release all air bubbles.

c. Screed off plaster level with top of cone. Remove cone by lifting it straight up with a slow and smooth motion.

d. Place cone in a vertical position adjacent to freed plaster sample suing care not to jiggle base plate.



e. Lay straightedge across top of cone being careful not to vibrate cone; measure slump in inches from bottom edge of straightedge to the top of slumped plaster sample.

2. All mixing of materials and application procedures shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements. The manufacturer’s representative shall visit the site to verify field conditions, confirm materials and application requirements and ascertain that all materials and systems are so installed. Documentation shall be provided to this effect.

B. Workmanship

1. Unless otherwise required by the manufacturer, apply finish plaster in two coats by "double-back" method with second coat applied as soon as first coat is tamped and initially floated. Apply plaster with sufficient pressure to provide a good bond on bases. Work plaster to screeds at intervals of from 5 feet to 8 feet on straight surfaces. Apply smooth trowel finish without waves, cracks, trowel marks, ridges, pits, crazing, discoloration, projections, or other imperfections. Form plaster carefully around curves and angles, well up to screeds. Take special care to prevent sagging and consequent drooping of applications. Produce surfaces free of visible junction marks in finish coat where one day's work adjoins another. Finish proprietary plaster as required by the manufacturer.

2. All cementitious finishes shall be applied by a licensed applicator as approved by the manufacturer.

C. Curing

1. Curing cementitious finishes with fine fog water spray applied to finish coat as frequently as required to prevent dry-out of surface, or as directed by the manufacturer of the cementitious finish. Keep plaster damp until pool is filled. Prevent damage or staining of plaster by troweling or curing.

D. Patching, Pointing, and Cleaning Up

1. Upon completion, cut out and patch loose, cracked, damaged, or defective plaster; patches matching existing plaster in texture, color, and finish, flush with adjoining plaster. Perform pointing and patching of surfaces and plasterwork abutting or adjoining any other finish work in a neat and workmanlike manner. If 10 percent or more of the pools plaster finish is found to be defective, the plaster shall be removed and replaced complete from all surfaces. Remove plaster droppings or spattering from all surfaces. Leave plaster surfaces in clean, unblemished condition ready for pool filling. Remove protective coverings from adjoining surfaces. Remove rubbish and debris from the site.

3.03 PRE-FILL SPECIFICATION

A. Contractor shall employ a qualified water testing agency to analyze the domestic water with which the pool will be filled within 2 weeks of the plaster date, and shall employ a swimming pool experienced water chemistry consultant to determine types and quantities of chemicals required to ensure calcium-balanced water immediately upon the completion of water filling. Refer to section 131100 for water filling requirements.



1. Have on hand quantities of the chemicals as determine above, plus 25% overage for follow-up treatment. These chemicals, typically including calcium chloride, bicarbonate of soda, and muriatic acid are in addition to standard bromine/chlorine products and alkalizer/pH control products required elsewhere.

B. The pool(s) shall not be plastered until directed by the Owner’s representative and the filtration system and chlorination system are complete and ready for start-up. The Contractor shall supply all chemicals required for treatment of the pool water.

C. The Contractor shall submit domestic water analysis to the Owner and/or Architect at least 2 weeks prior to filling the pool(s).


Counsilman-Hunsaker - b62a83af44e618a1e19806d165bff3f0

131413-1 WATERSLIDES

SECTION 131413 WATERSLIDES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services for installation of the fiberglass waterslide(s) including all foundations, anchor bolts and support structure.

B. The outdoor waterslides shall have an approximate slide length of 183.02 and 142.54 lineal feet at the centerline, a vertical drop of approximately 26.25 feet and consist of multiple turns, entry sections and straight sections as shown on the project plans.

C. Provide minimum interior cross section, 36 inch wide x 28 inch deep, with the side riser on the outside of curves forming a 230 degree enclosure. Splashguards on the outside of slide high wall, as necessary, must be an integral part of slide section. Bolt-on sections are not permitted.

D. Design, furnish and install foundation system, structural supports and all other related work to meet specified and indicated criteria.

E. Furnish and install fiberglass waterslides as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, and as necessary for proper completion including, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. All fiberglass flume components.

2. All flume structural support systems including foundations and support columns.

3. All tower, platforms, stairways and related supports.

4. Installation supervision, ride testing and certification.

5. Labor, materials and equipment to complete the installation.

6. Operations and maintenance manuals.

7. On site startup training.

8. Proper signage as required.

F. Related work specified elsewhere

1. All demolition and repairs to decks, fences and landscaping.

2. Construction of concrete drilled pier or spread footer foundations, columns and flatwork as required.



3. All electrical works, buildings, permits and modifications if any to the pool.

4. Supply and installation of mechanical equipment and pool piping as necessary for slide operation.


A. Supplier shall demonstrate their specific experience and competency in the manufacturing and installation of waterslides.

B. The supplier shall have completed at least five installations comparable to the system specified herein within the last 5 years. Submit a list of such projects with name, address and current telephone number of the Owner's operator and Architect of Record to the Architect with bid on bid date.

C. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligation of the contract and to complete work described or if bidder does not have the qualifications stated herein.

1.4 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS AND ENGINEERING SERVICES

A. In addition to complying with all applicable codes and regulations, comply with pertinent recommendations contained in:

1. Waterslide flumes shall comply with “WWA Considerations for Operating Safety”, 1989, as published by the World Waterpark Association.

2. “Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings” of the American Institute of Steel Construction.

3. “Code for Welding in Building Construction” of the American Welding Society.

4. “Specifications for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel” of the American Institute of Steel Construction.

5. “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures”, Publication ACI 315-92 of the American Concrete Institute.

6. “Structural Concrete for Buildings”, Publication ACI 301-96 of the American Concrete Institute.

7. “ASTM” requirements for all steel components, of the American Society of Testing Materials.

B. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent shall govern.

1.5 COORDINATION AND CLARIFICATION

A. Coordinate with other trades affecting and affected by work in this section.



B. The CONTRACTOR must establish with the selected waterslide installer and with other trades having related work in this Section that all work necessary to complete the installation is included in his bid to the General Contractor. Further the waterslide supplier in his bid to the CONTRACTOR will list specifically those items of related work not included in his proposal.

C. When in doubt regarding the responsibility for work covered in this section and/or discovery of errors or omissions in the bidding documents, the CONTRACTOR and/or supplier shall notify the Architect and request a clarification prior to the bid date.

1.6 CONTRACTORS ALTERNATIVE PROPOSAL

A. Suppliers to submit their bid based on materials, equipment and methods as specified in this section. Any substitutions of material, equipment or method must be submitted in accordance with the specified procedure described in Division 1. Any required changes to the construction documents shall be described in writing and any costs or changes must be included in the price quoted to complete the installation.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Division 1 requirements.

B. Shop Drawings

1. Provide a complete set of checked shop drawings required to fabricate and assemble all systems that is signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of New Mexico.

2. Statements

a. Furnish the Owner with copies of all permits and receipts for fee payments.

3. Test Reports

a. Submit a sample form of any performance test reports that will be used by the installer following slide erection, prior to beginning slide installation.

C. Include complete product data indexed, tabbed and referenced to specifications.

D. Include complete shop drawings, directly from the manufacturer at appropriate scale, illustrating the fabrication and installation of the waterslide and support structure.

E. Submit engineering design calculations that are prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of NM, with shop drawings for waterslide layouts, structures and footings. Provide rough-in information for interfacing mechanical and electrical work. Shop drawings shall include plans, elevations, cross sections, details, sleeves, inserts and anchors to be cast into concrete, and calculations required to construct the waterslide and associated feature footing structures. Structural drawings shall clearly identify all reinforcement, construction joints, embedded items including waterstops, excavation lines and finish concrete elevations, under drainage requirements, under drain routing, clean out locations and location dimensions of all accessory items provided under this section. A licensed professional engineer shall utilize existing soils and geotechnical data in the preparation of the structural design criteria. Provide



all design calculations and support data required to show compliance with performance requirements specified, including design assumptions concerning element restraint. All calculations shall be certified and sealed by the licensed professional engineer. Provide a design in response to actual site conditions.

F. Installation of the waterslide and associated feature footings shall not commence until detailed plans and specifications are approved by the department of Building and Safety. The responsibility for all costs associated with obtaining such approval shall be part of the General Construction contract.

G. Specify water supply requirements and required pump characteristics to Architect, for approval, prior to preparation of fabrication drawings.

H. Guarantee / Warranty

1. All work of this section shall be warranted against all defects of material and/or application for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. Any failures that may occur within this warranty period, due to defective installation and/or materials, shall upon written notification of such failure be immediately repaired or replaced.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit six (6) bound volumes of complete operating and maintenance instructions covering all installed equipment. Include wiring diagrams, lubrication and user maintenance instructions.

B. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule, parts lists, piping diagram and troubleshooting information.

C. Include one set of approved submittals as a part of each O & M manual.

D. Certification letter: Provide a certification letter from the slide manufacturer to the owner stating that the slide has been installed properly and is functioning according to the slide manufacturer’s recommendations.


A. Deliver material in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and crates with all labels intact and legible.

B. Deliver materials in sufficient time and quantity to allow continuity of work and compliance with approved construction schedule.

C. Handle materials in a manner to prevent damage.

D. Store all materials on clean raised platforms with weather protective covering when stored outdoors. Provide continuous protection of materials against damage or deterioration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SLIDE CONFIGURATIONS



A. The preliminary slide layouts have been developed utilizing a slide path design provided by Splashtacular, La Quinta, California 1-800-844-5334.

B. Slides by WhiteWater, Columbus, OH 614-485-9500 or 800-775-4337 are acceptable provided they meet deck accessibility and support tower requirements without design changes.

2.02 FIBERGLASS FLUME SLIDE COMPONENTS

A. Fiberglass Laminate Materials

1. Gel Coat

a. Interior gel coat shall be high quality isophtalic polyester with U.V. inhibitors. 18 to 20 mil thick ride surface, 20 mils exterior coating. Translucent fiberglass shall also have exterior UV protection clear coat.

2. Resins

a. Thixotropic promoted low profile polyester resin with alternate layers of continuous roving chop and 18 oz. woven roving.

3. Structure

a. Fiberglass lamination with sandwich panel centerline reinforcement. Standard flume section shall be 3/16 inch thick, minimum weight 20 oz. per square foot. Flanges shall be minimum 1/4 inch thick and extend at least 4-3/4 inch from the slide surface, "L" type.

4. No fill material to fiberglass slide other than aforementioned products shall be allowed without written approval prior to erection.

B. Joints, Connections and Seams

1. Flume to flume joints shall be fastened with 3/8 inch stainless steel bolts, washers (2 per bolt) and self-locking nuts.

2. Flume to support system connections shall be made with galvanized hardware, and shall be connected separately from waterslide section connections to the exterior flange of the flume.

3. All connections shall be external to flume interior. No connection, hardware or penetration shall be made to flume interior.

4. Fiberglass joint connections shall be made using waterproof, non-shrink caulking with suitable adhesion to fiberglass. Silicone sealants will not be permitted. The slide manufacturer shall supply caulking material.

5. Using fiberglass over seams within the riding surface is not permitted. Sanding within the slide surface should be minimized to maintain adequate gel coat thickness and gloss. Any sanded areas shall be polished to a high gloss until undetectable.

C. Color



1. Shall be integral to the fiberglass. The color shall be selected by the Architect and Owner from all available colors submitted with the bid in the form of color chart or color chips. Color variations within the inside and outside of slide shall be an option to the Owner.

D. Waterslide shall be furnished with the following components:

1. Entry tray shall be pre-plumbed for water injection down stream of the rider entry point. Rider entry area shall be a non-skid surface, with no steps permitted.

2. Waterslide shall be constructed so that water loss does not occur. Risers or built-up sections are required for ride safety and to control water loss, shall be provided on all curved flume sections. Risers shall be integral to the flume, and bolt-on sections will not be acceptable.

3. Riser ends to provide a smooth transition at the beginning and ending of each riser shall be provided integral to the flume section.

4. Pool entry section shall provide a smooth finished end piece, which provides safe pool entry and masks any hardware or connections to the pool.

5. Factory pre-drilling of all sections.

6. Waterproof joint sealant

7. Stainless steel assembly hardware

2.03 FLUME SLIDE STRUCTURAL SUPPORT SYSTEM

A. The flume support towers, tower foundations and stair systems shall consist of all elements necessary to safely and securely support the fiberglass flume or tube from starting platform to the plunge pool and consist of:

1. Concrete footings and foundations, including excavation, backfill and compaction.

2. Concrete/Steel support columns.

3. Structural steel tower and stair system.

4. Guard railing, balustrades and handrails shall be painted galvanized steel tubing. Stainless steel railings are acceptable.

5. All connecting hardware.

B. Design of all slide supports and footings shall be certified by a Licensed Structural Engineer in the State of NM. Design shall accommodate the local soil conditions as indicated, and the stresses generated by the water flume ride during use.

C. Concrete

1. Cast-in-place



a. Minimum compressive strength shall be 3,000 psi at 28 days. Maximum size aggregate shall be ¾ inch. Slump shall not be more than 3 inches. Concrete shall be vibrated but not excessively so as to cause segregation of materials. Check all applicable drawings for locations of block-outs, anchors, inserts, etc. before concrete is placed.

2. Reinforcing Steel

a. Fy = 60,000 psi min. for: ASTM A615 (deformed bar) or equivalent. ASTM A82 (welded wire fabric) or equivalent.

3. Unless otherwise noted, concrete cover to reinforcing shall be as follows; Footing 3 in. and walls, pedestals and columns 1 ½ in.

4. All concrete procedures to conform to latest ACI Building Code.

5. Steel reinforcing lap splices for concrete slab shall be a minimum of #6 bar diameter.

D. Structural Steel

1. Shall consist of radial arms with end yoke type fastening assembly for each support point. (Note: A central column support with radial arms may be used to support circular sections of 180 degrees or greater.)

2. Structural steel shall be new material of sizes and shapes listed in current AISC handbooks and as indicated on drawings.

3. Shapes and plates

a. ASTM A36 or equivalent minimum Fy = 36,000 psi (248.2 MpA)

4. Square structural section

a. ASTM A500 minimum Fy = 46,000 psi (317 MpA).

5. Round steel pipes

a. ASTM A53 Grade B minimum Fy = 35,000 psi (241.3 MpA).

6. Cast steel: ASTM A27 minimum Fy = 35,000 psi or equivalent.

7. Tension rods, bolts and anchor bolts: ASTM A36 minimum allowable tensile stress Ft-19,100 psi (131.7 MpA).

8. Structural bolts

a. ASTM A325, friction type or equivalent minimum allowable shear stress, Fv-21,000 psi (144.8 MpA). Minimum allowable tensile stress, Ft-44,000 psi (303.4 MpA).

9. Welding electrodes



a. E480XX electrode (E70XX). Minimum allowable shear stress, Fv-21,000 psi (144.8 MpA).

10. Grout

a. Masterflow 713 or approved equal non-shrink, non-metallic grout. Use as recommended by manufacturer.

11. All plates, shapes and tubes in contact are to be welded with ¼ inch minimum fillet welds all around unless otherwise indicated.

12. Unless otherwise noted all steel structure shall be galvanized.

13. CONTRACTOR shall supply temporary bracing to take care of all loads on the structure during erection to ensure the safety of the structure, leave as long as it is required, and remove when safety is assured.

14. All flumes and support arms shall be properly set and installed prior to installation of permanent column bracing. Additional column bracing as required by the engineer, in addition to those noted on the drawing, shall be provided upon site inspection.

15. All hollow structural sections shall be closed airtight with end plates sealed with welds.

16. All steel shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose mill scale, loose rust, oil and dirt.

17. Surface to be welded shall be free from loose scale, rust, paint or other foreign matter. Care shall be taken to minimize stresses due to heat expansion, contraction and distortion by using proper sequence in welding and by other approved methods.

18. Fabrication and erection shall conform to the latest editions of the ASTM Specifications and Code of Practice; welding shall be done by welders certified with AWS-D-1.1

19. Equivalent structural steel sizes listed in current AISC or CISC Handbook may be used upon approval of the Architect/Engineer.

20. Definitions

a. ASTM – American Society of Testing Materials.

b. AISC – American Institute of Steel Construction

c. CISC – Canadian Institute of Steel Construction

E. Column Systems

1. A single or multiple steel/concrete post system shall be used.

F. Starting Towers/Stairways/Railings

1. The starting tower/stairway shall consist of:



a. A steeltop deck, stair and support system supporting the starting chute for the outdoor slide(s). Guard railing, balustrades and handrails shall be galvanized steel tubing.

b. Painted galvanized steel or stainless steel handrails.

c. Bracing and structural support (non-corrodible).

d. Concrete Foundation, columns and flatwork as required by the design.

2. Design

a. An Engineer licensed in the State of NM shall certify the structure design. Structure shall be sized to handle the user volumes, the height required by the flume length, and the location on the existing topography.

b. Stair design shall follow current UBC Code per State Building Codes.

c. Coordinate with slide manufacturer.

3. Concrete Footings and Piers

a. Shall be designed and constructed to support the design loads.

b. All concrete shall have a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 4000 psi.

c. All footings shall be on undisturbed soil.

d. Vertical members shall be on concrete footings, above grade and be secured with flange plates and anchor bolts.

4. Hardware

a. Steel hardware, ASTM A-7 or A-36 (hot dipped galvanized).

b. Bolts, Federal Specification FF-B-SC1.

5. Starting Tower

a. Starting tower structure shall be constructed of a galvanized steel support deck with a slip resistant finish surface consisting of either a broom finish concrete or vinyl tread inserts. Coordinate design with building structural engineer and slide manufacturer.

b. Awning structure to cover upper slide platform that is designed for local wind loads shall be provided. Awning shall be high density knitted polyethylene cloth, with an epoxy painted steel frame to support the structure. Bottom of awning shall be no less than 7.6 feet above platform. Awning color shall be selected by Architect.

6. Stairs and Railings

a. Prefabricated stairway sections shall include stringers constructed of hot dip galvanized steel. Stair treads and landings shall be of non-corrosive and impervious fiberglass or



vinyl with appropriate non-slip surface. Colors to be chosen from waterslide manufacturer color chart. Stairway systems, handrails and guardrails shall comply with all applicable codes.

b. Rail system shall be a minimum of 42 inch high at any point, including height above starter tub section, non-climbable and designed to prevent accidental exit. Guard railing, balustrades and handrails shall be painted galvanized steel tubing. Stainless steel railings are acceptable. Handrails shall be provided to meet all code requirements. Color selection by Architect/Engineer and Owner.

c. Railing must surround top platform on all sides (except at slide start area). Railings must be provided along stair section and continue from the top platform area, down to the bottom of the finish deck.

d. Stair system from finish deck to top platform shall be a minimum of 36 inchesin clear width.

e. A chain with removable self-closing hook and sign labeled “CLOSED” shall be provided across the entry of each waterslide at the top of the waterslide platform.

f. A swing gate with self-closing hook and sign labeled “CLOSED” shall be provided across the stair entry point on the deck of the waterslide.

g. Rules Signage: Provide two (2) rules signs with all manufacture’s recommended waterslide rules. Mount one sign at the top platform and one (1) at the stair base. Both slide rule signs shall be clearly visible to the slide users.

7. Finish

a. All ferrous metal parts (All steel components of waterslide are to be factory painted with field touch-up as required.)

1) Surface Preparation

a) Blast all surfaces to be coated to the extent of an SSPC-SP6 commercial-grade level of cleanliness. Create a 1.5 – 2.0 mil profile and prime before any rust bloom forms on the surface.

2) Primer

a) Spray apply in the shop, one full coat of Tnemec Series 90-97 Aromatic Urethane Zinc-Rich or Amercoat 68 HS primer to a DFT of 4.0 mils. Allow to cure as per data sheet (4 hours at 75 deg. F.) before applying top coat.

3) Top Coat

a) Spray apply in the shop one even finish coat of Tnemec Series 74-Color Endura-Shield. Acrylic Polyurethane or Ameron PSX-700 finish to a minimum DFT of 5.0 mils. Allow to cure as per data sheet (6 hours at 75 deg. F.) before handling/loading in the shop.



4) Field Touchup

a) If the broken area of the shop applied film is rough from scaring, disc-abrade that area smooth and then solvent clean it as per an SSPC-SP1, level of cleanliness. Brush or roller apply one coat of Tnemec Series 135 Chembuild or Ameron epoxy primer. Allow to cure as per data sheet. Brush or roller apply one coat of Tnemec Series 74 or Ameron PSX-700 shop applied color to bring the film up to specification thickness.

b. Piping

1) All above grade plumbing to be Schedule 80 PVC, unless otherwise noted. Refer to drawings for sizes and connection details.

2) All above grade waterslide piping to be painted to match waterslide tower color. Paint and primer to be approved for painted PVC application. Primer to be Pro Shield Waterborne Primer/Sealer (05-208) as manufactured by Columbia Paint & Coating; paint to be Industrial Acrylic DTM Polyurethane (05-502) as manufactured by Columbia Paint & Coating or approved equal. Contractor to confirm color with Architect on site prior to painting.

c. Top deck and landing shall have a non-slip finish.

d. The stair system and treads shall consist of galvanized steel pans with vinyl tread inserts. All stair treads and platform shall have a slip-resistant finish.

e. All exposed concrete vertical surfaces shall have an exposed aggregate finish.

f. Seal all concrete with a minimum of two (2) coasts of H&C silicone acrylic concrete sealer, FLR Paints, Inc., 6104 31st St., East, Bradenton, FL.

g. Colors shall be as selected by the Owner and Architect/Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

A. The waterslide installer shall assemble and install all equipment, special parts and accessories in accordance with these specifications and detailed layouts and shop drawings of equipment supplier.

B. Installer shall furnish and install all anchors and inserts to be imbedded including all fittings, inserts, structure sleeves and required anchorage.

C. Install all equipment and systems in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

D. The waterslide shall be as described in the specifications. Items are detailed and specified as a guide reference and for dimensional purposes. The CONTRACTOR must make provisions accordingly and submit shop drawings and submittals based on that data.



E. Installer shall coordinate, supervise and approve work by other trades responsible for work related to this section. All work in this section shall be performed by the waterslide installer except as noted.

3.02 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Inspection

1. Prior to installation of the work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that fiberglass slide and structural support systems may be fabricated and erected in strict accordance with the original design, the approved shop drawings and the referenced standards.

B. Discrepancies

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.

2. Do not proceed with fabrication or installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies are fully resolved.

3.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate the waterslide and structural support systems in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and referenced standards.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF FOOTINGS AND FOUNDATIONS

A. Foundations shall be installed in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings prepared by Professional Engineer registered in the State of NM.

3.03 WELDING

A. General

1. For details of joints, comply with requirements for AWS joints accepted without qualification tests.

2. Use ASTM A-233, E-70XX series electrodes.

3. Follow applicable sections of AWS specifications.

B. Types of welds unless otherwise noted

1. Make all fillet welds 1/4 inch minimum.

2. Make all butt welds full penetration welds.

3.02 ERECTION



A. General

1. Erect the fiberglass waterslides and structural support systems in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and all pertinent regulations and standards.

B. Tolerance

1. Align all structural steel straight, plumb and level with a tolerance of 1 in 500.

C. Fiberglass Joints

1. All flange to flange connections shall be made utilizing the waterproof caulking supplied by the fiberglass manufacturer and shall be joined in such a way as to provide for a safe and matless ride. All joints shall be aligned for a completely smooth riding surface, that is, alignment must be within 1/64 inch and in no case shall the downstream side of the joint be above the upstream side of the joint.

D. Steel Finishes

1. Any field welds or scarred surfaces shall be cleaned and cold galvanized with zinc rich paint.

3.03 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, immediately remove all fiberglass, debris and rubbish occasioned by this work to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION

A. Supply the services of an experienced operator/instructor after waterslides have been completed and initially placed in operation. During this period, the Owner's representatives who will be operating the pool shall be thoroughly instructed in all phases of the slide operation. Prior to leaving the job, obtain written certification from the designated Owner's representative acknowledging that the instruction period has been completed and all necessary operating information provided. A minimum of one (1) 2-hour session is required.

3.05 CONCLUSION

A. It is the intention of these specifications to provide a complete installation of the waterslides as described. All accessory construction and apparatus necessary or advantageous in the operation or testing or high performance of the work shall be included. The omission of specific reference to any part of the work necessary for such complete installation shall not be interpreted as relieving the waterslide supplier or installer from furnishing and installing such parts. Any such omission or clarification shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to bidding.


Project Manual Farmington Family Outdoor Aquatics Facility

Documents

Transcript of Project Manual Farmington Family Outdoor Aquatics Facility